THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

PRESENTED  BY 

PROF.  CHARLES  A.  KOFOID  AND 
MRS.  PRUDENCE  W.  KOFOID 


EQUITATION 


EQUITATION 


BY 
H.  L.  DE  BUSSIGNY 


WITH  ILLUSTRATIONS 


BOSTON  AND  NEW  YORK 

HOUGHTON  MIFFLIN  COMPANY 
&toergfoe  $res»  Cambrifcg* 
1922 


COPYRIGHT,  IQ22,  BY  CAROLINE  A.  DE  BUSSIGNY 
ALL  RIGHTS  RESERVED 


tCfje  &toer*ti>e 

CAMBRIDGE  •  MASSACHUSETTS 
PRINTED  IN  THE  U.S.A. 


To  the  public  and  to  my  pupils  interested  in 
equitation  and  to  those  most  especially  whose 
interest  and  generosity  have  made  it  possible 
for  me  to  complete  this  work. 

H.  L.  DE  BUSSIGNY 


M370219 


PREFACE 

) 

FOR  seventy-six  years,  as  cavalier,  as  student,  as 
instructor,  I  have  ridden,  under  every  sort  of  con- 
ditions, horses  of  every  type,  every  conformation, 
and  every  breeding. 

My  first  experiment,  at  the  age  of  five,  was  with 
a  donkey,  young  and  entirely  unbroken.  At  the  be- 
ginning, I  was  more  often  on  the  ground  than  on 
the  donkey's  back;  but  after  six  months  of  perse- 
verance, all  its  gambols  failed  to  unseat  me.  At 
eight  years,  I  had  a  pony,  thirteen  and  a  half  hands 
high;  and  I  received  instruction  from  the  Comte 
d'Aure,  Esquire-in-Chief  of  the  cavalry  school. 
This  Grand  Master  was  always  repeating,  "Seat. 
Seat.  It  is  the  sine  qua  non.  Be  a  cavalier  first. 
Afterwards  it  will  be  possible,  with  study,  to  be- 
come an  esquire. " 

From  eight  to  seventeen,  I  practiced  the  pre- 
cepts of  Comte  d'Aure  in  various  riding-schools. 
At  seventeen,  I  entered  the  French  cavalry.  I  was 
at  the  battle  of  Solferino  in  1859.  In  1860,  I  was 
fighting  in  Syria;  and  in  1861,  in  Morocco.  From 
1862  to  1867,  I  was  with  Maximilian  in  Mexico. 
The  next  year  saw  me  in  Algeria  and  the  Sahara 
Desert,  fighting  the  Kabyles  and  Bedouins.  In 
1870  came  the  Franco-German  War;  and  I  fought 
the  Prussian  Uhlans. 

vii 


PREFACE 

It  was  when  hunting  and  fighting  other  men, 
hunted  and  fought  by  other  men,  on  horseback 
night  and  day,  that  I  came  to  realize  the  truth  of 
the  formula,  that  seat  is  the  rider's  sine  qua  non. 

In  the  army,  for  the  cavalryman  to  be  able  to 
ride  is  all  that  the  manual  asks,  since  the  discipline  is 
unalterable  when  moving  in  troop.  But,  for  the  in- 
dividual, the  French  army  protects  and  encourages 
studies  of  the  different  methods  of  the  various  mas- 
ters of  the  equestrian  art.  Before  I  entered  the 
army,  while  still  at  the  college,  I  followed  a  course 
of  instruction  under  Baucher,  who  was  then  teach- 
ing in  the  school  at  Collin,  Maneye  du  Rhone. 

Although  Baucher's  method  was  never  adopted 
by  the  French  army,  his  ideas  have  very  deeply  af- 
fected cavalry  traditions,  because  of  the  great  num- 
ber of  officers  who  have  been  sent  to  Saumur  and 
Luneville  to  study  and  report  upon  his  system. 
Several  of  these  officers  were  my  instructors  after  I 
entered  the  cavalry;  and  my  studies  of  the  art  con- 
tinued under  their  very  able  direction. 

Experiment  with  different  methods  is,  however, 
nearly  impossible  in  the  army;  so  that  it  was  only 
after  I  came  to  the  United  States  in  1872,  and,  as  a 
civilian,  became  proprietor  of  riding-schools,  man- 
ager of  schools  and  riding-clubs,  head  instructor 
in  New  York  and  Boston,  that  I  was  able  to  de- 
velop certain  principles,  certain  means,  certain  ef- 
fects, which  had  before  not  been  clear  in  my  mind. 

Equitation  is  the  sixth  branch  of  horsemanship; 

viii 


PREFACE 

and  is^divided  into  military,  racing,  steeple-chasing, 
polo,  and  the  promenade.  Only  the  last  of  these  is 
treated  in  this  work. 

Riding  is  one  of  the  most  wholesome  of  recrea- 
tions, both  for  mind  and  body.  It  does,  however, 
necessitate  a  certain  special  and  natural  aptitude. 
Anybody,  reasonably  well  conformed  morally  and 
physically,  can  practice  the  ordinary  equitation  as 
a  health-giving  exercise,  easy  to  acquire.  But  rid- 
ing practiced  as  an  art  or  as  a  science  offers  serious 
and  multiplied  difficulties,  in  the  solution  of  which 
by  the  student  is  found  all  the  mental  pleasure  of 
the  avocation.  .,,„ 

The  two  greatest  masters  of  the  art  are  Baucher 
and  Fillis.  With  them,  in  the  light  of  their  princi- 
ples, riding  has  become  truly  an  art,  because  these 
masters  have  been  satisfied  to  set  forth  their  prac- 
tices, without  giving  the  reason,  the  wherefore,  of 
the  acts  which  they  dictate.  For  example,  the  two 
effects  of  the  rider's  hand  upon  the  lower  jaw  of  the 
horse  impel  the  animal  to  the  right  or  to  the  left. 
The  pressure  of  the  rider's  legs  upon  the  horse's 
flanks  gives  two  more  sensations.  Here,  then,  are 
four  signs,  by  means  of  which  the  rider  communi- 
cates with  his  mount  and  thereby  controls  its  en- 
tire mechanism.  These  sensations,  caused  in  a  liv- 
ing animal,  certainly  have  for  it  a  meaning:  they 
oblige  certain  parts  to  act.  The  rider  closes  his  leg 
upon  the  horse's  right  flank,  and  the  horse  turns 
to  the  right.  But  what  is  the  mechanical  reason? 

ix 


PREFACE 

When  each  and  every  movement  of  the  horse  in  re- 
sponse to  its  rider's  signals  is  explained  on  mechan- 
ical principles,  then  equitation  is  no  longer  an  art. 
It  has  become  a  science,  and  therefore  invariable. 

The  difference  between  my  system  of  training 
the  horse  and  the  systems  of  Baucher  and  Fillis 
is,  in  part,  that  I  have  carried  farther  the  science 
as  distinguished  from  the  art.  But  besides  this, 
while  Baucher  and  Fillis  trained  their  horses  for 
the  sake  of  executing  the  movements  of  the  high 
school,  I  employ  these  airs  of  the  high  school,  not  as 
an  end  in  themselves,  but  as  a  means  for  developing 
the  physical  and  mental  qualities  of  the  horse  itself. 
These  masters  specially  chose  the  animals  which 
they  were  to  train.  I,  by  means  of  my  system  of 
gymnastics,  seek  to  improve  and  develop  an  ani- 
mal of  any  original  conformation  that  may  be  given 
me. 

The  purposes  of  this  manual  are,  therefore,  to  ex- 
plain the  mechanical  reason  for  every  effect  which 
the  rider  exerts  on  the  horse,  and  to  set  forth  the 
successive  steps  by  which,  practically,  an  actual 
animal  is  to  be  trained  and  developed.  Underlying 
principles  and  theories  are  everywhere  explained 
with  the  greatest  possible  clearness.  In  spite  of  a 
good  deal  of  inevitable  condensation,  the  methods 
here  set  forth  should  prove  perfectly  easy  both  to 
understand  and  to  apply. 

H.  L.  DE  BUSSIGNY 

Boston,  May,  1921 


CONTENTS 

PART  I 
THE  USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

I.  INTRODUCTION  3 

II.  MOUNT,  DISMOUNT,  AND  VAULT  7 

III.  THE  SEAT  15 

IV.  THE  WOMAN  RIDER  30 
V.  THE  AIDS  37 

VI.  THE  GAITS  40 

VII.  JUMPING  47 

PART  II 

THE  REASONED  EQUITATION :  THE  TRAINING  OF  THE  SADDLE- 
HORSE  BY  THE  AID  OF  PRINCIPLES  BASED  ON  THE  EXPERIENCE 
OF  MASTERS  OF  THE  ART  OF  RIDING 

VIII.  THE  REASONED  EQUITATION  55 

IX.  BREAKING  IN  58 

X.  REWARDS  AND  PUNISHMENTS  67 

XL  THE  FIRST  WORK  ON  FOOT  70 

XII.  THE  FLEXIONS  74 

XIII.  BACKING  AND  THE  PIROUETTES  86 

XIV.  THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS  94 

XV.  THE  FIRST  WORK  MOUNTED:  THE  HANDS  AND 

THE  AIDS  1 06 

XVI.  THE  LEGS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS  in 

XVII.  THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS  119 

XVIII.  MOBILIZATIONS  MOUNTED  140 

xi 


CONTENTS 

XIX.  THE  FLEXIONS  MOUNTED  149 

XX.  PLACING  THE  HORSE  AND  THE  VARIANTS 

FROM  THE  "!N  HAND"  160 

XXL  THE  ASSEMBLAGE  180 

PART  III 

THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

XXII.  THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT  189 

XXIII.  THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE  201 

XXIV.  MY  OWN  SYSTEM  235 
XXV.  THE  JAMBETTES  245 

XXVI.  THE  SPANISH  WALK  252 

XXVII.  THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FLYING  TROT  261 

XXVIII.  THE  PIAFFER  269 

XXIX.  THE  PASSAGE  284 

XXX.  THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD  296 

XXXI.  HANDS  WITHOUT  LEGS:  LEGS  WITHOUT       f 

HANDS  308 

PART  IV 

THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE  AND  THEIR  CORRECTION 

XXXII.  THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE  AND  THEIR 

CORRECTION  313 

APPENDIX 

REPORT  OF  A  COMMISSION  OF  THREE  OFFICERS  OF 
THE  UNITED  STATES  ARMY  ON  THE  DE   BUSSIGNY 
\   SYSTEM  363 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

THE  AUTHOR   MOUNTED  ON   "WHY-NOT"  AT  THE 
BEGINNING  OF  HIS  TRAINING  Frontispiece 

FIGURES  IN  HALF-TONE 

Facing 

1.  THE  HORSE  SEES  AND  FEELS  THE  WHIP  WITHOUT 
FEAR  70 

2.  CONTACT  OF  THE  BITS  WITH  THE  MOUTH  BY  THE 
WHIP  ON  THE  FLANK  70 

3.  CONTACT  OF  THE  BITS  WITH  THE  MOUTH  BY  THE 
WHIP  ON  THE  CHEST  71 

4.  FLEXION  FOR  BRINGING  UP  THE  HEAD  AND  NECK 
AND  MAKING  THE  HORSE  LlGHT  80 

5.  THE  HORSE  LIGHT  IN  HAND  80 

6.  FLEXION  OF  THE  LOWER  JAW  TO  THE  RIGHT  BY  THE 
CURB  BIT  81 

7.  COMPLETION  OF  THE  DIRECT  FLEXION  81 

8.  FLEXION  OF  NECK  AND  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE  CURB 
BIT  82 

9.  FLEXION  OF  NECK  AND  MOUTH  BY  THE  SNAFFLE 
REINS  82 

10.  FLEXION  OF  THE  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE  CURB  BIT  AND 

OF  THE  NECK  BY  THE  SNAFFLE  REINS  83 

11.  FLEXION  OF  THE  NECK  BY  THE  SNAFFLE  AND  OF 
THE  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE  CURB  BIT  83 

12.  DIRECT  FLEXION  OF  THE  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE  CURB 
BIT  AND  OF  THE  NECK  BY  THE  SNAFFLE  REINS          84 

13.  DIRECT  FLEXION  OF  NECK  AND  LOWER  JAW  WITH 
LIGHTNESS  OF  THE  FRONT  HAND  84 

xiii 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

14.  DIRECT  FLEXION  OF  MOUTH  AND  NECK  BY  THE 
SNAFFLE  ONLY  85 

15.  ROTATION  OF  THE  CROUP  WITH  DIRECT  FLEXION  OF 
NECK  AND  JAW  88 

1 6.  ROTATION  OF  THE  CROUP  WITH  DIAGONAL  FLEXION 

OF  NECK  AND  JAW  88 

17.  PIROUETTE  FROM  RIGHT  TO  LEFT  142 

1 8.  ROTATION  FROM  LEFT  TO  RIGHT  142 

19.  THE  HORSE  STRAIGHT  AND  IN  HAND  150 

20.  TO  RENDER  THE  HAND  158 

21.  ROTATION  BY  THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT:  THE  RIGHT 
FORE  LEG  FLEXED  194 

22.  ROTATION  BY  THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT:  THE  HORSE 

ON  THREE  LEGS,  THE  RIGHT  FORE  LEG  EXTENDED  194 

23.  THE  TROT  195 

24.  FIRST  STRIDE  IN  CHANGE  OF  LEAD  AT  THE  GALLOP  195 

25.  SECOND  STRIDE  IN  CHANGE  OF  LEAD  FROM  RIGHT 

TO  LEFT  196 

26.  THIRD  STRIDE  IN  CHANGE  OF  LEAD  FROM  RIGHT 

TO  LEFT  196 

27.  JAMBETTE  :  FLEXION  OF  THE  RIGHT  FORE  LEG  248 

28.  JAMBETTE:  EXTENSION  OF  THE  RIGHT  FORE  LEG    248 

29.  JAMBETTE  :  FLEXION  OF  THE  RIGHT  HIND  LEG  249 

30.  SPANISH  WALK:  LEFT  DIAGONAL  256 

31.  SPANISH  WALK:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL  256 

32.  SPANISH  TROT:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL  262 

33.  SPANISH  TROT:  LEFT  DIAGONAL  262 

34.  PIAFFER:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL  272 

35.  PIAFFER:  LEFT  DIAGONAL  272 

36.  PASSAGE:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL  284 

37.  PASSAGE:  LEFT  DIAGONAL  284 

xiv 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

38.  THE  TROT  BACKWARDS  '  296 

39.  GALLOP  ON  THREE  LEGS:  RIGHT  FORE  LEG  EX- 
TENDED 297 

40.  GALLOP  ON  THREE  LEGS  :  LEFT  FORE  LEG  EX- 
TENDED 297 

41.  THE  GALLOP  TERRE  A  TERRE  302 

42.  FlLLIS  AT  THE  GALLOP  BACKWARD  306 

43.  "WHY-NOT"  AT  THE  GALLOP  BACKWARD  306 

CUTS  IN  THE  TEXT 

AN  ANCIENT  GREEK  RIDER  4 

MOUNTING:  FIRST  METHOD  7 

MOUNTING:  SECOND  METHOD  9 

RIDING  IN  THE  PILLARS  TO  COMPLETE  THE  RIDER'S 

SEAT  28 

CORRECT  MANNER  OF  MOUNTING  FOR  A  WOMAN  31 

CORRECT  POSITION  OF  THE  WOMAN  ON  HORSEBACK          35 
CORRECT  POSITION  OF  THE  WOMAN'S  LEGS  AND  ARMS 

WHEN  MOUNTED  36 

AMBLE  42 

SINGLE-FOOT  45 

FIRST  LESSON  WITH  THE  LONGE  47 

THE  HORSE,  MOUNTED,  LEAPS  THE  BAR  DIRECTED  BY 

THE  LONGE  49 

THE  HORSE  JUMPS  THE  OBSTACLE  MOUNTED  AND  UN- 
DER CONTROL  OF  THE  RIDER  50 
THE  HORSE  COMES  SQUARELY  TO  THE  OBSTACLE  AND 

JUMPS  FRANKLY  51 

DUMB- JOCKEY,  USED  FOR  TRAINING  THE  HORSE  TO  AC- 
CEPT CONTACT  OF  THE  BITS  AT  THE  DIFFERENT  GAITS     60 
FIRST  LESSON  WITH  THE  LONGE  61 

xv 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

LESSON  MOUNTED  WITH  THE  LONGE  64 

ARTHROLOGY  (ARTICULATIONS  OF  THE  HORSE)  76 

MYOLOGY  (SUPERFICIAL  MUSCLES)  77 

THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS  101 

DIAGRAM  SHOWING  HOW  TO  ENTER  THE  CORNERS  205 

DIAGRAM  OF  CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION  209 

THE  DOUBLE  TO  THE  RIGHT  (DIAGRAM)  212 

CHANGES  OF  HAND  (DIAGRAMS)  214 

CIRCLE  (DIAGRAM)  216 

THE  VOLTE  (DIAGRAM)  219 

FIGURE  8  (DIAGRAM)  225 

HALF-PASSAGE,  HEAD  TO  WALL  229 

HALF-PASSAGE,  SHOULDER-IN  231 

CONTRA  CHANGE  OF  HAND  (DIAGRAM)  233 

HEAD  TOO  Low  323 

HEAD  TOO  HIGH  325 

RUNNING  AWAY  335 

THE  HEAD  TO  CROUP  339 

PUNISHING  A  RESTIVE  HORSE  343 

THE  BUCK-JUMP  347 
A  RESTIVE  HORSE  IN  THE  INCORRECT  POSITION 

CALLED  "ACCULER"  352 

REARING  353 

KICKING  357 


EQUITATION 


PART  I 
THE  USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 


EQUITATION 

•    • 
• 

CHAPTER  I 
INTRODUCTION 

EQUITATION  is  divided  into  several  branches:  that 
of  the  promenade,  that  of  the  army,  of  the  races,  of 
polo,  of  the  circus.  The  equestrian  art  consists  in 
the  practice  of  these  different  sorts  of  equitation, 
in  teaching  the  principles  accepted  for  their  prac- 
tice, and  in  training  the  horse  for  these  different 
uses.  The  present  work,  however,  will  treat  only  of 
the  equitation  of  the  promenade. 

This  portion  of  the  general  art  has,  in  its  turn, 
three  subdivisions.  These  are: 

The  usual  or  instinctive  or  "  lateral "  equitation. 

The  rational  equitation,  V equitation  raisonnee, 
based  upon  reasoned  principles  worked  out  by  the 
masters  of  the  art. 

The  scientific  equitation,  Vequitation  savante, 
based  upon  the  scientific  study  of  animal  motions, 
and  involving  a  scientific  system  of  gymnastics  for 
the  physical  development  of  the  horse,  designed  to 
adapt  the  animal  to  the  controlled  use  to  which  it  is 
put. 

It  is  evident  that,  from  antiquity  to  our  own 
epoch,  the  usual  or  instinctive  equitation  has  been 

3 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

and  is  still  the  most  practiced.  In  the  infancy  of  the 
art  of  horsemanship,  men  taught  themselves  by 
instinct  and  habit,  not  yet  having  even  the  most 
elementary  principles.  Soon,  however,  from  custom 
and  from  the  practice  of  experienced  riders,  there 


AN  ANCIENT  GREEK  RIDER 

arose  certain  theories  and  methods,  which  were 
taught  to  beginners.  Even  in  the  earliest  times 
riders  had  the  idea  of  balance;  but  they  applied  it 
only  to  the  seat  of  the  man  on  the  horse,  and  did  not 
at  all  consider  the  balance  of  the  horse  under  the 
weight  of  the  man.  This  was  assumed  to  be  taken 
care  of  by  the  animal's  own  instincts. 

When,  later,  this  instinctive  horsemanship  had 
still  further  progressed,  and  there  had  been  invented 
saddle,  bridle,  stirrups,  and  spurs,  the  experience  of 

4 


INTRODUCTION 

riders  and  teachers  developed  the  principles  which 
govern  the  use  of  these  instruments.  Such  masters 
as  Pignatelli,  Gaspard,  Saulnier,  Pembroke,  the 
Duke  of  Newcastle,  Comte  de  la  Gueriniere,  and 
others,  worked  out  the  theory  of  mounting  and 
dismounting,  of  seat,  of  the  lateral  effect,  of  the 
bridle,  of  the  use  of  the  spurs,  and  of  the  pillars.  In 
all  this  they  considered,  not  only  the  improvement 
of  the  rider's  seat,  but  also  the  collection  or  bal- 
ance of  the  horse.  Of  this  last,  however,  they  had 
only  a  confused  and  elementary  conception.  They 
thought  that  the  horse,  when  mounted  and  in 
action,  would  always  find  its  proper  balance  for 
itself;  and  so  they  devised  series  of  movements, 
which,  executed  by  the  horse  at  walk,  trot,  and 
gallop,  should  practice  the  animal  in  carrying  itself 
with  its  load.  There  is,  nevertheless,  a  vast  differ- 
ence between  such  purely  instinctive  training,  and 
the  rational  equitation  which  understands  the 
reasons  for  the  horse's  condition  of  equilibrium, 
and  allows  him  to  execute  the  various  movements 
only  while  retaining  this  state.  The  early  masters 
of  equitation  were  ignorant  of  many  facts  of 
animal  motion  now  known  to  science,  and  they  had 
no  clear  idea  of  the  animal  mechanism  involved. 
Ignoring  the  theory  of  levers,  they  controlled  the 
horse  by  the  lateral  effect  of  the  rider's  hand  and 
leg  acting  on  the  same  side.  It  is,  therefore,  per- 
fectly fair  to  call  this  kind  of  equitation,  instinctive, 
usual,  lateral. 

5 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

This  lateral  equitation  can  be  practiced  by  the 
beginner  by  rule  of  thumb,  without  acquaintance 
with  the  principles  or  theories  of  any  formulated 
method.  But  a  learner  makes  faster  progress  and  is 
in  less  danger  of  accident  when  he  puts  himself 
under  a  riding-master.  The  riding-master  or  the 
riding-school  will  provide  a  horse  already  trained, 
with  all  the  needed  apparatus.  It  is  then  not 
necessary  for  the  pupil  to  train  the  animal;  but 
only  to  learn  to  mount  and  dismount;  to  sit 
properly  on  the  horse  when  standing,  walking, 
trotting,  or  galloping,  in  a  word,  to  make  his  seat; 
and  to  control  the  horse  by  the  lateral  effect  at 
these  different  gaits,  in  any  direction,  without 
losing  the  correct  position.  When  the  pupil  has 
acquired  a  sufficiently  firm  seat,  he  may  practice 
jumping.  This  will  test  his  progress,  and  will  also 
show  him  what  he  has  still  to  learn.  My  own  long 
experience  proves  to  me  that  the  rider's  seat  is  the 
foundation  of  his  progress.  Without  seat,  nothing 
can  be  learned.  With  seat,  everything,  simple  or 
difficult,  becomes  possible.  The  cavalier  can  never 
have  too  much  of  this  sine  qua  non.  Indeed,  he  can 
never  have  enough. 


CHAPTER  II 
MOUNT,  DISMOUNT,  AND  VAULT 

THE  horse,  being  saddled  and  bridled,  quiet,  and 
trained  to  be  mounted,  is  held  by  the  man,  who  will 
mount  on  the  left  side. 

First  method:  The  rider,  facing  the  saddle,  in 


MOUNTING:  FIRST  METHOD 


front  of  the  stirrup,  and  holding  the  reins  in  his 
right  hand,  places  this  hand  on  the  pommel  of  the 

7 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

saddle,  while  with  the  left  he  grasps  a  handful  of 
hairs  of  the  mane.  Rising  on  the  toes  of  his  right 
foot,  he  places  his  left  foot  in  the  stirrup,  and,  after 
two  preparatory  swings  of  the  body  up  and  down, 
by  bending  and  straightening  the  right  knee,  on 
the  third,  he  raises  himself  upon  his  left  stirrup, 
assisting  himself  by  both  legs  and  by  the  left  hand. 
He  is  now  standing  erect  in  the  left  stirrup,  facing 
toward  the  horse's  right.  The  right  hand,  always 
holding  the  reins,  is  next  placed  upon  the  right 
panel  of  the  saddle,  the  wrist  bearing  upon  the 
upper  part,  the  upper  part  of  the  body  is  inclined 
forward,  and  the  right  leg  is  passed  over  the  horse's 
croup  and  the  rear  part  of  the  saddle.  Finally,  the 
rider,  still  supporting  his  body  by  the  right  hand, 
comes  easily  down  into  the  saddle,  abandons  both 
panel  and  mane,  brings  his  right  hand  with  the 
reins  in  front  of  him,  and  without  looking  or  any 
help,  places  his  right  foot  in  the  stirrup. 

All  other  methods  of  mounting  are  variations  of 
this,  necessitated  by  peculiarities  of  either  man  or 
horse. 

If  the  horse  is  tall  and  the  man  short,  the  latter 
can  best  reach  the  stirrup  by  standing  with  his 
left  side  close  to  the  horse's  shoulder,  and  facing  to 
the  rear.  Some  riders,  on  the  other  hand,  prefer  to 
face  forward,  their  right  side  at  the  horse's  left 
flank,  and  the  right  hand,  which  holds  the  reins,  on 
the  cantle  of  the  saddle. 

Still  another  method,  if  proportions  of  man  and 

8 


MOUNT,  DISMOUNT,  AND  VAULT 

horse  permit  it,  is  to  take  the  left  reins  in  the  left 
hand,  which  also  grasps  the  mane,  and  the  right 
reins  in  the  right  hand,  which  rests  on  the  pommel. 
The  rest  of  the  action  is  like  the  first  method.  The 


MOUNTING:  SECOND  METHOD 

advantage  is  that  the  rider  always  has  the  reins  in 
both  hands,  and  so  is  ready  to  control  the  horse  in 
case  of  need. 

In  dismounting,  the  rider,  after  stopping  his 
horse,  takes  all  four  reins  in  the  right  hand,  placing 
this  in  front  of  the  left  and  resting  it  upon  the 

9 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

pommel.  The  left  hand,  now  free,  he  carries  above 
the  left  reins  and  grasps  the  mane.  He  then  frees 
his  right  foot  from  its  stirrup,  and  raises  his  weight 
on  his  left  foot,  steadying  himself  with  his  two 
hands.  The  body  being  now  upright  and  clear  of 
the  saddle,  the  rider  swings  his  right  leg  over  the 
croup  and  brings  it  near  the  left.  Next,  he  bends 
the  left  knee  till  the  right  foot  reaches  the  ground, 
and  takes  his  left  foot  from  the  stirrup,  holding  all 
the  while  to  both  saddle  and  mane.  Last  of  all,  he 
lets  go  the  mane  with  his  left  hand,  and  at  the  same 
time  drops  the  right  reins,  still  keeping  contact 
with  the  left,  advances  two  steps  to  the  horse's 
head,  and  grasps  with  the  right  hand  near  the  bit, 
either  all  four  reins  or  else  a  pair  belonging  to  either 
the  snaffle  or  the  curb. 

Mounting  and  dismounting  should  be  done 
deliberately,  but  correctly  and  without  hesitation. 

Vaulting  is  a  gymnastic  exercise  which  can  be 
performed,  not  only  with  a  horse  specially  trained 
and  equipped  for  this  purpose,  but  also  with  an 
ordinary  saddle  horse  carrying  saddle  and  bridle. 
When  a  specially  trained  animal  is  employed,  it  is 
kept  at  a  canter,  in  a  circle  to  the  left,  while  the 
instructor,  standing  at  the  center  of  the  ring,  with 
a  long  manege  whip,  keeps  the  gait  regular  and 
cadenced. 

The  best  horse  for  this  exercise  is  a  strong,  well- 
rounded,  and  well-developed  cob,  of  fifteen  hands, 
of  good  temper  and  limbs,  which  has  been  trained 

10 


MOUNT,  DISMOUNT,  AND  VAULT 

both  to  hold  a  regular  canter  and  to  stop  at  the 
instructor's  order.  It  should  have  on  its  back  a 
strong  surcingle,  with  two  iron  handles,  directed 
forward,  not  back,  and  set  eight  inches  below  the 
top  of  the  withers.  This  must  be  so  firmly  fastened 
in  place  that  it  cannot  move  even  if  the  entire 
weight  of  the  man  bears  on  one  side.  The  horse  is 
reined  from  the  cavesson  with  a  snaffle  to  the 
surcingle. 

The  beginner  is  first  practiced  in  springing  from 
the  ground  when  the  horse  is  standing  still.  For 
this  movement,  the  pupil  stands  behind  the  horse's 
left  shoulder,  his  right  hand  grasping  the  left  handle 
of  the  surcingle  and  his  left  a  tuft  of  hair  of  the 
mane,  the  feet  near  together  and  the  body  straight. 
He  then  counts  to  himself,  one,  two,  three,  bending 
his  knees  sharply  at  each  count.  With  the  third 
count,  he  springs  upward,  helping  himself  with  his 
hands,  until  he  holds  his  body  straight,  supported 
on  his  arms.  Then,  keeping  the  left  leg  immobile, 
he  swings  the  extended  right  leg  over  the  croup  and 
seats  himself  on  the  horse's  back.  Meanwhile,  the 
right  and  left  hands  have  shifted  to  the  handles  on 
their  respective  sides. 

As  soon  as  the  pupil  vaults  easily  to  the  back  of 
the  standing  horse,  he  may  execute  the  same  move- 
ment with  the  horse  walking  and  trotting. 

To  vault  upon  a  horse  at  a  canter,  the  pupil  takes 
the  right  handle  of  the  surcingle  with  his  right  hand, 
the  nails  below,  and  the  left  handle  with  the  left 

ii 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

hand,  the  nails  up.  He  keeps  the  same  cadence  as 
the  horse,  the  man's  leg  striding  with  the  corre- 
sponding fore  leg  of  the  animal.  As  the  horse  plants 
its  left  foot,  the  man  quickly  advances  his  own 
right  foot  to  a  position  near  the  left,  and  before 
the  horse  again  lifts  its  left  foot,  the  man  bends 
slightly  his  knees,  springs  into  the  air,  pulling  him- 
self by  his  left  hand,  and  immediately  passes  his 
right  leg  over  the  haunches  of  his  mount,  shifting 
his  left  hand  at  the  same  instant  to  bring  the  nails 
below  like  the  other.  This  movement  needs  decision, 
quickness  of  action,  and  energy  on  the  part  of  the 
man,  since  he  must  be  on  the  back  of  the  horse 
before  the  latter's  right  fore  foot  returns  to  the 
ground  after  its  stride.  No  time,  therefore,  can  be 
lost. 

When  the  rider  is  mounted  and  the  horse  continues 
its  canter,  the  man  should,  for  the  sake  of  his  future 
progress,  learn  to  feel  the  jolt  of  the  horse's  motion, 
and  to  neutralize  this  by  the  relaxation  of  his  mus- 
cles and  the  suppleness  of  his  spine,  all  in  the  ex- 
act cadence  of  the  step.  For  it  is  on  this  sense  of 
cadence  that  everything  else  depends.  If  the  pupil 
has  not  that,  he  will  begin  his  movement  too  early 
or  too  late,  and  thus  render  the  maneuver  most 
distressing  to  the  spectator  and  nearly  impossible 
for  himself. 

When  the  pupil  has  become  accustomed  to  the 
canter  cadence,  he  may  be  set  to  practicing  the 
following  progressive  series  of  movements: 

12 


MOUNT,  DISMOUNT,  AND  VAULT 

Seat  the  two  legs  to  the  left. 

Seated  to  the  left,  jump  to  the  ground  and  to  the 

back  at  the  same  stride. 
Seat  the  two  legs  to  the  right. 
From  right,  jump  astride. 
From  astride,  seat  to  the  left. 
From  left  to  right. 
From  astride  to  the  ground  and  seat  to  the 

left. 

From  left  to  the  ground  and  seat  to  the  right. 
From  right  to  left,  jump,  and  astride. 
From  seat  to  the  left,  to  the  ground,  and  from  the 

ground  to  the  right,  and  astride. 
From  seat  to  right,  ground  to  right,  ground  to 

the  left,  and  astride. 

From  astride,  jump  to  the  ground,  to  the  left,  to 
the  right,  to  the  ground,  from  right  ground  to 
left  ground,  from  left  ground  to  right  ground, 
from  right  ground  to  astride. 
From  astride  to  facing  backward  astride. 
From  astride  backward  to  astride  forward. 
Same  movements  repeated  at  each  tempo  of  the 

canter. 

These  movements  may  be  supplemented  by 
others;  but  this  series,  well  executed,  is  enough  to 
give  confidence  and  quickness  to  ordinary  pupils. 
The  added  movements,  even  if  very  brilliant,  will 
not  be  of  great  practical  use. 

When  vaulting  is  taught  with  the  horse  saddled 
and  bridled,  the  methods  are  the  same  except  that 

13 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

the  left  hand  grips  a  tuft  of  the  mane  instead  of  the 
handle  of  the  surcingle. 

The  instructor  will  be  successful  if  he  makes 
vaulting  a  pleasure  to  the  pupil ;  but  not  if  he  makes 
it  hard  work. 


CHAPTER  III 
THE  SEAT 

THE  seat  of  the  rider  on  the  horse  has  been  deter- 
mined in  its  details  by  anatomy,  by  veterinary 
science,  and  by  equestrian  art.  Anatomists  have 
maintained,  with  reason,  that  the  more  nearly 
perfect  the  physical  conformation  of  the  man,  the 
more  easily  will  he  seat  himself  correctly  upon  his 
mount,  when  the  two  are  proportioned  to  one 
another.  Veterinarians  have  approved  the  position, 
finding  in  it  no  cause  for  unsoundness,  loss  of 
health,  or  interference  with  movements,  weight 
carrying,  and  regularity  of  gaits.  Masters  of 
equitation  have  fixed  the  details  of  the  position  and 
taught  the  theory  of  it  in  the  light  of  its  efficiency 
for  controlling  the  horse  by  hands,  legs,  and  weight, 
both  standing  still  and  in  motion,  at  different  gaits, 
and  for  neutralizing  the  shocks  from  the  moving 
animal.  Theory  gives  the  idea  of  the  position;  but 
only  practice  brings  the  adhesion,  contact,  stability, 
suppleness,  and  confidence  which  constitute  the 
state  called  seat. 

Seat  is  the  basis  of  equitation.  By  the  seat  the 
rider  is  in  contact  with  his  mount,  communicates 
to  the  animal  the  confidence  he  has  in  it,  and,  on 
the  other  hand,  is  notified  at  once  of  the  horse's 

15 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

disposition  to  obey  or  refuse.  Only  with  a  good  seat 
is  the  rider  able  to  use  hands  and  legs,  and  to  alter 
gait  and  direction  by  shifting  accurately  his  weight. 
As  we  are  all  of  us  too  ready  to  neglect  those  funda- 
mental laws  which  control  our  lives,  forgetting  that 
if  these  laws  of  nature  were  suspended  for  even  a 
quarter-second,  life  itself  would  cease,  so  as  riders 
we  tend  to  ignore  the  basal  principles  of  inertia  and 
weight  as  they  affect  action  and  seat.  If  the  horse 
commit  some  fault,  the  result  of  our  own  improper 
disposition  of  the  weight  upon  his  back,  we  blame 
the  horse.  Yet  the  fault  is  ours;  for  the  load  which 
we  put  upon  him  is  really  very  great  when  we 
consider  carefully  the  muscular  effort  which  the 
animal  must  put  forth  in  executing  our  direc- 
tions. 

The  rider,  being  mounted,  should  feel  the  saddle 
in  contact  with  the  coccyx  and  the  two  hip  bones. 
These  serve  as  a  base,  and  bear  the  weight  equally. 
They  are  the  fixed  point  from  which  the  upper  part 
of  the  body  moves  to  right  or  left,  backward  or 
forward,  without  ever  ceasing  contact,  except  when 
rising  to  the  trot.  The  thighs,  inclined  at  an  angle 
of  forty-five  degrees,  should  be  turned,  without 
effort,  so  that  their  flat  sides  are  against  the  saddle, 
which  they  press  equally.  If  the  flat  sides  of  the 
thighs  are  not  against  the  saddle,  contact  and 
adherence  are  lost.  If  they  are  placed  thus  with 
effort,  the  muscles  are  tense,  and  therefore  cannot 
be  flat.  This  not  only  prevents  adherence,  but,  in 

16 


THE  SEAT 

addition,  tires  the  muscles  so  that  they  cannot  act 
when  most  needed.  (Frontispiece.) 

The  thighs  are  sloped  forty-five  degrees,  because 
in  that  position  they  grip  most  forcibly.  They  are 
held  evenly  against  the  sides  of  the  horse,  since 
otherwise  the  adhesion  is  unequal  and  the  seat  not 
steady,  the  rider  having  disturbed  it  by  his  own 
fault.  The  knees  should  be  kept  free  from  all 
stiffness,  so  that  the  full  length  of  the  femoral 
muscles  may  be  in  close  and  permanent  contact 
with  the  horse's  sides,  and  the  knees  themselves, 
when  necessary,  may  grip  the  saddle  strongly  and 
quickly.  They  should  not,  however,  press  con- 
stantly and  strongly,  lest  as  in  the  case  of  the 
thighs,  the  muscles  become  too  fatigued  to  act 
when  called  upon. 

Such  is  the  first  part  of  the  position  of  the  seat, 
the  immovable  part,  the  foundation  of  all  the  rest. 
Two  remaining  portions  of  the  rider's  body  are 
movable,  the  trunk  above  the  hips  and  the  legs 
below  the  knee. 

THE  POSITION  OF  THE  TRUNK 

THE  loins  should  be  braced,  but  free  from  stiffness. 
Otherwise,  they  will  communicate  their  rigidity  to 
the  entire  upper  part  of  the  body,  which  will  in 
consequence  be  less  ready  to  respond  to  unexpected 
movements  of  the  horse.  The  rest  of  the  trunk, 
also,  should  be  upright,  easy,  and  free.  It  must  be 
flexible,  else  it  cannot  be  handled  as  a  free  mass, 

17 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

swinging  forward  and  backward  and  from  side  to 
side  without  affecting  the  seat.  It  must  be  upright 
for  the  sake  of  the  balance. 

The  shoulders  should  be  kept  down,  else  the 
breathing  will  not  be  free,  and  the  rider  will  tend 
to  round  his  back,  draw  in  his  waist,  and  so  throw 
his  spine  off  the  perpendicular.  But  if  the  shoulders 
are  forced  too  far  back,  they  will  hollow  out  and 
impede  the  free  action  of  the  arms. 

The  arms,  likewise,  should  be  kept  free,  so  that 
their  movements  may  be  entirely  independent  of 
those  of  the  body.  Moreover,  if  the  arms  be  stiff, 
this  stiffness  will  extend  to  the  hands,  which  hold 
the  reins,  and  diminish  their  "  intelligence."  The 
elbows  should  fall  into  an  easy,  natural  position  at 
the  sides.  If  they  are  kept  too  close  to  the  body, 
the  position  appears  uncomfortable,  and  the  wrists 
cannot  be  raised  or  lowered  without  displacing  the 
arms  and  moving  the  upper  part  of  the  body. 

The  head  should  be  carried  erect,  easy,  and  free 
from  the  shoulders.  The  head  is  itself  heavy,  and 
being  at  the  upper  end  of  the  spine  and  farthest 
from  the  point  of  support,  any  change  in  its  posi- 
tion affects  markedly  the  balance  of  both  rider  and 
horse.  I  do  not,  however,  mean  to  suggest  any  such 
position  as  that  of  the  soldier  on  parade,  neck 
immovable  and  eyes  straight  ahead.  What  I  mean 
is  that  the  rider's  head  should  move  to  the  right  or 
left,  freely,  but  without  any  stooping,  the  eyes 
looking  far  ahead,  since  one  cannot  see  distant 

iS 


THE  SEAT 

objects  without  noticing  intermediate  ones  also. 
The  head  in  its  movements  should  be  upright,  and 
should  turn  without  carrying  the  shoulders  with  it. 

The  forearms  should  make  a  right  angle  at  the 
elbow,  but  only  as  an  intermediate  position  to  be 
altered  either  way  as  different  effects  are  desired. 
The  two  wrists  should  be  kept  at  the  same  height, 
the  fingers  facing  one  another  and  the  thumbs  up. 
If  one  wrist  is  carried  higher  or  lower  than  the  other, 
the  corresponding  rein  will  have  more  or  less  effect 
on  the  horse's  mouth.  The  two  wrists  should  be 
separated  about  six  inches,  the  usual  thickness  of 
a  horse's  neck.  If  the  reins  are  held  farther  apart, 
they  will,  in  proportion  to  their  separation,  act 
more  upon  the  bit  itself  and  less  upon  the  bars  of 
the  mouth,  and  so  be  less  felt.  If,  however,  the 
reins  of  the  snaffle  are  held  nearer  together,  they 
will  exercise  a  pressure  on  the  lips,  which  is  efficient 
if  not  too  long  continued.  I  do  not  mention  here 
bridle  bits,  curb  chains,  and  other  instruments  of 
torture,  long  ago  discarded  by  sound  equestrian  art. 

The  wrist  joints  should  be  kept  pliable,  so  as  not 
to  communicate  stiffness  to  the  arms  and  neck. 
Stiff  wrists,  moreover,  prevent  the  rider  from  feel- 
ing the  horse's  mouth.  The  thumbs  should  be  kept 
up,  since  in  this  position  the  two  hands  are  most 
uniform  and  readiest  to  affect  the  mouth  of  the 
horse,  either  when  resistance  is  to  be  followed  by 
yielding  or  when  the  rider  slackens  the  reins. 
Moreover,  when  the  thumbs  are  up,  they  press 

19 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

somewhat  more  firmly  upon  the  reins,  so  that  these 
are  less  likely  to  slip.  Finally,  if  the  fingers  are 
turned  up,  the  elbows  will  be  stiff  and  too  close  to 
the  body.  But  if  they  are  turned  down,  the  elbows 
will  stick  out. 

The  bridle  is,  after  all,  the  most  important  means 
of  controlling  the  horse.  The  hand  manages  the  bit 
by  way  of  the  reins.  The  bit,  by  its  contact, 
governs  the  mouth.  The  mouth  communicates 
with  the  neck.  The  neck  guides  the  front  limbs. 
Therefore,  must  the  hands  be  kept  in  place,  and 
the  reins  be  of  equal  length.  For  if  the  reins  slip 
in  the  fingers,  control  of  the  front  hand  is,  for  the 
instant,  lost.  For  many  reasons,  then,  it  becomes 
important  to  keep  the  thumbs  upon  the  reins. 

THE  POSITION  OF  THE  LOWER  LEG 

THE  leg  below  the  knee  should  fall  naturally.  If 
ankle  or  calf  is  stiff,  the  knee  joint  also  will  stiffen, 
the  knees  will  tend  to  get  up  on  the  saddle,  and  the 
leg  will  not  work  freely  in  managing  the  horse.  The 
upper  part  of  the  calf  should  press  the  saddle 
lightly.  If  it  presses  too  strongly,  fatigue  results. 
Moreover,  the  rider  cannot  carry  the  legs  backward 
without  opening  the  knees,  and  thus  he  loses  one  of 
the  essentials  of  a  good  seat.  Yet,  on  the  other 
hand,  if  the  calf  does  not  touch  the  saddle  at  all, 
then  the  leg  must  be  too  far  out  at  the  side,  too  far 
forward,  or  too  far  back.  In  the  first  two  cases,  the 
legs  will  be  too  far  from  the  body  of  the  horse  to 

20 


THE  SEAT 

produce  any  effect.  In  the  last  case,  the  effect  will 
be  permanent,  and  so  destroy  itself. 

In  riding  without  stirrups,  the  foot  should  fall 
freely,  lest  the  fixing  of  the  ankle  joint  stiffen  the 
rest  of  the  leg.  When  stirrups  are  used,  the  foot 
may  either  be  kept  well  home,  or  only  the  ball 
inserted.  In  either  case,  the  rider  must  be  able  to 
use  the  lower  leg,  without  stiffness,  in  managing 
the  horse. 

It  is  often  said  that  the  heels  ought  always  to  be 
lower  than  the  toes.  This,  however,  seems  to  be 
nothing  more  than  an  ancient  prejudice  of  cav- 
alrymen, who  see  nothing  but  general  appearance 
and  cling  to  dear  old  routine.  If  only  the  knees  do 
not  come  up  too  high  on  the  saddle,  and  the  feet 
are  not  too  much  turned  out  so  as  to  spur  the  horse 
unwittingly,  one  may  wear  his  stirrups  as  he  likes. 
In  fact,  one  need  not  use  stirrups  at  all.  Only  one 
must  remember,  that  although  in  riding-school  and 
park,  a  third  of  the  foot  in  the  stirrup  is  sufficient, 
hunting  and  racing  on  the  flat  and  riding  across 
country  and  charging  the  enemy,  all  require  the 
whole  foot  there.  The  former  position  gives  more 
freedom  for  working  the  legs;  but  no  one  ceases  to 
be  a  good  horseman  by  putting  his  feet  a  little  more 
forward  or  back,  provided  always  that  the  seat  is 
not  disturbed  and  the  legs  are  free  to  manage  the 
mount. 

I  have  described  a  rider's  position  on  horseback 
minutely  and  at  length.  It  will  take  a  beginner 

21 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

five  years  of  practice  to  master  it  satisfactorily. 
For,  in  the  first  place,  to  secure  perfect  adhesion, 
the  muscles  of  the  thighs  must  acquire  a  certain 
shape.  But  while  one  is  attending  to  the  position 
of  the  head  or  the  arms,  the  thighs  get  out  of  place 
and  have  to  be  readjusted.  Moreover,  nothing  ex- 
cept long  practice  will  enable  one  to  grip  forcibly 
with  the  thighs,  without  communicating  the  least 
contraction  to  the  legs  or  to  the  upper  portion  of 
the  body,  which  must  always  remain  entirely  in- 
dependent of  any  action  of  other  muscles. 

It  seems  easy,  does  it  not?  Well,  then,  sit  on  a 
chair  and  try  to  bring  the  legs  and  the  upper  part  of 
the  body  backward  simultaneously.  It  is  not  so  easy 
as  it  looks.  But  on  horseback  one  has  to  remember 
everything  at  once,  and  to  do  everything  at  the 
same  time.  My  readers  will  understand  now,  that 
I,  like  all  practiced  teachers,  am  but  an  open  book 
from  which  a  pupil  gets  information  at  any  moment. 
But,  after  all,  the  pupil  himself  is  his  own  best 
teacher,  if  only  he  will  practice  long  and  con- 
stantly. 

I  was,  myself,  never  permitted  stirrups  from  four 
years  of  age  till  ten.  During  this  time  I  used  to 
accompany  my  father  on  hunting  parties;  and  if  I 
happened  to  fall,  he  would  always  count,  "One 
less,"  referring  to  the  seven  falls  which  by  tradition 
precede  the  acquisition  of  a  seat. 

Yes,  to  acquire  a  good  seat,  one  must  learn  to 
ride  without  stirrups! 

22 


THE  SEAT 

But  to  ride  without  stirrups,  and  especially  to 
trot,  before  all  the  muscles  have  been  relaxed  by 
riding  at  a  walk  and  progressively,  is  surely  a  wrong 
practice.  Because,  if  the  rider  contracts  his  limbs 
to  resist  the  movements  of  the  horse,  he  at  once 
makes  the  muscles  too  set  to  assume  the  shape 
necessary  for  perfect  adhesion.  Must  one,  then, 
walk  a  horse  for  months  and  years?  It  would, 
indeed,  be  the  best  method,  though  rather  imprac- 
ticable in  view  of  the  probable  expense. 

I,  therefore,  advise  the  beginner  to  use  stirrups, 
so  as  to  fall  as  few  times  as  possible  —  and  thus 
save  his  parents'  feelings.  Let  it  be,  nevertheless, 
the  first  object  to  become,  as  soon  as  possible,  fully 
able  to  sit  upon  a  saddle,  without  stirrups,  at  all 
paces. 

What,  then,  should  be  the  ordinary  practice? 
For  the  first  winter,  ride  at  the  school,  without 
stirrups,  but  always  in  the  presence  of  the  instruc- 
tor. Learn  for  yourself  all  you  possibly  can,  until 
you  have  gained  a  certain  degree  of  stability  of 
seat;  and  do  not  neglect  to  practice  during  the 
summer. 

For  the  second  winter,  organize  a  class  of  ten 
or  a  dozen  young  people  of  about  the  same  age  and 
advancement  —  boys  only,  no  girls.  Put  the  class 
under  a  teacher,  who,  remembering  his  own  early 
training,  will  work  with  enthusiasm.  Have  lessons 
three  times  a  week  for  six  months. 

Here  is  a  programme  for  such  a  class:  Walking 

23 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

without  stirrups.  Calisthenic  exercises.  Stopping 
and  walking.  Individual  turn.  Successive  semi- 
turn.  Successive  turn.  Trotting,  Calisthenics,  etc., 
as  above,  while  trotting.  Walking.  Individual  half- 
turn.  Individual  turn,  stopping,  and  starting  again 
to  a  trot.  Galloping.  Calisthenic  exercises,  etc.,  as 
in  walking  and  trotting.  Stopping  and  starting  to 
the  gallop.  This  whole  programme  is  to  be  gone 
through,  first  with  stirrups,  and  then  a  second  time 
without. 

The  time  has  not  yet  come  for  learning  to  manage 
the  horse.  This  will  come  later.  At  the  end  of  the 
second  year,  the  young  pupil  ought  to  be  able  to 
perform  all  these  movements  easily,  without  stir- 
rups. Circular  movements  have  been  included  in 
the  programme,  since  the  pupil  should  be  made 
accustomed  to  all  directions  and  to  producing  all 
kinds  of  movements. 

Let  the  pupil  also  bear  in  mind  that  just  as  to 
become  a  good  sailor  one  must  not  be  afraid  of 
seasickness,  so  to  become  a  good  rider  one  must  not 
be  afraid  of  the  rough  movements  of  the  horse. 
Once  accustomed  to  these,  one  learns  in  due  time 
to  counteract  them.  But  if  one  tries  from  the 
start  to  repress  these  sudden  jerks,  he  never 
becomes  used  to  them,  and  his  contractive  efforts 
will,  sooner  or  later,  be  turned  into  stiffness. 

Now  this  condition  of  stiffness  is  precisely  what 
the  learner  ought  to  avoid  from  the  very  outset. 
But  for  the  beginner  the  greatest  difficulty  of  all  is 

24 


THE  SEAT 

to  put  the  proper  amount  of  contraction  into  the 
muscles  of  the  thighs,  so  as  to  obtain  adhesion,  and 
yet  at  the  same  time  to  prevent  this  contractive 
force,  which  belongs  to  the  immovable  portion  of 
the  seat,  from  interfering  with  the  suppleness  of 
the  two  other,  movable,  parts  of  the  body.  This 
difficulty  is  best  met  by  the  following  calisthenic 
flexions : 

Movements  of  the  head:  down,  up,  left,  right. 

Of  the  arms:  up,  down,  forward,  back,  rotation 
at  the  shoulder. 

Of  the  spine:  backward,  forward,  left,  right. 

Of  the  lower  legs:  forward  and  backward,  with 
turning  of  the  toes  inward  from  both  positions. 

Of  the  ankles:  toes  in,  out,  up,  down. 

Of  the  thighs:  knees  high,  and  knees  down,  but 
always  with  contact  between  the  saddle  and 
the  base  of  the  spine. 

These  exercises,  executed  at  walk,  trot,  and 
gallop,  will  enable  the  beginner  to  move,  freely, 
legs,  head,  arms,  and  body,  while  at  the  same  time 
keeping  the  seat  firm. 

But  the  adhesion  of  the  thigh  muscles  must  be 
produced  and  maintained,  solely  by  the  pliancy  and 
flexibility  of  these  muscles,  and  not  at  all  by  their 
permanent  contraction.  Such  contraction  should 
be  but  momentary,  never  spreading  to  other  parts 
of  the  body,  which  must  always  remain  unaffected 
by  any  effort  of  the  thighs. 

Moreover,  the  trunk  and  head  should  be  able  to 

25 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

move  forward  or  backward  of  the  perpendicular, 
and  to  the  left  and  right,  without  in  the  least 
displacing  the  weight  from  its  base,  and  without 
any  effect  whatever  upon  the  contact,  adhesion,  or 
other  element  of  the  seat.  So,  too,  should  the  lower 
leg  be  able  to  swing  backward  from  its  position  and 
forward  again,  without  any  tendency  to  advance 
too  far,  and  without  any  disturbance  of  any  other 
member. 

In  short,  both  the  upper  and  the  lower  parts  of 
the  rider's  body  must  be  trained  to  work  freely  on 
their  respective  joints,  separately  or  together,  in 
any  direction,  yet  without  affecting  in  any  wise  the 
immovable  seat. 

For  the  seat  is  the  focus  of  all  equestrian  feeling. 
By  way  of  the  seat,  the  rider  senses  the  coming 
movements  of  the  horse.  By  means  of  the  seat,  with 
other  aids,  he  controls  or  prevents  these.  Further- 
more, it  often  happens  that  a  fidgety  animal  will 
submit  unresistingly  to  a  rider  whose  seat  is  firm, 
while  another  rider,  unsteady  of  seat,  will  manage 
it  only  with  difficulty.  The  creature  seems  to  be 
affected  one  way  or  the  other,  according  as  it  can 
or  cannot  shift  the  rider's  weight. 

Some  horsemen  are  of  the  opinion  that  this 
moral  effect  passes  from  horse  to  rider;  some  that 
it  travels  from  rider  to  horse.  I  myself  think  that 
both  are  right.  For  consider  any  horse,  standing 
still,  mounted  by  a  rider  having  the  most  perfect 
seat,  but  who  moves  neither  hands  nor  legs.  Where, 

26 


THE  SEAT 

then,  is  this  moral  effect?  But  let  the  animal  once 
start  to  move,  then  he  must  immediately  be  sen- 
sible of  the  rider's  quality.  The  rider  who  has  a 
correct  seat  will  not  permit  his  mount  to  proceed 
according  to  its  own  fancy,  but  will  constrain  it, 
confidently,  unhesitatingly,  by  rational  and  positive 
means.  On  the  other  hand,  the  rider  whose  seat 
is  not  firm  will  sometimes  surprise  his  horse  and 
sometimes  let  it  go.  His  control  will  be  strained, 
hesitating;  and  the  horse  will  feel  this. 

Moreover,  in  spite  of  inconsistencies  in  certain 
systems,  I  cannot  but  believe  —  and  the  longer  I 
study,  the  better  I  am  convinced  —  that  the  seat 
is  much  improved  by  training  horses  for  one's  self. 
For  after  all,  it  matters  little  what  the  origin  or  the 
quality  of  the  particular  system  adopted,  so  long  as 
the  rider  takes  and  gives  with  hands  and  legs,  and 
thus  learns  to  move  his  members  without  disturbing 
his  seat.  Whenever,  by  constant  practice,  this  habit 
has  become  fixed,  then  the  rider  will  maintain  his 
seat  without  ever  thinking  of  it  at  all.  But  in  that 
case,  he  will,  obviously,  communicate  his  own 
confidence  to  his  horse,  while  at  the  same  time  he 
forestalls  easily  any  untoward  movement,  rearing, 
bucking,  arching  the  back,  shaking  the  head,  kick- 
ing, and  the  rest. 

But  how  can  a  rider  do  all  this  without  self- 
confidence;  and  how  shall  he  be  self-confident 
without  a  steady  seat?  The  indifferent  rider,  who 
lets  his  horse  go  as  he  will,  who  hangs  on  by  the 

27 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 


reins,  who  grips  the  animal's  sides  with  the  calves 
of  his  legs,  has  no  use  for  seat.  But  whoever  wishes 
to  ride  at  the  regular  paces  with  grace  and  com- 
fort, can  never  have  too  strong  a  seat.  So  long  as 
the  horse  walks,  mere  contact  is  sufficient.  Riding 
outside  the  school,  and  rising  at  the  trot,  necessi- 
tates contact  of  the  knees,  since  at  each  step 
contact  of  the  thighs  is  lost.  The  very  fast  trot 
demands  a  close  seat.  For  the  trot  au  rassembler, 
commonly  called  "passage,"  grip  is  essential  — 
since  I  do  not  know  one  horseman  who  can  trot 
au  rassembler  with  a  rising  seat.  The  gallop  also 
requires  a  close  seat;  while  for  the  counter-moves 
and  for  jumping,  grip  is  indispensable  during  the 

action,  and  should 
be  in  proportion  to 
the  violence  of  the 
shock. 

Here,  in  fine,  is 
what  I  advise  the 
student  at  the  rid- 
ing-school :  Give 
great  weight  to  all 
the  principles  here 
set  forth.  Never 
miss  a  single  les- 
son ;  for  the  riding-master  has  his  amour-propre  and 
will  be  the  more  interested  in  your  progress  if  you 
try  to  show  him  by  your  regular  attendance  that  you 
really  desire  to  become  a  good  horseman.  Finally, 

28 


RIDING    IN    THE    PILLARS    TO 
COMPLETE  THE  RIDER'S  SEAT 


THE  SEAT 

do  not  imagine  that  you  have  understood  every- 
thing. Make  sure  for  yourself  and  be  convinced. 

Such,  then,  are  the  means  which  the  reasoned 
equitation  offers  toward  obtaining  a  proper  seat. 
The  military  schools  still  employ  jumpers  in  the 
pillars.  These  are  useful  enough  for  suppling 
recruits,  who  have  to  be  taught  in  the  shortest 
possible  time  to  stay  in  the  saddle,  no  matter  by 
what  means.  They  are  not  applicable  to  civilians 
of  every  age;  neither  do  they  always  produce  fear- 
lessness. 


CHAPTER  IV 
THE  WOMAN  RIDER 

FOR  the  many  women  nowadays  who  ride  across 
saddle,  all  principles  and  methods  are  precisely  the 
same  as  for  men.  This  discussion,  therefore,  con- 
cerns only  those  who  use  the  side-saddle. 

A  horse  to  be  ridden  by  a  woman  should  accord 
completely  in  color,  conformation,  temper,  regu- 
larity of  gaits,  and  safety,  with  the  age,  build, 
temperament,  social  position,  and  equestrian  skill 
of  the  rider.  It  must,  at  the  very  least,  be  well 
broken,  trained  to  the  side-saddle,  and  wonted  to 
every  object  commonly  met  in  city  or  country.  It 
should,  in  addition,  possess  two  special  qualities. 
The  first  is  that  it  should  go  forward  freely, 
without  needing  continually  to  be  urged,  and  yet, 
at  the  same  time,  be  restrained  and  directed 
without  too  much  exertion  on  the  rider's  part. 
The  second  is  that  it  should  be  absolutely  sure- 
footed at  all  three  gaits.  A  horse  with  a  long,  free, 
easy  walk  is  preferable.  One  with  any  tendency  to 
rear  is  quite  out  of  the  question. 

It  is  by  the  correct  simplicity  of  her  dress,  the 
firmness  of  hat  and  hair,  that  the  horsewoman  will 
make  possible  both  her  comfort  and  that  elegance 
which,  for  the  woman  rider,  takes,  -the  place  of 
beauty. 

30 


THE  WOMAN  RIDER 


TO  MOUNT 

A  HORSE  to  be  ridden  by  a  woman  must  have  been 
trained  to  stand  absolutely  quiet  to  be  mounted, 
without  the  need  of  any  second  assistant.  The 
rider  stands  at  the  left  of  the  animal,  facing  forward. 
The  right  hand,  resting  on  the  second  pommel  of 
the  saddle,  holds  the  reins  at  the  correct  length  for 


CORRECT  MANNER  OF  MOUNTING  FOR  A  WOMAN 

feeling  the  horse's  mouth.  The  single  assistant 
faces  the  rider,  his  right  foot  in  front  of  his  left,  his 
body  leaning  forward  and  his  left  hand  extended  to 
receive  the  woman's  left  foot,  while  his  right  hand 
is  either  at  her  waist  or  just  below  her  left  shoulder. 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

The  rider's  left  hand  rests  on  the  right  shoulder  of 
the  assistant. 

Thereupon,  one  or  other  of  them  counts  —  one, 
two,  three;  and  at  the  last  count  the  assistant  lifts 
with  his  extended  right  leg,  bringing  forward  the 
left  foot  beside  the  right,  and  supports  the  woman's 
weight.  She,  on  her  side,  taking  this  support,  raises 
herself,  and  pivoting  sidewise,  seats  herself  on  the 
saddle,  both  knees  to  the  left.  She  then  removes 
her  hand  from  the  saddle  fork,  while  at  the  same 
time  the  assistant,  taking  her  right  boot  in  his  left 
hand,  aids  her  in  passing  her  right  knee  over  this 
second  fork.  When  the  right  foot  is  in  place,  he 
takes  her  left  boot  by  the  heel,  turns  forward  the 
stirrup,  and  helps  to  set  the  foot  in  place.  In  the 
meantime  the  rider  is  adjusting  her  reins,  holding 
them  either  with  one  hand  or  both.  Last  of  all, 
the  assistant  helps  with  the  complexities  of  elastics 
and  straps,  and  hands  the  rider  her  whip. 

All  this  must  be  done  deliberately  and  precisely, 
without  either  abruptness  or  hesitation.  If  the 
rider's  left  boot  is  armed  with  a  spur,  she  must 
warn  her  assistant. 

Young  pupils  in  the  riding-schools  commonly 
mount  from  a  block.  This  is  a  mistake  at  the  begin- 
ning, though  well  enough  later,  after  they  have 
learned  to  mount  from  the  ground.  The  fault  is 
that  of  the  riding-master  who  neglects  his  duty  as 
a  teacher.  Boys  of  fourteen  should  be  taught  to 
assist  a  lady  in  mounting;  and  I  do  not  hesitate  to 

32 


THE  WOMAN  RIDER 

say  that  this  knowledge  is  an  essential  part  of  good 
breeding. 

Some  masters  advocate  giving  the  right  foot 
rather  than  the  left,  as  more  secure.  I  have  tried 
out  both  ways,  and  find  that  it  makes  little  differ- 
ence. The  main  points  are  practice,  and  the  skill 
and  strength  of  the  assistant,  who  must  lift  the 
rider  without  jolt,  and  with  no  thrust  toward  the 
rear,  since  this  might  tear  her  hand  from  the  sad- 
dle fork,  or  even  send  her  over  backwards.  The 
assistant  does  not  toss  the  rider,  but  lifts  her 
steadily,  in  exact  time  with  the  straightening  of  her 
knee,  as  if  his  hands  were  a  step. 

A  horsewoman  can,  however,  mount  by  herself, 
by  lengthening  her  stirrup,  and  then,  when  seated, 
adjusting  it  again.  She  can  also  mount  by  aid 
of  a  stone,  tree,  fence,  or  other  elevation.  For  all 
these,  however,  she  must  be  assured  of  the  temper 
and  docility  of  her  horse.  I  recommend  all  young 
riders  to  learn  to  mount  alone.  It  is  good  practice, 
and  often  very  useful  both  in  hunting-field  and  on 
promenade, 

TO  DISMOUNT 

To  dismount,  the  rider  stops  her  horse,  takes  all 
four  reins  in  the  right  hand,  removes  her  foot  from 
the  stirrup,  raises  her  right  knee  from  the  saddle, 
and  passes  her  right  leg  over  to  the  left  side, 
pivoting  on  the  seat.  Her  right  hand,  still  holding 
the  reins,  now  rests  on  the  second  pommel.  The 

33 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

assistant,  standing  at  the  horse's  left  haunch,  takes 
her  left  hand  in  his  right,  and  aids  her  also  with  his 
own  left,  as  she  slips  to  the  ground,  still  helped  by 
her  right  hand  on  the  second  fork.  An  agile  woman 
can  dismount  thus  without  assistance. 

Dismounting,  like  mounting,  should  be  done  de- 
cisively, but  without  abruptness. 

It  is  at  the  act  of  mounting  that  the  horse  first 
feels  the  ability  of  the  rider,  her  confidence,  and  her 
skill.  Baucher  and  Fillis  always  trained  their 
horses  before  letting  them  be  mounted  by  their 
women  pupils.  I  myself  often  let  mine  begin  with 
horses  that  have  been  merely  broken;  and  I  have 
always  been  successful. 

THE  HORSEWOMAN'S  POSITION 

THE  woman  rider,  mounted,  should  carry  her  head 
straight  and  free,  turning  it  easily  in  any  direction 
without  affecting  the  body. 

The  eyes  look  straight  to  the  front  between  the 
horse's  ears,  and  always  in  the  direction  in  which 
the  animal  is  going. 

The  body  above  the  waist  is  erect  and  mobile. 
Below  the  waist,  it  is  firm,  but  without  being 
stiff. 

The  shoulders  are  well  back  and  on  the  same 
line. 

The  arms  fall  naturally,  the  forearms  are  bent, 
and  the  elbows  are  held  close  to  the  body,  but  not 
stiffly, 

34 


THE  WOMAN  RIDER 


The  wrists  are  on  the  level  of  the  elbows,  and  six 
inches  apart. 

Both  hands  hold  the  reins,  the  fingers  firmly 
closed,  the  nails  to- 
ward each  other, 
and  the  thumbs  ex- 
tended along  the 
reins. 

The  end  of  the 
rider's  spine  is  per- 
pendicular to  the 
spine  of  the  horse, 
and  exactly  in  the 
middle  of  the  sad- 
dle. This  contact 
carries  the  weight, 
not  only  of  the  up- 
per portion  of  the 
body,  but  also  of 
the  thighs  and  even 
of  the  legs  below  the  knees.  By  the  bearing  of  the 
end  of  the  spine  on  the  saddle,  and  by  the  contact 
of  the  inside  of  the  right  knee  with  the  second  fork 
and  of  the  inside  of  the  left  thigh  and  knee  with 
the  saddle,  the  horsewoman  balances  the  body  and 
neutralizes  the  shock  of  the  moving  horse. 

The  right  foot  falls  naturally  on  the  saddle,  the 
toe  forward  and  somewhat  down,  the  outside  of 
the  calf  against  the  panel. 

The  left  foot  feels  the  stirrup,  but  does  not  lean 

35 


CORRECT  POSITION  OF  THE 
WOMAN  ON  HORSEBACK 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

on  it.  The  toe  turns  a  little  inward,  just  enough 
to  prevent  the  left  calf  from  pressing  against  the 
saddle,  since  this  would  tend  to  pull  the  entire 
body  round  to  the  left. 

Further  details  of  the  woman  rider's  position 

may  be  found  in  my 
book,  The  Horsewoman, 
D.  Appleton  and  Com- 
pany, New  York.  This 
which  I  have  here  set 
forth  is  the  accepted 
posture.  It  is  easily  ac- 
quired if  the  pupil  be- 
gins young  and  prac- 
tices certain  calisthenic 
exercises  on  horseback. 
To  have  a  good  seat  is 
to  be  able  to  retain  this 
position,  under  all  con- 
ditions, with  the  horse 
in  motion.  No  woman, 
young  or  adult,  can  ac- 
quire such  seat  merely  by  reading  any  book.  She 
needs  in  addition,  the  help  of  a  teacher,  one, 
moreover,  of  long  experience. 

The  principles  of  the  reasoned  and  of  the  sci- 
entific equitation  are  the  same  for  women  as  for 
men,  the  woman  rider's  whip  taking  the  place  of 
the  man's  right  leg. 


CORRECT  POSITION  OF  THE 

LEGS  AND  ARMS  WHEN 

MOUNTED 


CHAPTER  V 
THE  AIDS 

THE  best  procedure  for  the  beginner  would,  no 
doubt,  be  to  master  all  the  details  of  seat,  position, 
and  the  manipulation  of  the  reins,  while  the  horse 
is  standing  still.  Few  pupils,  however,  are  at  all 
willing  to  undertake  any  such  patient  labor. 
Young  or  adult,  they  want,  not  merely  to  walk,  but 
to  trot,  before  they  have  any  idea  what  is  to  be 
done,  either  to  direct  or  to  control  their  mounts. 
My  own  experience  is,  therefore,  that  it  is  really 
better,  on  the  whole,  to  let  the  beginner  do,  within 
reason,  a  good  deal  as  he  likes. 

In  the  usual  or  lateral  equitation,  the  rider 
possesses  two  aids  or  means  of  controlling  the 
horse.  These  are  the  hands  holding  the  reins  and 
the  calves  of  the  legs,  or  in  the  case  of  the  rider  on 
a  side-saddle,  the  left  leg  and  the  whip. 

The  effects  of  the  hands  are  three: 

By  pulling  straight  back  on  the  reins,  the  rider 
signals  the  horse  to  diminish  the  speed  of  its 
forward  motion  or  to  stop  it  completely. 

By  raising  the  hand  vertically,  the  rider  lifts  the 
horse's  head.  The  horse,  in  consequence,  raises  its 
front  hand,  and  therefore,  its  front  legs. 

By  drawing  more  strongly  on  either  rein,  the 

37 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

horse's  head  is  pulled  to  that  side,  and  it  tends  to 
turn  in  that  direction. 

The  rider's  legs,  on  the  other  hand,  have  only  one 
effect: 

When  both  are  pressed  against  the  horse's  flanks, 
they  determine  the  action  of  its  hind  legs,  since, 
to  avoid  the  pressure,  it  advances  the  whole  body. 
Either  leg  used  alone  pushes  the  horse  to  the  oppo- 
site side. 

If,  then,  the  horse  is  standing  still,  the  pressure  of 
both  the  rider's  legs  starts  it  walking  forward.  If 
the  horse  is  in  motion,  pressure  with  the  right  leg, 
accompanied  by  an  increased  pull  on  the  right  rein, 
turns  the  animal  to  the  right,  and  vice  versa.  Such 
use  of  rein  and  leg  on  the  same  side  constitutes 
the  right  or  left  lateral  effect.  The  rein  gives  the 
direction  to  the  front  hand.  The  leg  gives  the  im- 
pulse to  the  hind  hand,  which  thereupon  pushes 
forward  in  the  direction  indicated. 

It  is,  however,  most  important  always  to  bear  in 
mind  that  such  effect  of  hand  and  legs  is  always  by 
means  of  an  added  pull  on  one  rein  and  an  added 
pressure  of  one  leg,  never  by  the  diminished  contact 
of  rein  or  leg  on  the  other  side.  The  principle  is  that 
the  effect  of  one  rein  or  one  leg,  without  the  usual 
contact  on  the  other  side,  will  not  alter  the  direction 
of  the  animal's  forward  motion,  but  will  pivot  him 
on  the  fixed  spot.  If,  then,  the  horse  is  advancing, 
held  to  a  straight  line  by,  let  us  call  it,  two  degrees 
of  contact  of  reins  and  legs,  and  it  is  desired  to  turn 

38 


THE  AIDS 

him  to  the  right,  the  left  hand  and  the  left  leg  still 
maintain  their  two  degrees  of  pressure,  while  at  the 
same  time,  the  right  hand  and  the  right  leg  increase 
theirs  from  two  degrees  to  three  and  from  three 
degrees  to  four.  But  as  soon  as  the  horse  has  made 
the  required  change  of  direction,  right  leg  and  right 
rein  return  to  their  former  two  degrees  of  effect,  and 
give  once  more  the  straight  line  forward. 

These  effects  are  the  same  at  trot  and  canter. 

In  the  usual  equitation,  the  rider  remains  up- 
right in  his  saddle,  except  that  the  body  inclines  a 
little  forward  to  cause  the  horse  to  advance,  and 
inclines  slightly  backward  for  stopping  and  backing. 
In  this  sort  of  equitation,  the  horse  is  not  main- 
tained in  any  state  of  equilibrium,  the  location  of 
its  center  of  gravity  is  problematical,  and  there- 
fore, the  weight  of  the  rider  has  little  effect  in 
governing  its  movements. 

At  the  trot,  the  rider  may  either  keep  a  close  seat, 
or  he  may  rise  at  each  step,  in  what  is  called  the 
English  motion.  But  in  either  case,  he  has  to  sit 
close  in  order  to  use  the  pressure  of  his  legs  for 
changes  of  direction  or  of  gait,  or  for  other  control. 
He  can,  indeed,  turn  his  mount  by  the  reins  only, 
without  using  his  legs;  but  the  animal  obeys  only 
because  it  is  willing.  Without  pressure  of  the  legs, 
the  rider  cannot  compel  obedience. 

As  soon  as  the  learner  has  acquired  sufficient 
confidence  and  a  firm  seat,  it  is  helpful  exercise  to 
practice  jumping  obstacles. 


CHAPTER  VI 
THE  GAITS 

THE  usual  equitation  regards  the  horse  as  an  ani- 
mated machine  already  adjusted  to  carrying  the 
rider's  weight  at  various  gaits.  Means  of  securing 
regularity  of  gait  or  of  correcting  irregularity  belong 
to  the  rational  equitation,  and  are  quite  outside  the 
ordinary  form. 

The  horse  has  three  natural,  or  regular,  gaits  — 
the  walk,  the  trot,  and  the  run.  He  has,  besides, 
two  other  irregular  or  artificial  gaits,  the  amble 
and  the  single-foot,  which  are  not  natural  to  the 
animal,  except  where  they  are  the  result  of  special 
breeding  or  training. 

The  walk  progresses  by  a  succession  of  strides, 
in  which  the  four  limbs  move  two  by  two,  diago- 
nally. It  is,  therefore,  said  to  be  in  "diagonal 
biped."  In  the  fast  walk,  called  by  Newcastle,  in 
French,  le  pas  releve,  though  the  animal  still  keeps 
at  all  times  three  feet  on  the  ground,  the  diagonal 
movement  is  no  longer  apparent. 

The  means  for  making  a  standing  horse  change 
to  a  walk  are  so  various  in  the  usual  equitation, 
that  it  is  not  possible  to  touch  upon  any  but  the 
most  commonly  practiced,  such  as  chirping  with 
the  tongue,  the  moderate  use  of  the  whip,  advanc- 

40 


THE  GAITS 

ing  the  bridle  hand.  Turning  is  brought  about  by 
the  traction  of  one  rein;  stopping  and  backing,  by 
pulling  upon  both. 

If,  when  at  the  walk,  the  horse  is  urged  to  go 
faster,  it  breaks  into  the  trot.  The  trot  is  like  the 
walk,  except  that  the  diagonal  action  is  more 
pronounced  and  more  apparent,  and  that  the  feet 
are  kept  a  shorter  portion  of  the  time  on  the  ground. 
In  trotting,  the  horse's  spine  at  the  haunches 
delivers  a  succession  of  shocks  to  the  seat  of  the 
rider,  who  neutralizes  them  by  rising  from  the 
saddle  an  instant  before  each  blow.  This  device 
secures  both  comfort  and  exercise.  Except  for  this, 
the  conduct  of  the  trot  is  the  same  as  of  the  walk. 

The  fastest  gait  is  the  run.  The  action  is  a 
succession  of  leaps  executed  by  the  two  sides  of 
the  body  symmetrically,  or,  as  it  is  called,  in 
"  lateral  biped."  A  somewhat  slower  run  is  a  gallop. 
A  slower  gallop  is  a  canter. 

If  at  the  run,  gallop,  or  canter  the  two  legs  on,  let 
us  say,  the  right  side,  gain  more  ground  than  the 
other  two,  the  horse  is  said  to  run,  gallop,  or  canter 
to  the  right,  or,  more  simply,  to  lead  to  the  right; 
and  vice  versa.  But  whenever  a  horse  at  run,  gallop, 
or  canter  turns  its  course  to  either  side,  it  has  to 
lead  with  that  side.  Conversely,  when  the  horse  is 
urged  to  any  of  these  gaits,  and  at  the  same  time  is 
compelled  to  turn  to  either  side,  it  will,  almost 
always,  take  the  lead  to  the  same  side.  Otherwise, 
these  gaits  are  managed  like  the  walk  and  trot. 

41 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

Of  the  irregular  gaits,  the  amble,  widely  esteemed 
in  the  days  of  the  instinctive  equitation,  is  still 
favored  by  the  Cossacks  of  the  Ukraine  and 
Crimea,  the  Arabs,  certain  American  Indians,  by 
Mexicans,  and  in  our  own  Southern  States.  A  few 
unskillful  riders,  also,  even  in  the  more  sophisti- 


AMBLE 

cated  parts  of  the  world,  still  prefer  the  comfort  of 
the  amble  to  the  exhilaration  of  the  trot. 

In  the  amble,  the  horse,  instead  of  striding  with 
two  diagonal  members,  as  in  the  trot,  advances 
together  the  two  limbs  on  the  same  side.  There  is, 
therefore,  no  play  at  the  coupling,  no  trajectory, 
and  the  rider  is  pushed  alternately  from  side  to  side, 
instead  of  being  propelled  upward  as  in  the  trot. 

42 


THE  GAITS 

So  far  as  this  gait  is  the  result  of  training,  it 
can  be  corrected,,  though  with  difficulty.  But  if  it 
is  hereditary,  it  can  seldom  be  changed.  I  have 
myself  had  occasion,  in  the  United  States,  to  al- 
ter a  good  many  amblers  into  trotters.  My  own 
method  is  by  cavesson  and  breaking-strap,  a  tire- 
some device,  but  fairly  quick  and  sure.  The 
progression  through  the  reasoned  equitation  is  the 
best  corrective;  but  this  also  is  very  tedious,  since 
the  work  must  be  done,  partly  on  foot,  and  partly 
mounted  in  place.  Even  then,  if  the  horse  is  put 
to  the  trot  and  begins  to  amble,  he  must  be  stopped 
at  once,  lest  he  become  confused  and  not  under- 
stand what  is  asked  of  him. 

The  rack  is  between  a  walk  and  an  amble.  The 
four  limbs  advance  by  a  lateral  motion,  slower 
than  at  the  amble,  faster  and  shorter  than  at  the 
walk.  But  in  order  to  do  this,  the  muscles  of  neck, 
back,  loins,  and  haunches  have  to  be  kept  con- 
tracted, so  that  the  entire  vertebral  column  is 
held  immobile.  This  is  especially  noticeable  in  the 
pelvic  region  and  at  the  coupling.  The  hind  hand 
receives  no  trajection  as  in  the  walk  and  trot.  The 
rear  limbs  move  below  the  croup  without  any 
lift-and-drop  at  each  step.  The  sacral  region  re- 
mains rigid.  The  stride  is  short  and  quick. 

The  front  legs  are  neither  completely  in  lateral, 
nor  yet  completely  in  diagonal.  Each  reaches 
forward  and  returns  supporting  the  load,  a  little 
in  advance  of  the  rear  limb  on  the  same  side.  But 

43 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

the  return  of  the  feet  is  quicker  than  at  the  walk, 
and  their  beat  is  about  equally  spaced.  In  other 
words,  at  the  regular  walk  there  are  heard  two 
beats  in  diagonal;  at  the  amble,  three  beats  in 
lateral;  at  the  rack,  four  beats  in  lateral. 

The  rack  was  much  favored  in  ancient  times, 
when  there  were  no  roads,  when  horses  were  ridden 
without  saddle  or  bridle,  and  the  best  gait  was  the 
one  which  needed  least  skill  and  balance  on  the 
rider's  part.  It  is  now  obsolete. 

Single-foot  is  almost  never  taken  by  instinct, 
unless  the  animal  suffers  from  atrophy,  weakness, 
or  fatigue.  Occasionally,  however,  it  is  hereditary. 
In  the  latter  case,  the  correction  of  the  fault  is 
nearly  impossible  and  never  permanent.  If  the 
gait  is  the  result  of  training,  as  it  is  sometimes  in 
Brittany,  Mexico,  and  the  western  parts  of  the 
United  States,  it  is  best  cured  by  cavesson  and 
longe. 

The  action  in  single-foot  is  a  slow  trot  in  front, 
and  a  fast  walk  behind.  It  is  exactly  the  movement 
of  a  horse  thoroughly  tired  out  by  a  long  journey, 
which  is  nevertheless  being  urged  forward  by  its 
rider.  Such  an  animal,  again  rested,  will  return  to 
his  normal  walk  and  trot. 

The  irregular  or  artificial  gaits  may  be  the  result 
of  training  or  of  heredity. 

The  amble  is  the  same  the  world  over,  though 
called  amble  in  England,  but  rack,  pace,  or  fox-trot 
in  the  United  States.  The  word  does  not  matter, 

44 


THE  GAITS 

except  that  "pace,"  ambiguous  in  this  sense,  had 
better  be  kept  to  mean  all  the  gaits  of  a  horse,  and 
not  restricted  to  a  particular  one. 

When  a  horse,  already  at  a  fast  trot,  is  urged  to 
move  still  more  rapidly,  so  that  action  in  diagonal 


SINGLE-FOOT 

biped  becomes  impossible,  he  may  change  to  the 
amble.  For  this,  he  stiffens  the  spine,  and  replaces 
the  up-and-down  motion  of  the  trot  by  an  oscilla- 
tion from  side  to  side  in  lateral  biped.  Fore  and 
hind  legs  on  the  same  side  advance  together;  but 
the  motion  is  so  rapid  that  the  animal  appears 
to  the  eye  to  be  running  with  the  hind  legs  and 

45 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

trotting  with  the  front.  Curiously,  certain  ambling 
horses  have  been,  on  the  track,  faster  than  the 
fastest  trotters. 

In  the  single-foot,  the  hind  legs  move  at  a  fast 
walk,  while  the  fore  legs  execute  a  slow  trot.  Both 
these  irregular  gaits  can  be  cured  by  the  reasoned 
equitation,  or  by  the  cavesson  and  breaking-strap. 


CHAPTER  VII 
JUMPING 

THE  first  prerequisites  in  a  horse  that  is  to  clear  an 
obstacle  properly  are  conformation,  strength,  and 
energy.  Any  horse,  when  free,  will  jump  anything 
if  frightened  or  pursued.  But  it  has  to  be  trained 
to  jump  at  the  rider's  will  and  under  his  weight. 

For  this  there  are  various  methods,  of  which  the 
following  has  proved  by  experience  to  be  the  best. 

A  bar  of  wood  or  a  low  hurdle  is  placed  on  the 
ground,  and  the  horse,  led  by  a  man  holding  the 


FIRST  LESSON  WITH  THE  LONGE 

longe  of  the  cavesson,  and  maintained  always  in  a 
state  of  perfect  calm  and  docility,  is  habituated  to 

47 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

passing  this  at  a  walk.  When  the  animal  has  ac- 
quired confidence,  the  obstacle  is  raised  progres- 
sively, the  trainer  following  the  horse  and  encour- 
aging him  by  showing  the  long  whip,  not,  however, 
striking,  unless  the  horse  actually  refuses.  Even 
in  that  case  it  is  better  not  actually  to  strike, 
but  only  to  swing  the  whip  gently.  Meanwhile,  the 
man  holding  the  longe  must  be  careful  not  to  hinder 
the  horse  from  jumping,  or  to  pull  against  it  after 
it  has  passed  the  bar.  As  soon  as  the  animal  sur- 
mounts the  barrier  calmly,  it  should  be  recom- 
pensed by  caresses  or  otherwise. 

When  the  horse  has  learned  to  take  the  bar  at  a 
walk,  it  is  practiced,  progressively,  at  the  gallop. 
Here,  especially,  is  it  essential  not  to  excite  the 
animal,  nor  to  check  it  by  the  longe,  either  before 
or  after  the  leap.  For  the  horse  in  leaping  has  to 
develop  a  very  great  amount  of  muscular  energy; 
and  if  the  trainer  hinders  it  in  any  way,  or  at  any 
time  asks  too  much  of  it,  the  horse  fails  to  put  forth 
sufficient  energy,  becomes  disheartened,  refuses, 
and  tries  to  bolt. 

After  this  training  with  the  cavesson  has  pro- 
ceeded far  enough,  the  trainer  mounts  the  horse, 
and  proceeds  once  more  with  the  same  programme 
from  the  beginning. 

From  this  point  on,  it  must  always  be  borne  in 
mind  that  the  horse  clears  the  obstacle  by  its  own 
act  of  will.  Being  trained  to  leap,  it  knows  the 
right  way  to  use  its  powers.  The  first  essential  for 


JUMPING 

the  rider,  therefore,  is  to  let  the  horse  alone,  and  not 
interfere  with  it  by  some  wrong  position  in  the 
saddle  or  some  wrong  effect  of  the  reins.  The 
important  matter,  then,  is  to  gallop  the  horse 
straight  at  the  obstacle,  neither  too  fast  nor  too 


THE  HORSE,MOUNTED,  LEAPS  THE  BAR  DIRECTED  BY 
THE  LONGE 


slow;  to  feel  the  contact  of  the  bit  and  yet  permit 
freedom  to  the  head  and  neck,  not  holding  them 
too  high  or  too  low ;  and  not  to  try  to  lift  the  horse's 
front  hand,  but,  on  the  contrary,  to  push  it  forward 
during  the  entire  movement  by  the  pressure  of  the 
rider's  legs  upon  the  horse's  flanks  near  the  girths. 
Meanwhile  the  rider  is  to  sit  firm  in  his  saddle,  his 

49 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

body  always  perpendicular  to  the  ground,  his  loins 
supple  to  neutralize  the  shock. 

No  other  part  of  horsemanship  has  given  rise  to 
more  theories  than  has  jumping.  For  no  two  horses 
jump  just  alike,  nor  do  any  two  men  ride  in  pre- 
cisely the  same  way.  When,  therefore,  we  consider 


— ^>^s^^^^ 


THE  HORSE  JUMPS  THE  OBSTACLE  MOUNTED  AND  UNDER 
CONTROL  OF  THE  RIDER 

the  different  speeds,  strides,  and  conformations 
of  horses,  with  their  differing  energy,  the  special 
qualities  of  experience,  seat,  conformation,  and 
tact  of  hand  of  riders,  and  the  various  conditions  of 
ground,  the  excitement  occasioned  by  the  company, 
the  variety  in  height,  width,  and  stiffness  of  the 
obstacle  to  be  passed,  to  say  nothing  of  the  tempo- 

50 


JUMPING 

rary  physical  and  moral  dispositions  of  both  rider 
and  horse,  it  clearly  becomes  impossible  to  lay 
down  any  invariable  rule  that  shall  make  every 
jump  invariably  like  every  other. 

But  after  all  is  said,   clearing  an  obstacle  is 
largely  a  matter  of  confidence  on  the  part  of  the 


THE  HORSE  COMES  SQUARELY  TO  THE  OBSTACLE  AND 
JUMPS  FRANKLY 

rider.  A  horse  does  not,  of  course,  apprehend  di- 
rectly the  rider's  morale.  But  he  does  appreciate  to 
the  full  the  lack  of  confidence  of  a  rider  who,  on  com- 
ing to  the  jump,  stiffens  himself,  shifts  in  his  sad- 
dle, or  pulls  against  his  horse's  mouth;  and  it  is  this 
lack  of  confidence,  thus  communicated  to  the  horse, 
that  causes  the  animal  to  hesitate,  refuse,  or  bolt. 


USUAL  OR  INSTINCTIVE  EQUITATION 

Successful  training  for  the  jump,  in  short,  in- 
volves not  only  time  and  moderation,  economy 
of  physical  and  moral  energy,  attention  to  the 
animal's  wind,  a  light  weight  increased  progressively 
to  the  normal  load  to  be  carried,  and  frequent  rests 
to  avoid  exhaustion.  Not  less  essential  are  the 
trust  of  the  horse  in  its  own  powers,  its  confidence 
in  the  rider,  the  confidence  of  the  rider  in  his  horse, 
and  no  undue  interference  with  it. 

NOTE  ON  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

WHEN  the  horse  is  performing  well  at  walk,  trot, 
and  gallop,  there  is  often  much  benefit,  before 
taking  up  the  jump,  in  practicing  certain  of  the 
so-called  figures  of  manege,  such  as  the  double, 
the  change  of  direction,  the  circle  and  figure  eight, 
the  volte  and  half-volte.  These  are  taken  progres- 
sively, first  at  the  walk,  then  at  the  trot,  then  at  the 
gallop. 

In  these  movements,  at  the  present  stage  of  the 
rider's  progress,  the  horse  is  kept  to  the  straight 
line  by  means  of  the  "  lateral  effect. "  Properly, 
however,  this  should  be  accomplished  by  the 
"  diagonal  effect,"  with  which  the  ordinary  rider  is 
assumed  not  to  be  acquainted,  and  which  he  should 
not  attempt  to  use  until  he  has  passed  through  the 
progressive  training  that  belongs  to  this  branch  of 
equitation.  The  details  of  these  figures  are,  there- 
fore, included  in  the  chapters  on  the  scientific 
equitation. 

52 


PART  II 

THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

THE  TRAINING  OF  THE  SADDLE  HORSE  BY  THE  AID 

OF  PRINCIPLES  BASED  ON  THE  EXPERIENCE  OF 

MASTERS  OF  THE  ART  OF  RIDING 


CHAPTER  VIII 
THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

WE  owe  the  reasoned  equitation  largely  to  Baucher. 
Before  his  day,  even  in  ancient  times,  men  had, 
indeed,  an  idea  of  the  need  of  the  state  of  equilib- 
rium on  the  part  of  the  horse;  and  they  had 
tried,  unsuccessfully,  to  obtain  this  by  various 
methods,  often  complicated,  and  involving  series 
of  movements  and  also  mechanical  devices.  Bau- 
cher not  only  created  a  system  for  obtaining  the 
state  of  equilibrium;  in  addition,  in  his  L1  Equitation 
Raisonnee,  he  set  forth  the  principles  on  which  the 
whole  reasoned  equitation  is  based. 

These  are  in  brief: 

The  state  of  equilibrium  is  not  the  result  of  any 
instincts  of  the  horse;  but,  on  the  contrary,  is 
imposed  upon  the  horse  by  the  rider,  in  the  form  of 
an  increased  muscular  activity  which  the  rider 
stimulates. 

The  horse,  compelled  to  the  state  of  equilibrium 
by  the  man,  is  itself  in  a  state  of  complete  submis- 
sion, in  which  it  cannot  use  its  brute  strength  to 
resist  its  rider,  but  can  nevertheless  execute  any 
natural  movement  with  the  least  possible  waste  of 
energy. 

The  weight  of  the  man,  also  in  equilibrium  upon 

55 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  horse's  back,  is  borne  with  the  least  possible 
effort,  and  with  an  ease  for  which  the  animal  is 
manifestly  grateful  to  its  master. 

Now  it  is  absolutely  true  that  only  as  the  result 
of  training  are  the  enormous  powers  of  the  horse 
brought  under  the  man's  intelligence,  without 
violence  and  without  physical  or  moral  pain.  The 
one  is  wise,  the  other  is  strong.  The  two  form  a 
friendly  unit  in  which  the  brute  is  submissive  and 
happy.  But  since  the  reasoned  equitation  follows 
a  series  of  progressive  exercises,  in  which  the  more 
advanced  rest  on  those  which  precede,  it  is  essential 
that  the  same  rider  use  always  the  same  horse, 
during  the  time  necessary  to  complete  its  training. 

A  sound  and  well-conformed  animal,  energetic 
but  good-tempered,  will  be  the  easiest  to  train.  A 
full  bridle  should  be  employed,  with  a  bit  of  me- 
dium power,  a  Baucher  snaffle,  curb  chain,  and  lip 
strap.  The  work  on  foot  requires  a  three-foot  whip. 
Later  in  the  training,  when  the  horse  is  mounted, 
spurs  will  be  needed.  A  well-kept  second-hand 
English  saddle  is  better  than  a  new  one. 

Since  the  reasoned  equitation  has  for  its  purpose 
to  teach  the  rider  both  how  to  train  his  horse,  and 
also  how  to  ride  a  horse  already  trained  in  the 
system,  it  is  useful  for  professional  riding-masters 
and  trainers,  and  for  all  civilians.  But  it  is  only 
after  several  years  of  the  usual  equitation  that 
either  the  theory  or  the  practice  of  the  reasoned 
equitation  becomes  of  any  particular  benefit.  Bau- 

56 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

cher  wrote  out  his  method  primarily  for  cavalry 
officers  and  other  professionals,  and  his  principles 
are  very  complicated  for  an  amateur  to  follow.  I 
have,  however,  taught  the  reasoned  equitation  to 
a  great  number  of  amateur  riders,  both  men  and 
women.  I  have,  in  addition,  simplified  Baucher's 
theory  and  clarified  his  methods  so  that  now  the 
entire  system  is  practical  for  amateur  and  profes- 
sional alike. 


CHAPTER  IX 
BREAKING  IN 

BREAKING  in,  for  the  young  horse,  involves  ac- 
quaintance with  the  trainer,  so  that  it  will  come  to 
him  and  follow  him  without  fear  or  anxiety,  accept 
the  bridle  without  reluctance,  stand  quietly  for 
mounting  and  dismounting,  walk,  trot,  and  gallop 
under  the  rider's  weight  without  nervous  tension, 
turn  to  either  side  by  the  rein,  stop  and  stand  still. 
That  these  movements  should  all  be  done  perfectly, 
is  not,  however,  so  important  as  that  the  horse 
should  be  docile  and  quiet. 

This  first  portion  of  a  horse's  training  does  not 
need  an  experienced  master.  Any  ordinary  rider 
can  manage  it,  provided  only  that  he  have  persever- 
ance, patience,  kindness,  love  for  the  animal,  and  a 
sufficiently  good  seat  to  resist  the  exuberance  of  a 
young  horse.  For  a  young  horse  is  like  a  child,  ig- 
norant, timid,  anxious;  and  if  the  trainer  is  not 
indulgent,  patient,  and  fond  of  the  animal,  sooner 
or  later  a  little  too  much  severity,  the  least  touch 
of  brutality,  will  reenforce  this  natural  timidity, 
and  produce  restiveness  and  bad  temper  that  the 
horse  will  never  outgrow.  Many  a  horse  has  been 
spoiled  by  unintelligent  trainers.  For  the  horse's 
memory  is  excellent,  and  very  seldom  does  it  forget 
harsh  treatment. 

58 


BREAKING  IN 

Baucher  says,  and  I  am  of  his  opinion,  that  it 
needs  uncommon  discrimination  on  the  part  of  an 
owner  to  pick  the  right  man  for  breaking  in  a  young 
horse.  Indeed,  to  judge  wisely  the  time  required 
for  the  work,  the  state  of  progress  of  the  young  ani- 
mal and  its  muscular  development,  to  reward  obe- 
dience suitably,  and  to  punish  with  wise  moderation, 
demand  a  judgment  and  an  experience  that  come 
near  to  talent. 

It  is  far  easier  to  train  a  child  than  to  reform  a 
criminal:  and  it  is  the  same  with  a  young  horse. 
But  if  the  instructor  lacks  patience  or  kindness  or 
experience,  the  child  will  revolt  against  his  teachers, 
and  the  horse  against  its  riders,  and  both  will  be 
permanently  harmed.  And  since  the  breaking  in  is 
the  beginning  of  a  horse's  education,  the  man  who 
undertakes  it  can  never  have  too  much  of  each  of 
these  essential  qualities. 

During  the  breaking  in,  a  single  bridoon  should 
be  used,  rather  than  a  full  bridle.  The  chain  and  bit 
produce  too  powerful  an  effect  on  the  mouth  of  a 
young  horse,  and  it  will  not  understand.  Moreover, 
they  cannot  be  managed  properly  during  the  rear- 
ing, kicking,  and  buck-jumping  to  which  young 
horses  are  addicted. 

If  the  horse  is  nervous  or  violent,  I  employ  the 
cavesson  with  the  longe.  The  horse  is  saddled  and 
bridled,  the  stirrups  being  raised  against  the  saddle 
by  a  knot  in  the  straps.  The  cavesson  is  put  on  over 
the  bridle,  the  throat-latch  tight  enough  to  prevent 

59 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  cavesson  from  slipping  and  hurting  the  horse's 
eyes  if  the  animal  becomes  violent.  Around  the 
saddle  I  buckle  a  surcingle,  with  two  buckles  and  a 
little  strap,  to  hold  the  reins  when  not  in  use,  and  to 
prevent  their  falling  down  in  front  of  the  animal's 


DUMB-JOCKEY,    USED    FOR    TRAINING    THE    HORSE    TO 
ACCEPT  CONTACT  OF  THE  BITS  AT  THE  DIFFERENT  GAITS 

legs.  I  have  also  two  buckles  on  the  headpiece  of  the 
cavesson;  and  two  pairs  of  old  reins,  with  holes  at 
each  end,  equally  spaced.  One  pair  buckles  to  the 
cavesson  and  to  the  snaffle,  the  two  sides  just  alike. 
The  other  ends  of  this  pair  fasten  at  the  surcingle, 
the  two  reins  of  equal  length.  The  second  pair  of 
reins  attaches  to  the  bit,  without  tension  at  first, 
but  in  due  time  fastened  with  the  snaffle  reins. 
All  these  straps  being  adjusted,  I  take  the  end  of 

60 


'  I 


BREAKING  IN 

the  longe  in  my  left  hand  and  back  away  to  very 
nearly  the  full  length,  while  an  assistant  holds  the 


FIRST  LESSON  WITH  THE  LONGE 

horse's  head.  I  stand  at  the  center  of  the  circle  in 
which  the  horse  is  to  travel,  and  show  the  long 
training  whip,  which  I  carry  in  my  right  hand.  The 
assistant  leads  the  horse  a  few  steps  around  the 
circle  to  the  left,  then  stops  and  caresses  the  animal 
on  neck  and  head. 

When  in  this  way  the  horse  has  traveled  an  entire 
circumference,  the  assistant  lets  go  the  bridle,  and 
takes  the  longe  with  his  left  hand  about  three  feet 
from  the  head.  While  the  assistant  continues  to 
caress  the  horse  with  his  right  hand,  the  trainer, 
still  holding  the  longe  in  his  left  hand,  encourages 
the  horse  to  continue  around  the  circle,  by  chirping 
the  tongue  and  showing  the  whip  near  the  horse's 
hind  legs,  but  without  actually  striking.  After  a 

61 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

few  trials,  the  horse  comprehends  what  is  wanted, 
and  goes  forward  at  command.  Thereupon,  the 
assistant  works  progressively  farther  and  farther 
along  the  longe  away  from  the  horse,  until  he  lets 
go  entirely. 

As  the  horse  learns  to  travel  around  the  circle 
under  control  of  the  trainer,  it  must  learn  also  to 
stop  on  the  line,  without  turning  its  body  inward  or 
outward.  For  this,  the  trainer  swings  his  left  hand 
up  and  down,  so  as  to  give  a  succession  of  mild  jerks 
on  the  longe;  at  the  same  time,  the  assistant  walks 
slowly  along  the  longe  to  the  horse's  head,  while 
the  trainer,  in  a  clear  and  commanding  voice,  calls, 
Hoho,  Hoho.  Whoa!  As  the  horse  stops,  the  as- 
sistant caresses  it.  At  first  the  animal  will  turn  its 
haunches  outward  from  the  circle.  After  a  few  les- 
sons, it  will  stop  straight  on  the  line. 

The  trainer  should  always  stand  still  at  the  center 
of  the  circle,  never  following  the  horse,  but  compel- 
ling the  horse  to  go  round  him,  to  walk,  trot,  and 
stop  as  indicated,  but  not  to  come  to  the  trainer 
unless  summoned  by  a  pull  on  the  longe. 

An  experienced  trainer  will  very  soon  teach  the 
horse  to  obey  the  whip.  Shown  near  the  flanks,  it 
means  to  go  to  the  right  or  left;  at  the  hind  hand, 
to  go  forward  at  the  different  gaits;  in  front  of  the 
face,  to  stop.  Showing  the  whip  straight,  the  lash 
upward,  accompanied  by  a  gentle  tug  on  the  longe, 
will  bring  the  horse  to  the  center.  If  the  horse  is 
then  rewarded  and  caressed,  the  sight  of  the  whip 

62 


BREAKING  IN 

held  vertically  will  alone  be  sufficient  without  the 
pull  on  the  longe. 

At  the  beginning  of  this  work,  the  reins  should 
not  be  at  all  tight.  It  is,  however,  impossible  to  lay 
down  any  rules  as  to  their  precise  tension.  An 
experienced  trainer  judges,  by  the  animal's  temper, 
conformation,  energy,  length  of  neck,  and  sensi- 
bility of  mouth,  what  the  effect  of  the  bits  will  be. 
In  fact,  an  experienced  trainer  could  fill  ten  volumes 
with  accounts  of  the  diversities  among  horses  and 
the  various  difficulties  that  he  has  encountered  and 
overcome.  Something  less  than  this,  however,  con- 
fined to  principles  and  method,  will  better  please 
the  publisher  and  hearten  the  reader. 

Three  months  is  sufficient,  by  this  method,  for 
breaking  a  horse  to  the  lateral  equitation.  But  if 
the  horse  is  mounted  from  the  beginning,  it  will 
take  at  least  a  year,  often  longer. 

When  the  young  animal  has  made  sufficient 
progress  with  longe  and  breaking-strap,  the  sur- 
cingle is  removed,  and  the  horse,  standing  still,  is 
mounted  and  dismounted  by  the  assistant,  the 
trainer  meanwhile  holding  the  longe  near  the  head. 
After  this,  the  assistant  being  mounted,  the  trainer 
sends  the  horse  around  the  circle  as  before,  walking, 
stopping,  trotting,  cantering,  while  the  assistant, 
under  the  direction  of  the  trainer,  applies  the  proper 
effects  of  legs  and  bridle.  All  this  should  be  done 
both  to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  as  explained  in  the 
discussion  of  figures  of  manege. 

63 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

As  soon  as  the  horse  has  become  calm  and 
obedient  while  the  hands  of  the  assistant  feel  a 
gentle  contact  with  the  mouth  through  the  rein, 
the  cavesson  likewise  is  removed;  and  the  trainer, 
now  mounting  for  himself,  begins  progressive  work 


LESSON,  MOUNTED,  WITH  THE  LONGE 

upon  the  several  gaits,  first  on  a  straight  line, 
afterwards  at  the  figures  of  manege,  but  always, 
without  exception,  by  means  of  the  lateral  effects, 
It  is  best,  when  possible,  to  keep  the  horse  for  a 
year  at  the  breaking  in  and  the  lateral  effects, 
before  going  on  to  the  reasoned  equitation.  By  that 
time  horse  and  trainer  better  know  one  another, 
the  horse  is  stronger,  steadier,  and  better  able  to 
profit  by  the  suppling  of  the  flexions.  Moreover, 
the  young  or  inexperienced  trainer  is  very  likely  to 

64 


BREAKING  IN 

push  his  horse's  education  too  hard,  and  to  neglect 
some  items  which  do  not  seem  important  to  him. 
The  result  is  that  there  comes  a  time  when  the 
trainer  has  to  go  back  and  pick  up  these  neglected 
elements. 

Often,  too,  it  happens  that  a  horse,  well  trained 
by  a  master,  is  ridden  by  some  one  without  eques- 
trian tact,  and  has  to  go  back  to  the  master  to  be 
retrained.  Sometimes,  also,  a  man  buys  a  horse 
which  has  already  been  ridden,  but  in  accordance 
with  some  other  method  than  his  own;  and  since 
the  memory  of  the  horse  is  very  persistent,  the 
training  may  have  to  be  started  over  again  from 
the  foundation. 

In  all  these  cases  the  trainer  needs  to  be  expe- 
rienced, patient,  persevering,  energetic,  and  posi- 
tive, besides  having  a  genuine  affection  for  his  pupil. 
No  two  horses  are  alike  in  conformation  or  morale, 
nor  in  the  results  of  their  first  contact  with  man.  The 
trainer  needs,  therefore,  to  diagnose  his  animal,  to 
consider  his  strong  and  weak  points,  so  as  to  pick 
the  right  place  for  the  training  to  begin.  If,  for 
example,  a  horse  is  anxious  and  timid,  before  I  do 
anything  else,  I  give  it  confidence,  by  means  of  work 
on  foot  with  the  whip.  If  it  is  young  and  not  strong. 
I  develop  its  muscles  by  means  of  the  cavesson  with 
the  Bussigny  breaking-straps. 

One  ought,  in  a  word,  to  study  his  horse,  find  out 
its  special  needs,  and  commence  the  education  by 
removing  the  causes  of  its  imperfections.  Meth- 

65 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

odists,  as  a  whole,  are  too  sure  of  their  general 
principles.  They  want  to  have  every  horse  put 
through  the  hard-and-fast  progression  of  their 
particular  method.  But  my  experience  is  that  each 
individual  horse  has  its  own  physical  and  moral 
disposition,  and  that  each  needs  its  own  special 
treatment  and  training. 

This  much,  at  any  rate,  is  certain:  no  matter  how 
the  horse's  education  commences  or  proceeds,  the 
earlier  portions  of  it  will  need  more  care,  more 
ability,  and  more  experience  on  the  part  of  the 
trainer  than  the  later  ones.  I  am,  then,  fully  agreed 
with  Baucher  in  his  criticism  of  owners  who  give 
young  horses  to  their  stable  grooms  to  train.  And 
yet,  in  Baucher's  time,  equitation  was  in  high 
esteem.  Whereas  now  horsemanship  is  almost  a  lost 
art,  and  riding  is  thought  of  merely  as  a  wholesome 
exercise. 


CHAPTER  X 
REWARDS  AND  PUNISHMENTS 

CARESSES  and  other  rewards  are  the  first  means  by 
which  the  trainer  makes  the  horse  understand  that 
it  has  nothing  to  fear  when  under  control.  A  horse 
is  by  nature  timid  and  anxious;  the  first  step  in  its 
training  is  to  give  it  confidence  and  to  make  it 
understand  that  it  will  meet  no  ill  usage.  When 
that  is  accomplished,  the  horse  is  tamed.  As  yet, 
however,  it  knows  nothing.  Its  education  advances 
by  means  of  rewards  when  it  does  well,  and  by 
punishments  when  it  fails  to  do  something  that  it 
has  already  been  taught. 

Caressing  may  be  done  with  the  hand  alone,  or 
with  the  voice,  or  by  the  two  in  conjunction.  Early 
in  the  training,  it  is  better  to  employ  both  together, 
so  that  each  may  help  to  make  the  other  understood. 
After  the  horse  gets  the  idea,  it  is  better  to  use  only 
one  at  a  time. 

When  the  man  is  on  foot,  he  commonly  caresses 
the  horse  by  passing  his  hand  over  the  forehead  be- 
low the  forelock,  always  in  the  direction  of  the  hair. 
But  the  horse  should  become  accustomed  to  caress- 
ing on  other  parts  of  the  body  —  neck,  shoulders, 
loins,  abdomen,  haunches,  and  legs.  The  fingers 
should  be  extended  and  the  full  hand  used,  not 

67 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

merely  the  finger-tips.  The  horse  is  thankful  for  a 
generous  caress  with  heart  in  it. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  horse  should  not  be 
slapped  too  strongly.  A  nervous  animal,  especially, 
is  likely  to  interpret  this  as  a  reproof. 

Caressing  by  the  voice  is  entirely  a  matter  of 
softness  of  tone.  The  animal  has  no  idea  whatever 
of  the  meaning  of  the  words. 

With  the  horse  in  motion,  whether  walking, 
trotting,  or  galloping,  whenever  the  rider  feels  it 
becoming  anxious  at  the  sight  of  some  object  or-  at 
some  noise,  or  hesitating  before  an  obstacle  to  be 
cleared,  he  commonly  employs  the  voice  to  quiet  or 
encourage  the  animal,  since  the  hands  are  busy  with 
the  reins.  But  standing  still,  or  whenever,  in  mo- 
tion, the  rider  can  manage  the  reins  with  one  hand, 
the  free  hand  should  caress  the  particular  part  of 
the  body  which  has  obeyed  the  rider's  signals  or 
been  the  chief  factor  in  the  movement.  If  the  neck 
has  played  the  leading  part,  caress  the  neck.  If  the 
croup,  caress  the  haunches  or  loins.  By  this  means 
the  horse  is  trained  to  associate  the  aids  and  signals 
of  the  rider  with  the  part  of  the  body  which  is  to 
carry  out  the  command. 

In  general,  a  reward  given  during  the  act  of 
obedience  is  more  effective  than  one  administered 
later.  It  is,  therefore,  often  wise  to  repeat  a  move- 
ment, already  executed  correctly,  for  the  sake  of 
giving  the  caress  during  the  actual  performance. 
But  after  a  difficult  movement,  well  performed,  it 

68 


REWARDS  AND  PUNISHMENTS 

is  often  best  to  dismount,  take  off  the  bridle,  give  a 
carrot,  an  apple,  or  a  piece  of  sugar,  and  dismiss  the 
pupil  to  the  stable. 

Punishments,  in  the  horse's  education,  are  no  less 
important  than  rewards.  These  ought  always  to  be 
administered  fairly  and  justly,  with  decision,  but 
without  impatience,  calmly  and  with  self-restraint, 
and  with  a  sentiment  of  regretful  loyalty  on  the 
part  of  the  man. 

The  means  of  correction  are  four:  the  spurs  (to  be 
discussed  later),  the  whip,  the  voice,  and  the  hand. 
The  whip  is  especially  effective.  It  is  used  with 
sharp  but  not  severe  stroke,  upon  any  part  of  the 
body,  but  never  on  the  head.  After  the  training  has 
made  some  progress,  the  effect  of  the  whip  is 
augmented  if,  along  with  the  stroke,  the  trainer 
speaks  in  a  sharp,  guttural  tone.  A  man  working 
his  horse  on  foot  can  make  a  strong  impression  by 
looking  the  animal  straight  in  the  eyes,  with  a 
severe  countenance,  while  he  speaks  harshly  with 
the  voice.  After  this,  the  whip  may  be  suppressed, 
and  the  rebuke  given  by  a  severe  slap  of  the  hand, 
accompanied  by  the  threatening  tone.  The  same 
method  may  then  be  used  mounted. 

When  the  horse  has  learned  to  expect  punishment 
when  it  misbehaves  and  rewards  when  it  does  well, 
and  to  trust  its  rider  always,  it  is  well  on  the  road  of 
a  progressive  and  thorough  education. 


CHAPTER  XI 
THE  FIRST  WORK  ON  FOOT 

THE  breaking  in  has  for  its  object  merely  to  accus- 
tom the  young  horse  to  the  feeling  of  harness,  girths, 
and  saddle,  and  to  the  beginnings  of  control  by  the 
trainer.  The  early  work  on  foot  is  but  a  continua- 
tion of  the  breaking  in.  Its  object  is  to  lead  the 
green  animal  to  understand  the  various  contacts 
and  effects,  of  which,  of  course,  he  is,  at  the  begin- 
ning, completely  ignorant.  By  this  preliminary 
work  on  foot,  we  educate  the  horse  to  submit  to  the 
contact  of  the  bits,  which  at  first  cause  an  anxiety 
which  must  be  completely  overcome. 

The  horse,  saddled  and  bridled,  is  led  to  the  spot 
selected  for  the  first  lesson.  The  stirrups  are  raised 
on  the  saddle,  and  the  snaffle  reins  are  passed 
forward  over  the  head,  and  held  in  the  left  hand  of 
the  trainer,  who  stands  in  front  facing  the  animal, 
the  whip  in  his  right  hand.  The  man  speaks 
soothingly,  exhibits  the  whip,  and  with  it  caresses 
the  horse's  forehead,  nostrils,  ears,  and  both  sides 
of  the  neck.  (Figure  I.) 

At  first,  the  horse  will  be  uneasy.  But  shortly  he 
becomes  calm,  finding  that  no  pain  follows  the 
touch  of  the  whip,  and  encouraged  by  the  man's 
voice  and  his  complete  immobility.  Thereupon,  the 

70 


Figure  i .  THE  HORSE  SEES  AND  FEELS  THE  WHIP 

WITHOUT  FEAR 


Figure  2.  CONTACT  OF  THE  BITS  WITH  THE  MOUTH  BY 

THE  WHIP  ON  THE  FLANK 


Figure  3.  CONTACT  OF  THE  BITS  WITH  THE  MOUTH  BY 

THE  WHIP  UPON  THE  CHEST 


THE  FIRST  WORK  ON  FOOT 

trainer  raises  the  whip,  and  stepping  backward,  he 
pulls  lightly  on  the  two  snaffle  reins.  When,  by  this 
means,  the  trainer  obtains  two  or  three  forward 
steps,  he  immediately  caresses  the  animal  by  voice 
and  hand.  After  a  few  days  of  this  training,  the 
horse  will,  of  its  own  accord,  advance  toward  its 
master  as  soon  as  the  whip  is  lifted  to  the  height  of 
its  head.  As  soon  as  this  happens,  the  pupil  should 
be  caressed  with  the  whip  on  shoulder,  chest,  croup, 
and  all  four  legs. 

When  the  horse  no  longer  has  the  slightest  fear  of 
man  or  whip,  the  time  has  come  to  teach  the  animal 
to  move  forward  in  response  to  other  effects.  The 
trainer,  facing  forward,  stands  at  the  horse's  left 
shoulder.  In  his  right  hand  he  holds  the  two  snaffle 
reins,  three  inches  from  the  horse's  chin;  and  in  his 
left  hand  he  carries  the  whip,  the  lash  behind  and 
near  the  horse's  flank.  In  this  position  he  impels 
the  horse  to  walk  forward  by  light  touches  of  the 
whip  on  the  flanks  near  the  girths.  (Figure  2.) 

At  this  point  the  horse  will  sometimes  hesitate, 
or  even  try  to  back.  But  the  trainer,  remaining 
always  calm,  encourages  the  animal  with  his  voice, 
which  the  horse  already  knows.  By  drawing 
forward  steadily  with  his  right  hand,  he  should 
always  succeed  in  obtaining  a  few  forward  steps. 
These,  if  well  recompensed  by  caresses,  will  very 
soon  be  followed  by  more  at  the  same  signal. 

If  the  horse  manifests  irritability  or  violence,  the 
trainer  should  pass  the  snaffle  reins  forward  over  its 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

head,  and  while  holding  them  with  the  right  hand 
near  the  chin  as  before,  he  should  also  take  them 
near  their  ends  with  his  left  hand,  which  holds  the 
whip.  If,  then,  any  violent  movement  of  the  horse 
forces  the  trainer  to  let  go  the  reins  with  his  right 
hand,  he  still  has  the  other  grip  to  fall  back  on. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  advances  readily  and  takes 
the  contact  of  the  snaffle  bit  against  the  lower  jaw, 
the  training  is  to  be  repeated  from  the  other  side. 
When  the  contact  is  accepted  freely  with  the 
snaffle,  the  same  course  is  repeated  with  the  bit.  In 
this  case  the  little  finger  of  the  left  hand  separates 
the  two  reins  of  the  bit,  and  the  ends  of  these  reins 
leave  the  hand  between  the  forefinger  and  the 
thumb.  The  snaffle  reins,  on  the  contrary,  enter 
the  hand  between  the  forefinger  and  the  thumb, 
and  pass  out  at  the  little  finger.  All  five  digits  close 
upon  the  four  reins. 

From  this  position  the  trainer  urges  the  horse 
forward  with  the  whip,  as  before,  against  the  snaffle. 
Then,  when  the  horse  is  moving,  he  substitutes  the 
contact  of  the  snaffle  for  that  of  the  bit,  by  bending 
the  wrist  to  carry  the  thumb  forward  and  the  little 
finger  backward.  This  movement  of  the  hand  must 
be  done  very  gently  and  carefully.  When  the  con- 
tact can  be  made  with  the  trainer  on  the  left  side, 
the  same  operation  must  be  repeated  from  the 
right,  with  everything  reversed. 

This  procedure  is  advocated  by  Fillis,  who  holds 
that  the  whip,  acting  upon  the  flank,  will  help  to 

72 


THE  FIRST  WORK  ON  FOOT 

make  the  horse  understand  the  action  of  the  rider's 
legs,  at  the  later  stage  when  the  animal  is  mounted. 
In  this,  Fillis  is  essentially  right. 

Baucher's  practice  is  somewhat  different.  He 
faces  the  horse,  taking,  at  first,  the  two  snaffle  reins 
in  his  left  hand,  and  later,  bit  reins  and  snaffle  reins 
alternately.  With  the  whip,  held  in  his  right  hand, 
he  makes  light  touches  on  the  horse's  chest.  The 
horse,  thereupon,  backs.  But  as  the  touches 
continue,  the  horse,  finding  backing  of  no  avail, 
decides  to  go  forward.  It  is  thereupon  rewarded 
with  caresses,  until,  very  shortly,  merely  showing 
the  whip  near  the  chest  will  obtain  forward  move- 
ment and  contact  with  the  bits.  (Figure  3.) 


CHAPTER  XII 
THE  FLEXIONS 

THE  horse,  when  not  under  the  control  of  the  man, 
balances  himself  instinctively  by  different  positions 
of  head  and  neck.  But  the  horse  under  control  has 
these  various  positions  given  to  him  by  his  rider,  by 
way  of  the  bits.  But  the  feeling  of  the  bits  in  his 
mouth  is  disagreeable  to  the  horse.  The  result  is  a 
tendency  to  contract  and  to  keep  tense  the  muscles 
which  close  the  lower  jaw,  on  which  the  bits  rest. 
This  disagreeable  sensation  tends,  moreover,  to 
affect  the  entire  body,  and  to  produce  a  general 
condition  of  contraction,  opposition,  and  refusal. 

The  object  of  the  flexions  is,  by  means  of  certain 
graduated  exercises,  to  teach  the  horse  that  no  real 
pain  will  follow  these  uncomfortable  sensations, 
and  to  suppress  their  general  accompaniments, 
while  accustoming  the  animal  to  obey  their  special 
effects. 

The  hands  holding  the  reins  can,  by  different 
positions  and  manipulations,  produce  on  the 
animal  mechanism  a  great  variety  of  effects,  of 
which  the  three  principal  are,  directing,  raising, 
and  maintaining.  The  work  of  the  flexions  will 
introduce  the  horse  to  these  different  effects,  which 
later,  after  the  rider  is  mounted,  will  be  further 
complicated  by  the  effects  of  the  legs. 

74 


THE  FLEXIONS 

A  brief  consideration  of  the  bones,  joints,  and 
muscles  involved  in  the  flexions  will  help  in  avoid- 
ing certain  mistakes. 

The  bars,  on  which  rest  the  bits,  are  the  distal 
part  of  the  lower  jaw,  between  the  molar  teeth  and 
the  incisors.  In  conformation  they  are  of  three 
types.  In  one  sort  the  bone  is  small,  and  covered 
by  a  thin  mucous  membrane.  Such  bars  are  said 
to  be  "sharp,"  and  are  especially  sensitive  to  the 
pressure  of  the  bits.  Another  sort  has  a  large  bone, 
somewhat  flattened  where  it  meets  the  bits,  and 
covered  with  thick  mucous  membrane.  This  sort 
is  commonly  little  sensitive,  and  is  described  as 
"fleshy."  The  best  type  of  bar  is  intermediate  be- 
tween the  two. 

The  temporo-maxillary  articulation  which  con- 
nects the  lower  jaw  with  the  skull  lies  between  the 
ears  and  the  eyes,  just  behind  the  frontal  bone. 
It  allows  the  jaw,  moved  by  the  digastricus ,  mas- 
seter,  and  temporalis  muscles,  to  open  and  shut,  to 
move  laterally  for  mastication,  and  to  glide  back 
and  forth.  This  joint  plays  an  important  part  in 
equitation. 

Another  important  set  of  bones  are  the  verte- 
brae of  the  neck.  The  first  cervical  vertebra,  the 
atlas,  articulates  with  the  occipital  bone  of  the 
skull.  Next  to  it  comes  the  axis.  These  two  verte- 
brae form  the  atlo-axoid  articulation  which  permits 
the  head  to  rotate  upon  the  axis,  this  remaining 
fixed.  The  occipito-atloid  articulation,  on  the  other 

75 


v    Q 

?     I 

O     I 

^  S 

<  a 

j  O 

J  u- 

i« 


CQ 

Ji 

•x 

E 

0 

-o 

'5 

X 

•D 

-0 

+- 

•o 

"a. 
0 

.Cervical  vertebrae 

c 
E 

"o 
o 

c 
a. 

.  ScdpiJo  humeral 

Humero  radial 

S- 

(O 

O 
O 

T) 
QC 

•  Metacarpal 

— 

CO 

0^ 

o 

77 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

hand,  permits  four  motions,  extension,  flexion,  lateral 
inclination,  and  circumduction.  Its  movements  are 
given  by  the  muscles  of  the  neck,  obliquus  capitis, 
sterno-maxillaris,  rectus  capitis,  scalenus,  longus  coll, 
splenius,  and  angularis scapula.  All  these  muscles  are 
either  attached  or  related  to  the  three  other  muscles 
which  work  the  lower  jaw.  They  are,  therefore, 
most  intimately  concerned  in  the  position  which  is 
given  to  the  head  and  neck,  through  the  sensation 
of  the  bits  on  the  bars.  It  is  the  position  of  the 
head  and  neck  which  is  the  object  of  the  flexions. 
Two  other  especially  powerful  muscles  of  the 
neck  are  concerned  primarily  with  locomotion. 
The  rhomboideus  is  connected  at  the  atlas  region 
with  the  other  muscles  of  the  head  and  neck;  but 
when  this  atlas  region  is  fixed,  it  draws  the 
shoulder  forward  and  upward.  It  is,  therefore, 
related  to  the  scapulo-angularis  and  latissimus 
dorsi  of  the  chest.  The  other  large  muscle,  the 
mastoido-humeralis,  has  also  one  of  its  ends  at  the 
atlas  region,  and  the  other  at  the  shoulder  and 
chest.  When  the  atlas  region  is  fixed,  at  the  same 
time  that  the  rhomboideus  lifts  the  fore  leg,  the 
mastoido-humeralis  carries  it  forward.  But  if  the 
chest  region  is  the  fixed  point,  this  muscle  draws 
the  head  and  neck  to  one  side.  It  is  by  means  of 
the  flexions  that  we  obtain  for  these  two  muscles 
the  fixed  point  in  the  atlas  region.  When  the  horse 
accepts  contact  of  the  bits  on  the  bars,  the  rider 
controls  directly  the  muscles  of  the  head,  and 

78 


THE  FLEXIONS 

indirectly  those  of  the  neck.  Thus  by  the  continual 
communication  of  this  indirect  effect,  which  in  its 
turn,  emanates  from  the  first  direct  effect  of  the  bits 
on  the  bars,  the  rider  controls  also  the  action  of  the 
front  limbs. 

Here,  then,  is  the  theory  of  so  much  of  the  animal 
mechanism  as  is  exercised  by  the  flexions.  I  urge 
the  trainer,  at  this  point,  to  regard  as  essential 
the  character  of  the  flexion  obtained  by  his  work, 
rather  than  its  amount.  The  important  matter  is 
not  that  the  horse  shall  bend  its  neck  more  or  less 
readily,  but  that  it  shall  respond  with  head  and 
neck  to  the  tension  of  the  reins;  that  it  does  not 
cease  this  tension  of  its  own  will,  but  while  keeping 
the  contact  of  the  bits,  shall  obey  this  tension 
consistently. 

It  is  desirable  for  the  horse's  education,  not  to 
commence  this  work  of  the  flexions  unless  there  is 
to  be  time  to  complete  it.  Further  consideration  of 
the  bones,  joints,  and  muscles  involved  in  locomo- 
tion will  be  found  under  the  caption,  "Legs  and 
Their  Effects/ '  the  same  illustrations  serving  for 
fore  hand,  trunk,  and  hind  hand. 

The  masters  of  equitation  before  Baucher  had 
already  employed  a  system  of  flexions  for  suppling 
the  neck;  but  they  failed  to  recognize  the  impor- 
tance of  a  further  suppling  of  the  mouth.  Baucher, 
in  his  reasoned  equitation,  saw  the  need  of  suppling 
the  mouth  also,  and  developed  a  series  of  flexions 
for  both  the  mouth  and  the  neck. 

79 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

Fillis  objects  to  the  execution  of  Baucher's 
flexions  on  the  ground  that  he  bends  the  neck  at 
the  region  of  the  third  vertebra  and  not  at  the  atlas 
region.  The  series  of  flexions  by  Baucher  is  very 
complicated,  those  of  Fillis  are  very  strenuous;  the 
two  are  difficult  of  execution  for  a  young  trainer. 

To  remedy  these  difficulties,  I  have  created  a 
series  of  flexions  similar  as  to  object  to  those  of  the 
two  grand  masters,  but  more  easy  of  execution  and 
sufficiently  comprehensive  for  the  trainer  and  the 
horse.  The  first  condition,  sine  qua  non,  is  to  teach 
the  horse  to  sustain  the  head  and  neck  high  up,  by  its 
own  effort  and  without  the  help  of  the  trainer.  To 
obtain  this  result,  the  trainer  places  himself  facing 
the  head  of  the  horse,  holding  the  left  snaffle  rein  in 
his  right  hand  and  the  right  rein  in  his  left.  By 
raising  his  two  hands  straight  upwards,  not  back- 
ward or  forward,  the  horse  will  raise  head  and  neck. 
(Figure  4.)  When  the  head  and  neck  are  up,  the 
trainer  opens  the  fingers  of  the  two  hands  main- 
tained at  the  same  height;  but  if  the  horse  drops  its 
head  or  neck,  the  trainer  shuts  his  fingers  quickly. 
The  flexion  is  complete  only  when  the  horse  holds 
the  head  up  without  help.  (Figure  5.)  It  then 
becomes  a  question  of  obtaining  the  flexion  of  the 
mouth  without  letting  the  head  change  the  high 
position.  For  this  flexion,  the  trainer,  facing  the 
head  and  neck  from  the  left,  and  holding  the  right 
rein  of  the  bit  in  his  right  hand  and  the  left  rein  in 
his  left,  causes  a  pressure  on  the  right  bar  by 

80 


Figure  4.  FLEXION  FOR  BRINGING  UP  THE  HEAD  AND  NECK 

AND  MAKING  THE  HORSE  LIGHT 


Figure  5.  THE  HORSE  LIGHT  IN  HAND 


Figure  6.  FLEXION  OF  THE  LOWER  JAW  TO  THE  RIGHT 

BY  THE  CURB  BIT 


L "._2Ll_ 

Figure  7.  COMPLETION  OF  THE  DIRECT  FLEXION 


THE  FLEXIONS 

the  right  hand,  which,  acting  progressively,  forces 
the  horse  to  open  its  mouth.  The  head  is  slightly 
inclined  to  the  right,  but  sustained  high,  the 
slightest  derangement  of  the  head  or  neck  being 
corrected  by  the  left  rein  held  in  the  left  hand, 
which  is  carried  upward,  downward,  forward,  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left,  according  to  the  effect 
necessary  to  correct  the  false  position  taken  by  the 
head  or  neck  in  resisting  or  preventing  the  proper 
position  and  flexion.  (Figure  6.) 

When  the  depression  of  the  lower  jaw  is  obtained, 
the  head  being  lightly  inclined  to  the  right,  the 
trainer,  by  carrying  his  left  hand  progressively 
backward,  places  the  head  straight,  always  continu- 
ing the  flexion  of  the  mouth.  When  the  head  and 
neck  are  inclined  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  the 
flexion  is  called  the  right  or  left  lateral  flexion.  The 
flexion  is  called  direct  when  the  head  and  neck 
are  straight.  The  two  lateral  flexions  are  only  the 
means  for  obtaining  the  direct  flexion,  which  is 
only  complete  when  the  horse  depresses  its  lower 
jaw.  (Figure  7.)  The  effect  of  the  bits  upon  the 
mouth  and  neck  produces  a  cause  and  effect.  The 
mouth  refuses  because  the  neck  resists,  the  neck 
refuses  because  the  mouth  resists.  This  difficulty  is 
found  in  the  different  conformations,  and  to  obvi- 
ate it,  the  alternate  flexions  of  mouth  and  neck  are 
the  proper  work. 

For  the  flexions  of  the  neck,  the  trainer  places 
himself  on  the  horse's  left  side  near  the  head,  takes 

81 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  right  rein  of  the  bit  with  his  right  hand  and  the 
left  rein  of  the  snaffle  with  his  left  hand.  The  flex- 
ion of  the  mouth  is  obtained  by  the  right  rein  and 
the  flexion  of  the  neck  by  the  left  hand  carried  to 
the  right  over  the  nostrils  of  the  horse.  (Figure  8.) 
The  lateral  flexion  of  the  neck  is  complete  when 
the  head  is  turned  facing  to  the  right.  After  the 
lateral  flexion  of  the  neck,  the  head  is  to  return  to 
the  direct  flexion,  by  the  rein  or  reins  of  the  snaffle. 
If  the  horse  has  a  thick,  short,  and  fleshy  neck,  it  is 
proper  to  enforce  more  bending  from  the  neck.  For 
that  purpose  the  trainer  places  himself  on  the  right 
side  of  the  horse  for  the  lateral  flexion  to  the  left, 
holds  the  right  rein  of  the  snaffle  in  the  right  hand 
and  the  left  rein  in  the  left  hand.  The  left  rein, 
bearing  upon  the  neck,  is  kept  at  the  same  tension 
by  the  left  hand,  assuming  that  the  right  hand 
allows  the  head  to  flex  to  the  left  and  follows  the 
head  in  its  flexion  backward,  so  that,  by  raising 
the  right  hand,  the  head  is  maintained  perpendicu- 
lar and  flexed  at  the  atlas.  (Figure  9.) 

This  position  of  the  head  flexed  perpendicularly 
has  to  be  obtained  by  moderate  progress,  passing 
from  the  position  in  Figure  9  to  that  shown  in  Fig- 
ure 10,  and  finally  to  that  obtained  by  the  bit  alone 
in  Figure  n. 

After  arriving  at  this  stage,  the  trainer  continues 
the  direct  flexion  of  mouth  and  neck.  The  two  reins 
of  the  bit  are  held  in  the  left  hand,  and  the  two 
reins  of  the  snaffle  in  the  right,  the  forefingers 

82 


Figure  8.  FLEXION  OF  NECK  AND  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE 

CURB  BIT 


Figure  9.  FLEXION  OF  NECK  AND  MOUTH  BY  THE 

SNAFFLE  REINS 


Figure  10.  FLEXION  OF  THE  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE  CURB  BIT 

AND  OF  THE  NECK  BY  THE  SNAFFLE  REINS 


Figure  1 1.  FLEXION  OF  THE  NECK  BY  THE  SNAFFLE  AND  OF 

THE  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE  CURB  BIT 


THE  FLEXIONS 

between  each  pair  of  reins.  The  left  hand  operates 
a  progressive  but  continual  tension  upon  the  bit, 
while  the  right  hand  corrects  with  the  snaffle  the 
false  position  possible  at  the  beginning  and  thus 
secures  the  flexion  at  the  atlas  only.  (Figure  12.) 
The  flexion  is  completed  when  the  mouth  is  open. 

Finally,  to  obtain  proof  of  the  quality  of  my  work 
of  flexions,  the  horse  straight,  the  head  up  and  light, 
and  yet  in  contact  with  my  hands,  I  place  myself 
facing  the  horse,  the  left  reins  of  snaffle  and  bit  in 
my  right  hand,  the  right  reins  in  my  left  hand,  and 
by  a  progressive  and  moderate  action  of  my  two 
hands,  I  obtain  the  direct  flexion  of  mouth  and 
neck,  the  horse  keeping  the  same  position  of  body. 
(Figure  13.)  At  the  completion  of  the  flexion,  the 
horse  is  upon  the  hand,  with  the  lower  jaw  com- 
pletely depressed.  (Figure  14.)  The  flexions  have 
to  be  executed  equally  to  the  right  and  to  the 
left  by  the  same  principles,  but  by  the  opposite 
means. 

In  explaining  above  the  principles  of  the  flexions, 
I  have  changed  sides  several  times  in  order  to  make 
it  possible  for  the  photographer  to  reproduce  on 
the  plate  the  position  of  hands,  reins,  head,  and 
neck,  so  they  will  be  more  apparent  to  the  reader. 

The  next  step  is  to  secure  lightness.  The  trainer 
stands  facing  his  horse,  with  the  right  snaffle  rein 
in  his  left  hand,  and  the  left  rein  in  his  right.  By 
repeated  vibrations  he  raises  progressively  the  head 
and  neck,  until,  after  a  few  lessons,  the  horse  re- 

83 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

mains  straight  and  still,  head  and  neck  elevated, 
without  the  help  of  snaffle  or  bit. 

As  soon  as  this  position  of  lightness  is  obtained, 
comes  the  flexions  of  the  jaw.  The  trainer,  holding 
as  before  the  two  snaffle  reins,  makes  very  light 
oppositions,  but  without  allowing  the  head  or  neck 
to  drop.  Now  begins  the  "  fingering."  By  this  I 
mean  the  repeated,  rhythmic  opening  and  shut- 
ting of  the  mouth :  mouth  shut,  bit  contact,  fingers 
closed  on  the  reins;  then  mouth  open  and  fingers 
unclosed,  the  hand  always  at  the  same  height. 

When  the  lower  jaw  is  depressed  squarely  at  the 
effect  of  the  snaffle,  the  trainer  repeats  the  same 
exercise,  holding  in  each  hand  a  rein  of  the  snaffle 
and  one  of  the  bit.  The  snaffle  maintains  the 
position  of  head  and  neck,  while  the  bit  controls 
the  depression  of  the  jaw.  But  the  effect  of  the  two, 
especially  of  the  snaffle,  is  peculiarly  upon  the  atlo- 
axoid  articulation. 

But  while  this  flexion  is  the  most  important  of  all, 
it  is  nevertheless  so  entirely  at  the  atlo-axoid  joint 
that  the  rhomboideus  and  mastoido-humeralis  mus- 
cles are  so  completely  contracted  that  they  do  not, 
in  this  condition,  gain  the  development  which  is 
desirable  and  which  is  so  noticeable  in  the  neck  of 
"Why-Not." 

For  all  this  work,  especially,  I  recommend 
patience,  perseverance,  and  slow  advance.  What 
counts  for  the  future  is  the  quality  of  the  perform- 
ance. The  quantity  is  a  small  and  temporary  matter. 


Figure  12.  DIRECT  FLEXION  OF  THE  LOWER  JAW  BY  THE 

CURB  BIT  AND  OF  THE  NECK  BY  THE  SNAFFLE  REINS 


Figure  13.  DIRECT  FLEXION  OF  NECK  AND  LOWER  JAW 

WITH  LIGHTNESS  OF  THE  FRONT  HAND 


Figure  14.  DIRECT  FLEXION  OF  MOUTH  AND  NECK  BY  THE 

SNAFFLE  ONLY 


THE  FLEXIONS 

The  series  given  above  is  sufficient  to  teach  the 
rider  the  manipulation  of  the  reins,  and  to  train 
the  horse  to  yield  by  mouth  and  neck  to  the  effects 
of  the  bits.  Many  other  flexions  have  been  worked 
out  by  methodists  to  meet  special  difficulties  of 
conformation  and  temper.  But  such  a  variety  of 
cases  is  outside  the  limits  of  this  book.  Those  which 
have  been  given,  done  first  on  foot  and  then 
mounted,  are  quite  sufficient  for  suppling  neck  and 
mouth. 


CHAPTER  XIII 
BACKING  AND  THE  PIROUETTES 

THE  pirouettes  are  revolutions  of  one  end  of  the 
horse's  body  about  the  other.  In  the  direct  pirou- 
ette, the  hind  feet  remain  in  place,  while  the  fore 
feet  circle  around  them,  either  to  the  right  or  to  the 
left.  In  the  reversed  pirouette,  called  rotation  by 
the  new  school,  the  shoulders  are  the  fixed  point 
and  the  haunches  turn  around  them. 

The  reversed  pirouette  is  the  first  movement 
of  the  reasoned  equitation.  It  is  also  the  most 
important,  since  on  its  correct  and  symmetrical 
execution  the  entire  education  depends.  It  has, 
moreover,  three  stages:  the  reversed  pirouette  in 
lateral,  which  belongs  to  the  lateral  equitation; 
the  direct  rotation,  which  belongs  to  the  reasoned 
equitation;  and  that  in  diagonal,  which  belongs  to 
the  scientific  equitation.  The  three  terms,  lateral, 
direct,  and  diagonal,  refer  to  the  lateral,  direct,  and 
diagonal  effects  by  which  the  movement  is  ob- 
tained. 

The  first  step  in  the  horse's  education  is,  of  course, 
the  position  of  "in  hand";  which  has  already  been 
considered  in  the  account  of  the  flexions,  and  will 
be  discussed  still  further  in  Chapter  XXII.  Up  to 
this  point  the  horse  has  been  trained  to  take  the 
position  given  by  the  rider's  hand  while  standing 

86 


BACKING  AND  THE  PIROUETTES 

still.  It  does  not  yet  understand  how  to  move 
its  weight  on  its  feet,  and  at  the  same  time,  to  re- 
main in  hand.  The  grand  masters  have,  therefore, 
spoken  of  the  direct  and  reversed  pirouettes  as  the 
mobilization,  respectively,  of  the  front  and  hind 
hands. 

'  THE  REVERSED  PIROUETTE 

IF  the  horse  has  been  given  the  work  with  the 
trainer  on  foot,  already  described,  the  reversed 
pirouette  should  also  be  taught  on  foot.  If  the 
training  is  done  in  a  manege,  the  animal  should  be 
in  the  center  of  the  ring.  I  shall  discuss  first  the 
reversed  pirouette  in  lateral  from  right  to  left. 

The  trainer  stands  on  the  horse's  right,  between 
head  and  shoulder.  The  right  hand  holds  three 
reins,  two  from  the  bit,  with  the  little  finger 
between  them,  and  the  right  snaffle  rein,  which 
passes  from  the  thumb  to  the  little  finger.  But  the 
snaffle  rein  is  held  shorter  than  the  rest.  The  whip 
is  held  in  the  left  hand,  with  the  lash  near  the 
horse's  right  flank. 

By  means  of  the  reins  from  the  bit,  the  trainer 
holds  the  horse  in  hand,  and  at  the  same  time,  with 
the  snaffle  rein,  he  obtains  a  partial  lateral  flexion 
to  the  right.  He  calms  the  animal  by  his  voice,  and 
still  keeping  the  "in  hand/*  he  keeps  touching  the 
right  flank  lightly  with  the  whip. 

Commonly,  at  this,  the  horse  will  either  back  or 
raise  the  right  hind  leg.  If  the  horse  backs,  the 

87 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

trainer  will  correct  the  fault  by  carrying  forward 
the  reins.  But  if  the  horse  merely  lifts  the  right 
hind  leg,  showing  neither  fear  nor  impatience,  then 
the  trainer  is  satisfied  and  rewards  the  action  with 
caresses.  After  a  brief  relaxation,  the  action  is  re- 
peated from  the  beginning. 

Sooner  or  later,  however,  the  animal,  instead  of 
merely  lifting  the  right  foot,  will,  in  addition,  carry 
it  to  the  left,  under  the  body,  and  set  it  down  more 
or  less  in  front  of  the  left  foot.  In  that  position, 
before  the  right  hind  foot  can  be  lifted  again,  the 
left  hind  foot  must  also  gain  ground  leftward. 
(Figure  15.) 

This  is  the  first  step  of  the  reversed  pirouette, 
the  beginning  of  the  mobilization  of  the  hind  hand. 
In  a  short  while,  the  horse  comes  to  understand  that 
when  its  right  flank  is  touched  with  the  whip,  it  is 
to  lift  the  right  foot  and  step  toward  the  left.  After 
the  first  step,  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  are 
readily  obtained  in  the  same  way.  Four  such  steps, 
done  in  proper  cadence,  are  enough.  More  will 
disturb  the  support  of  the  front  legs,  and  will 
distress  the  horse,  since  they  are  against  its  natural 
conformation. 

Meanwhile,  of  course,  the  horse  will  have  lost 
the  "in  hand"  position.  The  only  remedy  is 
patience,  perseverance,  and  quality  of  work.  You, 
Master,  are  the  instructor.  You  are  teaching  to 
your  pupil  the  alphabet  of  locomotion.  On  this 
foundation,  your  pupil  may,  in  time,  become  a  most 

88 


Figure  15.  ROTATION  OF  THE  CROUP  WITH  DIRECT  FLEXION 

OF  NECK  AND  JAW 


Figure  16.  ROTATION  OF  THE  CROUP  WITH  DIAGONAL 

FLEXION  OF  NECK  AND  JAW 


BACKING  AND  THE  PIROUETTES 

uncommon  animal.  Do  not  forget  that  your  whip 
has  still  to  be  replaced  by  legs  and  spurs.  So  do  not 
hurry.  Take  ample  time,  remembering  that  the 
more  time  you  take  at  this  stage,  while  still  main- 
taining the  quality  of  your  work,  the  faster  progress 
you  will  make  in  the  end. 

When  the  lateral  rotation  is  thoroughly  mastered 
to  the  left,  everything  is  reversed  and  the  move- 
ment made  toward  the  right. 

In  the  reversed  pirouette,  as  also  in  the  passage, 
the  trainer  must  not,  under  any  condition,  allow 
the  horse  to  begin  the  movement  by  stepping  off 
with  the  hind  leg  on  the  side  toward  which  the 
motion  is  to  be  made.  If,  for  example,  the  step  is 
to  be  toward  the  left,  the  right  hind  foot  must  first 
cross  over  in  front  of  the  left.  After  that,  the  left 
foot  steps  still  farther  to  the  left.  But  the  left  foot 
must  never  move  first.  In  other  words,  the  legs 
always  cross,  never  straddle. 

I  cannot  insist  too  strongly  on  this  point.  Bau- 
cher  followed  and  taught  the  opposite  method,  and 
it  gave  rise  to  much  confusion  in  his  principles. 
Moreover,  it  occasioned  terrible  fights  against 
horses  trained  by  him,  which  became  confused  by 
the  effects  of  the  legs. 

When  the  reversed  pirouette  is  correctly  executed 
in  lateral,  it  can  next  be  readily  obtained  with  the 
direct  flexion  of  "in  hand."  For  this,  the  pull  on 
one  snafBe  rein  is  suppressed,  and  the  horse's  head 
and  neck  are  held  straight,  while  the  four  steps  of 

89 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  movement  are  asked  by  means  of  the  whip. 
(Figure  16.) 

The  reversed  pirouette  in  diagonal  belongs  to 
the  scientific  equitation,  and  will  be  taken  up  with 
that  subject. 

THE  DIRECT  PIROUETTE 

THE  direct  pirouette,  usually  termed  simply  the 
pirouette,  is  the  first  movement  for  mobilizing 
the  front  hand.  Assuming  for  convenience  of 
description  that  the  movement  is  toward  the  left, 
the  action  is  as  follows: 

The  left  hind  leg  becomes  the  chief  support  of 
the  hind  hand,  while  the  right  hind  foot,  as  in  the 
reversed  pirouette,  passes  in  front  of  it  to  the  left. 
Then,  in  its  turn,  the  left  rear  foot,  without  in  the 
least  altering  its  place  on  the  ground,  turns  on 
the  same  spot  to  face  in  the  new  direction.  These 
two  alternate,  the  right  foot  really  stepping  round 
the  left. 

Meanwhile,  the  right  fore  foot  passes  in  front  of 
the  left,  thus  crossing  the  fore  legs.  As  soon  as  this 
has  taken  the  weight,  the  left  fore  foot  moves  off 
to  the  left,  and  restores  the  first  relation.  In  this 
manner  the  fore  hand  walks  round  the  left  hind  foot. 
For  movement  in  the  other  direction,  everything  is, 
of  course,  reversed. 

To  obtain  this  pirouette  to  the  left,  the  trainer 
stands  on  the  horse's  right  side,  as  for  the  reversed 
pirouette,  facing  to  the  rear.  In  his  right  hand  he 

90 


BACKING  AND  THE  PIROUETTES 

holds  the  two  snaffle  reins  close  behind  the  chin. 
The  whip  is  in  his  left  hand,  lash  near  the  horse's 
flank. 

The  horse  being  held  straight  and  "in  hand," 
the  trainer,  with  his  right  hand,  pushes  the  ani- 
mal's head  straight  to  the  left,  while,  at  the  same 
time,  by  means  of  the  whip,  he  checks  the  natural 
movement  of  the  haunches  toward  the  right.  Thus, 
by  pushing  the  fore  hand  round  in  one  direction, 
and  at  the  same  time  preventing  the  hind  hand 
from  circling  after  it,  the  trainer  soon  obtains  the 
first  step  of  the  pirouette.  Then  follows  the  usual 
pause  and  caressing ;  and  shortly,  the  animal  learns 
to  complete  the  action.  After  this,  the  direction  is 
reversed. 

BACKING 

THE  pirouette  has  now  taught  the  horse  to  mobil- 
ize the  fore  hand.  The  reversed  pirouette  or  revo- 
lution has  taken  care  of  the  hind  hand.  There  still 
remains  the  mobilization  of  the  entire  length  of 
the  spine,  from  the  atlas  region  to  the  last  of  the 
sacral  vertebrae.  While  this  remains  straight  and 
rigid,  correct  locomotion  is  not  possible. 

Flexion  of  the  spine  hinges  on  the  " coupling" 
between  the  last  dorsal  vertebra  and  the  first  sacral, 
which  has  to  bend  with  each  step  forward,  side- 
wise,  or  backward.  Unfortunately,  this  articula- 
tion tends  to  become  ankylosed  with  advancing  age, 
and  even  in  a  young  animal  the  unnatural  load  of 

91 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  rider  tends  to  stiffen  the  joint.  Both  causes 
interfere  with  free  movement,  and  occasion  kicking, 
rearing,  and  buck- jumping. 

It  is,  therefore,  essential,  during  the  work  on 
foot,  to  complete  the  mobilization  of  the  entire 
body  by  exercise  in  backing  to  supple  the  coupling. 

Some  authors  advise,  for  this  purpose,  having 
the  trainer  stand  in  front  of  the  horse,  facing  it, 
and  with  one  rein  in  each  hand,  either  of  bit  or 
snaffle,  pushing  the  animal  backward  by  "sawing" 
back  and  forth  on  the  bridle.  Fillis  advocates 
having  the  man,  in  addition,  step  on  the  horse's 
feet,  first  on  one,  then  on  the  other,  as  the  sawing 
goes  on. 

But  how,  I  ask,  is  the  horse  to  understand  that 
it  is  to  flex  its  spinal  column,  just  because  some- 
body saws  its  mouth  or  walks  on  its  feet?  I  myself 
proceed  in  quite  a  different  manner.  I  put  my  horse 
straight,  right  side  near  a  wall,  "at  left  hand,"  as  it 
is  called.  I  stand  at  the  shoulder,  whip  in  my  right 
hand,  snaffle  reins  in  my  left.  With  the  whip,  I 
touch  the  back  close  behind  the  saddle,  repeating 
several  times,  very  gently,  never  at  all  violently  or 
severely.  Meanwhile,  I  pull  lightly  on  the  snaffle 
reins.  Commonly,  within  two  minutes,  the  horse 
lifts  one  hind  foot.  If  at  this  moment  I  pull 
on  the  reins,  I  hinder  with  my  left  hand  the  move- 
ment forward  of  this  leg,  which  will  at  once  be  car- 
ried backward.  The  diagonal  front  leg  will  at  once 
follow,  and  I  have  obtained  the  first  step.  Caress- 

92 


BACKING  AND  THE  PIROUETTES 

ings  on  the  croup  with  the  right  hand,  accompanied 
by  the  voice,  soon  make  the  horse  comprehend  what 
is  desired.  A  single  one-hour  lesson  is  sufficient  to 
teach  the  creature  to  go  backwards,  the  coupling 
supple,  at  the  touch  of  the  whip  behind  the  saddle 
and  the  gentle  tension  on  the  reins.  The  movement 
should  then  be  repeated  from  the  right  side,  reins 
in  the  right  hand,  whip  in  the  left. 

This  movement  backward,  alternated  with  the 
other  movements,  forward,  pirouette,  and  reversed 
pirouette,  will  very  soon  bring  about  a  state  of 
complete  obedience  on  the  part  of  the  horse.  The 
man,  on  his  side,  begins  to  see  the  effects  of  the 
various  means  which  he  is  employing  and  to  under- 
stand the  operation  of  the  animal  mechanism. 

During  the  work  on  foot,  if  the  horse  is  uneasy 
from  need  of  exercise,  put  him  at  the  cavesson  and 
longe,  preferably  without  bridle. 

A  last  word :  Patience  and  gentleness ;  do  not  for- 
get that  you  teach,  you  educate. 


CHAPTER  XIV 
THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS 

BEFORE  proceeding  to  the  further  training  of  the 
horse  with  the  rider  mounted,  it  is  necessary  to 
consider  more  fully  than  under  the  instinctive 
equitation,  the  position  of  the  rider's  hands  and 
the  manipulation  of  the  reins. 

No  fixed  position  of  the  hands  is  correct  for  all 
occasions.  What  it  should  be  in  each  special  case 
depends  on  the  degree  of  education  of  the  horse, 
on  its  action,  sensitiveness,  temper,  conduct.  It 
varies  with  the  surroundings,  the  gait  at  which  the 
animal  is  traveling,  the  character  of  the  road,  the 
state  of  submission  or  disobedience.  It  is  modified 
also  by  the  ability  of  the  rider.  It  alters  from  mo- 
ment to  moment  with  the  change  of  circumstances. 
All  that  one  can  do,  therefore,  is  to  give  the  gen- 
eral principles  involved,  and  the  standard  position 
from  which  variants  are  taken  as  conditions  change. 

Let  us,  then,  suppose  a  horse,  well  conformed, 
properly  trained,  and  quiet,  ridden  at  the  prome- 
nade trot,  by  a  good  ordinary  rider  with  a  good 
seat,  in  street,  road,  bridle  path,  or  manege,  but  with- 
out all  the  paraphernalia  and  impedimenta  gener- 
ally met  with  in  such  conditions.  In  such  a  case,  the 
hand  will  be  carried  six  inches  above  the  pommel, 
the  little  finger  down  and  slightly  nearer  the  body 

94 


THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS 

than  the  thumb.  The  thumb  is  up  and  closed  upon 
the  four  reins,  which  fall  forward  of  the  hand  and 
to  the  left,  when,  as  is  usual,  the  reins  are  in  the  left 
hand.  The  fingers  touch  the  palm  at  the  nails, 
pressing  with  just  enough  force  to  prevent  slipping. 
The  hand  is  exactly  opposite  the  middle  of  the 
body,  and  exactly  in  line  with  the  horse's  neck. 
The  elbow  touches  the  side  without  stiffness  or 
pressure. 

When,  for  any  reason,  the  hand  is  moved  from 
this  position,  one  inch  upward,  downward,  or  side- 
wise,  is  in  general  sufficient  for  the  full  effect  of 
the  change.  If  for  any  reason,  some  other  position 
has  to  be  taken  for  the  sake  of  conduct  or  control, 
what  this  new  position  shall  be  is  decided  by 
practice  and  experience  according  to  the  particular 
circumstance.  If,  for  example,  the  horse  rears, 
the  hand  should  be  dropped  as  low  as  possible,  the 
rider  leaning  forward.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
horse  kicks,  then  the  hand  is  lifted  as  high  as 
possible,  while  the  rider  leans  back  and  lifts  the 
animal's  head. 

For  the  rider  on  a  side-saddle,  the  position  is 
the  same,  except  that  the  hand  is  two  or  three 
inches  above  the  right  thigh. 

During  the  process  of  training  a  horse,  the  posi- 
tion of  the  hand  varies  so  greatly  that  no  rules  can 
be  given.  The  master  will,  therefore,  vary  his 
position  to  meet  special  problems  of  mouth  or  neck 
or  of  the  two  together,  and  all  the  various  contrac- 

95 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

tions  and  defenses  of  the  horse,  as  his  experience 
suggests. 

In  ordinary  civilian  equitation,  in  the  case  of 
men  and  occasionally  even  in  the  case  of  amazons, 
there  is  really  no  particular  reason  why  the  reins 
should  be  held  with  the  left  hand  rather  than  with 
the  right.  But  the  army  man,  the  hunter,  the  polo 
player,  and  the  woman  who  uses  her  whip  to 
produce  the  effects  of  a  right  leg,  are  obliged, 
naturally,  to  keep  the  right  hand  free  for  saber, 
pistol,  mallet,  or  whip,  and  to  use  the  left  hand 
only  for  the  reins. 

For  beginners,  for  all  riders  mounted  on  animals 
not  properly  bitted,  and  oftentimes  with  hunters 
and  park  hacks,  it  is  an  advantage  to  hold  the  reins 
in  both  hands.  Both  in  the  hunting  field  and  on  the 
promenade,  it  is  sometimes  difficult  to  keep  the 
horse  straight  at  an  obstacle  or  straight  on  the  road. 
Evidently,  in  these  cases,  the  rider  has  better  con- 
trol, and  easier,  if  he  does  not  have  the  complication 
of  four  reins  in  one  hand. 

When  both  hands  hold  the  reins,  each  taking 
those  on  its  own  side,  the  snaffle  rein  passes  under 
the  little  finger,  and  that  from  the  bit  lies  between 
the  little  finger  and  the  third  finger.  Both  then  pass 
upward  and  forward,  above  the  forefinger,  held 
against  it  by  the  thumb.  When  both  reins  of  the  bit 
are  held  in  the  same  hand,  together  with  one  snafHe 
rein,  the  other  snaffle  rein  being  held  alone  in  the 
other  hand,  the  tv/o  hands  should  be  kept  at 


THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS 

exactly  the  same  height,  and  never  more  than  three 
inches  apart.  To  make  an  effect  to  either  side,  the 
hand  is  carried  three  inches  horizontally,  without 
any  tilting  of  the  hand  upward  or  downward. 

The  reins  of  the  bridle,  whether  held  in  one  hand 
or  both,  are  pressed  by  the  fingers  only  just  hard 
enough  to  prevent  slipping.  If  the  pressure  is  too 
strong,  the  tension  will  be  communicated  to  the 
arms,  and  from  them  to  the  whole  upper  portion  of 
the  body.  At  first  sight,  nothing  seems  easier.  But 
in  practice,  the  reins  will  slip,  and  unequally.  The 
result  is  that,  when  the  rider  has  occasion  to  draw 
on  the  reins,  the  one  which  at  the  moment  happens 
to  be  shortest,  has  the  most  effect. 

It  becomes  necessary,  therefore,  from  time  to 
time,  to  readjust  the  reins  in  the  hand. 

Suppose  that  all  four  reins  are  held  in  the  left 
hand.  To  adjust,  let  us  say,  the  curb  reins,  which 
are  those  without  the  buckle,  the  rider,  with  his 
right  hand  behind  the  left,  takes  the  free  ends  with 
his  thumb  and  first  finger,  and  carries  the  right 
hand  upward,  while  at  the  same  instant  he  relaxes 
the  grip  of  the  left  hand  on  these  two.  Meanwhile 
the  left  hand  is  kept  precisely  in  line  with  the 
horse's  neck.  As  soon  as  the  rider  feels  with  the 
right  hand  the  equal  contact  against  the  mouth,  he 
closes  once  more  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  and  lets 
go  with  the  right.  For  the  snafHe  reins,  those  with 
the  buckle,  the  process  is  exactly  the  same. 

With  the  reins  held  in  both  hands,  to  adjust 

97 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  left  reins  the  rider  brings  the  right  hand  up  to 
the  left,  takes  with  the  thumb  and  first  finger  as 
before  the  reins  which  have  slipped  too  long, 
relaxes  the  grip  of  the  left  hand,  and  draws  the 
reins  upward  to  the  proper  length.  If  the  reins  are 
too  short,  they  are  taken  in  the  same  way,  but  in 
front  of  the  left  hand,  and  drawn  forward.  For 
the  right  rein,  the  process  is  exactly  reversed. 

It  is  difficult,  usually,  to  teach  a  beginner 
properly  to  close  his  fingers  on  the  reins;  particu- 
larly women,  who  handle  the  leather  as  if  it  were 
fine  lace,  and  never  really  grip  it  firmly  nor  have 
the  correct  length.  Yet  grip  and  length  are  even 
more  important  for  women  than  for  men,  since 
the  latter  ha,ve  the  better  control  by  way  of  legs 
and  saddle.  With  both  men  and  women,  the  fault 
commonly  begins  during  the  early  lessons  in  the 
ring.  If  not  corrected  then,  it  persists  as  a  bad  and 
dangerous  habit,  so  that  one  often  sees  even  good 
riders  who  have  always  to  be  adjusting  their  reins. 

Sometimes,  for  control  or  for  safety,  it  becomes 
necessary  to  shorten  promptly  some  or  all  of  the 
reins.  Beginners  carelessly  let  them  slip  through 
the  fingers.  Many  older  riders  abandon  control  of 
their  horses  or  think  it  proof  of  a  good  hand  to  have 
the  reins  too  long.  The  result  is  that  in  sudden 
emergency  —  as,  for  example,  when  the  animal  by 
a  sudden  jump  disturbs  the  seat  —  the  rider  can  do 
nothing  until  he  has  taken  time  to  shorten  his  reins. 
Then  it  may  be  too  late.  While,  therefore,  even 

98 


THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS 

the  beginner  ought  to  learn  to  keep  his  reins  always 
at  the  correct  length,  he  should  be  practiced  also  in 
shortening  them  instantly. 

The  method  is  much  the  same  as  for  adjustment. 
If  the  rider  is  holding  all  four  reins  in  the  left  hand, 
he  simply  seizes  them  all  with  all  the  fingers  of  the 
right  hand,  or  certain  ones  with  thumb  and  fore- 
finger, and  draws  them  upward  to  the  needed 
length. 

I  often  tell  my  pupils  that  the  beginner  has 
always  two  enemies  of  his  safety  —  his  eyes  and  his 
fingers.  The  eyes  never  look  far  enough  ahead  to 
see  where  the  horse  is  going;  therefore  they  tilt 
the  head  forward  and  displace  the  body.  The  fin- 
gers let  slip  the  reins;  therefore  are  these  not  ready 
when  needed  to  control  the  horse. 

I  have  already  noted  that  the  determining  factor 
in  handling  the  reins  is  the  need  of  holding  the  horse 
straight,  the  backbone  acting,  so  to  say,  as  a  sort  of 
keel;  and  that,  on  the  whole,  it  is  easier  to  accom- 
plish this  end  when  both  hands  are  employed. 
Nevertheless,  there  are  conditions  which  make  it 
at  least  convenient  for  the  time  being  to  change 
from  two  hands  to  one  or  from  one  to  two.  If,  for 
example,  the  rider  regularly  uses  the  left  hand  for 
all  four  reins,  in  order  to  have  the  right  hand  free 
for  whip  or  mallet,  he  may  often  need  to  use  both 
hands  to  control  a  case  of  excitement  or  refusal. 

To  separate  the  reins,  changing  from  the  left 
hand  to  both  hands,  the  little  finger  of  the  right 

99 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

goes  over  the  right  snaffle  rein,  with  one  finger,  or 
better  two  fingers,  between  this  and  the  right  rein  of 
the  bit.  The  bit  rein  is  slightly  the  looser  of  the  two. 

It  is  impossible  to  give  the  precise  detail  of  this 
movement.  It  has  to  vary  somewhat  with  the  way 
the  reins  are  carried  in  the  left  hand.  For  much 
the  same  reason,  it  is  not  possible  to  dictate  the 
relative  length  of  the  two  reins,  since  this  is  af- 
fected by  skill  of  the  rider,  the  speed  of  the  horse, 
and  its  education,  temper,  and  surroundings.  With 
certain  horses,  in  certain  conditions,  at  various 
speeds  and  gaits,  certain  ways  of  holding  the  reins 
are  better  than  others.  I  have  experimented  widely, 
and  I  am  convinced  that  virtually  all  the  methods 
of  the  various  masters  are  good  in  an  "  intelligent " 
hand.  It  is  not  any  fixed  position  of  the  reins  which 
gives  control  over  the  forehead  of  the  mount,  but 
the  effects  of  hand  and  fingers  on  the  bits.  An  able 
esquire  will  produce  the  same  total  effect  with  the 
snaffle  or  with  the  bit,  with  left  hand  or  right  hand 
or  both.  It  is  all  a  matter  of  equestrian  tact. 

One  cannot,  then,  dictate  the  precise  method  of 
separating  the  reins  until  he  knows  how  they  are 
held  all  together.  But  whatever  the  method,  the 
pupil  should  be  frequently  practiced  in  changing 
from  one  hand  to  both  and  back  again.  These 
manipulations  are  to  be  executed,  first  standing, 
and  later  at  all  three  gaits,  without  changing  the 
regularity  of  gaits  and  speed.  Then  is  the  beginner 
prepared  for  emergencies. 

100 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

There  are  three  principal  methods  of  crossing 
the  four  reins  in  one  hand. 

According  to  the  first  of  these,  the  rider,  as  soon 
as  mounted,  takes  the  extremities  of  the  snaffle 
reins  in  his  right  hand  and  places  them  upon  the 
middle  of  the  horse's  neck.  He  next  takes  in  his 
right  hand  the  two  reins  of  the  bit,  also  by  their 
ends,  and,  lifting  his  hand,  gives  these  a  moderate 
tension.  He  now  places  his  left  hand  over  these  two 
reins,  his  little  finger  between  them,  and  grips  them 
with  all  four  fingers.  The  free  ends  pass  out 
between  the  forefinger  and  the  thumb,  which  closes 
on  them,  and  fall  to  the  left  side  of  the  hand. 
Finally,  the  rider  picks  up  the  snaffle  reins  with  his 
right  hand  and  raises  them  in  front  of  the  left.  His 
left  hand  thereupon  looses  its  grip  with  the  three 
upper  fingers,  but,  still  holding  with  the  fourth, 
passes  the  middle  finger  between  the  two  snaffle 
reins,  and  shuts  the  thumb  against  the  free  ends  of 
both  pairs. 

For  the  second  method,  the  rider,  as  before,  lays 
the  snaffle  reins  on  the  horse's  neck,  lifts  the  bit 
reins  with  his  right  hand,  and  grasps  them  with  his 
left.  In  this  case,  however,  both  the  third  and  the 
fourth  finger  separate  the  two  bit  reins.  He  next 
takes  the  two  snaffle  reins  in  his  right  hand,  and 
passes  them  between  the  first  finger  and  the  thumb 
of  his  left  hand,  bringing  them  out  below  the  little 
finger.  The  thumb,  as  before,  shuts  upon  all  four 
reins. 

102 


THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS 

According  to  the  third  method,  the  left  rein  of 
either  the  bit  or  the  snaffle  is  placed  below  the  little 
finger,  and  the  left  rein  of  either  the  snaffle  or  the 
bit  passes  between  the  fourth  finger  and  the  third. 
The  right  rein  of  the  snaffle  or  of  the  bit  is  between 
the  third  finger  and  the  second,  and  the  right  rein 
of  bit  or  snaffle  is  between  the  second  finger  and  the 
first.  Thus  a  finger  separates  each  two  adjacent 
reins. 

One  last  manipulation  of  the  reins  remains  to  be 
considered  —  the  ancient  practice  of  jerking  the  bit. 

The  old  school  of  equitation  recognized  this 
action  as  a  means  of  controlling  a  disobedient, 
restive,  or  vicious  animal.  At  that  epoch  only 
stallions  were  ridden;  and  the  character  of  the 
riders  had  to  match  their  mounts.  Pluvinel,  de  la 
Broue,  and  Grisons  recommend  that,  in  case  a  horse 
refuses  to  turn  to  the  right  or  left,  to  change  from 
gallop  to  trot,  or  from  trot  to  walk,  or  to  stop,  the 
rider  should  "give  him  several  sharp  jerks  against 
the  mouth;  and  in  the  mean  time  call  him  with  a 
strong  voice, '  Pig ! ' '  Cow !  * '  Scoundrel ! '  '  Coward ! ' 
'Felon!'"  a  complete  vocabulary  of  epithets  not 
understood  by  three  quarters  of  humankind. 

Of  course  these  excellent  masters  did  really 
produce  the  effects  they  desired;  but  it  was  by  the 
sound  of  the  voice,  not  by  the  epithets.  Moreover, 
the  jerk  on  the  bit  cannot  have  any  other  result 
than  to  destroy  the  animal's  understanding  of  the 
effects  of  the  bit  by  making  him  fear  the  pain. 

103 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

Jerking  the  bit  is,  then,  a  proof  of  lack  of  both 
kindness  and  competence  on  the  rider's  part.  For 
after  several  repetitions,  the  horse,  remembering 
the  pain,  expects  still  another  jerk  whenever  the 
rider  does  anything  with  the  reins;  and  in  order  to 
protect  itself,  it  raises  the  head  very  high.  In  this 
position,  the  jerk  cannot  be  operated.  If  the  rider 
tries  it,  the  horse  will  get  away  at  high  speed  and 
become  unmanageable. 

The  horse's  mouth  is  extremely  sensitive,  and 
needs,  more  than  any  other  part,  the  study  of  the 
rider  and  the  practice  of  the  principle  of  strength  of 
effects  rather  than  effects  of  strength.  Strength  of 
effects  means  intelligence.  Effects  of  strength  mean 
jerk  and  saccade.  Brutality  belongs  to  the  nature 
of  an  animal;  but  intelligence  is  the  great  gift  of 
man.  It  is  not  by  making  the  horse  afraid  of  the  bit 
that  we  make  it  understand  the  meaning  of  its 
effects.  Only  by  the  agreeable  contact  of  the  bit 
upon  the  bars,  and  by  the  sensitive  repetition  of 
this  contact,  does  the  horse  come  to  understand, 
without  fear,  the  fingering,  the  equestrian  tact  of  its 
rider. 

The  first  action  of  any  animal,  man  included,  on 
feeling  pain  in  the  mouth,  is  to  shut  it.  But  when 
a  horse  shuts  its  mouth  forcibly  on  the  bit,  no  mere 
two  hundred  pounds  of  human  rider  can  pull  it 
open  by  any  effect  of  strength  alone.  But  strength 
of  effects,  the  taking  and  giving  of  the  rider's  hand, 
will  release  the  tension  and  open  the  mouth,  not 

104 


THE  HANDLING  OF  THE  REINS 

because  of  any  pain,  but  by  a  pleasant  relaxing  of 
the  jaw.  If  along  with  this,  the  rider,  by  the  effects 
of  his  legs,  concentrates  the  animal's  forces  so  as 
to  bring  the  center  of  gravity  under  his  seat,  he 
establishes  a  control  from  which  the  animal  cannot 
escape.  But  it  is  not  by  jerks  and  saccades  that  the 
horse  comes  to  understand  the  effects  of  bits  and 
legs. 

Nevertheless,  if  the  horse,  taking  contact  with 
the  bits,  hesitates  to  yield  the  lower  jaw,  some 
vibration  of  the  snaffle  rein  may  be  needed  to  relax 
the  mouth.  But  vibrations  and  jerks  are  two 
different  matters.  The  one  is  beneficial;  the  other 
is  useless  and  dangerous. 


CHAPTER  XV 

THE  FIRST  WORK  MOUNTED:  THE  HANDS 
N  AND  THE  AIDS 

ALL  the  work  done  up  to  this  point  has  been  merely 
preparatory.  Now  the  time  has  come  for  the  horse 
to  be  mounted,  and  for  the  whip  to  be  replaced  by 
the  aids  and  effects  of  the  rider's  legs. 

Other  methodists,  after  completing  the  flexions 
and  the  mobilization  on  foot,  pass  directly  to  the 
flexions  mounted.  This  I  consider  a  serious  error. 
To  mount  a  young  animal,  and  to  keep  it  standing 
still  during  the  time  of  its  lesson  on  the  various 
flexions,  is  to  offer  far  too  many  occasions  for 
nervous  impatience  and  disorderly  acts.  Yet  how 
is  the  rider  to  prevent  these?  The  horse  does  not 
understand  the  aids.  The  effects  of  hands,  legs, 
and  seat  are  ignored.  The  rider  is  at  the  mercy  of 
the  animal's  ignorance  and  caprice. 

To  meet  this  difficulty,  I  have  for  many  years 
relied  upon  the  following  system: 

As  soon  as  the  preparatory  work  on  foot  is 
completed,  I  mount  the  horse,  and  begin  at  once 
the  training  in  the  aids,  before  proceeding  to  the 
flexions  standing  still.  First  of  all,  I  employ  the 
legs,  so  that  I  may  be  able  to  push  the  horse  for- 
ward against  the  contact  of  the  bits.  Not  only  do  I 
continue  my  teaching  of  the  aids  of  legs  without 

1 06 


THE  FIRST  WORK  MOUNTED 

spurs,  at  the  beginning ;  I  employ  also  spurs  without 
rowels,  for  the  sake  of  accustoming  the  horse  to 
their  use,  to  increase  the  effect  of  the  legs,  to  ac- 
celerate the  speed,  and  to  obtain  the  contact  of  its 
jaw  upon  my  hand.  I  am  not  satisfied  with  the  walk 
only.  I  ask  also  the  trot,  since  this  is  oftentimes  a 
very  great  help  in  exercising  and  quieting  the  ani- 
mal. 

Only  after  the  aids  of  the  legs  are  well  under- 
stood, so  that  I  can  always  determine  a  free  forward 
movement,  do  I  proceed  to  the  reversed  pirouette, 
pirouette,  and  backing,  for  the  mobilization  of  the 
fore  hand,  the  hind  hand,  and  the  body  as  a  whole. 
On  the  other  hand,  I  begin  the  instruction  of  the 
front  hand  by  the  flexions  mounted,  while  my 
control  by  my  legs  is  still  only  partial,  standing  still, 
at  walk,  and  at  trot.  Thus,  without  difficulty, 
restiveness,  or  rebellion,  I  arrive  at  the  "in  hand"; 
and  finally,  after  more  and  more  polishing,  at  the 
"  assemblage. " 

Meanwhile,  with  the  instruction  of  the  horse,  has 
progressed  the  tact  of  the  cavalier  in  using  his  aids. 

The  various  sorts  of  equitation  employ  many 
different  means  for  directing  and  training  the  horse. 
The  equitation  raisonnee  and  the  equitation  savante 
admit  only  three  aids  —  the  hands,  the  legs,  and 
the  seat.  Cavessons,  whips,  and  martingales,  chir- 
ruping with  the  tongue,  caressings  and  punish- 
ments, are  only  means  for  helping  the  animal  to 
comprehend  the  effects  of  these  three. 

107 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

Baucher  in  his  method,  though  he  includes  the 
seat  as  an  aid,  gives  no  theory  as  to  the  relation  of 
the  seat  to  the  assemblage;  and  his  own  position, 
always  correct,  is  always  and  invariably  perpendic- 
ularly above  the  center  of  gravity.  Photographs  of 
Fillis  in  action  show  alteration  in  his  position  which 
act  upon  the  center  of  gravity  in  direct  proportion 
to  the  movement  involved.  But  only  in  a  few  of 
the  movements  explained  in  his  method  does  he 
maintain  the  need  of  a  proper  inclination  of  the 
upper  part  of  the  man's  body  in  the  direction  of 
the  horse's  motion. 

The  seat,  simply  as  a  means  of  staying  on  the 
horse's  back  at  all  gaits  and  movements,  cannot  be 
considered  an  aid,  so  long  as  the  horse  keeps  to  his 
merely  instinctive  equilibrium.  But  as  soon  as  this 
instinctive  equilibrium  is  replaced  by  the  condition 
of  transmitted  equilibrium,  then  the  effect  of  posi- 
tion of  the  rider's  body,  acting  upon  the  center  of 
gravity  of  the  horse,  becomes  very  powerful. 

I  discuss  this  better  later  on,  after  I  have 
considered  the  theory  of  the  assemblage,  rassembler, 
and  the  state  of  collection.  For  the  present,  it  is 
important  for  the  student's  understanding  of  the 
general  idea  of  "  accuracy  of  seat." 

A  second  and  more  important  aid  is  the  hand. 
For  this  it  makes  no  difference  whether  the  horse  is 
in  instinctive  or  transmitted  equilibrium.  In  either 
case,  the  effect  of  the  reins  passes  to  the  mouth, 
from  the  mouth  to  the  neck,  from  the  neck  to  the 

108 


THE  FIRST  WORK  MOUNTED 

front  limbs,  and  from  the  fore  hand  throughout 
the  entire  animal  mechanism.  Baucher  fully  un- 
derstood the  importance  of  this  aid,  and  created 
the  flexions  of  mouth  and  neck.  So  too  did  Fillis, 
who  was  first  to  apply  the  expression  doigter,  that 
is  to  say,  fingering. 

The  bridle  hand  can  produce  three  general  effects, 
which,  in  their  turn,  by  the  fingering  and  by  the 
different  positions  of  the  hand,  are  still  further 
modified  in  great  variety. 

The  first  is  by  tension  of  the  reins,  a  retarding. 
Its  opposite  is  freedom,  permission,  concession. 

The  second  effect  is  by  the  steadiness  of  the 
bridle  hand.  Its  immediate  effect  is  sustension, 
and  later  elevation. 

The  third  effect  is  by  the  position  of  the  hand,  to 
indicate  the  direction  which  the  animal  is  to  take. 

These  effects,  in  general,  should  be  produced  one 
after  the  other,  but  not  simultaneously.  To  produce 
any  one  without  at  the  same  time  producing  any 
trace  of  any  other,  or  disturbing  the  conditions 
involved  in  the  other  two,  constitutes  the  "intelli- 
gent hand." 

The  usual  position  of  the  hand  is  that  given 
above.  But  for  control,  training,  or  the  like,  the 
reins  are  carried  upward,  downward,  backward, 
left  or  right,  to  an  extent  proportionate  to  the  effect 
desired.  During  such  movements  the  hand  should 
always  continue  to  feel  the  bit.  When  the  hand 
has  reached  the  position  where  it  will  obtain  the 

109 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

required  movement,  it  remains  fixed  in  place  until 
the  movement  is  completed.  Thus  the  motion  of 
the  hand  conveys  the  nature  of  the  movement;  the 
fixation  of  the  hand  controls  its  execution. 


'  CHAPTER  XVI 
THE  LEGS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

BY  "legs"  one  means  always  the  leg  below  the 
knee.  The  thighs  remain  always  in  permanent 
contact  with  the  saddle,  and  always  entirely 
independent  of  any  movement  or  pressure  of  the 
calves.  The  common  expressions  of  riding-teachers, 
" Close  your  legs,'*  "Use  your  legs,"  " Fermez  les 
jambes,"  refer,  then,  only  to  the  free  portion  of 
the  limb.  They  do  not  mean,  as  many  beginners 
mistakenly  suppose,  that  the  horse's  body  is  to  be 
enveloped  by  the  whole  leg  from  hip  to  ankle! 

The  legs,  including  the  feet,  are  the  second  mobile 
part  of  the  rider's  body  and  the  most  important 
means  of  controlling  the  horse.  They  and  their 
effects  are  the  essential  promoters  of  every  action 
of  the  horse,  physical  and  moral.  They  must, 
therefore,  act  to  just  the  right  amount,  neither  too 
much  nor  too  little;  at  just  the  right  instant, 
neither  before  nor  after,  in  accord  with  the  fingering 
of  the  reins  and  the  cadence  of  the  stride;  not 
interfering  with  the  step,  but  reestablishing  the 
tempo  if  lost;  coordinated  with  the  sensibility, 
nervousness,  energy,  or  the  lack  of  these,  of  the 
animal.  The  action  of  the  legs  demands,  therefore, 
the  highest  "tact"  on  the  part  of  the  rider.  Many 

in 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

are  called,  but  few  chosen  to  the  proper  manage- 
ment of  this  delicate  and  powerful  aid. 

To  explain  the  effects  of  the  legs  and  the  causes 
of  these,  and  to  deduce  from  such  general  principles 
the  correct  manner  of  using  these  effects  in  practice, 
is  the  most  complicated  subject  in  all  equestrian 
science. 

In  ancient  times,  before  the  invention  of  the 
bridle,  the  legs  provided  the  only  means  of  control- 
ling the  horse.  Later  came  spurs.  All  the  masters 
of  equestrian  art,  from  Xenophon  to  James  Fillis 
inclusive,  have  laid  down  the  principle  that  the 
effect  of  the  contact  of  the  legs  is  to  impel  the  body 
forward  in  whatever  direction  is  indicated  by  the 
reins. 

This  is,  nevertheless,  only  partly  true.  When  the 
legs  are  pressed  against  the  flanks  of  an  uneducated 
animal,  their  first  effect  is  merely  to  tickle  the 
panniculus  carnosus  muscle,  which  envelops  the 
body  from  chest  to  haunch.  But  although  this 
muscle  does  adhere  to  certain  of  the  locomotor 
muscles,  its  action  is  entirely  independent  of  the 
whole  locomotor  system.  When,  therefore,  the 
horse  feels  the  touch  of  a  foreign  object,  it  merely 
uses  the  panniculus  carnosus  to  shake  the  skin, 
whether  that  foreign  body  be  legs,  spurs,  or  flies. 
It  is,  consequently,  only  as  the  result  of  education 
that  the  horse  learns  to  support  unmoved  the 
rider's  legs  and  spurs. 

But  below  the  panniculus  carnosus,  from  thorax 

112 


THE  LEGS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

to  pelvis,  lie  the  great  muscles  which  move  the  fore 
and  hind  limbs,  and  which  are  the  principal  agents 
in  locomotion.  Of  these  the  latissimus  dorsi  car- 
ries the  arm  upward  and  backward,  the  longissi- 
mus  dorsi,  when  it  acts  alone,  is  a  powerful  extensor 
of  the  vertebral  column,  and  the  deep  pectoralis, 
attached  at  the  angle  of  the  shoulder,  draws  the 
whole  fore  limb  backward.  The  student  desiring  to 
understand  more  fully  the  attachments,  relations, 
and  actions  which  are  effected  by  pressure  of  the 
rider's  legs,  should  consult  some  standard  work  on 
the  anatomy  of  the  horse. 

It  is,  then,  easy  to  understand  that  the  rider's 
legs  affect  first  of  all  the  horse's  hair,  skin,  pannicu- 
lus  carnosus,  and  abdominal  tunic,  all  of  which  have 
nothing  to  do  with  locomotion;  while  the  great 
pectoralis  and  its  adjuncts,  the  latissimus  dorsi, 
and  the  muscles  of  the  haunches  and  hind  limbs, 
are  either  affected  only  secondarily  or  remain 
unimpressed.  But  the  first  contact  of  the  rider's 
legs  is  for  the  horse  rather  unpleasant  than  other- 
wise. It  takes,  therefore,  patient  teaching  to 
accustom  the  untrained  animal  to  endure  this 
contact  without  anxiety,  nervousness,  or  fear.  Only 
after  the  horse,  standing  quiet  and  calm,  supports 
the  pressure  of  the  legs  on  all  parts  of  the  body, 
from  as  far  forward  as  the  rider  can  reach  to  as  far 
backward,  has  the  time  come  for  teaching  the 
significance  of  this  contact  for  the  more  important 
muscles  of  locomotion,  such  as  the  great  pectoralis. 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

All  masters  of  equitation  have  heretofore  advo- 
cated putting  the  legs  in  contact  with  the  horse's 
flanks  and  holding  them  there  until  the  pupil  makes 
one  or  two  or  more  steps  forward.  I  differ  com- 
pletely with  this  idea.  The  horse,  standing,  has  all 
four  limbs  directly  below  its  body.  But  in  order  for 
it  to  move  forward,  one  of  the  fore  legs,  executing  the 
three  movements  of  the  stride,  must  reach  forward 
and  come  to  the  ground,  ready  to  receive  the 
weight.  It  thereupon  becomes  the  fixed  point  upon 
which  the  great  pectoralis  acts  to  pull  the  body 
forward.  But  an  acting  muscle  pulls  one  of  its  ends 
toward  the  other;  not  both  ends  toward  the  middle. 
If,  then,  the  rider's  two  legs  press  equally  upon  the 
middle  of  the  great  pectoralis  muscles,  their  natural 
action  is  prevented.  All  that  the  horse  can  then  do 
is  to  stop;  or  if  it  be  energetic  or  violent,  to  rear;  or 
possibly  to  back,  if  the  fixed  point  on  which  the 
muscles  pull  is  the  pelvis,  the  haunches,  the  ilium, 
or  the  loins.  It  is  some  improvement  on  the  usual 
procedure  gently  to  open  and  close  the  legs,  making 
little  repetitions  of  the  contact.  But  even  this  is 
not  completely  satisfactory. 

I  advocate,  therefore,  this  device.  First,  I  make 
contact  with  both  legs.  Then,  still  keeping  contact 
with  one  leg,  with  the  other,  very  gently,  I  make 
and  break  contact,  my  leg  never  going  more  than 
half  an  inch  out  from  the  animal's  body.  Very  soon, 
I  see  the  fore  leg  on  the  same  side  take  its  forward 
stride,  and  at  the  same  time  I  feel  under  me  the 

114 


THE  LEGS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

opposite  hind  leg  come  off  the  ground.  This  is  the 
first  step !  When  one  has  obtained  the  first  step,  if 
he  is  a  trainer,  a  master,  he  may  feel  sure  that 
millions  of  steps  will  follow  by  and  by.  Now  is  the 
time  to  prove  to  your  pupil,  by  caressings  and  re- 
wards, that  what  he  has  done  is  what  you  asked. 
You  have  obtained  the  correct  response,  scienti- 
fically and  naturally,  without  the  quarrel,  doubt, 
or  confusion,  which  are  the  result  of  the  wrong 
method  of  the  old  masters  of  equitation. 

I  dwell  especially,  at  this  point,  on  the  impor- 
tance of  patience  and  moderation.  Do  not  forget 
that  you  are  an  instructor,  and  that  your  pupil  does 
not  yet  understand  the  meaning  of  your  effects. 
Accept,  therefore,  your  duty.  Act  as  if  you  were 
dealing  with  a  child  who  does  not  yet  know  the 
meaning  of  papa  and  mamma.  Teach  by  kindness. 
Do  not  be  violent.  Do  not  kick  the  animal  because 
it  does  not  yet  comprehend  you.  If  you  do,  you 
will  be  sorry  afterwards.  Remember  always  that 
a  horse,  once  properly  educated,  answers  to  the 
delicate  and  intelligent  effects  of  your  legs  as  it 
answers  to  the  deftest  fingering  of  your  reins;  and 
that  all  your  domination  of  the  animal  is  the  prod- 
uct of  your  intelligence,  a  strength  of  effect,  never, 
never,  an  effect  of  strength. 

When,  from  standing,  the  horse  will  pass  to  the 
walk  at  the  effects  of  the  legs,  without  showing  anxi- 
ety or  haste,  it  should  be  taught  by  the  same  methods 
to  pass  from  walk  to  trot,  and  from  trot  to  gallop. 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

It  is,  however,  one  of  the  axioms  of  equitation 
that  any  effect  of  rider  on  horse  loses  its  influence 
more  and  more  the  longer  it  is  continued.  If,  then, 
bits  or  calves  or  spurs  are  employed  continuously, 
without  relaxation,  the  horse  in  time  accepts  the 
contact,  becomes  wonted  to  it,  and  all  the  effect 
disappears. 

It  is,  therefore,  necessary,  from  time  to  time,  to 
"render  the  legs"  in  the  same  way  that  one  renders 
the  hand.  Otherwise  the  sensibility  to  the  pressure 
of  the  legs  will  wear  away,  or  the  hind  hand  will 
become  fatigued  and  the  horse  refuse.  But  since 
the  effect  of  the  legs  is  less  natural  to  the  horse  and 
less  obvious  to  the  rider  than  the  effect  of  the  hands, 
even  more  care  must  be  taken  to  employ  this  effect 
with  proper  moderation.  Moreover,  if  after  ob- 
taining motion  forward  by  means  of  the  contact  of 
the  legs,  the  rider  continues  to  maintain  the  same 
contact  as  before,  the  horse  will  soon  fail  to  under- 
stand the  meaning  of  the  first  pressure.  Relaxation 
of  the  contact  is  absolutely  essential  for  Conveying 
the  meaning  of  the  contact. 

There  are,  however,  two  different  ways  of  ren- 
dering the  legs.  Suppose  that,  to  urge  the  horse 
forward,  the  rider  needs  three  degrees  of  pressure. 
He  exerts  these  three  degrees,  and  the  horse  goes 
forward.  The  required  speed  being  obtained,  the  legs 
then  return  to  their  normal  one  degree  of  contact, 
and  the  horse  continues  the  movement  for  himself. 
This  principle  applies  to  all  gaits  and  speeds. 

116 


THE  LEGS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

There  is,  in  addition,  a  second  way  of  render- 
ing the  legs,  which  though  unrecognized  by  the 
reasoned  equitation,  is  far  too  much  practiced  — 
namely,  the  loss  of  all  contact  with  the  horse's 
flanks.  To  do  this,  one  ought  to  be  very  sure  of  his 
seat,  his  horse,  and  his  surroundings.  Even  then  it 
is  wiser  to  confine  this  meaning  of  the  verb  "to 
render "  to  occasions  when  the  horse  is  standing 
still.  Evidently,  rendering  the  legs  with  the  horse 
in  motion,  should  not  involve,  at  the  same  time, 
rendering  the  hands.  One  who  does  this  is  said  to 
" abandon"  his  mount,  a  serious  fault. 

Thus  far,  for  the  sake  of  simplicity,  I  have 
spoken  as  if  the  effect  of  the  rider's  legs  on  the 
horse's  body  were  the  same,  whatever  the  precise 
region  of  the  contact.  This  is  not,  however,  entirely 
the  fact.  There  really  are  three  different  effects 
corresponding  to  three  different  positions. 

Contact  well  forward  near  the  girths  tends  to 
collect  the  horse  and  to  aid  the  hand  in  establishing 
the  state  of  equilibrium.  This  position  tends  also  to 
keep  the  animal  in  equilibrium  during  movement. 

Contact  far  back  against  the  flank,  on  the  other 
hand,  tends  to  draw  the  hind  legs  forward  under 
the  center  of  gravity,  and  thus  to  favor  stopping,  or 
even  going  backwards. 

The  intermediate  position  between  these  two  is 
the  one  which  sends  the  horse  forward,  as  already 
discussed. 

These  three  different  ways  of  using  the  legs, 

117 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

understood  by  both  horse  and  man,  will  avoid 
certain  mistakes  on  the  part  of  both. 

One  more  principle  is  to  be  noted.  The  action 
of  one  rein  alone  or  of  one  leg  alone  has  no  meaning. 
The  only  effect  that  the  horse  can  learn  to  under- 
stand is  the  additional  or  repeated  effect  of  one  rein 
or  one  leg  while  the  other  remains  unmodified  and 
uniform. 


CHAPTER  XVII 
THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

SPURS  had,  at  first,  no  rowels;  but  were  stiletto-like 
and  long.  At  that  epoch,  the  bit,  called  buade,  was 
very  severe;  and  the  saddle  had  high  pommels 
before  and  behind.  The  rider's  legs,  therefore, 
extended  straight  down;  and  since  he  could  not 
bend  his  knee,  he  needed  the  long  spur  to  counteract 
the  too  powerful  effect  of  the  bit.  Even  to-day  the 
Arabs  still  use  this  type  of  spur,  called  shabir. 

But  with  the  progress  of  equitation,  effects  of 
force  have  given  way  to  force  of  effects,  arid  the 
stiletto  point  has  been  superseded  by  rowels, 
severe,  medium,  or  mild  in  proportion  to  the 
sharpness  of  their  points.  The  choice  of  the  right 
degree  of  severity  of  the  rowels  needed  for  any 
particular  animal  is  governed  by  the  creature's 
dullness  or  sensibility,  and  determined  by  the  rid- 
er's equestrian  tact.  In  any  case,  the  horse  has  to  be 
first  accustomed  to  dull  rowels  and  trained  progres- 
sively to  those  more  severe. 

A  great  many  sorts  of  rowel  have  been  used,  with 
various  theories  to  explain  their  different  forms. 
Practically,  it  is  important  to  have  the  rowels  turn 
loosely  on  their  pivots.  Otherwise,  the  horse's 
hairs  may  collect  around  them  and  prevent  their 
turning  at  all.  In  that  event,  the  points,  being  fixed, 

119 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

are  a  great  deal  more  severe;  and  the  rider  may 
unwittingly  spur  much  harder  than  he  intends. 
Motion  of  the  rowel  from  above  downward  is 
likewise  more  severe  than  in  the  reverse  direction. 

The  attack  with  the  spurs,  at  all  periods  in  the 
history  of  equitation,  has  been  considered  both  as  a 
means  of  correction  and  punishment,  and  as  an 
augmentation  of  the  effect  of  the  legs.  It  has  been 
shown  by  writers  on  the  subject  that  the  use  of  the 
spurs  follows,  as  a  necessary  result,  the  invention  of 
bit  and  bridle.  Evidently,  the  bit  in  the  mouth, 
bearing  upon  the  sensitive  bars,  gives  rise  to 
discomfort  and  even  pain,  so  that  the  horse  natu- 
rally hesitates  to  go  forward  against  the  sensation. 
This  was  especially  the  case  with  the  earlier  bits, 
with  their  long  branches  and  their  disks  with  screws 
attached  to  the  ports.  When  the  legs  alone  proved 
insufficient  to  push  the  horse  forward  against  the 
bit,  the  whip  had  to  be  employed.  But  this  can  be 
used  on  only  one  side  at  a  time,  and  is  therefore 
inefficient.  Moreover,  the  mounted  soldier,  reins 
in  one  hand,  lance  or  sword  in  the  other,  could  not 
use  the  whip.  Spurs,  therefore,  had  to  be  invented 
to  force  the  horse  to  go  forward,  notwithstanding 
the  pain  of  the  bit  manipulated  by  the  heavy- 
handed  rider. 

The  first  master  to  begin  to  use  the  spur  with 
moderation  and  intelligence  was  Comte  de  la 
Gueriniere.  His  principle  of  the  "delicate  pressure 
of  the  spurs*'  is  still  noted  by  the  more  progressive 

120 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

schools  of  equitation.  But  equitation,  with  the 
progress  made  since  de  la  Gueriniere's  time,  has 
passed  from  the  instinctive  to  the  reasoned  basis, 
and  now  to  the  scientific.  It  is  no  longer  a  question 
of  practicing  what  our  ancestors  have  done,  but  of 
following  a  progressive  education,  a  sequence  of 
reason,  cause,  and  the  effect  of  the  means  used  by 
the  man  on  the  horse. 

Now  the  first  principle  of  the  scientific  equitation 
is  the  force  of  effect;  it  denies  forever  the  effect  of 
force.  This  being  admitted,  it  is  no  longer  by  the 
severity  of  the  bit  nor  by  the  severity  of  the  spurs 
that  we  train  the  horse.  I  say  train,  as  we  still  do, 
mistakenly:  I  mean  educate.  Following  a  progres- 
sive education,  the  horse  is  first  taught  by  a  trainer 
on  foot,  by  the  use  of  the  whip  on  its  flanks,  to 
move  forward  against  the  bit.  This  practice  with 
the  whip  prepares  the  animal  for  the  effects  of  the 
legs  upon  the  same  part  of  the  body,  when  the 
rider  is  mounted  and  the  legs  give  the  impulse  to 
the  entire  machinery.  This  impulse  of  the  legs 
is  received  by  the  bit,  making  contact  with  the 
bars,  so  that  there  is  a  continual  fluctuation  of  the 
equilibrium  as  the  center  of  gravity  shifts  backward 
and  forward  at  each  step. 

To  make  this  matter  clear,  suppose  a  horse  to  be 
mounted  and  standing,  its  training  by  the  flexions 
of  mouth  and  neck  being  so  far  advanced  that  it  is 
well  "in  hand."  In  order  to  maintain  the  animal  in 
this  position,  the  center  of  gravity  at  the  center  of 

121 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

mechanism,  the  rider  is  exerting,  let  us  say,  a  force 
of  twenty  pounds,  ten  pounds  on  the  fore  hand  to 
maintain  the  "in  hand,"  and  ten  pounds  with  the 
legs,  to  maintain  the  contact  with  the  bit.  Other- 
wise the  "in  hand"  will  cease  and  the  state  of 
equilibrium  be  lost. 

Suppose,  now,  that,  in  order  to  send  the  horse 
forward  at  a  walk,  the  rider,  keeping  always  the 
pull  of  ten  pounds  at  the  reins,  increases  the  pres- 
sure of  his  legs  to  fifteen  pounds  and  then  to 
twenty;  but  the  horse  still  keeps  its  center  of 
gravity  where  it  was,  and  remains  standing  still. 
If  at  this  point  the  rider  gives  the  hand,  the  center 
of  gravity  will  pass  forward  and  the  horse  will  start; 
but  the  "in  hand,"  which  is  part  of  the  equilibrium, 
will  be  lost.  If,  therefore,  the  legs  alone  have  not 
the  power  needed  to  push  the  center  of  gravity 
forward  while  the  reins  continue  to  act,  the  rider 
must  have  spurs  with  which  to  multiply  their 
effect. 

The  horse  having,  if  I  may  so  express  myself,  let 
the  center  of  gravity  pass  forward,  would  fall  if  it 
did  not  at  once  extend  a  fore  leg  to  receive  the 
weight.  This  constitutes  one  step.  As  the  horse 
moves  forward,  the  spurs  abandon  their  contact; 
but  the  legs  still  maintain  their  pressure  as  before 
the  spurs  were  applied.  The  center  of  gravity  will 
return  to  the  middle  point;  but  the  horse  will 
continue  to  move  forward,  still  in  the  state  of 
equilibrium.  All  this  is  in  accord  with  Newton's 

122 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

first  law  of  motion  as  set  forth  in  his  Principia.  The 
body,  once  set  in  motion  by  a  force,  continues  after 
the  force  is  withdrawn  to  move  forward  in  the  same 
direction  until  another  force  interferes.  The  horse, 
therefore,  without  further  spurring,  continues  to 
advance  at  the  same  speed,  until  something  else 
occurs. 

This,  then,  is  what  we  mean  by  the  "attack" 
of  the  spurs;  nothing  brutal,  sudden,  sharp,  or 
unexpected,  merely  the  supplementing  of  the  effect 
of  the  legs,  which  alone  were  not  sufficient.  But 
the  animal  has  life,  and  consequently,  senses  and 
will.  It  does,  for  a  time,  continue  to  go  forward  in 
a  state  of  equilibrium,  under  the  impulse  of  the 
original  force.  Sooner  or  later,  however,  some 
new  sensation  becomes  a  disturbing  force.  It  loses 
its  uniform  motion  in  a  straight  line,  and  with  it 
the  state  of  equilibrium.  Thereupon,  hand  and  legs, 
spurs,  if  necessary,  must  again  come  into  action. 

In  such  a  case,  the  spurs  are  a  corrective,  not  by 
their  own  direct  effect,  but  because  they  help  to 
restore  the  state  of  equilibrium,  and  thus  to  inhibit 
the  animars  own  will,  which  is  the  disturbing  force. 
But  though  the  good-will  of  the  horse  is  a  pleasant 
state,  it  really  is  very  little  matter  what  the  horse 
thinks.  The  only  point  is  submission  to  the  will  of 
the  rider,  who,  by  complete  and  continual  control 
of  the  physical  horse,  sets  quite  on  one  side  the  will 
of  the  moral  horse.  Then  and  only  then  is  the  horse 
an  utter  captive,  unable  to  disobey,  unable  to  move 

123 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

a  limb  except  at  the  intelligent  command  of  its 
master. 

On  the  other  hand,  we  must  not  forget  the  great 
principle,  already  accepted,  that  every  impression 
made  upon  the  animal  loses  its  effect  progressively 
as  the  impression  is  continued.  If  legs  or  spurs  are 
held  steadily  against  the  horse's  sides,  it  shortly  be- 
comes quite  insensible  to  them.  It  must,  then,  have 
its  sensitiveness  reawakened  by  repeated  attacks. 

For  this  purpose,  while  the  horse  is  walking, 
trotting,  or  galloping,  the  rider,  taking  a  firm  seat, 
closes  his  legs  progressively  until  he  presses  with  his 
full  strength,  the  hand  meanwhile  being  firm  and 
steady,  and  the  rider  cool-tempered  and  calm,  con- 
fident in  himself  and  his  seat.  These  conditions 
realized,  the  rider  turns  his  toes  outward,  the  spurs 
touch  the  flanks  near  the  girths,  pinch,  and  then 
release,  while  the  legs  press  with  the  same  force  as 
before  the  spurs  were  applied. 

The  spurs  do  not  remain  in  contact  with  the 
flanks.  The  touch  is  brief,  but  the  pressure  is 
repeated  again  and  again,  in  about  the  tempo  of  a 
quarter-note  in  music,  until  the  horse,  calm  and 
obedient,  in  a  state  of  equilibrium,  stands  still  or 
moves  forward  at  the  same  speed  and  gait  as  at  the 
beginning  of  the  attack.  If,  however,  the  horse,  at 
the  attack,  backs  or  refuses  to  go  forward,  then 
the  tempo  of  the  application  of  the  spurs  is  increased, 
until  such  time  as  the  horse  advances,  always  upon 
the  hand,  with  the  bit  in  contact  with  the  bars. 

124 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

If  the  horse  drops  its  head  when  spurred,  the 
rider  takes  the  snaffle  in  one  hand  and  lifts  the  head 
with  the  snaffle,  never  with  the  bit.  The  attack  is 
completely  successful  when  the  horse's  head  and 
neck  go  steadily  upward  and  forward  upon  the  hand 
of  the  rider,  the  face  nearly  perpendicular  to  the 
ground  and  the  lower  jaw  open. 

Thereupon  follows  a  sensation  well  known  to 
masters  of  the  art.  As  the  attacks  bring  the  hind 
legs  below  the  haunches,  the  coupling  is  lightly 
opened,  while  the  hand,  acting  upon  the  bit, 
throws  back  upon  the  rear  legs  a  portion  of  the  load 
previously  supported  by  the  front  pair.  The  rider 
feels  the  weight  pass  below  his  seat.  He  hears  the 
saddle  give  a  sudden  crack  as  the  muscles  of  the 
trunk  contract.  Still,  it  is  not  absolutely  necessary 
that  these  two  sensations  should  accompany  the 
collection  of  the  horse  into  equilibrium.  I  have 
found  some  horses  in  which  they  do  not  always 
occur. 

To  a  young  trainer,  these  attacks  of  the  spurs 
appear  terrible  and  dangerous.  To  the  consum- 
mate esquire,  they  are  the  simplest  matter.  The 
scientific  equitation  does  not  regard  an  animal  as 
trained  if  it  does  not  respond  to  the  attack  by 
collecting  itself,  or  if  the  attack  throws  it  out  of 
the  state  of  equilibrium. 

The  attack  of  the  spurs  should  always  be  deft  — 
le  toucher  delicat  de  Veperon,  is  the  phrase  of  the 
Grand  Master,  Comte  de  la  Gueriniere.  These  are 

125 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  most  exacting  of  all  our  means.  They  act  upon 
the  physical  forces  of  the  animal,  and  upon  his 
moral  forces.  They  affect  especially  his  will.  They 
are,  therefore,  a  most  important  means  of  control 
if  employed  for  their  strength  of  effects.  But  they 
are  most  dangerous  when  used  as  effects  of  strength. 

Masters  of  the  equestrian  art  have  all  assumed 
that  the  spurs  have  two  uses  —  one  for  conduct 
and  one  for  punishment.  I  admit  their  use  for 
conduct,  but  I  deny  their  use  as  a  corrective  in  the 
sense  in  which  other  writers  have  taught.  I  admit 
their  use  as  a  corrective  in  so  far  as  they  augment 
the  effect  of  the  legs.  I  grant  that,  when  the  legs 
alone  are  not  sufficiently  powerful,  as  a  means  of 
conduct,  to  impose  upon  the  horse,  by  my  will, 
the  position  of  equilibrium,  so  as  to  paralyze 
movements  of  revolt  originating  in  the  animal's 
will,  I  employ  the  spurs.  But  the  effect  of  these  is 
always  to  reenforce  the  effects  of  the  legs,  which  are 
of  themselves  impotent  to  obtain  the  position  of 
assemblage.  By  means  of  the  spurs  I  am  able  to 
correct  a  wrong  position  which  the  horse  takes  in 
revolt,  and  which  would  otherwise  put  in  jeopardy 
my  control  over  him,  and  bring  my  intelligent 
will  into  subordination  to  the  enormous  physical 
strength  of  an  unintelligent  brute. 

I  do  not  believe  that  the  animal  is  influenced  by 
sharp  physical  pain  in  any  such  degree  as  a  man 
is,  who  by  his  education  is  always  more  delicate 
physically,  and  morally  more  fearful  than  the  ani- 

126 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

mal,  who  has  no  dread  whatever  of  death.  It  is, 
therefore,  not  by  inflicting  physical  pain  that  the 
man  dominates  the  brute;  but  rather  by  the 
skillful  use  of  the  sensations  which  the  man  is  able 
to  impose.  Whenever  pain  becomes  the  custom,  the 
animal  no  longer  heeds  it.  But  agreeable  sensa- 
tions are  retained  in  memory,  and  so  dispose  the 
animal  to  obey  for  the  sake  of  the  caresses  and 
rewards. 

I  have  already  explained  that  the  purpose  of  the 
flexions  is  to  obtain  equal  contact  of  the  bars  upon 
the  bit  by  the  effect  of  the  two  legs  used  equally. 
Evidently,  if  the  legs  do  not  act  equally,  the  contact 
of  the  bit  will  also  be  unsymmetrical.  So  much  the 
more,  then,  must  the  vastly  more  powerful  spurs 
be  used  with  precise  equality  if  the  animal  is  to  be 
kept  straight  and  equal  in  all  his  steps  and  gaits. 

It  is  for  this  reason  most  important  that  the 
teeth  of  the  two  rowels  be  equally  sharp  or  dull, 
and  that  the  spurs  be  set  immovably  at  the  same 
height ;  otherwise  the  attack  will  occur  sooner,  or  at 
a  different  place,  or  be  more  severe,  on  one  side 
than  the  other.  I  hold  my  own  spurs  in  place  by 
having  a  small  piece  of  leather  at  the  top  of  the  heel, 
on  which  the  spur  rests,  and  a  very  short  strap 
which  passes  in  front  of  the  heel  below  the  boot. 
But  the  best  method  is  to  follow  the  advice  of 
Fillis  and  to  have  box  spurs  set  permanently  in  the 
boots.  These  cannot  be  displaced  and  will  always 
act  equally. 

127 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

A  rider  is  said  to  " apply  the  spurs"  when  he 
brings  them  against  the  horse's  flanks  and  holds 
them  there.  Oftentimes  during  the  horse's  educa- 
tion, the  rider  needs  to  bring  back  the  animal's 
attention,  which  has  been  distracted  by  some  sight 
or  sound,  or  has  simply  lapsed.  This  moral  state 
of  the  animal  should  never  be  tolerated,  lest  the 
horse  come  to  think  that  he  can  get  away  from  the 
rider's  control  at  his  own  will  or  because  of  what 
he  sees  and  hears.  It  is  essential  that  the  man  shall 
be  master  of  the  animal,  always  and  in  every 
circumstance.  To  apply  the  two  spurs  at  the 
slightest  distraction  is  highly  efficient,  provided 
their  use  is  moderate  and  progressive.  The  legs 
should  be  closed  first,  and  the  spurs  applied  without 
shock,  as  the  legs  alone  prove  insufficient. 

A  great  many  poets  and  other  writers  speak  of 
riders  who  "bury  their  spurs  in  their  horse's 
flanks,"  and  thereby  start  them  off  like  lightning. 
But  the  fact  is  that  to  bury  the  two  spurs  brusquely 
is  precisely  the  best  way  to  stop  a  horse  running 
at  full  speed.  The  prick  of  the  spurs  makes  him 
kick  out  with  the  hind  legs,  which,  getting  no 
support  from  the  air,  can  no  longer  drive  the  body 
forward.  The  horse  ought  to  bear  the  touch  of  the 
spurs  as  calmly  as  he  bears  the  pressure  of  the  legs. 
It  is  the  repetition  of  the  contact  that  produces 
the  effect,  not  the  single  brusque  application. 

Burying  the  spurs  has  nevertheless  its  place. 
Certain  horses  are  thoroughly  vicious  by  nature, 

128 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

or  through  restiveness  or  laziness  are  always  try- 
ing to  escape  from  the  rider's  control.  With  such 
animals,  the  man  must,  from  the  beginning,  assert 
his  superiority  with  intelligent  force.  It  is  not,  in 
such  cases,  a  question  of  training  or  education.  It 
is  a  question  of  taming,  yet  without  creating  fear 
by  excessive  punishment.  The  rider  must  be  posi- 
tive, strict,  and  severe;  but  always  reasonable  and 
calm. 

The  result  of  burying  the  spurs  in  the  horse's 
flanks  and  holding  them  there  is  commonly  to 
inhibit  the  action  of  the  great  pectoralis  muscles, 
and  thus  to  prevent  the  forward  propulsion  of  the 
body,  while  at  the  same  time  punishing  the  crea- 
ture for  an  act  of  restiveness.  The  horse,  there- 
fore, finding  himself  unable  to  use  his  members  in 
rebellion,  cannot  but  feel  the  rider's  mastership. 
But  if  the  horse  does  not  already  understand  the 
effect  of  legs  and  spurs,  surprise  may  throw  him 
into  disorder.  Moreover,  the  sharpness  of  the  spurs, 
the  strength  and  temperament  and  training  of  the 
horse,  and  its  native  stubbornness,  all  need  to  be 
considered  by  the  rider  before  he  buries  his  spurs 
in  its  flanks. 

A  rider  is  said  to  "  tickle  with  the  spurs  "  when  he 
uses  these  instruments  inopportunely  and  without 
reason.  Certain  riders  like  to  exhibit  an  ill-founded 
pretense  of  knowing  how  to  ride,  and  render  their 
mounts  impatient  or  frantic  by  continued  tickling. 
Others,  who  have  no  accuracy  of  seat,  let  their  legs 

129 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

flop  back  and  forth  with  the  movement  of  the  horse. 
Happily  for  the  latter  sort,  the  horse  that  supports 
such  treatment  is  too  old  or  lymphatic  to  mind 
anything.  Otherwise,  with  an  energetic  animal, 
there  would  shortly  follow  a  divorce  by  mutual 
consent.  Still  a  third  sort  of  rider  is  the  one  who  has 
so  little  confidence  in  his  seat  or  himself  that,  when 
occasion  comes,  he  is  afraid  to  use  his  spurs  with 
justice  and  energy.  He  tickles  because  he  has  not 
the  faith  to  use  the  persuaders  firmly. 

In  short,  the  man  who  tickles  with  his  spurs  is 
like  the  man  who  teases  his  friends.  The  one  makes 
himself  an  annoyance,  and  commonly  finds  his 
retribution  in  lack  of  comrades  and  true  friends. 
The  other  is  likely  to  make,  of  a  good  horse,  either 
a  nervous  and  excited  animal,  or  else  a  poor,  lazy, 
confused  victim  and  slave.  Spurs  on  the  wrong 
heels  are  like  matches,  knives,  and  firearms  in  the 
hands  of  children. 

On  the  other  hand,  certain  horses  are  "  ticklish 
to  the  spurs."  That  is  to  say,  they  will  not  accept 
the  contact  without  showing  dislike  or  fear.  Some 
horses  make  continual  movements  of  the  tail,  or 
turn  the  head  to  look  at  the  rider's  leg.  Some  stop; 
or,  if  standing,  half  rear  and  half  back.  Some  put 
back  their  ears,  and  roar  or  growl.  Some  grind 
their  teeth.  Some  urinate  nervously,  in  small  and 
repeated  jets. 

Mares  are  especially  liable  to  this  fault.  The 
cause  is  usually  a  too  great  sensibility  of  the  hairs 

130 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

of  the  flanks  and  of  the  panniculus  carnosus.  The 
cure  is  to  ride  for  a  time  without  spurs  and  with 
the  legs  against  the  flanks.  This  is  followed  by 
spurs  with  the  teeth  filed  dull  and  encased  in 
leather,  until  the  horse  becomes  progressively 
accustomed  to  the  ordinary  sort.  The  same  treat- 
ment can  be  used  for  horses  that  have  been  made 
ticklish  by  improper  spurring.  A  few  cases,  appar- 
ently cured,  afterwards  relapse.  Some  animals  are 
quite  incurable. 

In  sum,  then,  the  spurs,  properly  used,  are  our 
most  powerful  means  for  obtaining,  with  the  help 
of  the  bridle,  a  position  of  the  animal  in  which  all 
defense,  restiveness,  disobedience,  or  signs  of  fear 
become  impossible.  We  do  not,  indeed,  alter  the 
horse's  moral  state;  but  we  force  it  to  assume  a 
position  in  which  it  cannot  use  its  members  for 
the  acts  which  correspond. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  spurs  are  a  dangerous  tool 
when  used  by  a  rider  who  employs  them  with- 
out moderation,  delicacy,  propriety,  and  discretion, 
like  a  monkey  playing  with  a  razor.  Nothing  is 
more  ridiculous  than  to  see  either  a  man  or  a 
woman  rider,  wearing  spurs  as  an  ornament  of 
fashion,  with  the  legs  so  extended  as  to  bring  the 
heels  close  to  the  horse's  shoulders.  It  is  easy,  in 
such  a  case,  to  understand  the  sarcasm  of  a  certain 
master:  "It  would  be  better  for  such  a  rider  to 
buckle  his  spurs  to  his  own  elbows,  and  use  them 
against  his  own  flanks. " 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

Since,  then,  the  spurs  are  the  most  powerful 
means  recognized  by  equitation,  their  employment 
demands  moderation,  intelligence,  experience,  just- 
ness, exactness,  propriety,  accuracy,  equality,  pre- 
cision, and  faith,  as  moral  qualifications,  and, 
as  physical  basis,  that  sine  qua  non,  the  accurate 
seat,  without  which  the  other  qualities  are  of  no 
avail.  In  fact,  the  rider  needs  as  much  equestrian 
tact  in  his  heels  as  in  the  hands  and  fingers  which 
manipulate  the  reins.  The  difference  is  that  a 
mistake  made  with  the  hands  is  usually,  in  large 
measure,  reparable;  but  an  error  committed  with 
the  heels  will  occasion  disorder  or  revolt  that  is  not 
only  dangerous  at  the  moment  but  may  make  upon 
the  animal  a  moral  impression  that  is  unforgotten 
and  may  be  forever  irreparable. 

I  have  already  explained  that  the  effects  of  the 
rider's  legs  on  the  horse's  flanks  are  indirect.  The 
muscles  of  propulsion  are  overlaid  by  the  pannicu- 
lus  carnosus.  On  this,  the  pressure  of  the  legs  acts 
directly;  but  only  by  education  is  the  effect  of  this 
pressure  passed  on  to  the  pectoralis  magnus.  But 
the  function  of  the  panniculus  carnosus  is  to 
contract  at  the  touch  of  any  foreign  or  strange 
object,  such  as  an  insect  or  a  twig.  The  young 
horse,  therefore,  when  mounted  for  the  first  time, 
reacts  to  the  contact  of  the  rider's  legs  as  to  any 
other  annoyance.  If  he  is  uncommonly  excitable, 
he  simply  raises  a  hind  leg  and  makes  ready  to  kick. 
Only  by  the  process  of  education  does  the  horse 

132 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

learn  to  support  the  contact  of  the  rider's  legs 
calmly  and  without  impatience. 

The  first  effect  of  the  contact  is,  therefore,  to 
make  the  horse  raise  one  or  both  hind  legs.  But,  by 
our  training,  we  obtain  instead  the  forward  move- 
ment, the  front  leg  gaining  ground  on  the  side  of 
the  pressure.  After  the  first  step,  comes  the  second, 
and  then  the  trot  and  gallop,  all  associated  with  a 
more  or  less  complex  system  of  signs,  based  on 
pressures  of  the  rider's  legs.  This  is  sufficient  for 
ordinary  riding.  But  when  the  horse  revolts,  no 
matter  what  the  occasion  for  his  disobedience 
or  disorder,  we  employ  the  spurs  to  reenforce  the 
effects  of  the  legs. 

What,  then,  can  the  spurs  do?  Without  cooper- 
ation of  the  hand,  nothing.  But  the  two,  hand  and 
spurs,  acting  together,  constrain  the  animal  to  a 
position  of  equilibium,  in  which  all  his  bodily 
forces  are  assembled  under  a  center  of  gravity,  in 
such  wise  that  the  horse  cannot  displace  this 
collection  of  its  powers  without  the  rider's  permis- 
sion and  intelligent  direction.  For  in  order  to 
displace  its  body,  in  case  of  revolt,  the  horse  would 
have  to  use  its  muscles  in  a  way  impossible  for  it  by 
the  law  of  its  nature.  These  powerful  effects  of  the 
spurs  are,  therefore,  neither  brutal,  nor  abrupt,  nor 
provocative.  Their  action  is  entirely  mechanical, 
and  therefore  rationally  calming  and  pacifying. 

In  other  words,  the  spurs,  as  they  affect  an  an- 
imal in  a  state  of  moral  disorder,  act  like  oil 

133 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

poured  upon  the  waters  of  a  turbulent  sea.  The 
cause  of  the  turbulence  remains ;  but  the  local  effect 
is  destroyed.  So  with  the  horse:  its  emotions  are 
the  same,  but  it  cannot  act  them  out.  Its  physical 
strength  is  locked,  like  an  insane  creature  in  a 
strait- jacket. 

The  progress  of  the  animal's  education  to  the 
effects  of  the  spurs  is,  therefore,  the  same,  in 
general,  as  its  training  to  the  effects  of  the  legs, 
except  that  it  needs  even  more  patience  and  kind- 
ness. In  case  the  horse  has  previously  been  mal- 
treated with  the  spurs,  the  training  is  the  same,  but 
still  more  kind  and  patient. 

For  this  education,  every  esquire  needs  three  sets 
of  spurs.  The  first  degree  is  without  rowels,  the  end 
of  the  branches  being  rounded.  The  second  degree 
has  rowels  without  teeth.  A  penny  or  a  ten-cent 
piece  answers  nicely.  The  third  degree  has  the 
teeth  short  and  dull.  If  when  these  rowels  are 
pinched  between  thumb  and  finger  of  the  gloved 
hand,  the  teeth  prick  through  the  glove,  they  are 
a  little  too  sharp.  The  length  of  the  branch  depends 
on  the  length  of  the  rider's  legs  and  on  the  width  of 
the  horse's  flanks,  the  longer-legged  man  needing 
the  longer  spurs.  Only  experience  determines  just 
what  the  proper  length  shall  be. 

The  trainer,  equipped  with  spurs  of  the  first 
degree,  mounts  the  horse,  and  stops  him  well  away 
from  the  wall,  if  the  work  is  done  in  a  manege,  in 
order  that  the  horse  may  not  try  to  rub  the  rider's 

134 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

leg  against  the  barrier  or  injure  itself  by  kicking. 
He  then  closes  his  legs  with  all  his  might,  pressing 
the  horse's  flanks  near  the  girths,  while  the  reins, 
held  in  the  left  hand,  make  their  effect.  The  toes 
are  now  turned  outward,  and  the  right  spur  is 
brought  close  to  the  right  flank,  within  perhaps  a 
tenth  of  an  inch.  The  rider  soothes  the  horse  with 
his  voice,  and  as  soon  as  the  animal  is  perfectly 
calm,  he  applies  the  spur  progressively  —  very 
progressively  —  and  holds  it  against  the  flank, 
meanwhile  caressing  the  right  side  of  the  animal 
with  the  right  hand,  and  encouraging  him  with  the 
voice.  Be  generous  with  this,  not  economical.  Put 
your  heart  into  your  voice,  and  your  horse  will 
understand  your  meaning.  Very  well!  The  spur 
has  remained  a  moment.  Begin  again  with  further 
progression.  The  horse  has  felt  the  iron  of  your 
spur,  and  look  at  his  ears!  Ah!  Ah!  They  are 
immobile.  He  thinks.  He  thinks  something  new, 
a  new  sensation.  Take  care,  take  care,  young 
esquire.  Voice!  Voice!  You  have  it  again;  I  see  it 
in  your  face.  You  smile.  Now  encourage  with  the 
voice;  put  your  heart  in  it.  Caress  with  the  right 
hand  the  nearest  possible  to  the  spot  where  the  spur 
has  made  contact. 

Change  now  the  reins  to  the  right  hand,  and 
begin  the  same  progression  with  the  left  spur,  with 
the  same  generosity  and  the  same  care.  You  have 
it  on  the  left  as  well  as  on  the  right.  Now  ride 
your  horse  at  a  walk,  or  even  at  a  trot,  for  dis- 

135 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

traction  and  exercise  for  the  animal,  and  rest  for 
your  own  legs. 

Stop  again  near  the  center  of  the  ring.  Apply  the 
right  spur  —  very  progressively.  Encourage  with 
your  voice.  Be  careful  now,  for,  if  your  horse  is 
young  and  you  are  a  novice,  neither  of  you  yet 
knows  quite  where  you  are  going.  You  have  con- 
tact with  the  right  spur.  Hold  it  and  come — come 
—  with  the  left.  Voice!  Voice!  You  have  contact 
on  both  sides.  Caress  with  the  right  hand,  neck, 
sides,  croup.  Keep  the  same  pressure  with  the  legs, 
but  take  away  the  spurs.  Now  voice,  caresses. 
Bring  both  spurs  at  once  into  contact.  It  is  the 
critical  moment.  But  you  have  it!  Then  release 
the  contact  progressively,  cease  the  pressure  of  the 
legs,  dismount,  open  the  curb  chain,  and  send  your 
pupil  to  the  stable.  In  the  afternoon,  repeat  the 
same  lesson  three  or  four  times. 

When  the  horse  supports  the  contact  standing 
still,  pass  to  the  next  demand.  From  standing,  the 
two  rowels  in  contact,  try,  by  leaning  the  body 
forward  in  the  saddle,  to  make  the  horse  move 
forward.  After  a  few  steps,  lean  backward  and 
bring  him  to  a  stop.  Again  forward.  And  again 
stop.  Rest  your  legs  and  caress  generously.  Repeat 
again  and  again.  Let  everything  be  always  calm 
and  quiet,  without  disorder,  and  without  anxiety 
on  the  part  of  the  horse. 

Next,  take  the  pupil  at  a  walk  near  the  wall.  As 
he  walks  quietly,  begin  the  pressure  of  the  legs,  and 

136 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

add  progressively  the  contact  of  the  spurs.  Hold 
for  a  few  steps,  and  then  release,  but  continue  the 
pressure  of  the  legs.  Again  make  contact  with  the 
spurs;  hold  it  as  before  for  a  few  steps;  then  cease 
the  touch  of  the  spurs,  but  continue  the  grip  of  the 
legs.  Once  more  touch  and  release.  Finally,  make 
contact  with  the  spurs,  lean  back,  finger  the  reins, 
stop  the  horse,  caress  again  and  again,  remove  the 
spurs,  ease  the  grip  of  the  legs,  dismount,  and  send 
the  pupil  to  the  stable. 

There  should  be  six  such  lessons  at  the  walk, 
the  legs  pressing  constantly,  but  the  spurs  making 
and  breaking  contact  every  few  steps.  After  six 
lessons  at  the  walk,  give  six  lessons  at  the  slow  trot. 

Now  that  the  horse  supports  the  spurs  at  both 
walk  and  trot,  it  is  time  to  begin  the  attacks.  If 
the  preliminary  work  has  been  well  mastered,  the 
next  step  will  be  easy. 

The  horse  is  standing.  The  rider,  by  means  of  his 
legs,  makes  the  contact  with  the  bit,  the  horse  upon 
the  hand  and  light.  The  rider  shuts  his  hand  and 
holds  his  fingers  closed.  As  soon  as  the  legs  are 
fixed,  their  pressure  begins.  The  spurs  then  make 
contact;  and  at  the  same  time,  the  fingers  open. 
Then  come:  fixity  of  hand  —  fixity  of  legs  —  the 
horse  at  the  w*alk  —  caresses  —  fixity  of  hand  — 
fingering  —  fixity  of  legs  —  caresses.  The  horse  is 
walking:  make  contact  with  the  spurs — shut  your 
fingers  —  lean  back  —  the  horse  stops.  Forward 
again:  open  your  fingers  —  spur  —  lean  forward  — 

137 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

stop.  After  this  work  is  thoroughly  understood,  the 
same  series  is  run  through,  from  walk  to  trot,  from 
trot  to  walk,  from  walk  to  stop,  from  stop  to  walk, 
from  walk  to  trot,  and  so  on. 

Progress  thus  far  has  accustomed  the  horse  to 
the  touch  of  the  spurs,  and  convinced  him  that 
nothing  will  hurt  and  that  there  is  nothing  to  fear. 
We  now  complete  the  attacks.  The  horse  is  stand- 
ing. The  rider  opposes  with  his  hand  and  finds  con- 
tact with  the  mouth.  The  legs  are  closed,  the  spurs 
near  the  girths.  Then  follows  a  delicate  and  re- 
peated contact  and  release  of  the  spurs,  at  the  tempo 
of  an  eighth-note.  This  continues  until,  by  the  flex- 
ion of  the  lower  jaw  and  the  alto-axoid  joint,  the  bit 
loses  contact  with  the  bars,  though  the  rider's  hand 
does  not  move.  As  soon  as  this  flexion  of  the  mouth 
and  head  is  obtained,  the  attack  of  the  spurs  ceases. 
The  bits  again  make  contact ;  the  attack  repeats  as 
before. 

In  other  words,  your  hand  makes  five  degrees  of 
effect,  and  your  attack  with  the  spurs  makes  also 
five  degrees.  Your  two  means  are,  therefore,  equal. 
The  center  of  gravity  comes  exactly  in  the  middle 
of  your  seat  and  perpendicularly  below  your  spinal 
column.  There  is  established  an  equilibrium  of  all 
forces.  Your  horse  is  in  the  state  of  assemblage. 
But  if  the  center  of  gravity  is  under  your  spine, 
while  the  horse  is  standing  still,  it  is  because  your 
body,  from  head  to  coccyx,  is  perpendicular.  If, 
now,  that  perpendicular  is  carried  forward,  the 

138 


THE  SPURS  AND  THEIR  EFFECTS 

center  of  gravity  also  shifts  forward.  The  equilib- 
rium becomes  unstable.  The  tendency  is  to  fall 
forward.  The  front  legs  advance  to  prevent  the  fall, 
attract  to  their  aid  the  hind  limbs,  and  the  walk 
or  trot  begins.  Then,  if  walking  or  trotting,  the 
equilibrium  becomes  disturbed,  fixity  of  the  hand 
and  a  light  attack  of  the  spurs  will  reestablish  it, 
while  fingering  on  the  reins  will  maintain  it. 

When  the  horse  has  so  far  advanced  in  its 
education  as  to  understand  well  the  attack  of  spurs 
of  the  first  degree,  the  work  is  exactly  repeated  with 
spurs  of  the  second  degree.  Following  these,  spurs 
of  the  the  third  degree  will  still  further  augment  the 
effects  of  the  legs,  without  affecting  the  pupil's 
equanimity. 

Finally,  to  student  and  novice,  I  give  this  advice. 
As  you  carry  on  your  progressive  work  with  the 
attacks,  certain  imbeciles  —  stable  boys,  riding- 
masters,  the  ignorant  public  —  will  want  to  know 
what  you  are  about,  and  whether  you  are  afraid  of 
your  horse.  Do  not  care.  Let  them  criticize:  it  is 
very  easy.  But  if  you  find  one  of  these  expert 
hunters  or  polo-players  who  think  they  have  a  seat, 
get  them  to  try  the  work  that  you  have  been  doing, 
keeping  their  seats  while  applying  and  holding 
their  spurs  exactly,  precisely,  justly,  equally,  and 
accurately.  Then,  if  they  make  the  attempt,  ob- 
serve them  for  your  amusement! 


CHAPTER  XVIII 
MOBILIZATIONS  MOUNTED 

THE  "in  hand"  obtained  by  the  series  of  flexions 
with  the  horse  standing  still  has  not  yet  trained 
the  animal  to  move  its  limbs  while  still  keeping 
the  head  and  mouth  in  the  "in  hand"  position.  If, 
therefore,  the  rider  now  tries  to  send  the  horse 
forward,  "in  hand,"  the  four  legs,  not  being  trained 
to  move  properly  in  that  position,  will  become 
disunited  into  twos  or  threes.  The  problem  is, 
therefore,  by  means  of  the  pirouettes,  to  educate 
the  horse  to  be  still  further  under  the  rider 's  control, 
the  effects  acting,  at  first,  separately,  the  fore  legs 
under  the  direction  of  the  hand,  the  hind  legs  under 
the  direction  of  the  legs,  and  later,  united,  collected, 
assembled  under  the  direction  of  both  hands  and 
legs. 

The  mobilization  of  the  hind  legs  is  obtained  by 
means  of  the  reversed  pirouette,  obtained  either  by 
lateral  or  direct  effect. 

The  horse,  being  mounted  and  kept  standing 
and  "in  hand,"  the  trainer  will  ask  the  movement 
from  left  to  right  by  the  effects  of  the  left  snaffle 
rein  and  of  the  left  leg  against  the  flank.  Mean- 
while, the  reins  of  the  bit  will  keep  the  horse  "in 
hand"  and  standing  nearly  still  on  its  front  legs. 

In  other  words,  the  left  snaffle  rein  draws  the 

140 


MOBILIZATIONS  MOUNTED 

head  to  the  left,  while  the  rider's  left  leg  pushes  the 
hind  quarters  to  the  right.  The  movement  begins 
by  the  lifting  of  the  left  hind  foot  and  its  movement 
toward  the  right  in  front  of  the  right  hind  foot. 
Thereupon,  the  right  hind  foot  also  shifts  toward 
the  right,  and  the  first  step  is  made.  Repetition 
of  these  effects  continues  the  movement,  which, 
however,  cannot  proceed  beyond  four  steps.  The 
reversed  pirouette  from  right  to  left  is  obtained  by 
the  same  means,  reversed. 

If  at  first  the  horse  does  not  understand  the 
pressure  of  the  rider's  legs,  the  whip  is  used  to 
augment  their  effect,  by  repeated  contact  near  the 
leg.  Very  soon  the  horse  learns  to  obey  the  pressure 
of  the  leg  alone. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  executes  the  reversed 
pirouette  calmly  and  correctly  by  the  lateral  effect, 
the  rider  asks  the  same  movement  by  the  direct 
effect.  For  this,  the  horse  is  held  "in  hand"  either 
by  the  two  snaffle  reins  or  by  those  of  the  curb,  but 
not  by  all  four.  The  rider's  left  leg  then  asks  the 
rotation  of  the  haunches  toward  the  right,  while 
the  right  leg  urges  the  horse  forward.  (Figure  17.) 
Finally,  comes  the  same  movement  from  right  to 
left. 

For  the  direct  pirouette,  the  horse,  being  always 
"in  hand,"  has  to  pivot  on  a  hind  foot,  while  the 
fore  part  of  the  body  circles,  let  us  say,  from  right 
to  left.  For  this,  first  of  all,  the  right  fore  foot  lifts, 
crosses  over  in  front  of  the  left,  and  comes  to  the 

141 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

ground  about  one  foot  to  the  left  of  the  latter.  As 
it  comes  to  rest,  it  takes  the  weight  in  its  turn; 
and  the  left  fore  foot,  now  unloaded,  shifts  still 
farther  to  the  left,  passing  behind  the  right.  Once 
more  the  left  foot  takes  the  load,  and  the  right  foot 
crosses  as  before.  (Figure  18.) 

Meanwhile,  the  hind  legs  have  carried  much  of 
the  weight  of  the  fore  hand.  They  have  not,  how- 
ever, remained  fixed.  As  the  shoulders,  after  the 
first  step  of  the  right  fore  leg,  travel  toward  the  left, 
the  right  hind  foot  also  lifts,  moves  to  the  left,  and 
takes  the  ground  in  front  of  the  left  hind  leg.  Then, 
as  the  right  front  leg  begins  its  second  stride  to  the 
left,  the  left  hind  foot  moves  to  a  position  two  or 
three  inches  forward  and  to  the  left  of  the  right, 
and  takes  once  more  the  load.  Again,  as  the  left 
front  foot  shifts  to  the  left,  the  right  hind  foot 
repeats  its  former  movement  to  the  left.  This 
makes  two  steps  around  the  imaginary  circle  of 
the  pirouette.  Repetition  of  these  two  continues 
the  turn  from  right  to  left  to  a  complete  about-face. 

Such  is  the  mechanical  motion  executed  by  the 
horse.  At  this  point  I  ask  of  the  anatomists  and 
masters  of  equitation,  how  is  it  that  the  pirouette 
is  anatomically  possible,  if  the  scapular  and  the 
numerous  are  fixed  to  the  thorax  and  the  sternum, 
and  the  only  movement  of  the  fore  legs  is  forward 
and  back,  without  elongation?  When  the  right  fore 
leg  has  passed  across  the  left,  if  it  cannot  lengthen 
before  coming  to  the  ground,  then  it  can  fall  to  the 

142 


Figure  17.  PIROUETTE  FROM  RIGHT  TO  LEFT 


Figure  18.  ROTATION  FROM  LEFT  TO  RIGHT 


MOBILIZATIONS  MOUNTED 

ground  only  as  the  left  fore  leg  rises.  Therefore,  is 
the  theory  of  locomotion  false  which  holds  that  one 
limb  cannot  leave  the  ground  until  after  its  mate 
has  made  contact.  The  sophists  will  reply  that 
locomotion  is  always  a  succession  of  falls.  Very- 
true,  but  these  falls  operate  successively  upon  the 
front  legs  as  each  in  turn  goes  forward  at  the  walk, 
the  trot,  or  the  gallop;  there  is  no  crossing  over  of 
the  feet  at  each  step,  right  to  left  or  left  to  right. 

Consider  the  case  where  the  fall  is  greatest.  The 
leaping  horse  is  entirely  out  of  contact  with  the 
ground.  It  comes  to  the  ground  at  the  end  of  the 
leap,  with  its  two  front  legs  extended;  and  im- 
mediately after,  the  hind  legs  also  come  down.  Is 
this  natural  to  the  anatomy  of  the  animal?  Yes! 
But  suppose  that  the  horse  finishes  the  leap  with 
its  two  front  legs  in  the  position  demanded  by 
the  pirouette  or  the  half  passage.  What  will  be  the 
consequence?  Answer  me,  please! 

Returning  now  to  the  effects  employed  to  execute 
the  pirouette,  the  front  hand  has  to  be  unloaded,  and 
the  hind  legs,  which  are  the  support  and  pivot,  have 
to  be  loaded,  especially  the  left  hind  leg.  The  rider 
must,  therefore,  carry  the  line  of  his  body  backward 
from  the  perpendicular,  and  also  bear  more  heavily 
on  the  left  haunch.  The  right  fore  leg,  since  it 
makes  the  longer  step,  has  to  be  unloaded  by  a  very 
slight  effect  of  the  right  rein.  But  as  this  right  fore 
leg  is  to  travel  over  from  right  to  left,  the  right  rein 
must  bear  upon  the  right  side  of  the  neck,  the  hand 

143 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

of  the  rider  being  carried  to  the  left.  If,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  right  rein  were  to  operate  alone,  the  result 
would  be  to  carry  the  head  too  much  to  the  right  by 
the  flexion  of  the  neck.  Consequently,  the  left  rein 
has  to  maintain  the  head  straight  by  the  proper  op- 
position. But,  of  course,  the  natural  effect  of  mov- 
ing the  hand  to  the  left  is  to  swing  the  haunches 
to  the  right.  And  since  the  right  hind  leg  must, 
on  the  contrary,  pass  leftward  in  front  of  its  mate, 
the  rider's  right  leg  is  brought  an  inch  or  more 
behind  the  girth,  to  forestall  this  movement  and 
maintain  the  haunches  as  pivot  and  support/v 

The  pirouette  is  to  be  executed  step  by  step.  At 
the  beginning,  one  or  two  steps  are  sufficient.  It  is 
evident  that  the  "in  hand"  position  must  be  un- 
disturbed during  the  entire  movement,  since  it  is 
only  under  this  condition  that  this  mobilization 
of  the  forehand  has  any  real  bearing  on  the  fu- 
ture progressive  education.  Again  I  counsel,  for  the 
student,  moderation,  patience,  perseverance;  but 
more  important  still  are  positiveness,  and  quality 
rather  than  quantity,  since  quantity  alone  will  have 
little  value  for  the  future  training. 

Other  masters  dictate  this  pirouette  immediately 
after  the  "in  hand"  has  been  obtained,  and  before 
the  reversed  pirouette.  I,  on  the  contrary,  first 
mobilize  the  hind  legs  by  means  of  the  reversed 
pirouette  or  rotation;  and  only  after  my  horse  well 
understands  my  effects  of  leg,  do  I  begin  the  mobi- 
lization of  the  fore  hand  by  the  pirouette. 

144 


MOBILIZATIONS  MOUNTED 

Forty  years  ago,  noting  the  confusion  in  the 
minds  of  riders  between  pirouette  and  reversed 
pirouette,  I  renamed  the  latter,  rotation  —  pirou- 
ette for  the  mobilization  of  the  fore  hand;  rotation 
for  the  mobilization  of  the  hind  legs  or  croup.  The 
change  is,  at  first  sight,  not  important.  It  becomes 
so  only  because  it  helps  to  clear  the  matter  for 
beginners., 

Even  at  first  sight,  the  figure  of  the  pirouette 
is  easy  to  understand.  The  difficulty  comes  in 
executing  it.  Moreover,  it  is  sometimes  extraor- 
dinarily hard  to  make  the  beginner  comprehend 
just  the  difference  between  pirouette  and  rotation. 
I  have  seen  really  intelligent  men  confuse  them, 
month  after  month.  Changing  the  name  from 
reversed  pirouette  to  rotation  has  helped  not  a 
little. 

Finally,  for  the  sake  of  one  of  my  pupils  in 
particular,  who  insisted  that  he  was  doing  the  one 
when  he  was  really  doing  the  other,  I  hit  upon  the 
following  device. 

Stand  facing  the  edge  of  an  open  door,  and  take 
the  knobs  in  your  two  hands.  The  hinges  represent 
the  horse's  front  legs;  your  legs  are  the  horse's  hind 
ones.  Now  pivot  the  door  from  right  to  left,  passing 
your  right  foot  between  your  left  foot  and  the  door, 
bringing  it  to  the  ground,  and  then  bringing  the  left 
foot  into  its  usual  place  beside  it.  This  imitates  the 
movement  of  the  rotation.  Taken  from  left  to 
right,  everything  reverses,  both  motions  and  effects. 

145 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

For  the  pirouette,  turn  your  back  to  the  door. 
The  hinges  are  now  the  horse's  hind  legs,  and  your 
single  pair  are  the  horse's  fore  legs.  Once  more, 
swing  the  door  from  right  to  left,  and  follow  it  with 
your  feet,  by  shifting  the  right  foot  across  in  front 
of  the  other,  and  then  passing  the  left  foot  between 
the  door  and  the  right  to  its  usual  position. 

Do  not,  I  repeat,  attempt  to  execute  these  figures 
on  horseback,  until  you  are  sure  that  you  under- 
stand precisely  each  detail.  After  that,  if  you  pro- 
ceed with  moderation,  the  movements  are  so  easy 
that,  like  everybody  else  who  has  tried  it,  you  will 
laugh  at  the  novices  who  have  not  yet  caught  the 
idea. 

When  the  pirouette  is  properly  done  at  the  walk, 
it  can  be  tried  at  the  trot,  but  only  after  the  horse 
has  so  far  advanced  in  its  education  as  to  trot 
properly.  The  chief  difficulty  with  the  pirouette 
at  the  trot  is  to  gauge  accurately  the  horse's  sen- 
sitiveness to  each  of  your  effects.  Otherwise,  it 
may  cross  its  legs  too  quickly,  and  in  order  to 
avoid  the  tendency  to  fall,  which  is  greater  at  the 
trot  than  at  the  walk,  it  is  likely  to  change  to  the 
gallop,  preferring  to  execute  the  figure  at  this  gait 
rather  than  at  the  trot. 

At  the  gallop,  the  pirouette  should  always  be 
asked  at  the  same  hand  or  same  side  at  which  the 
horse  leads  —  the  right-hand  pirouette  to  the  right, 
and  vice  versa. 


146 


MOBILIZATIONS  MOUNTED 

BACKING 

MOTION  backwards  is  not  a  gait,  but  merely  one  of 
the  three  movements  which  the  horse  executes  by 
carrying  rearward  its  center  of  gravity,  and  con- 
sequently a  part  of  its  weight. 

The  movement  has  given  rise,  among  methodists, 
to  a  great  diversity  of  theories,  more  or  less  im- 
practical and  absurd.  Some  writers  recommend 
having  two  men  to  teach  the  action,  one  in  the 
saddle,  who  pulls  alternately  on  the  reins,  the  other 
on  foot,  who  touches  chest  or  knees  with  a  whip. 
Others  advocate  having  the  rider  dismount,  and, 
facing  the  horse's  head,  take  one  rein  in  each  hand, 
and  push  backward,  first  on  one  and  then  on  the 
other.  If  the  horse  does  not  then  back,  the  trainer 
steps  on  the  horse's  fore  feet  as  he  gives  the  tug 
at  the  reins.  What  confusion!  There  is  no  real 
principle.  How  can  one  write  concerning  an  art 
without  greater  knowledge  of  it! 

It  must  be  evident  that,  in  order  to  make  the 
horse  back,  the  rider  must  carry  backwards  the 
center  of  gravity.  Then,  whenever  a  hind  leg  leaves 
the  ground,  it  must  go  to  the  rear  to  receive  the 
weight,  which  otherwise  tends  to  fall  backwards. 
If,  at  the  same  time,  the  rider's  hand  indicates  to 
the  horse  that  it  cannot  go  forward,  a  front  leg  must 
follow  the  hind  leg  in  diagonal.  This  makes  the  first 
step.  To  repeat  the  same  effects  of  hand  and  legs 
obtains  the  second  step. 

147 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

The  objection  of  the  horse  to  backing  arises  from 
the  stiffness  of  the  muscles  of  the  back  at  the  region 
of  the  coupling.  These  muscles  and  the  articulation 
can,  however,  be  suppled  by  the  preparatory  work 
on  foot,  with  the  whip.  The  rider,  standing  at  the 
horse's  left,  holds  the  two  curb  reins  in  his  left 
hand,  and  touches  repeatedly,  with  the  whip,  the 
croup  behind  the  saddle,  meanwhile  making  a 
moderate  but  repeated  effect  with  the  curb  on  the 
horse's  mouth.  Very  soon,  the  horse  backs.  By 
repeating  this  work  two  or  three  times  at  each 
lesson,  the  horse  soon  learns  to  execute  the  move- 
ment, first  with  the  trainer  on  foot,  afterwards  with 
the  trainer  mounted  and  employing  his  legs, 
supplemented  if  necessary  by  the  whip.  A  saddle 
horse,  well  collected,  should  move  backwards  with 
the  same  step  and  cadence  as  forward. 


CHAPTER  XIX 
THE  FLEXIONS  MOUNTED 

FOR  the  flexions  mounted,  the  rider  lays  the  two 
reins  of  the  bit  on  the  horse's  neck  near  the  withers, 
their  length  equal;  and  holds  the  snaffle  reins,  one 
in  each  hand,  with  the  free  end  of  each  passing 
between  the  forefinger  and  the  thumb.  The  elbows 
are  in  contact  with  the  body,  but  without  stiffness. 
The  hands  are  at  the  same  height  as  the  elbows, 
and,  at  most,  three  or  four  inches  apart.  The  legs 
are  in  contact,  but  make  no  effect. ' 

First,  obtain  contact  with  the  bit.  Immediately, 
yield  contact,  by  opening  the  fingers.  Then  close 
the  fingers,  and  again  take  contact.  When  you  are 
sure  that  you  can  make  the  contact  when  and  how 
you  please,  be  satisfied  for  the  present,  dismount, 
and  continue  the  flexions  on  foot.  The  second  les- 
son of  the  same  day  repeats  exactly  the  work  of 
the  first. 

On  the  second  day,  mounted,  take  three  minutes 
to  complete  the  contact,  two  mniutes  for  the  fin- 
gering, three  minutes  of  fingering,  two  minutes  of 
contact.  Dismount. 

On  the  third  day,  take,  mounted,  two  minutes 
of  contact,  three  of  fingering,  two  of  contact,  three 
of  fingering,  interrupted  by  rests.  Dismount. 

t  For  the  fourth  day,  take  one  minute  of  contact 

149 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

with  the  snaffle.  Cross  the  left  rein  of  the  snaffle  to 
the  right  hand,  holding  the  two  always  equal.  With 
the  snaffle  reins,  maintain  the  position,  head  up. 
Take  the  reins  of  the  bit  in  the  left  hand,  separating 
them  by  the  first  two  fingers,  the  ends  passed  over 
the  forefinger  and  held  by  the  thumb.  Make  con- 
tact with  the  snaffle.  Shift  the  contact  from  snaf- 
fle to  bit.  Caress  with  the  right  hand ;  or,  if  that  is 
occupied,  with  the  voice.  Continue  this  exercise 
for  five  minutes.  For  another  five  minutes,  change 
the  contact  back  to  the  snaffle.  Do  three  minutes  of 
fingering  alternately  with  the  two  hands,  followed 
by  two  minutes  with  the  reins  of  the  bit  and  snaffle 
both  in  the  right,  while  caressing  with  left  hand  and 
voice.  (Figure  19.) 

For  the  second  lesson  of  the  fourth  day,  take 
the  snaffle  reins  in  the  right  hand,  while  the  left 
hand  holds  the  reins  of  the  bit,  but  without  effect. 
Make  contact  with  the  right  hand.  Shift  the  con- 
tact to  the  left  hand,  making  the  same  effects. 
If,  now,  as  you  finger  with  the  right  hand,  the  horse 
champs  the  bit,  begin  fingering  also  with  the  left, 
then  change  to  the  right  alone.  Then  follow  with 
three  minutes  of  fingering  with  the  bit,  helped  out, 
if  necessary,  with  the  snaffle;  three  minutes  with  the 
snaffle ;  then  two  minutes  with  the  bit.  Dismount. 

If  the  flexions  have  been  done  correctly  on  foot, 
this  work  of  obtaining  contact  with  the  two  bits 
alternately  will  be  sufficient  to  secure,  by  means  of 
fingering,  a  flexion  of  the  lower  jaw,  which  will, 

150 


Figure  19.  THE  HORSE  STRAIGHT  AND  IN  HAND 


THE  FLEXIONS  MOUNTED 

nevertheless,  still  further  improve  with  the  follow- 
ing lateral  and  direct  flexions  of  the  neck. 

For  the  lateral  flexion  of  the  neck  to  the  right, 
the  trainer  takes  both  curb  reins  in  his  left  hand, 
his  little  finger  separating  the  two,  holding  them  of 
equal  length,  and  short  enough  to  give  the  proper 
contact  and  to  supple  the  mouth  by  their  fingering. 
In  his  right  hand  he  holds  the  right  snaffle  rein  only, 
the  left  lying  slack  across  the  curb  reins.  By  carry- 
ing the  right  hand  still  farther  to  the  right,  keeping 
the  same  pull  on  the  right  snaffle  rein,  by  repeated 
and  progressive  pressure,  the  horse's  head  will  be 
turned  to  the  right,  pivoting  at  the  region  of  the 
atlas.    This  inclination  will  be  very  slight  at  the 
beginning;  but  with  repetition  and  caresses,  the 
horse  very  soon  learns  to  swing  its  head  far  enough 
to  transfer  at  will  the  weight  from  one  fore  leg  to 
its  mate,  dispose  its  center  of  gravity,  and  make 
the  various  changes  of  direction.  During  the  lateral 
flexion  with  the  snaffle  rein  to  either  side,  the  hand 
holding  the  curb  reins  should  be  kept  immovable, 
and  only  the  fingers  give  and  take  with  the  mouth. 
After  the  head  has  been  flexed,  it  is  to  return  to  its 
straight  position,  little  by  little,  by  the  progressive 
slackening  of  the  snaffle  rein,  always  at  the  will 
of  the  rider,  never  suddenly  at  the  will  of  the 
horse.    The  lateral  flexion  is  complete  when  the 
head  turns  to  a  right  angle  with  the  axis  of  the 
body  and  the  frontal  bone  is  perpendicular  to 
the  ground. 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

At  the  beginning  of  this  work,  in  order  to  make 
the  horse  understand  the  compound  effect,  it  will 
be  necessary  to  carry  the  right  hand  over  little  by 
little  and  to  cease  the  fingering  of  that  hand.  Do 
not  demand  too  much  flexion  at  first.  The  slightest 
inclination  of  the  head  should  be  rewarded,  and  the 
head  turned  straight. 

The  object  of  these  flexions  is  to  make  it  possible 
to  shift  the  weight  borne  by  either  fore  leg  on  to  the 
other,  always  on  the  side  away  from  the  movement 
of  the  head.  Thus,  if  the  flexion  is  to  the  left,  the 
load  transfers  to  the  right  front  leg;  and  vice  versa. 
It  may  happen  that,  when  everything  is  otherwise 
correct,  the  horse  will  paw  the  ground  with  the  foot 
on  the  side  toward  which  the  flexion  has  been  made. 
This  is  natural,  and  not  a  serious  fault.  Neverthe- 
less, it  is  something  which  the  horse  does  on  its  own 
initiative,  not  in  obedience  to  the  rider;  and  it  is, 
therefore,  not  to  be  permitted.  Moreover,  the  horse 
may  learn  to  paw  only,  without  making  the  flexion. 
Furthermore,  the  horse  should  not  champ  the  bit 
under  the  fingering  of  the  right  hand.  It  should,  at 
the  indication  of  the  right  hand,  complete  the  direct 
flexion  of  the  mouth;  while  at  the  same  time  it 
makes  the  flexion  of  the  neck  to  the  left  and  returns 
straight  again,  and  vice  versa  for  flexion  to  the  right, 
as  shown  in  Figure  6  and  discussed  under  "  Descent 
of  the  Hand." 

Do  not,  therefore,  accept  motion  of  the  lower 
jaw  to  right  or  left.  This  is  not  correct.  The  flexion 

152 


THE  FLEXIONS  MOUNTED 

of  the  neck  to  one  side  or  the  other  follows  the 
direct  flexion  of  the  mouth.  If  the  flexion  of  the 
neck  interferes  with  that  of  the  mouth,  the  flexion 
has  no  meaning,  and  the  rider  who  accepts  this 
condition  creates  an  asymmetry  of  the  neck  which 
is  reflected  throughout  the  entire  body. 

If  the  horse,  at  the  beginning  of  the  flexion  of 
the  neck  to  either  side,  throws  its  haunches  toward 
the  other,  put  it  straight  again,  first  by  ceasing  the 
flexion,  and  then  by  slight  pressure  of  the  legs.  Do 
not,  however,  under  any  condition,  kick. 

Fillis  is  entirely  logical  when  he  objects  to  be- 
ginning the  flexions  of  the  neck  before  the  animal 
understands  the  separate  effects  of  the  legs.  I  was 
myself  of  the  same  opinion  until  I  experimented 
successfully  with  several  horses  at  the  beginning  of 
their  training.  It  is  all  a  question  of  progression, 
of  moderation  in  demands,  and  of  perseverance. 
Without  the  least  doubt  it  is  possible  to  flex  de  pied 
ferme,  without  the  help  of  the  legs.  I  recognize, 
however,  a  difficulty,  and  to  meet  this  I  have  ad- 
vised placing  the  horse  near  a  wall  when  the  lateral 
position  is  being  taught,  in  order  that  the  presence 
of  the  barrier  may  help  to  keep  the  haunches 
straight.  We  have  to  consider,  also,  that  the  great 
masters  of  the  art,  because  of  their  equestrian 
tact,  are  able  to  omit  from  their  own  training 
the  work  on  foot.  Nevertheless,  they  were  them- 
selves obliged  to  employ  this  at  the  beginning 
of  their  professional  careers;  they  accept  it  as  es- 

153 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

sential  for  beginners,  and  they  include  it  in  their 
systems. 

Only  after  both  the  lateral  and  direct  flexions  of 
mouth  and  neck  are  mastered  standing,  should  the 
student  proceed  either  to  the  mobilization  of  the 
hind  legs  by  means  of  the  ordinary  rotation,  in 
accordance  with  Baucher's  method:  or,  following 
Fillis,  should  execute  a  form  of  the  rotation  in 
which  the  horse  moves  at  a  walk  in  such  wise  that 
the  tracks  of  fore  and  hind  feet  make  two  con- 
centric circles,  with  that  traced  by  the  hind  feet 
outside  the  other.  The  latter  is,  in  my  judgment, 
the  more  progressive  and  the  more  rational. 

When  the  beginner  has  mastered  the  reversed 
pirouette,  he  next  "carries  his  horse  forward"  at  a 
walk,  the  horse  always  giving  the  direct  flexions  of 
mouth  and  neck  without  altering  its  gait,  and  then 
asks  the  lateral  flexions  of  the  neck.  I  advocate 
making  this  flexion  in  such  wise  that  the  horse's 
head  shall  turn  toward  the  wall  of  the  ring.  Other- 
wise, the  pupil  will  think  that  it  is  his  own  leg  which 
keeps  the  haunches  from  turning,  when  really  it  is 
the  presence  of  the  wall.  When,  therefore,  the 
pupil  tries  to  keep  the  horse  straight  away  from  the 
wall,  he  finds  that  he  cannot  do  it,  and  must  go 
back  to  the  wall  again. 

Even  when  walking  with  the  right  side  against 
the  wall,  the  haunches  of  the  horse  tend  to  be 
displaced  to  the  right  at  the  lateral  flexion  of  the 
neck  to  the  left,  so  that  it  is  by  the  effect  of  the 

154 


THE  FLEXIONS  MOUNTED 

right  leg  that  the  rider  corrects  this  tendency  and 
keeps  the  spine  straight.  I  do  not,  at  the  beginning, 
employ  my  legs  to  maintain  the  straight  position; 
but  going  straight,  if  I  ask  the  flexion,  and  the 
haunches  have  a  tendency  to  swing  (a  tendency, 
only,  I  say),  I  do  not  wait  until  the  haunches  have 
actually  swung  —  it  would  then  be  too  late  —  but 
at  the  first  slightest  feeling  in  my  seat,  my  leg  is 
ready  with  its  effect.  But  I  do  not  kick.  To  kick  a 
horse  with  leg  or  spur  is  to  me  blasphemy. 

As  the  horse  reaches  the  corner  of  ring  or  manege, 
the  rider  continues  the  flexion  of  the  neck  to  the 
left,  sends  the  horse  forward  by  means  of  his  left 
leg,  and  turns  it  by  the  effect  of  the  right,  as  in  the 
reversed  pirouette  done  at  the  walk.  In  this,  the 
rider  is  entirely  rational,  in  complete  accord  with 
the  nature  and  anatomy  of  the  horse,  the  regularity 
of  its  motion,  and  what  it  has  been  taught  from 
the  beginning  of  its  education.  But  I  submit  that, 
after  having  taught  the  horse,  with  its  head  to  the 
left,  to  move  its  haunches  to  the  left  at  the  effect  of 
the  right  leg,  as  in  the  reversed  pirouette  or  rotation, 
it  is  the  height  of  absurdity  to  turn  a  corner  to  the 
right  by  means  of  right  rein  and  right  leg,  a  viola- 
tion of  the  nature  of  the  animal,  a  contradiction  of 
all  that  it  has  been  taught,  and  the  reason  for  those 
terrible  tempests  of  revolt  so  often  experienced  by 
Baucher  and  Fillis,  when  they  asked  movements, 
by  lateral  effects,  when  the  r  mounts  were  moving 
in  diagonal  action  at  walk  and  trot,  while  they  used 

155 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

a  diagonal  effect  with  the  horse  at  the  gallop,  which 
is  a  lateral  gait. 

These  lateral  flexions  of  the  neck,  with  the  direct 
flexions  of  the  jaw,  are  to  be  done  at  the  walk,  not 
too  continuously,  but  occasionally  only,  and  with 
frequent  return  to  the  direct  flexions  of  mouth  and 
neck.  I  emphasize  this,  because  the  horse  is  built 
to  travel  straight  —  an  axiom  of  the  reasoned  equi- 
tation —  and  only  occasionally  to  alter  its  natural 
posture. 

When  these  lateral  flexions  can  be  done,  to  either 
side,  at  a  walk,  they  are  repeated  in  the  same  way 
at  a  slow  trot. 

When  the  animal  executes  them  properly  at  the 
trot,  the  trainer  should  begin  passing  a  corner  to 
the  right,  with  a  half  lateral  flexion  to  the  left, 
while  he  bears  down  his  weight  on  his  own  right 
buttock,  but  without  relaxing  contact  with  his  legs. 

I  recommend  to  the  student,  at  this  point,  to  take 
note  of  his  own  progress.  The  work  on  foot  has 
given  him  the  power  to  see  with  his  eyes  and  to  feel 
with  his  fingers  the  action  which  he  has  asked  of 
the  horse.  Equestrian  tact  has  been  born  in  him. 
The  problem  is  now  to  keep  this  tact  developing 
progressively.  The  requirements  are  quality,  not 
quantity,  perseverance,  honesty,  patience,  gener- 
osity. 

In  dividing  the  time  for  this  work  on  the  flexions, 
it  should  be  understood  that  the  horse  is  not  to  be 
kept  in  one  fixed  position  for  the  entire  time 

156 


THE  FLEXIONS  MOUNTED 

indicated,  but  is  to  be  relieved  by  intervals  of 
freedom.  My  own  experience  is  that  a  few  steps 
forward,  light  "in  hand,"  or  a  few  moments 
standing  head  up,  without  the  effect  of  the  reins, 
but  by  the  horse's  own  free  will,  is  a  great  rest. 
Without  some  such  respite,  the  trainer  asking  the 
flexions  too  continuously,  the  horse  becomes  dis- 
couraged and  nervous. 

Very  probably,  too,  the  rider's  own  action  of 
hand  and  fingers  will  not  be  altogether  correct  at 
first.  But  practice  is  the  road  to  perfection,  and  as 
I  am  convinced  that  my  theory  is  correct,  I  urge 
the  student  to  be  patient  and  perseverant.  Fur- 
thermore, I  myself  entertain  always  a  friendly 
sentiment  toward  the  horse;  and  I  try  to  inculcate 
this  feeling  in  the  mind  of  the  student. 

RENDERING  THE  HAND 

To  "render  the  hand"  is  to  relax  the  tension  of  the 
reins,  either  by  movement  of  the  arms  or  by  loosen- 
ing the  grip  of  the  fingers.  It  is  not  the  same  as  to 
"abandon"  the  horse,  as  already  discussed.  Since, 
in  equitation,  the  various  means  act  by  strength 
of  effects  rather  than  by  effects  of  strength,  they 
tend  to  lose  their  effect  the  longer  they  are  con- 
tinued. We  must,  then,  cease  the  effect  for  a  longer 
or  shorter  time,  in  order  to  renew  the  sensibility. 
Raabe,  Baucher,  and  Fillis,  although  they  evidently 
themselves  employed  the  device,  seem  not  to  have 
thought  it  necessary  to  discuss  or  teach  it. 

157 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

I  recognize,  in  rendering  the  hand,  three  different 
actions. 

The  first  occurs  when  the  horse  has  his  head 
flexed  at  the  axoid  articulation,  and  the  muscles 
of  the  neck,  being  under  restraint  by  the  tension 
of  the  reins,  begin  to  show  fatigue,  stiffness,  and 
a  failure  of  sensibility.  But  if,  after  a  time,  the 
rider  eases  this  tension,  either  by  advancing  the 
hand  or  by  letting  the  reins  slip  in  his  fingers,  he 
allows  the  animal  to  rest  his  muscles,  and  renders 
his  hand  in  the  first  sense. 

The  second  way  of  rendering  the  hand  depends 
on  fingering.  When  the  head  is  flexed,  as  in  the 
first  instance,  the  rider's  control  over  the  neck  is 
by  way  of  the  lower  jaw.  But  since  the  bars  are  of 
uncertain  sensibility,  if  the  mouth  remains  closed 
notwithstanding  the  pressure  of  the  bit,  the  con- 
traction at  the  tempero-maxillaris  articulation  will 
be  communicated  to  the  alto-axoid.  The  result 
is  still  greater  fatigue,  stiffness,  and  loss  of  sensi- 
bility. But  when  the  neck  is  flexed  and  the  bit  in 
contact  with  the  bars,  pressure  of  the  fingers  on 
the  reins  opens  the  mouth,  while  cessation  of  this 
pressure  allows  it  to  close.  This  cessation  of  the 
pressure  which  has  flexed  the  lower  jaw  is  rendering 
the  hand  in  the  second  sense.  The  repetition  of  this 
flexing  and  rendering  constitutes  fingering. 

" Fingering"  is  the  only  possible  translation  of 
the  French,  doighter,  used  by  musicians  to  mean 
the  delicate  sensibility  by  which  they  distinguish 

158 


Figure  20.  TO  RENDER  THE  HAND 


THE  FLEXIONS  MOUNTED 

the  quality  of  pressure  which  they  exert  upon  their 
instruments  to  make  them  produce  the  exact 
quality  of  sound  which  renders  the  musical  phrase. 
Their  instruments,  however,  are  machines  which 
do  not  tire;  whereas  the  horse  is  a  creature  with 
bones,  muscles,  nerves,  and  will,  capable  of  fatigue, 
and  needing  relaxation,  lest  the  will  move  nerves 
and  muscles  to  resist.  It  is,  therefore,  to  prevent 
the  state  of  revolt  occasioned  by  fatigue  that  we 
must,  though  always  retaining  the  contact,  render 
the  fingers,  so  that  the  horse  vibrates  under  the 
rider's  control,  without  excessive  fatigue. 

The  third  sort  of  rendering  the  hand  consists  in 
allowing  the  horse  to  place  its  head  and  neck  in  a 
position  other  than  that  which  they  have  been 
holding  under  the  rider's  control.  The  horse  has 
completed  a  series  of  movements,  head  in  position 
and  fixed  point  at  the  atlas  region.  The  contraction 
starting  from  this  point  tends  to  create  weariness, 
so  that  the  horse  needs  to  rest  this  region.  The 
rider,  therefore,  by  lengthening  his  reins,  lets  the 
horse  extend  his  neck.  The  fixed  point  shifts  from 
the  atlas  region  to  the  shoulders,  and  the  horse 
rests.  This  action  of  rendering  has  to  be  learned 
by  the  horse,  first  standing;  then  progressively  at 
walk,  trot,  and  gallop.  (Figure  20.) 


CHAPTER  XX 

PLACING  THE  HORSE  AND  THE  VARIANTS 
FROM  THE  "IN  HAND0 

AFTER  the  discussions  of  the  preceding  chapters, 
there  still  remain  certain  matters,  which  either  have 
not  been  touched  upon  at  all  or  else  require  still 
further  elucidation  at  this  point. 

PLACING  THE  HORSE 

To  "place  the  horse "  is  to  put  him  into  whatever 
position  he  needs  to  take  in  order  to  understand  or 
to  execute  the  particular  movement  which  is  next 
to  be  asked  of  him.  This  is  really  one  of  the 
difficult  parts  of  the  art  of  equitation;  but  the 
esquire  who  understands  placing  has  always  the 
assurance  that  the  following  movement  will  be 
correctly  performed,  since  it  is  by  the  proper  posi- 
tion that  the  rider  appeals  to  the  animal's  intelli- 
gence and  at  the  same  time  paralyzes  any  sign  of 
insubordination.  The  principle  seems  paradoxical 
to  the  rider  who  merely  experiments,  but  for  the 
experienced  master,  the  position  thus  taken  by 
the  four  legs  of  the  animal  is  the  only  one  which 
supports  the  weight  equally  on  all  its  members.  It 
is,  therefore,  the  sine  qua  non  of  equilibrium,  with- 
out which  the  movement  is  impossible. 

Nothing,  therefore,  is  more  invariably  true  than 

1 60 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

the  principle  enunciated  by  Baucher:  "The  position 
gives  the  movement.'*  The  fact  is,  a  horse,  well 
conformed,  healthy,  and  well  mounted,  when  un- 
der transmitted  equilibrium,  finds  it  much  more 
difficult,  physically  and  morally,  to  alter  that  state 
and  refuse  the  movement  asked,  than  to  obey.  The 
proof  is  that  the  same  movement,  asked  of  an 
inferior  animal,  will  result  in  revolt. 

It  is  evident,  then,  that  the  horse  is  compelled, 
by  the  condition  of  transmitted  equilibrium,  to 
seek  instinctively  that  state  of  balance  which 
involves  a  less  physical  effort  in  executing  any 
change  of  gait  or  direction,  than  when  it  is  not  in 
balance.  After  this  position  of  balance  is  given  by 
the  rider,  the  horse  will  not  refuse  to  execute  a 
movement  which  does  not  compromise  the  condi- 
tion. This  is  the  reason  why  the  competent  esquire, 
who  knows  how  to  place  his  horse  preliminary  to 
the  movement,  never  has  a  restive  or  disobedient 
animal.  What  is  more,  if  a  well-educated  horse, 
accustomed  to  the  position  of  equilibrium,  is  by 
circumstances  put  out  of  that  state,  it  is  simply  lost 
and  does  not  know  what  to  do  with  itself.  But,  of 
course,  riding  of  this  sort  is  no  offhand  matter.  It 
requires  study  and  knowledge,  time  and  self-control. 

But,  unfortunately,  there  is  always  the  rider 
who,  for  example,  asks  of  his  mount  the  turn  to  one 
side  at  the  trot,  but  neglects  first  to  place  the  horse 
in  the  position  which  makes  the  movement  possible. 
The  animal  necessarily  refuses.  To  whom  belongs 

161 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  fault?  Obviously,  to  the  man.  Yet  it  is  the 
horse  who  is  blamed  and  punished.  But  will  the 
punishment  change  a  law  of  nature?  The  more 
the  poor  brute  is  abused,  the  less  is  it  correctly 
placed  to  execute  the  movement.  No  horse  will 
ever  refuse  what  is  asked,  when  its  rider  has  pre- 
viously made  sure  that  the  placement  is  right. 

A  standing  horse  is  correctly  placed  when  the 
four  legs,  perpendicular  to  the  ground,  form  a 
rectangle.  In  this  position,  each  leg  bears  one 
quarter  of  the  entire  weight.  Very  few  horses, 
however,  take  and  keep  this  position  instinctively. 
They  have  to  be  trained  to  it.  In  order,  then,  to 
place  the  horse,  the  rider  needs  to  understand  the 
diagonal  effect  for  standing,  walking,  and  trotting, 
and  the  lateral  effect  for  the  gallop,  since  these 
effects  are  the  only  means  for  correcting  a  wrong 
position  and  for  maintaining  the  horse  straight. 

THE  STRAIGHT  HORSE 

A  HORSE  is  said  to  be  straight  when  the  whole 
spinal  column,  from  the  atlas  to  the  last  sacral 
vertebra,  is  precisely  in  line. 

For  the  spine  of  a  horse  is  like  the  keel  of  a  boat. 
One  could  not  steer  a  boat  with  a  crooked  keel, 
without  strain  on  the  hull  and  a  waste  of  force  on 
the  rudder.  Even  more  true  is  it  for  the  horse  that, 
with  a  crooked  spine,  the  four  legs  will  not  carry 
equal  weights,  and  the  steps  and  strides,  with  their 
resultant,  the  gaits,  will  not  be  square  and  equal. 

162 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

Therefore  does  the  reasoned  equitation  accept  as 
sine  qua  non  the  two  basal  principles,  "straight" 
and  "  forward. "  Indeed,  if  the  horse  is  not  straight, 
it  cannot  go  forward,  but  advances  in  the  direction 
in  which  the  spine  points.  Then  are  the  steps  and 
strides  not  equal,  the  coupling  yields  more  to  one 
side  than  to  the  other,  and  carries  with  it  the  pelvis, 
the  haunches,  and  the  hind  legs.  On  the  other 
hand,  when  the  spinal  column  is  straight,  the 
coupling  gives  equally,  the  pelvis  becomes  the 
center  for  the  motion  of  the  two  hind  legs,  the 
fore  and  hind  parts  of  the  body  act  in  unison, 
collection  and  assemblage  become  possible,  and, 
equilibrium  being  secured,  the  center  of  gravity 
finds  its  natural  place  in  the  medial  plane.  In  this 
condition,  strides,  steps,  and  gaits  become  equal 
and  square,  the  horse  suffers  less  fatigue  and  wear, 
and  continues  in  the  best  condition  to  develop  its 
natural  and  instinctive  forces. 

Very  few  riders,  amateurs  or  masters,  are  able  to 
put  a  horse  exactly  straight,  and  to  keep  it  so 
while  they  carry  it  forward  or  backward.    Yet 
nothing  whatever  can  be  done  properly  by  a  horse 
which  is  not  straight. 

FORWARD 

En  avant,  as  the  French  say,  means  not  only  for- 
ward, but  in  addition,  the  condition  of  the  horse 
when  in  contact  with  the  bit  and  ready  to  advance 
frankly  and  without  hesitation  at  the  effects  of  the 

163 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

rider's  legs.  One  often  hears  a  master  say,  "This 
horse  is  not  enough  forward, "  meaning  that  the 
animal  is  behind,  not  upon,  the  rider's  hand. 

Of  the  two  equestrian  axioms,  straight  and  for- 
ward, this  is  the  more  important,  since  it  is  easier 
to  have  the  horse  straight  when  going  forward  than 
when  standing  still.  It  is  from  this  state  of  forward- 
ness that  everything  else  becomes  possible;  so  that, 
very  often,  even  after  a  horse  is  far  advanced  in  its 
training,  it  has  to  be  carried  forward  again,  before 
its  education  can  be  continued  successfully.  From 
the  beginning  of  the  equestrian  art,  by  the  oldest 
masters,  this  state  of  forwardness  has  been  com- 
mended. I  am,  therefore,  of  the  opinion  of  Fillis, 
who  reiterates,  "Forward,  again  forward,  always 
forward."  One  may  turn  the  rudder  of  a  boat  as 
much  as  he  likes,  but  if  the  boat  has  not  way, 
the  rudder  is  without  effect.  It  is  the  same  with  a 
horse;  first  forward,  then  direction. 

Unfortunately,  it  is  very  much  easier  to  keep 
the  fore  hand  straight  and  forward  by  the  natural 
tact  given  to  a  man's  hands  than  to  develop  in  his 
legs  the  purely  artificial  tact  which  comes  only  with 
long  practice.  Nevertheless,  a  horse  is  neither 
forward  nor  straight,  when  anything  is  wrong  or 
crooked  at  the  coupling. 

THE  REIN  OF  OPPOSITION 

BOTH  the  reasoned  and  the  scientific  equitation  use 
the  term,  "rein  of  opposition,"  to  mean  whatever 

164 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

effects  have  to  be  used  to  counteract  the  fault  of  a 
horse  which  is  unequal  in  its  movements,  and  which 
refuses  to  be  put  straight  or  to  stay  straight.  The 
matter  is  seldom  taught;  and  the  causes,  effects, 
and  corrections  have  been  quite  ignored.  Authors 
who  have  mentioned  rein  of  opposition  have  not 
explained  it  clearly.  Frankly,  I  suspect  that  very 
few  men  have  really  understood  it. 

Unhappily,  very  few  horses  are  straight  when 
mounted,  for  reasons  which  are  discussed  in  part 
under  the  captions,  " Weight "  and  "Seat."  But 
the  horse  with  a  tendency  to  have  the  spine  crooked 
tends  also  to  stride  unequally,  in  order  to  compen- 
sate for  the  first  defect.  This  we  correct  by  means 
of  the  rein  of  opposition. 

Suppose,  for  example,  that,  instead  of  walking, 
trotting,  or  galloping  straight,  a  horse  turns  its 
haunches  to  the  right.  The  haunches  are  ap- 
parently at  fault,  so  we  will  start  our  problem  from 
them.  The  masters  tell  us  to  push  the  haunches  to 
the  left  with  the  right  leg.  This  is  an  error,  in  that 
it  attacks  the  consequence  and  neglects  the  cause. 
The  real  trouble  is  that  the  left  front  leg  is  making 
a  shorter  stride  than  the  right.  The  left  hind  leg 
has,  therefore,  too  little  space  for  its  step,  and 
comes  to  the  ground  too  soon  and  too  near  the 
right.  This  pushes  the  back  part  of  the  body  to 
the  right,  and  throws  the  line  of  motion  of  the 
right  hind  leg  out  of  parallelism  with  the  axis  of  the 
body.  The  rider  can,  indeed,  for  the  moment,  push 

165 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  croup  over  with  his  right  leg.  But  the  effect 
soon  evaporates,  and  the  haunches  return  to  their 
former  place.  It  is  all  labor  without  end,  not  a 
corrective. 

But  why  does  the  left  front  leg  not  gain  ground 
equally  with  the  right  ?  For  a  great  many  reasons, 
which  are  all,  at  bottom,  one.  The  weight  is  more 
upon  the  right  fore  leg,  so  that  this  has  to  reach  out 
farther  at  each  stride  to  check  the  forward  fall  of 
the  body.  The  point,  then,  is  to  equalize  the  load 
on  the  two  front  legs.  This  we  can  do  by  pressing 
with  the  right  rein  against  the  right  side  of  the  neck 
so  as  to  throw  the  head  over  to  the  left,  until  the 
two  fore  legs  are  loaded  equally.  Then  the  left 
fore  leg  will  reach  out  farther,  and  allow  room  for 
the  full  stride  of  the  left  hind  leg.  This,  in  turn, 
will  no  longer  push  over  the  right  hind  leg,  and  the 
horse  will  travel  straight. 

But,  to  go  back  another  step,  why  was  the  weight 
not  equal  on  the  two  fore  legs?  The  answer  is  that 
the  spine  was  crooked.  By  using  a  rein  of  opposition 
on  the  side  opposite  to  the  shorter  stride,  we  correct 
the  wrong  position  of  the  haunches.  This  means  of 
placing  the  spine  straight  will  be  understood  by  a 
horse  whose  progressive  education  has  gone  so  far 
as  to  include  the  pirouette. 

THE  REIN  OF  CONTRACTION 

THE  rein  of  contraction  is  a  complex  and  special 
effect  of  a  rein,  which,  bearing  on  one  side  of  the 

166 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

neck,  pushes  the  shoulder  toward  the  opposite 
side. 

For  example,  the  rider  desires  to  turn  his  horse  to 
the  right.  Holding  one  rein  in  each  hand,  the  right 
hand  immovable,  he  passes  his  left  hand  across, 
above  the  right,  so  that  the  rein  bears  upon  the 
muscles  of  the  left  side  of  the  neck.  The  horse, 
therefore,  contracts  these  muscles.  But,  since  his 
head  is  held  straight  by  the  fixity  of  the  right  rein, 
the  result  is  to  pull  the  left  fore  leg  over  toward  the 
right,  in  front  of  its  mate.  But  as  soon  as  the  left  leg 
takes  the  Weight,  the  right  leg  also  steps  toward 
the  right.  Repetition  of  the  contractive  effect  will 
compel  a  second  similar  step;  and  the  body  will 
turn  toward  the  right  impelled  by  the  hind  legs. 
In  order  for  the  horse  once  more  to  travel  straight 
ahead,  the  rein  of  contraction  ceases  its  effect  and 
returns  to  equality  with  the  other. 

This  action  of  the  rein  of  contraction  is  what  is 
commonly  called  " guiding  by  the  neck."  I  do  not, 
however,  understand  that  the  expression,  to  "guide 
by  the  neck/'  must  always  mean  the  rein  of  contrac- 
tion. With  the  rein  of  opposition  or  with  the  rein 
direct,  the  horse  is  also  always  guided  by  the  neck. 
But  these  are  really  three  different  effects. 

IN  HAND 

A  HORSE  is  said  to  be  "in  hand"  when  the  bars  are 
in  contact  with  the  bit  with  which  the  rider's  hand 
communicates  through  the  reins. 

167 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

From  the  invention  of  the  bridle,  the  "in  hand" 
has  been  the  subject  of  the  researches,  writings, 
methods,  and  principles  of  the  masters  of  every 
epoch  and  age.  A  horse  so  placed  has  its  head 
perpendicular  to  the  ground,  and  therefore  parallel 
to  its  fore  legs.  But,  unhappily,  the  myology  and 
the  physical  structure  of  the  horse,  and  the  prin- 
ciple of  gravitation,  have  not  always  been  as  well 
understood  as  now  by  these  masters;  with  the 
result  that  each  one  of  them  has  created  his  own 
"in  hand."  When  we  consider  the  saddles  which 
force  the  rider  to  sit  bolt  upright  with  the  legs 
extended  downward  like  crutches,  the  severity  of 
the  ancient  bits,  the  heaviness  of  the  horses,  and 
the  movements  demanded  of  them  for  tourney, 
carrousel,  and  battle  corps-a-corps,  we  understand 
why  the  riders  and  masters  favored  so  exaggerated 
a  position.  Moreover,  in  earlier  days  the  horse 
carried  his  neck  flexed  at  the  fourth  vertebra,  more 
to  show  its  elegance  than  for  reasons  of  utility.  It 
is  only  in  our  own  time  that  the  development  of 
racing  has  emphasized  the  idea  of  speed,  and, 
ignoring  elegance,  has  altered  the  "in  hand"  to 
the  position  which,  while  favoring  obedience  to 
the  rider's  effects,  does  not  interfere  with  the  action 
of  the  animal  mechanism. 

All  modern  uses  of  the  horse  for  riding  ask  the 
"in  hand."  The  scientific  equitation  asks  also  that 
the  head  shall  be  "upon  the  hand."  Baucher 
required  the  horse  to  be  "  in  front  of  the  rider's  legs 

168 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

and  behind  the  hand."  Raabe  asked  the  horse  to 
be  "before  the  rider's  legs  and  in  the  hand."  The 
scientific  equitation  calls  for  a  horse  "  before  the 
legs  and  upon  the  hand." 

• 

UPON  THE  HAND 

WHEN  the  horse  is  "  upon  the  hand,"  there  is  a  state 
of  contact  of  the  lower  jaw  upon  the  bit  which 
makes  possible  the  communication  of  sensation  in 
both  directions  by  way  of  the  reins,  between  the 
horse's  bars  and  the  rider's  hand. 

Orator  and  musician  must  be  in  communication 
with  their  hearers  by  means  of  voice  or  instrument. 
It  is  not  otherwise  with  the  horse.  From  the  bit, 
the  sensations  pass  along  the  nerves  to  the  brain, 
the  will  is  formed,  and  the  appropriate  message  is 
returned  along  the  nerves  to  the  muscles.  These, 
contracting  upon  the  joints,  produce  the  movement. 
But  as  soon  as  this  contact  ceases,  there  is  an  end 
to  the  series  of  sensation,  transmission,  volition, 
and  act.  The  horse  passes  under  the  control  of  its 
own  instinctive  forces,  and  is  no  longer  subject  to 
the  will  of  the  rider. 

It  is  like  the  blind  man  led  by  his  dog.  So  long  as 
the  cord  between  them  remains  tight,  so  long  will 
the  man  follow  it.  But  if  the  dog  stops,  the  cord 
slackens;  and  the  man  also  stops,  uncertain  and 
hesitating,  because  communication  is  broken.  The 
case  is  exactly  the  same  when  for  the  blind  man  we 
substitute  the  horse,  and  for  the  dog  the  rider.  The 

169 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

rider  ceases  to  impel  the  horse  forward.  The  reins 
are  loose.  The  contact  is  broken.  The  horse  stops, 
not  knowing  where  to  go. 

But  if  this  state  of  contact  between  hand  and 
mouth  is  important  for  the  ordinary  equitation,  it  is 
a  great  deal  more  necessary  for  the  scientific,  since 
this  is  founded  upon  the  principles  of  equilib- 
rium, collection,  the  assemblage  of  forces  continu- 
ally united  in  the  medial  plane  and  establishing  the 
center  of  gravity. 

From  the  earliest  days  of  equitation,  every  rider 
has  studied  the  "in  hand"  by  means  more  or  less 
rational.  But  so  many  mistakes  have  been  made 
that  I  must  try  to  explain  the  precise  nature  of  the 
first  element  of  the  "in  hand,"  the  contact.  It  is, 
however,  a  difficult  matter  to  explain  a  feeling  in 
words,  and  though  comparisons  are  useful  to  illus- 
trate a  point,  I  shall  have  to  ask  the  indulgence  of 
reader  and  student. 

I  touch  elsewhere  upon  assemblage  and  col- 
lection. 

FORWARD  OF  THE  HAND 

A  HORSE  is  forward  of  the  hand,  if,  on  its  own 
initiative,  it  goes  forward  against  the  bit,  according 
to  its  own  will,  disposition,  or  temperament,  instead 
of  conforming  to  the  impulsion  of  the  rider's  legs. 
If  this  exuberance  is  not  the  result  of  unsoundness, 
viciousness,  bad  conformation,  or  bad  habit,  it  is 
more  a  merit  than  a  defect  in  a  saddle  horse,  since  it 

170 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

is  easily  remedied  by  proper  education,  while  the 
underlying  good  quality  still  remains. 

BEHIND  THE  HAND 

A  HORSE  is,  on  the  contrary,  said  to  be  behind  the 
hand  when  it  is  loath  to  take  contact  with  the  bit. 
This  may  occur  for  either  of  two  reasons.  A  young 
horse  may  have  become  discouraged  by  being 
ridden  under  a  hand  without  tact,  which  has 
maintained  the  contact  too  long,  or  has  shaken  too 
severely.  Or  the  trouble  may  be  weakness  of  hocks, 
haunches,  loins,  spine,  or  of  the  ilio-spinalis  muscle 
or  the  great  pectoralis. 

Evidently,  if  the  horse  lacks  strength  in  those 
parts  of  its  mechanism  which  drive  its  body  for- 
ward, it  will  hesitate  to  go  forward  against  the 
bit;  and  will,  in  consequence,  be  behind  the  hand. 
Similarly,  the  horse  which,  at  the  beginning  of  its 
training,  was  willing  to  enter  into  contact,  but  has 
become  discouraged,  fearing  the  rider's  tactless 
hand  and  the  resulting  pain,  is  really  in  an  analo- 
gous condition  to  the  weak  horse.  In  either  case, 
the  fault  must  be  remedied,  since  an  animal  which 
the  rider  cannot  send  against  the  bit  is  at  all  times 
ready  to  stop  and  enter  into  revolt.  If  the  horse  is 
behind  the  hand  because  it  is  badly  conformed  and 
weak,  training  is  the  cure.  But  if  the  horse  is  well 
conformed  and  strong,  and  still  stays  behind  the 
hand,  the  remedy  is  education  —  more  often  for 
the  rider  than  for  the  horse. 

171 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

It  is,  then,  somewhere  between  a  horse  that  is 
forward  of  the  hand  and  one  that  is  behind,  that 
we  find  the  ideal  condition,  "  upon  the  hand.'*  The 
first  two  sorts  of  horse  are  out  of  the  man's  control. 
The  one  because  it  takes  the  initiative  for  itself; 
the  other  because  it  does  not  respond  to  that  of  the 
rider.  The  third  is  under  control,  because  the 
forward  impulse  of  the  rider's  legs  is  received  by 
the  rider's  hand,  which,  by  means  of  the  fingering, 
accepts  it  and  lets  it  pass  forward,  or  denies  it  and 
sends  it  back,  accepts  and  raises,  accepts  and  directs. 

The  first  sort,  therefore,  pulls  on  the  bit,  because 
it  pushes  by  its  own  will.  The  second  sort  does  not 
pull,  because  it  cannot  or  will  not  push.  The  third 
pushes  just  so  much  as  is  indicated  by  the  legs  of 
the  rider,  who,  by  his  fingering,  accepts  or  prevents 
the  pulling.  The  first  horse  will  push,  pull,  and  run 
away.  The  second  horse  will  stop,  kick,  and  rear. 
The  third  cannot  perform  other  movements  than 
those  asked  by  its  rider. 

LIGHT  IN  HAND 

Lbger  a  la  main  has  long  been  used  by  masters 
of  equitation  to  describe  a  horse  which  responds 
calmly  and  readily  to  the  gentle  and  progressive 
effects  of  the  rider's  hand. 

But  the  horse  light  in  hand  is  not  at  all  the 
animal  which  escapes  the  contact  of  the  bit  on  its 
bars  by  shaking  its  head  in  every  direction.  Noth- 
ing is  easier  for  a  human  being  than  to  be  a  law- 

172 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

abiding  citizen  on  a  continent  by  himself.  Very 
possibly  the  same  man  would  be  a  criminal  if  he 
were  living  in  the  society  of  others.  Likewise,  a 
horse  which  refuses  contact  with  the  bit  cannot  be 
directed.  Nobody  knows  in  advance  what  it  will 
do,  acting  by  itself  and  without  means  of  control. 
The  horse  which  is  light  in  hand  accepts  the  contact 
of  the  bit,  without  altering  its  speed  or  gait,  its  head 
slightly  out  of  the  perpendicular,  its  neck  directed 
upward  from  the  withers  to  the  atlas  region,  and 
opens  its  mouth  if  the  rider's  hand  insists  on  the 
contact,  but  without  changing  the  cadence  of  its 
step.  But  if  this  lightness  in  hand  is  a  test  of  the  qual- 
ity of  the  horse's  education,  it  is  also  a  test  of  the 
rider's  skill.  Only  with  accuracy  of  seat  will  the 
rider's  legs  act  with  precision  to  obtain  the  propul- 
sion forward.  Only  with  accuracy  of  seat  will  the 
hand  judge  correctly  its  own  effect  upon  the  mouth. 
If  hands  and  legs  are  used  to  correct  faults  of  seat, 
the  horse  cannot  be  light  in  hand.  Bad  seat,  bad 
hand,  bad  legs;  good  seat,  good  hands,  good  legs; 
accurate  seat,  accurate  hand,  accurate  legs  —  it  all 
sums  up  in  the  words,  "  equestrian  tact."  Any 
horse,  well  conformed  and  well  ridden,  is  always 
light  in  hand. 

TO  LIGHTEN  A  HORSE 

So  Newcastle  translated  alleger  son  cheval.  Since 
the  horse,  at  the  beginning  of  its  education,  does 
not  understand  the  effects  of  hands  and  legs,  and  is 

173 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

not  wonted  to  the  pressure  of  the  girths  and  the 
weight  on  its  spine,  it  contracts  its  body  and  is 
heavy.  But  a  horse  of  good  conformation,  breeding, 
and  temper  is  naturally  energetic,  so  that  it  is  very 
easy  to  lighten  such  an  animal  by  a  wise  and  pro- 
gressive education.  A  more  ordinary  horse,  with- 
out these  native  qualities,  requires  the  training  of 
an  able  master.  Yet  any  horse  can,  by  education,  be 
sufficiently  lightened  to  be  mounted  with  pleasure. 

The  old  equitation  advocates  for  a  heavy  animal, 
great  vigor  and  energy  in  the  effects  of  hand,  and 
still  more  of  legs,  helped  out  by  spurs.  Nothing  can 
be  more  wrong.  If  the  horse  is  heavy  because  it  does 
not  understand  the  meaning  of  hands  and  legs,  and 
therefore  contracts  itself,  surely  it  is  not  by  still 
severer  effects  that  the  horse  will  be  cured  of  its 
apprehension.  On  the  contrary,  it  is  only  by  es- 
pecial lightness  of  effects,  applied  cautiously  and 
progressively,  that  the  trainer  will  make  these  so 
pleasant  to  the  animal  that  it  will  receive  them 
without  fear,  contraction,  or  heaviness. 

Thus  we  come  back  always  to  the  same  principle, 
strength  of  effects,  not  effects  of  strength:  intelli- 
gence, not  brute  force.  The  rider  who  understands 
and  puts  into  practice  the  principles  of  an  eques- 
trian method  with  a  heavy  horse,  will  very  soon  find 
himself  with  a  light  one. 

THE  INTELLIGENT  HAND 

AN  intelligent  hand  is  one  which,  at  all  times,  under 

174 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

every  condition  and  circumstance,  no  matter  what 
the  motion,  action,  gait,  or  speed,  the  state  of  obe- 
dience or  revolt,  understands  instinctively  every 
impression  that  comes  from  the  horse's  mouth, 
and  is  ready  at  once  to  accept,  refuse,  counter- 
act, or  suppress  both  the  effect  and  the  cause. 

The  English  expressions,  "fine  hand,"  and 
"light  hand,"  suggest  the  skill  of  the  pianist  or 
the  prestidigitator,  whose  tools  have  no  will  of 
their  own.  The  intelligent  hand  responds  to  and 
controls  the  vital  forces  of  a  creature  animated  by 
the  will  to  live.  The  hands  of  the  rider  are  two 
vowels  of  the  equestrian  alphabet ;  the  legs  are  two 
consonants ;  accuracy  of  seat  unites  the  four  letters 
into  a  word  of  the  language  with  which  rider  and 
horse  communicate.  If  a  letter  is  lacking,  or  if  the 
word  is  not  formed,  then  there  is  no  sense. 

All  this  is  no  dream,  no  illusion  of  the  mind.  It  is 
a  fact,  a  reality;  albeit,  it  is  understood  only  by 
the  master  who  knows  the  language  and  appreciates 
the  significance  of  each  letter  and  each  combina- 
tion, as  the  educated  horse  understands  them.  A 
fine  hand  means  nothing.  A  hard  hand  is  a  fault. 
An  intelligent  hand  is  all  in  all. 

ACCORD 

A  RIDER  is  in  accord  with  his  horse  when  his  aids 
are  in  correct  ratio  to  one  another  and  to  the 
movement  which  is  required  of  the  horse. 

The  rider's  hand  retains,  sustains,  and  directs 

175 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

the  forward  impulse  of  his  legs.  But  if  the  legs 
produce  a  greater  impulse  than  the  hand  can 
receive,  the  center  of  gravity  will  pass  to  the  fore 
hand.  Contrawise,  if  the  hand  produces  a  greater 
effect  than  the  legs  can  overcome,  the  center  of 
gravity  will  shift  to  the  hind  legs,  and  the  forward 
impulse  will  be  lost.  In  either  case  there  is  lack  of 
accord.  Again,  suppose  that  the  rider  wishes  to 
carry  his  horse  forward  at  a  walk.  If  thereupon  the 
legs  produce  so  powerful  an  effect  that  the  hand 
cannot  receive  it,  the  horse  will  take  the  trot.  Legs 
and  hand,  rider  and  horse,  are  not  in  accord. 

Not  only,  however,  must  the  rider's  effects  be  in 
accord  with  one  another  in  order  to  obtain  the  gait 
or  the  movement  asked,  they  must,  in  addition,  be 
in  accord  with  the  nature  and  energy  of  the  horse. 
The  rider,  therefore,  to  obtain  any  particular 
movement,  has  to  ask  that  particular  movement  by 
adjusting  accurately  his  effects  to  that  movement, 
not  to  some  other.  Otherwise,  horse  and  man  are 
not  in  accord,  because  the  man's  effects  do  not 
match  his  special  demand. 

THE  CENTER  OF  GRAVITY 

THE  center  of  gravity  of  any  body  is  that  point 
upon  which  the  body  will  balance  in  all  positions. 
The  balance  of  our  own  bodies  upon  the  legs, 
which  support  the  weight  and  prevent  it  from  fall- 
ing to  the  ground  at  each  step,  is  so  familiar  and 
instinctive  that  we  fail  to  appreciate  it  or  to  reflect 

176 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

on  the  consequences  if  that  balance  were  to  be  for 
one  moment  destroyed.  Gravitation  is  really  an 
essential  condition  of  our  natural  existence,  like 
the  air  we  breathe.  Its  force  is  precisely  measured 
by  a  body's  weight. 

Every  animal,  therefore,  is  under  the  influence  of 
two  forces,  the  inert  pull  of  gravity,  and  the  active 
force  of  its  own  muscles.  So  long  as  the  animal  is 
recumbent,  its  weight  is  immobile,  and  it  is  in  a 
position  of  inertia.  To  change  this  position  under 
the  first  force,  the  second,  the  contractive  force,  is 
needed.  This  is  developed  by  the  muscles,  by  a 
tension  sufficient  to  support  the  weight  immobile 
upon  the  legs.  But  in  order  to  propel  the  weight  in 
any  direction,  the  animal  needs  a  contractive  force 
greater  than  that  needed  to  keep  the  weight  im- 
mobile. Therefore  must  the  muscular  force  be 
sufficient  for  both  the  weight  and  the  velocity. 

Sir  Isaac  Newton  teaches  that  the  motion  of  an 
animal  is  a  series  of  falls,  received  and  prevented 
by  advancing  one  leg  after  the  other.  Since  the 
force  of  gravity  is  constant,  the  velocity  does  not 
affect  it.  But  the  velocity  does  affect  the  momen- 
tum, which  varies  directly  with  the  frequency  of  the 
falls.  The  greater  the  velocity,  the  more  do  the  bases 
of  support  multiply  their  action ;  and  consequently 
the  flatter  becomes  the  trajectory,  and  the  more 
perfect  the  equilibrium  of  the  forces  involved. 

With  horses  of  good  conformation,  the  center 
of  gravity  is  well  established.  But  with  horses  of 

177 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

deficient  conformation,  its  position  is  variable,  and 
this  hinders  the  union  of  the  animal's  forces  at  any 
center.  Though  its  proper  place  is  at  the  middle  of 
the  spine  when  the  horse  is  collected,  it  seldom  is 
actually  located  here  until  after  the  horse  has  been 
trained.  The  beautiful  conformation  only  makes 
the  training  easier.  But,  of  course,  the  horse  has 
also  its  instinctive  center  of  gravity,  when  at 
liberty,  without  a  rider  to  direct  its  movements, 
gaits,  and  speed. 

With  these  principles  in  mind,  it  becomes  easy  to 
understand  the  defenses  of  the  horse.  If  the  horse 
kicks,  rears,  or  runs  away,  the  cause  is  always  the 
wrong  location  of  the  center  of  gravity.  Kicking 
means  that  the  center  is  in  the  shoulders;  rearing, 
that  it  is  in  the  haunches;  running  away,  that  it  is 
in  the  spine,  but  too  much  forward  of  the  middle. 

The  constant  object  of  the  rider  is,  then,  to  keep 
the  center  of  gravity  where  it  belongs.  Equitation 
cannot  completely  alter  bad  construction  of  the 
locomotor  organs;  but  it  can  ameliorate  the  effect 
by  modifying  the  cause.  By  uniting  the  animal's 
forces  at  the  proper  point,  one  can  paralyze  the 
defenses  of  a  badly  conformed  animal.  This  is  the 
reason  why  the  masters  have  maintained  that  a 
well-conformed  horse  cannot  defend  itself,  without 
destroying  the  harmony  of  its  conformation,  and 
at  the  expense  of  a  very  great  increase  of  muscular 
effort,  to  give  the  power  needed  to  displace  the  cen- 
ter of  gravity. 

178 


PLACING  THE  HORSE 

For  these  reasons,  also,  the  scientific  equitation 
insists  on  the  absolute  necessity  of  giving  to  the 
horse  a  factitious  equilibrium  in  place  of  that  which 
comes  by  instinct;  not  only  in  order  to  prevent 
disobedience,  but  also  to  remedy  faults  of  con- 
formation by  a  due  combination  of  the  animal's 
forces  at  the  center  of  gravity.  The  entire  education 
of  the  horse  is,  indeed,  toward  this  result. 

When  the  center  of  gravity  is  established,  the 
horse  is  in  a  condition  of  equilibrium.  The  weight 
of  the  man,  combining  with  that  of  the  animal,  be- 
comes, by  its  position,  an  essential  element  in  main- 
taining the  center  of  gravity,  in  direct  ratio  to  the 
displacement  of  this  new  force,  forward,  backward, 
to  right  or  left  of  the  perpendicular.  If  the  man's 
weight  shifts  forward,  the  excess  compels  the  horse 
to  advance  a  base  of  support  in  order  to  prevent 
the  fall.  In  this  case,  the  center  of  gravity  does  not 
alter;  the  change  is  of  the  momentum.  It  is  the 
same  with  movement  backward,  or  to  right  or  left, 
always  supposing  that  the  horse  keeps  its  state  of 
equilibrium. 


CHAPTER  XXI 
THE  ASSEMBLAGE 

BY  means  of  the  foregoing  work,  which  has  been 
only  preparatory,  of  the  flexions,  the  mobiliza- 
tion of  the  fore  and  hind  hands,  and  the  movements 
backward,  the  cavalier  has  mastered  the  use  of  his 
various  means,  and  the  horse  has  come  to  under- 
stand their  effects.  The  rider  can  now  obtain  from 
his  horse  the  position  of  "in  hand."  Starting  with 
this  position,  and  using  all  the  effects  together,  the 
rider  should  now  be  able,  by  means  of  the  collection 
or  assemblage,  to  obtain  an  equilibrium  in  which 
all  the  animal's  forces  are  reunited  at  a  center  of 
gravity,  situated  exactly  beneath  his  own  weight, 
which,  in  its  turn,  bears  equally  and  perpendicu- 
larly on  the  spinal  column  of  the  horse. 

This  position,  obtained  and  continued  at  will  by 
the  cavalier,  is  the  great  ideal  of  equitation,  since 
it  gives  immediate  and  complete  control  of  the 
animal  by  the  man.  To  the  young  trainer,  at  first 
sight,  it  appears  difficult.  Yet  it  is  not.  If  one  has 
followed  the  progression  of  the  flexions  and  mobi- 
lizations, and  has  obtained  regularly  the  "  in  hand  " 
position,  he  will  also  secure,  without  too  much 
difficulty,  the  subsequent  position  of  equilibrium. 
But,  of  course,  the  conformation  of  the  horse,  both 

1 80 


THE  ASSEMBLAGE 

physical  and  moral,  also  enters  very  seriously  into 
the  problem. 

In  the  preceding  work  of  the  flexions  and  the 
mobilizations,  the  cavalier  has  used  the  effects  of 
hands  and  legs  separately.  But  to  obtain  the  state 
of  equilibrium  by  means  of  the  assemblage,  he 
must  employ  hands,  legs,  and  weight,  together. 
This  action  is  often  called  "effects  of  ensemble" 
since  it  requires  the  equalization  of  the  forces  of  the 
horse,  not  only  to  support  its  own  weight,  whether 
at  rest  or  in  motion,  but  also  to  carry  the  added 
weight  of  the  rider,  and  is  brought  about  by  ac- 
cordant effects  of  the  cavalier. 

In  short,  the  separate  effects  make  possible  the 
effects  of  ensemble.  These  effects  of  ensemble  pro- 
duce assemblage.  The  assemblage  gives  the  state 
of  equilibrium,  which  is  the  equal  balance  of  the 
entire  mechanism. 

From  the  beginning  of  equitation,  this  state  of 
equilibrium  of  rider  and  horse  has  been  the  subject 
of  researches  and  theories,  more  or  less  practical. 
Of  these,  Baucher's  is  the  most  reasonable.  More- 
over, this  grand  master  has  proved  experimentally 
the  existence  of  this  equilibrium,  and  the  fact  that 
it  is  produced  by  the  assemblage.  I  give  here  one  of 
Baucher's  tests  in  the  form  in  which  I  have  several 
times  repeated  them  for  myself. 

An  ordinary  saddle  horse,  properly  trained  but 
not  practiced  in  the  demonstration,  weighs  one 
thousand  pounds.  I  place  him,  without  saddle  or 

181 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

bridle,  with  his  hind  legs  on  one  of  two  platform 
scales  and  his  fore  feet  on  the  other.  If  he  took 
naturally  a  state  of  perfect  equilibrium,  he  would 
thereupon  register  a  weight  of  two  hundred  and 
fifty  pounds  with  each  foot,  five  hundred  pounds  at 
each  end. 

But  as  a  matter  of  fact,  the  forward  scales  regis- 
ter 612  pounds;  the  rear  scales  only  388.  The  horse 
will  not  distribute  his  weight  equally  between  the 
two  pairs  of  limbs,  unless  his  naturally  wrong  posi- 
tion is  rectified  by  the  demonstrator. 

For  this  purpose,  I  add  a  twelve-pound  saddle 
and  three  pounds  of  bridle ;  making  the  new  weight 
1015  pounds,  which  the  horse  distributes,  ten 
pounds  in  front  and  five  behind.  I  take  the  reins  of 
the  bit  and  raise  the  animal's  head.  At  once  the 
weights  change,  and  become  more  nearly  equal. 
The  front  scales  now  show  522  pounds  and  the 
rear  493.  Fifty  pounds  has  shifted  to  the  hind  legs. 

Still  keeping  the  head  up,  with  the  aid  of  a  whip, 
I  place  the  hind  legs  side  by  side,  and  both  per- 
pendicular to  the  horizontal  line  of  the  horse's 
spine.  All  the  while,  I  bear  lightly  on  the  bit  and 
flex  the  head  at  the  atlas  region.  The  scales  now 
indicate  510  pounds  on  the  fore  legs,  505  pounds  on 
the  rear  ones.  This  difference  of  five  pounds  arises 
from  the  impossibility  for  a  man  on  foot  of  keep- 
ing the  front  legs  exactly  perpendicular  upon  the 
scales  or  obtaining  perfect  flexion  at  the  atlas  region. 
Allowing  for  this  small  difference,  we  have  here  an 

182 


THE  ASSEMBLAGE 

undeniable  proof  of  a  state  of  transmitted  equilib- 
rium imposed  upon  the  animal  by  the  man. 

The  demonstration  is  still  more  striking  when  the 
horse  is  mounted.  I  weigh,  dressed,  172  pounds, 
a  total  weight  of  1187.  Letting  the  reins  lie  loose, 
I  find  that  the  scales  read  722  and  565  pounds. 
I  take  the  reins,  flex  the  horse's  head  and  neck 
to  bring  the  animal  "in  hand,"  and  at  the  same 
time,  by  the  contact  of  my  legs,  I  bring  the 
animal's  hind  legs  into  the  perpendicular  position. 
The  scales  now  read,  in  front  598,  behind  589,  a 
difference  of  only  nine  pounds.  In  this  particular 
case,  the  horse  had  become  pretty  nervous  from 
having  his  feet  on  the  unsteady  scale  platforms; 
and  in  order  to  keep  him  quiet,  I  had  been  neglect- 
ing my  own  position,  and  leaning  slightly  forward, 
for  the  sake  of  loading  the  fore  legs  and  keeping 
them  still.  As  soon  as  I  rectified  this,  and  sat  with 
head  and  body  erect,  the  forward  scales  read  stead- 
ily 593,  while  the  other  oscillated  between  592  and 
594  with  the  action  of  my  legs  in  trying  to  keep  the 
horse  perfectly  quiet.  It  was  a  convincing  dem- 
onstration. Moreover,  by  leaning  forward  or  back- 
ward with  the  head  very  erect,  I  could  always  take 
thirty-five  or  forty  pounds  from  the  reading  of 
either  scales  and  add  it  to  the  other. 

For  the  benefit  of  any  person  who  wishes  to 
repeat  these  tests,  I  add  certain  practical  sugges- 
tions from  my  own  experience.  I  find  that  one  of 
the  great  difficulties  is  to  keep  the  horse  calm  and 

183 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

still  upon  his  legs,  so  that  I  lost  a  great  deal  of 
time  and  the  data  were  less  accurate.  To  remedy 
this,  I  built  a  stall,  three  feet  by  twelve,  with  parti- 
tions four  feet  high.  The  scales,  I  placed  under 
ground,  the  platforms  level  with  the  surface,  and 
over  them  a  thin  layer  of  earth  or  tanbark  to  give 
the  horse  confidence  and  to  keep  it  from  slipping. 
If,  however,  the  apparatus  is  set  in  a  floor,  solid 
wooden  platforms  should  be  built  upon  the  scales, 
at  the  correct  distance  apart,  and  surfaced  with 
tanbark  or  dirt.  All  these  extra  weights  will,  of 
course,  have  to  be  allowed  for.  The  indicators  of 
the  scales  should  be  outside  the  stall. 

It  must  not  be  thought,  however,  that  Baucher, 
in  devising  this  experiment,  or  the  author  in  re- 
peating it,  had  any  idea  of  having  it  used  as  a 
means  of  training  the  horse  to  take  the  correct 
position.  Its  only  object  is  to  prove  to  the  student 
that  the  state  exists,  and  that  it  is  possible  to  ob- 
tain it  by  means  of  the  effects  and  aids. 

The  deductions  from  the  experiment  are  highly 
important.  It  proves  the  necessity  of  the  work  on 
the  flexions  of  mouth  and  neck,  since  without  these 
there  would  be  no  way  of  obtaining  the  "  in  hand." 
It  proves,  also,  the  necessity  of  mobilizing  the 
front  and  hind  hands,  since  without  this  the  horse 
could  not  be  placed  with  its  legs  vertical,  and 
therefore  the  weight  could  not  be  made  equal  on 
the  two  scales.  Finally,  it  proves  the  necessity  of 
the  suppling  of  the  loins  by  movement  backward, 

184 


THE  ASSEMBLAGE 

since  otherwise  the  hind  legs  could  not  be  brought 
into  the  perpendicular  relation  to  the  spine. 

So  long  as  the  horse  remains  at  rest  with  his 
four  limbs  perpendicular,  the  state  of  equilibrium 
can  be  demonstrated.  But  with  the  horse  in  action, 
only  the  eye  of  the  spectator  or  the  equestrian  tact 
of  the  rider,  through  his  seat,  can  detect  it.  The 
spectator  can  see  the  four  legs  leave  the  ground 
and  return,  two  by  two,  diagonally  at  walk,  trot, 
and  movement  backward. 

The  rider,  under  these  conditions,  feels  in  his  seat 
the  squareness  and  equality  both  of  the  different 
strides  and  of  each  step.  The  horse  gives  a  light 
and  agreeable  contact  upon  the  hand,  the  head  and 
neck  are  perfectly  steady  and  yet  firm,  while  the 
rider  feels  that,  with  the  least  tension  on  the  reins, 
the  neck  will  flex  like  an  elastic  band.  All  the  time 
he  feels  in  his  seat  that,  with  the  least  shifting  of 
his  weight  or  the  slightest  alteration  in  legs,  hand, 
body,  or  head,  the  equilibrium  will  vanish.  The 
animal  moves  between  the  rider  and  the  ground, 
rhythmically.  Every  joint  is  supple,  and  every 
part  of  the  mechanism  does  its  task  with  power, 
freedom,  and  in  perfect  synchrony.  Fillis,  the 
grand  master,  is  right  when  he  says,  "The  rider 
feels  as  if  the  horse  were  flying."  But  Baucher, 
the  great  dead,  is  also  right  when  he  says,  "The 
sea  is  calm,  but  full  of  rocks!" 

Unhappily,  this  state  of  equilibrium  tends  al- 
ways to  be  disturbed  in  consequence  of  the  various 

185 


THE  REASONED  EQUITATION 

positions  taken  by  the  horse  as  he  executes  his 
great  diversity  of  strides,  steps,  gaits,  and  move- 
ments. The  rider  must,  therefore,  by  means  of  his 
effects  of  ensemble,  be  always  checking  this  tend- 
ency, or  restoring  the  equilibrium  as  soon  as  it 
escapes.  When  the  horse  is  standing  still,  the  rider 
will  feel  this  escape  of  the  equilibrium  in  his  bridle 
hand.  But  when  the  horse  is  in  motion,  this  feeling 
comes  only  through  the  seat.  An  able  esquire 
reestablishes  the  equilibrium  by  the  accuracy  of 
his  seat,  economizing  hands  and  legs. 

These  effects  of  ensemble  are  employed  most 
efficiently  just  before  the  demand  for  a  new  move- 
ment, a  new  direction,  or  a  new  gait;  and  also  to 
maintain  the  equilibrium  during  the  succeeding 
movement  without  change  of  speed  or  gait.  All 
this  is  in  accord  with  the  principle  of  Baucher,  who 
created  the  effects  of  ensemble:  "The  position 
gives  the  correct  movement;  the  movement  should 
never  give  the  position. " 

These  effects  of  ensemble,  employed  on  a  well- 
trained  horse,  are,  however,  virtually  impercepti- 
ble to  the  onlooker. 


PART  III 
THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 


CHAPTER  XXII 
THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT 

THE  name,  "High  School/'  has  long  been  used  and 
is  still  employed  to  designate  a  system  of  education 
which  trains  a  horse  to  execute  in  the  ring  of  a 
circus  the  low  and  high  airs  and  the  various  figures 
of  manege.  It  is  a  special  kind  of  equitation,  for 
which  the  state  of  equilibrium  is  not  important. 
Baucher,  Fillis,  Franconi,  and  other  civilian  mas- 
ters of  the  art  have  exhibited  their  horses  in  the 
circus,  not  alone  for  the  immediate  financial  profit, 
but  still  more  to  make  their  systems  known  and 
appreciated.  It  was,  in  fact,  from  the  circus  that 
Baucher  and  Fillis  were  called  by  various  Euro- 
pean governments  to  teach  their  systems  to  army 
officers. 

These  masters,  however,  had  already  accepted 
the  anatomical  principles  of  Benton,  Borelli,  and 
Bishop,  who,  in  their  discussion  of  animal  motion, 
emphasize  the  fact  that,  at  walk  and  trot,  the 
horse  advances  by  the  diagonal  movement  of  its 
limbs.  But  in  accepting  this  doctrine  of  locomo- 
tion, these  masters  at  once  comprehended  that  the 
lateral  or  direct  effects  of  the  two  older  schools  are 
in  flat  contradiction  to  the  newer  ideas  of  horse 
anatomy.  They  found  it  necessary,  therefore,  to 

189 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

create  the  diagonal  effects,  in  order  to  be  en  rapport 
with  the  movement  in  diagonal  biped. 

The  horses  exhibited  by  these  masters  executed 
all  the  movements  of  the  high  and  low  airs,  but 
were  maintained  continually  in  the  state  of  equilib- 
rium; and  they  had  gait,  speed,  and  manners.  So, 
to  emphasize  the  distinction  between  their  systems 
and  those  of  the  circus,  the  masters  gave  to  their 
principles  the  name  equitation  savante.  The  term 
has  been  accepted  by  horsemen  the  world  over, 
both  in  the  armies  and  outside.  Unfortunately, 
the  only  translation  into  English  seems  to  be  the 
very  inadequate  "scientific  equitation. " 

As  a  matter  of  terminology,  the  right  diagonal 
biped  means  the  right  fore  leg  and  the  left  hind 
one;  the  left  diagonal  biped,  left  fore  and  right 
hind.  Consequently,  the  right  diagonal  effect  has 
to  mean  the  effect  produced  by  the  right  rein  and 
the  rider's  left  leg;  while  the  left  diagonal  effect 
is  that  of  the  left  rein  and  his  right  leg. 

The  equilibrium,  which  is  the  foundation  of  the 
whole  scientific  equitation,  can  be  obtained  only 
as  the  result  of  two  forces  opposed  to  one  another, 
the  one  pushing  the  horse  forward  and  the  other 
holding  him  back.  The  first  of  these  forces  arises 
from  the  effect  of  the  rider's  legs:  the  second  from 
the  effect  of  his  hands  by  way  of  the  reins  and  the 
bits.  If,  let  us  say,  the  rider  exerts  ten  degrees  of 
effect  with  his  legs  to  send  the  horse  forward,  and 
at  the  same  time  exerts  ten  degrees  of  effect  with 

190 


THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT 

his  hands  to  prevent  this  movement,  the  horse, 
between  these  two  forces,  must  concentrate  its 
native  powers,  and  establish  a  center  of  gravity. 
The  result  is  equilibrium,  that  is  to  say,  balance. 
The  effects  of  the  legs  are  effects  of  impulsion.  The 
effects  of  the  hands  are  effects  of  retention.  Thence 
arises  the  equestrian  axiom:  Equilibrium  is  the 
consequence  of  effects  of  opposition. 

Suppose,  then,  that  the  horse  is  being  main- 
tained in  equilibrium  between  ten  degrees  of  im- 
pulsion and  ten  degrees  of  opposition.  If,  now, 
the  impulsion  is  increased  from  ten  degrees  to  fif- 
teen, the  opposition  still  remaining  at  ten,  the 
horse  must  move  forward,  with  the  condition  of 
equilibrium  still  maintained. 

Precisely  here  lies  the  difference  between  the 
scientific  equitation  and  the  lateral  or  reasoned. 
The  former,  to  produce  movement  forward,  keeps 
the  same  opposition  as  before,  but  increases  the 
impulsion.  The  others  cease  the  opposition,  and 
thereby  allow  the  equilibrium  to  disappear.  These 
last  cannot  do  otherwise.  They  are  employing  the 
lateral  effect  only.  Therefore,  they  cannot  main- 
tain the  effect  of  opposition  against  a  mechanism 
which  is  driving  itself  forward  by  a  diagonal  action. 
Only  the  diagonal  effect  can  maintain  opposition 
while  the  animal  moves  in  diagonal. 

The  reader  will  note  that  it  is  always  from  the 
fore  leg  involved  that  the  right  or  left  diagonal 
biped  takes  its  name.  This,  in  my  opinion,  is  a 

191 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

mistake.  The  hind  leg  is  the  one  which  gives  the 
impulse  and  is  the  cause  of  every  movement.  The 
action  of  the  fore  leg  is  merely  the  consequence.  It 
would,  therefore,  have  been  more  logical  to  have 
named  the  bipeds  from  the  hind  legs;  and  more  in 
accord  with  the  equestrian  maxim,  "Forward, 
forward,  always  forward."  This  means  impulsion, 
and  impulsion  is  possible  only  by  the  effects  of  the 
rider's  legs  acting  on  the  hind  limbs  of  the  animal. 

It  must,  of  course,  be  understood  that  when  I 
discuss  these  motions  in  diagonal,  I  am  considering 
only  a  horse  in  the  state  of  equilibrium.  Moreover, 
when  any  master  speaks,  let  us  say,  of  the  right 
diagonal  effect  and  the  use  of  the  right  rein  and  the 
left  leg,  he  does  not  mean  that  the  left  rein  and  the 
right  leg  are  to  cease  their  effects.  What  he  means 
is  that  this  rein  and  that  leg  are  to  increase  theirs. 
Otherwise,  the  horse  will  turn  its  body,  its  spine 
in  the  dorsal  region  will  no  longer  remain  straight, 
and  the  forward  impulse  will  disappear. 

To  accustom  horse  and  rider  to  the  diagonal  ef- 
fect, they  should  execute  mounted  the  lateral  and 
direct  flexions,  and  mobilization  by  the  reversed 
pirouette  and  backing.  If,  however,  at  the  begin- 
ning of  practice  in  the  diagonal  effect,  a  young 
rider  training  a  young  horse  is  confused  in  his  ef- 
forts, it  is  better  to  begin  the  rotation  by  the 
diagonal  effects  on  foot.  For  this,  supposing  that 
the  movement  is  from  left  to  right,  the  trainer 
places  himself  exactly  as  for  the  direct  flexion,  ex- 

192 


THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT 

cept  that  he  holds  in  his  right  hand  the  right  reins 
of  both  curb  and  snaffle  and  also  the  whip.  By 
means  of  these  two  reins  he  secures  a  partial  flexion 
to  the  right;  and  at  the  same  time,  by  means  of  the 
curb  rein  held  in  his  left  hand,  he  maintains  the 
head,  mouth,  and  neck  inclined  to  the  right.  Then, 
with  the  whip,  he  makes  the  animal  execute  the 
mobilization  of  the  hind  quarters  from  left  to  right, 
step  by  step.  After  some  practice  at  these  rotations, 
both  from  right  to  left  and  left  to  right,  the  trainer 
mounts  and  repeats  the  mobilizations  by  the  same 
effects,  but  using  his  leg  instead  of  the  whip.  But 
an  experienced  trainer  begins  these  rotations  by 
diagonal  effect,  mounted. 

For  the  rotation  from  left  to  right,  by  the  right 
diagonal  effect,  the  cavalier  mounted,  the  horse 
standing  still  and  in  equilibrium,  both  reins  of  the 
bit  and  the  left  rein  of  the  snaffle  are  taken  in  the 
left  hand,  and  the  right  rein  of  the  snaffle  is  taken 
in  the  right  hand.  The  left  hand  keeps  the  horse's 
head  perpendicular,  the  "in  hand"  position,  wnile 
the  right  hand,  by  a  light  opposition  on  the  right 
snaffle  rein,  inclines  the  horse's  head  to  the  right. 
Meanwhile,  the  effect  of  the  rider's  right  leg  impels 
the  horse  forward,  and  the  left  leg,  increasing  its 
effect,  pushes  the  haunches  toward  the  right,  the 
animal's  right  fore  leg  gaining  a  little  ground  to  the 
front.  (Figures  21,  22.) 

The  rotation  must  be  executed  calmly  and  step 
by  step.  It  is  completed  when  the  horse  has  about- 

193 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

faced.  In  the  rotation  from  left  to  right,  the  action 
of  the  rider's  right  leg  is  absolutely  necessary  for 
maintaining  the  forward  impulse  while  the  haunches 
wheel  at  the  effect  of  the  rider's  left.  The  rotation 
is  stopped  at  its  completion  by  the  effect  of  the 
rider's  right  leg;  not  by  the  cessation  of  the  effect  of 
his  left.  The  rotation  can  be  done  also  at  the  trot, 
but  only  upon  a  circle,  and  only  after  the  horse  has 
learned  to  make  two  pistes,  which  makes  the  figure 
a  half-passage.  The  rotation  at  the  gallop  is  very 
complicated,  and  cannot  be  performed  until  the 
horse  can  do  the  two  pistes  at  a  gallop. 

The  pirouette  is  asked  only  by  the  direct  flexion 
of  the  mouth  and  neck  and  can  be  done  at  trot  and 
gallop.  Backing  is  asked  by  the  diagonal  effect.  It 
is  done  step  by  step,  and  needs  great  care  to  avoid 
wear  and  tear  of  the  hocks. 

The  trot  is  executed  by  the  action  of  diagonal 
bipeds,  precisely  like  the  walk  except  that  each 
biped,  remains  a  longer  time  off  the  ground.  (Fig- 
ure 23.) 

The  gallop  is  the  same  as  the  run,  but  slower. 
The  canter  is  still  slower  than  the  gallop.  The  run 
is  natural  and  instinctive  to  the  horse ;  the  gallop  is 
taken  and  held  under  the  control  of  the  rider;  the 
canter  is  an  artificial  gait  given  by  the  cavalier. 

These  three  gaits  have  given  rise  to  so  many 
theories  that  the  result  has  been  and  still  is  an  end- 
less confusion.  Some  theorists  teach  that  run  and 
gallop  are  executed  by  the  lateral  bipeds.  All  such 

194 


Figure  21.  ROTATION   BY  THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT:  THE 

RIGHT  FORE  LEG  FLEXED 


Figure  22.  ROTATION    BY  THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT:  THE 

HORSE  ON  THREE  LEGS,  THE  RIGHT  FORE  LEG  EXTENDED 


Figure  23.  THE  TROT 


Figure  24.  FIRST  STRIDE  IN  CHANGE  OF  LEAD 

AT  THE  GALLOP 


THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT 

theories  are  the  product  of  philosophizing  by  writ- 
ers who  do  more  riding  with  a  pen  than  with  hands 
and  legs  on  a  horse's  back. 

The  saddle  horse  is  useful  to  mankind  only  by 
virtue  of  its  locomotion.  This  locomotion  is  the 
consequence  of  impulsion;  and  impulsion  is  given 
only  by  the  animal's  hind  legs.  To  drive  the  body 
forward,  therefore,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that 
the  horse  should  have  one  or  two  feet  on  the  ground. 
A  foot  in  the  air,  so  long  as  it  remains  in  the  air,  can 
have  no  effect. 

But  if,  let  us  say,  the  right  hind  foot  is  on  the 
ground,  the  right  hind  leg  may  deliver  its  thrust 
either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left  fore  leg.  In  the  first 
case,  the  right  lateral  biped  is  set  in  motion,  in  the 
second  case,  the  left  diagonal  biped. 

In  order,  then,  to  pass  from  standing  still,  or 
from  walk  or  trot,  to  the  gallop  upon  the  right  lat- 
eral biped,  the  rider  throws  his  entire  weight  upon 
the  right  lateral  biped,  and  at  the  same  time,  by  a 
quick  inclination  of  the  body  forward  to  the  right, 
the  rider  places  the  horse  in  the  position  to  gallop. 
It  then  remains  only  to  give  the  action  to  the  whole 
machine,  the  legs  of  the  horse  moving  in  accord 
with  the  gait  asked. 

This  action  will  be  given  by  the  effect  of  the 
right  leg  of  a  rider,  who  at  the  same  time  closes  the 
fingers  of  the  right  hand  upon  the  right  rein  of  the 
curb  bit  or  snaffle.  These  effects  of  the  right  leg 
and  right  hand  have  to  be  executed  by  a  quick 

195 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

movement,  yet  without  occasioning  too  much  sur- 
prise. But  the  effects  of  right  leg  and  right  hand 
will  have  a  tendency  to  send  the  haunches  to  the 
left  rather  than  forward.  Therefore  the  rider 's  left 
leg  has  also  to  be  closed,  partly  to  prevent]  the 
haunches  from  getting  away  to  the  left,  and  partly 
because  the  attack  of  the  right  leg  first  attracts  the 
right  hind  leg  below  the  center  of  gravity,  and  then 
calls  the  left  hind  leg  to  its  support,  the  front  legs 
being  raised  by  the  effects  of  the  right  hand,  the 
right  ready  to  extend  to  receive  the  weight  as  the 
foot  comes  back  on  the  ground. 

All  these  effects  have  to  be  executed  with  deci- 
sion and  precision,  in  a  word,  with  equestrian  tact. 
It  is  this  employment  of  this  left  leg  of  the  rider  to 
maintain  the  horse  straight  at  the  beginning  of  the 
gallop  to  the  right,  which  has  created  the  mistaken 
theory  that  it  is  the  function  of  the  left  leg  to  start 
the  gallop  to  the  right,  and  of  the  right  leg  to  start 
the  gallop  to  the  left.  Such  was  the  foundation  of 
the  theory  of  the  gallop  executed  by  the  diagonal 
biped. 

The  motion  in  diagonal  at  the  gallop  shows  itself 
only  when  the  horse  changes  lead  from  one  lateral 
biped  to  the  other.  With  the  gallop  on  the  right 
hind  leg,  this  leg,  which  is  giving  the  impulse,  is 
always  in  front  of  the  left,  which  is  the  more  con- 
tinued support.  But  for  the  forcible  change  of  lead 
from  right  to  left,  the  impulsion  alters  first,  and 
after  this  the  support  passes  to  the  other  leg.  The 

196 


Figure  25.  SECOND  STRIDE  IN  CHANGE  OF  LEAD  FROM 

RIGHT  TO  LEFT 


Figure  26.  THIRD  STRIDE  IN  CHANGE  OF  LEAD  FROM 

RIGHT  TO  LEFT 


THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT 

right  hind  leg,  therefore,  stops,  and  the  left  hind  leg 
moves  forward  into  position  for  the  impulse,  while 
the  right  hind  leg  becomes  the  support.  The  right 
front  leg  also  becomes  a  support;  but  the  left  fore 
leg  extends  forward  to  receive  the  impulsion.  It 
follows,  then,  that  before  the  left  hind  leg  has  made 
contact  with  the  ground  and  taken  over  the  duty  of 
impulsion,  the  horse  is  upon  a  diagonal  biped. 
(Figure  24.) 

In  order,  therefore,  to  execute  the  change  of  lead 
from  right  to  left,  the  cavalier  should,  at  the  instant 
of  change,  lean  to  the  right,  in  order  to  load  the 
right  lateral  biped.  This,  thereupon,  becomes  the 
support,  and  leaves  the  left  lateral  biped  unloaded 
and  off  the  ground  for  the  very  quick  movement 
called  "change  of  foot  in  the  air."  This  whole 
motion,  but  especially  the  action  of  the  left  hind 
leg,  is  so  rapid  that  the  eye  cannot  perceive  the 
relations  of  the  different  limbs.  Even  photography 
is  inadequate  to  show  the  action  clearly.  The  cam- 
era can,  however,  be  made  to  exhibit  the  left  hind 
leg  in  the  different  parts  of  its  stride.  Thus  in  Fig- 
ure 25,  the  left  hind  leg  first  disappears  behind  the 
right;  and  next  after  that  the  right  fore  leg  is  flexed. 
Finally,  in  Figure  26,  the  left  hind  leg  is  on  the 
ground,  in  front  of  the  right  and  ready  for  propul- 
sion. The  left  fore  leg  is  already  raised.  It  will  ex- 
tend forward  as  soon  as  the  right  hind  leg  has  ar- 
rived near  the  left,  to  assist  as  support  and  thus 
allow  the  left  hind  leg  to  continue  the  impulse. 

197 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

Note,  now,  the  difference  between  Baucher,  Fil- 
lis,  and  myself.  Baucher  says,  "I  do  not  try  to 
explain  something  inexplicable;  it  is  for  the  eques- 
trian tact  of  the  esquire  to  discover  how  to  execute 
the  movement."  Fillis  says,  "I  make  my  horse 
gallop  to  the  right  by  the  effect  of  my  left  rein  and 
my  left  leg.  To  change  the  lead,  I  employ  the  op- 
posite effects." 

I,  on  the  contrary,  sum  up  my  directions  thus: 
By  the  effect  of  my  right  rein,  I  lift  the  horse's 
right  fore  leg.  (Figures  18-22.)  By  the  effect  of  my 
left  leg,  I  raise  the  horse's  left  hind  leg  —  the  diag- 
onal effect.  If,  then,  the  horse's  left  hind  leg  is  off  the 
ground,  his  right  hind  leg  is  pressed  forcibly  against 
the  ground.  (Figure  18.)  Thereupon,  by  the  effect 
of  my  right  snaffle  rein,  I  compel  the  horse  to  extend 
its  right  fore  leg.  (Figure  22.)  With  my  right  rein 
and  my  left  leg  —  diagonal  effect  —  I  obtain  the 
right  diagonal  biped.  With  my  left  rein  and  my 
right  leg — again  diagonal  effect — I  obtain  the  left 
diagonal  biped  for  the  walk  and  trot.  (Figure  21.) 
With  my  right  rein,  I  raise  the  horse's  right  fore  leg, 
while  with  my  right  leg  I  raise  the  horse's  right  hind 
leg  —  lateral  effect.  This  right  hind  leg  will  come 
to  the  ground  under  the  center  of  gravity,  and  drive 
the  body  forward.  The  right  fore  leg  will  thereupon 
extend  forward  for  the  gallop  to  the  right  —  lateral 
biped.  (Figure  25.)  My  body,  being  inclined  for- 
ward, will  carry  forward  the  center  of  gravity,  and 
the  gallop  will  continue  until  other  forces  intervene. 

198 


THE  DIAGONAL  EFFECT 

And  there  is  all  the  demonstration  of  the  theorem 
and  the  solution  of  the  problem! 

Every  horse,  however,  has  one  side  which  is  more 
supple  than  the  other;  and  it  is  better  to  begin  prac- 
tice in  changing  lead  by  shifting  from  the  less  supple 
to  the  more  supple  side. 

Suppose,  for  example,  that  the  more  flexible  side 
is  the  left.  My  horse  being  straight,  I  start  it  gal- 
loping to  the  right,  by  the  method  given  above,  and 
keep  it  going  straight.  I  then  reverse  all  my  effects. 
If  the  horse  changes  lead,  I  stop  it  as  soon  as  may  be, 
and  recompense  its  obedience.  When  it  is  completely 
calm,  I  begin  again,  galloping  to  the  right.  After 
several  steps,  I  again  change ;  and  again  recompense. 

When  the  horse  understands  the  change  of  lead 
from  right  to  left,  I  proceed  in  the  same  way  to 
teach  the  change  from  left  to  right.  At  first,  I  ask 
the  change  only  after  the  horse  has  galloped  ten  or 
fifteen  steps  on  the  same  foot.  When  the  horse 
manages  this,  I  reduce  the  interval  progressively, 
first  to  six  or  eight  steps,  then  to  four,  and  finally 
to  only  two.  I  need  not  say  that  this  training  takes 
time  that  cannot  be  measured  by  days  or  lessons. 
I  progress  slowly,  ask  very  little,  rest  my  horse  a 
great  deal,  and  keep  calm.  I  do  not,  under  any 
circumstances,  permit  my  horse  to  choose  the  lead 
for  itself,  nor  to  change  foot  on  its  own  initiative. 
It  is  essential  that  the  rider  always  impose  his 
mastership  upon  the  horse's  intelligence.  The  rules 
are:  short  lessons,  precision  helped  by  moderation, 

199 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

recompenses,  no  overexertion  or  fatigue.  With 
these,  success  is  assured. 

THE  FALSE  GALLOP 

BY  "false  gallop,"  we  mean  galloping  on  one  side 
when  turning  to  the  other.  A  horse  is  also  said  to 
gallop  false  when  it  leads  with  either  side,  after  the 
rider  has  signaled  for  the  other. 

A  horse  galloping  in  a  straight  line  leads  with 
whichever  side  the  rider  determines.  If  this  chances 
to  be  the  left,  the  rider  must  change  the  foot  before 
making  a  turn  to  the  right.  Otherwise  the  horse  will 
gallop  false. 

Turning  on  the  wrong  foot  is  always  dangerous. 
In  turning,  for  example,  to  the  right  at  the  gallop, 
the  center  of  gravity  will  be  displaced  toward  the 
right,  and  the  right  lateral  biped  will  take  the  longer 
step.  All  this  occurs  naturally  if  the  horse  is  gallop- 
ing to  the  right.  But  if  it  is  galloping  to  the  left,  the 
right  leg  cannot  reach  out  to  receive  the  additional 
weight,  and  the  horse  may  cross  its  legs  and  fall. 

The  false  gallop  is,  nevertheless,  employed  in 
training  the  horse  to  gallop  equally  o'n  the  two  sides, 
and  also  in  teaching  it  the  change  of  lead  on  a 
straight  line  without  change  of  hand.  But  it  should 
be  understood  that  in  all  such  cases  the  false  gallop 
is  always  asked  by  the  rider,  never  taken  by  the 
horse  at  its  own  will.  It  is  essential  to  a  well- trained 
saddle  horse  that  it  gallop  equally  to  either  side, 
and  always  at  the  signal  of  the  rider. 

200 


CHAPTER  XXIII 
THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

THE  figures  of  manege  include  all  the  different 
known  movements  which  a  horse  executes  during 
training  or  after  it  is  trained.  The  number  is  great 
and  the  character  varied;  but  they  are  all  com- 
pounded from  only  six  elements.  These  are:  for- 
ward, backward,  turn  to  the  right,  turn  to  the  left, 
half  haunches  to  the  right,  and  half  haunches  to 
the  left,  all  done  at  walk,  trot,  and  gallop. 

The  masters  before  Baucher  had  a  wider  range  of 
figures  than  since  his  day,  for  the  reason  that  they 
trained  from  movement  to  position,  instead  of  from 
position  to  movement,  as  is  now  the  practice  except 
for  the  army,  hunting,  and  polo.  The  progression 
for  the  ordinary  equitation  has,  however,  remained 
the  same,  and  consists  of  the  following  figures:  the 
double ;  the  changes  of  direction  or  changes  of  hand ; 
the  diagonal;  the  half -volte,  reversed  half- volte, 
and  volte;  the  circle,  with  change  upon  the  circle 
and  change  of  circle;  the  figure  eight;  the  half- 
passage  with  head  to  the  wall  and  with  croup  to  the 
wall;  the  shoulder  in;  the  centre-change  of  hand. 

These  movements,  done  at  walk,  trot,  and  gallop, 
have  long  constituted,  and  still  constitute,  the  com- 
plete education  of  the  horse.  A  park  hack  is  not 
considered  fully  trained  until  it  can  execute  these 

201 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

movements,  which  are,  indeed,  proof  of  its  good 
manners.  They  are,  moreover,  no  disadvantage 
for  a  promenade  horse  which  is  to  be  ridden  by 
the  same  esquire  who  trained  it;  though  the  results 
are  most  distressing  to  a  rider  of  less  equestrian 
tact. 

THE  WALK  OF  MANEGE 

THE  walk  of  manege  is  simply  a  very  slow  walk, 
well  cadenced,  the  steps  equal  and  regular,  and 
with  the  action  of  the  legs  less  forward,  but  very 
much  higher  than  in  the  ordinary  walk. 

It  cannot  be  obtained  except  under  the  most  per- 
fect equilibrium,  while  the  fingering  must  be  even 
more  precise  than  for  the  piaffer  and  the  backward 
trot,  which  are  derived  from  it.  The  rider's  legs 
must  maintain  the  center  of  gravity  always  exactly 
between  the  forces  of  the  front  and  rear  limbs,  not 
allowing  it  the  least  motion  from  side  to  side,  but 
only  up  and  down  with  the  step.  The  seat  must 
be  especially  accurate,  and  the  contact  absolutely 
permanent.  The  least  alteration  of  the  balance  will 
change  the  walk  to  the  trot,  if  forward,  or,  if  back- 
ward, will  stop  the  horse. 

To  obtain  the  walk  of  manege,  the  rider  gradually 
diminishes  the  speed  of  the  ordinary  walk,  keeping 
the  state  of  equilibrium  as  complete  as  possible. 
By  the  effects  of  opposition  coupled  with  great 
accuracy  of  seat,  and  by  the  diagonal  effect  re- 
peated in  tempo,  he  asks  slower  and  slower  steps, 

202 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

the  horse's  action  becoming  higher  and  higher  as 
the  stride  is  shorter  and  less  quick. 

It  is  impossible  to  advise  just  when  in  the  course 
of  the  training  to  begin  the  walk  of  manege.  It  is 
useless  to  attempt  it  before  the  horse  has  learned  to 
keep  in  equilibrium.  It  is  well  not  to  try  for  too 
slow  or  too  high  an  action,  to  study  the  horse,  and 
at  the  first  sign  of  success,  to  yield  everything, 
caress,  dismount,  and  stop  the  lesson.  Two,  four, 
or  six  steps  are  sufficient  at  one  time,  and  should  be 
followed  by  rest  and  distraction. 

Take  special  pains  to  prevent  the  two  possible 
irregularities,  the  acculer,  or  getting  behind  the 
hand,  and  the  "magpie  jump."  If  either  appears, 
stop  the  practice  of  the  figure  and  devote  at  least 
fifteen  days  to  sending  the  horse  forward  strongly 
against  the  bit,  equally  and  at  the  two  hands.  This 
is  the  only  cure  for  these  irregularities  or  defenses. 

Take  care  not  to  provoke  rearing  or  the  croupade 
by  too  much  precipitancy  in  your  demands.  Rear- 
ing will  probably  be  caused  by  fingering  in  wrong 
tempo;  the  croupade  by  beginning  too  early  the 
alternate  effect  of  the  legs,  so  that  the  signal  to  lift 
one  biped  comes  before  the  other  is  back  on  the 
ground,  and  there  is  a  brief  interval  when  both  are 
on  the  ground. 

Do  not  expect  to  secure  a  perfect  walk  of  manege 
until  after  you  have  trained  two  or  three  horses. 
Be  satisfied  at  first  with  a  few  steps  at  the  gait,  and 
occasional  changes  of  direction.  The  great  point 

203 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

is  to  perfect  your  own  equestrian  tact.  When  that 
is  done,  all  your  difficulties  are  easily  surmounted. 
The  walk  of  manege  is  the  highest  proof  of  the 
state  of  equilibrium,  and  you  must  learn  to  feel  the 
horse  under  you  flexing  all  its  joints,  developing  its 
power,  and  cadencing  its  walk  with  a  great  but 
calm  ardor,  slow  and  high.  When  a  horse  has  at- 
tained to  the  walk  of  manege,  in  complete  equilib- 
rium, every  feat  of  the  scientific  equitation  becomes 
possible  both  to  rider  and  to  steed. 

TO  ENTER  THE  CORNERS 

"To  enter  the  corner"  is  a  manege  expression 
meaning  not  to  let  the  horse  pass  the  corner  of  the 
enclosure  close  in  or  far  out  at  its  own  will. 

The  manege  is  commonly  rectangular,  with  two 
long  and  two  short  sides  and  a  surrounding  wall. 
The  horse  travels  straight  along  the  sides,  but 
changes  direction  at  the  angles,  to  the  right  if  being 
ridden  with  its  right  side  toward  the  center  —  "at 
right  hand"  as  it  is  called  —  to  the  left  if  the  other 
way.  Naturally,  the  animal  tends  to  follow  the 
barrier,  and  will,  therefore,  instinctively  and  of  its 
own  volition,  make  the  turn  before  getting  quite  to 
the  corner,  or  else  will  put  its  head  against  the  wall 
and  stop.  In  either  case,  the  rider  loses  an  oppor- 
tunity to  practice  the  management  of  his  mount. 

For  in  a  manege  of  ordinary  size,  say  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  feet  by  seventy,  a  horse  in  the  course 
of  an  hour's  lesson  will  turn  a  corner  about  two 

204 


B 


I  \ 

u  *    \ 

\ 
1 
I 

I 


|     Change  of  direction. 

I 

I 

I      , 

I 

I 


I 
I 
I 

\ 


ABCD    -Quadcangufar    manege.^-  4  corners 

BOAD  -short   sides 

AB-CD  -long  sides 

R  -piste  at  the  ri^'fif    hand 

L  -piste  at  the  left   hand, 

K  -corner   fully    entered   -  correct 

N  -corner   not  propei-lij    entered  -  incorrecf 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

hundred  and  forty  times,  half  at  the  right  hand, 
half  at  the  left.  If,  then,  the  rider  directs  the  animal 
at  each  turn,  he  obtains  valuable  practice  in  guid- 
ing his  mount,  and  so  learns  to  perform  the  act 
intuitively  and  without  effort.  Otherwise,  not  only 
does  the  rider  miss  the  opportunity,  but,  in  ad- 
dition, the  horse,  not  knowing  the  difference  be- 
tween being  straight  and  being  crooked,  gets  the 
habit  of  crossing  its  legs,  and  when  asked  to  go  for- 
ward and  straight,  carries  its  rider  to  the  center  of 
the  area. 

CHANGE  OF  DIRECTION 

THE  ancient  and  the  mediaeval  equitation  had  it 
that  the  turn  to  the  right  is  to  be  made  by  means  of 
the  right  rein  of  snaffle  or  bit  and  the  left  leg.  Bau- 
cher  agrees  with  this.  Accord-ing  to  him,  the  right 
rein  flexes  the  neck  to  the  right.  The  left  leg  pre- 
vents the  haunches  from  swinging  toward  the  left, 
while  the  right  leg  sends  the  rear  limbs  along  the 
arc  of  a  circle  of  greater  or  smaller  radius.  Fillis, 
though  more  practical  than  Baucher,  grants  that 
Baucher's  opinion  has  been  generally  accepted. 

But  to  turn  to  the  right  by  means  of  right  leg  and 
right  rein  involves  the  principle  of  the  lateral  equita- 
tion, with  all  its  practical  errors,  a  principle  which 
cannot  be  accepted  by  the  scientific  equitation.  It 
is  not  merely  the  horse's  shoulders  which  turn;  it  is 
the  entire  horse.  The  horse  is  first  straight  and 
upon  the  rider's  hand.  Then  the  rider  gives  the 

206 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

new  direction  by  the  reins,  and  by  his  legs  impels 
the  animal  in  it.  But,  of  course,  the  effect  of  the 
right  rein  is  to  send  the  haunches  toward  the  left,  so 
that  the  horse  is  no  longer  straight.  Then  comes 
the  effect  of  the  left  leg  to  keep  it  straight  by  pre- 
venting the  swing  of  the  haunches  to  the  left.  But 
under  the  impulse  of  the  left  leg  alone,  the  horse 
executes  a  pirouette,  haunches  pushed  to  the  right 
by  the  rider's  left  leg,  shoulders  pulled  to  the  right 
by  the  right  rein. 

I  myself  hold  to  a  more  rational  theory,  which 
differs  from  the  principle  of  the  old  lateral  equita- 
tion, and  also  from  the  reasoned  equitation  of 
Baucher  and  Fillis.  The  horse  is  either  assembled 
or  it  is  not.  If  it  is  not,  go  as  you  please.  The  horse 
makes  the  turn,  and  that  is  all.  If  the  horse  is  as- 
sembled, the  rider  controls  the  center  of  gravity. 
This  is  sine  qua  non  for  the  scientific  equitation, 
which,  moreover,  admits  at  the  walk  and  trot  no 
other  effects  than  the  diagonal,  either  to  obtain  the 
equilibrium  or  to  execute  any  movement.  The  gal- 
lop, which  is  the  only  lateral  gait,  requires  other 
effects  for  changes  of  direction,  of  which  more 
shortly. 

When  the  horse  is  traveling  straight  at  the  walk, 
its  feet  follow  the  two  parallel  lines  AC  and  BD,  by 
a  diagonal  stride  in  which  BC  and  AD  support 
alternately  the  center  of  gravity  at  O.  In  order  for 
the  horse  to  turn  to  the  right,  the  line  CD  moves  to 
the  position  PL,  it  sends  following  the  arcs  of  con- 

207 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

centric  circles,  as  the  center  of  gravity  travels  from 
O  to  M ;  otherwise  the  equilibrium  will  be  lost.  Evi- 
dently, the  two  left  legs  must  travel  farther  than 
the  two  right  legs. 

But  the  length  of  the  stride  does  not  affect  the 
velocity  or  the  momentum;  consequently,  it  does 
not  change  the  center  of  gravity.  The  left  front  leg, 
if  it  is  to  gain  more  ground  than  the  right,  must  be 
unloaded,  since  the  rule  is  that  any  leg  cannot 
leave  the  ground  before  the  weight  which  it  carries 
has  been  transferred  to  another  support.  This  we 
accomplish  by  flexing  the  head  slightly  to  the  left, 
arid  at  the  same  time  we  establish  the  fixed  point  of 
the  rhomboidus  and  mastoido-humeralis  muscles  at 
the  left  side  of  the  atlas  region.  Thereupon  the  un- 
loaded left  shoulder  will  cover  the  longer  distance 
CL  while  the  loaded  right  shoulder  is  covering  the 
shorter  distance  DP  and  serving  as  pivot  and  sup- 
port for  the  center  of  gravity,  which  remains  on 
OM. 

But  for  the  impulsion  of  the  hind  quarters,  both 
the  rider's  legs  are  necessary.  The  left  prevents  the 
haunches  from  yielding  to  the  effect  of  the  right, 
and  thus  departing  from  the  proper  path  ACL. 
The  right  leg  of  the  rider  pushes  forward  the  right 
hind  leg  of  the  horse,  and  since  this  is  prevented 
from  moving  toward  the  left  off  the  line  BDP,  the 
center  of  gravity  must  remain  on  the  line  OM ;  and 
momentum,  velocity,  and  equilibrium  remain  al- 
tered. 

208 


Change  of  Direction 


center  of  g'ravity 


4) 


O 


D  forehand 

center  of  £ravif  y 
3   hind hand 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

The  same  movement  at  the  trot  is  executed  in 
accord  with  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same 
means.  The  rider,  however,  needs  to  make  a  some- 
what more  forcible  effect  to  obtain  the  same  result 
—  a  fact  which  goes  to  confirm  this  theory  of 
change  of  direction  in  diagonal. 

The  idea  of  using  the  left  rein  for  a  turn  to  the 
right  is  bound  to  give  rise  to  much  discussion.  But 
the  reader  is  already  familiar  with  the  rein  of  con- 
traction, or  guiding  by  the  neck,  where  the  rider 
employs  his  right  leg,  and  at  the  same  time,  by 
carrying  his  hand  to  the  right,  draws  on  the  left 
rein.  This  new  principle,  created  by  myself,  I  have 
considered  and  practiced  long  years.  The  results 
convince  me  of  its  truth. 

The  horse  mounted  by  a  rider  carries  a  very  con- 
siderable weight,  a  fact  which  both  Baucher  and 
Fillis  have  completely  neglected.  Baucher,  to  be 
sure,  has  recognized  the  seat  as  a  third  means  of 
control.  But  what  is  the  seat,  if  the  weight  sup- 
ported by  it  is  ignored?  These  two  masters  advo- 
cate, with  reason,  collection,  the  assemblage  of  all 
the  forces  of  the  animal  at  a  center,  and  the  result- 
ing state  of  equilibrium.  The  horse  is  placed  in  this 
state  by  the  effects  of  hand  and  legs,  and  main- 
tained there  by  the  same  means.  They  point  out, 
rightly,  that  the  horse  in  equilibrium  is  comparable 
to  a  large  ball,  in  contact  with  the  ground  at  a 
single  point,  so  that  the  least  weight  added  to  one 
side  starts  the  movement  in  that  direction.  When, 

210 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

therefore,  a  horse  is  in  equilibrium,  the  shifting  of 
the  rider's  weight  from  his  left  haunch  to  his  right 
will  turn  the  horse  and  send  him  forward  to  the  right. 
Are  we,  then,  outside  the  natural  laws  of  motion? 
No.  We  are  obeying  the  law  which  teaches  that  a 
body  in  motion  will  continue  to  move  along  the  same 
straight  line  until  another  force  interferes.  This 
other  force  is  the  rider's  weight,  which,  when  applied 
at  one  side  of  the  center  of  gravity,  displaces  this 
and  forces  the  horse  to  turn  in  that  direction. 

All  this  is  undeniable.  It  is  easy,  therefore,  to 
understand  the  fights  of  these  two  masters  with  the 
horses  educated  by  them.  The  horses  walked  and 
trotted  in  diagonal.  The  riders  employed  the  lat- 
eral effects.  The  horses  galloped  in  lateral.  The 
riders,  to  train  them  to  that  gait,  used  a  half- 
diagonal  effect.  Naturally,  the  horses  became  con- 
fused between  their  instinctive  gaits  and  the  riders' 
effects  which  were  flatly  contrary  to  them. 

However,  if  a  horse  is  not  in  a  state  of  equilib- 
rium, this  change  of  weight  will  have  no  effect,  and 
the  scientific  equitation  is  not  concerned  with  the 
matter. 

THE  DOUBLE 

THE  double  is  a  figure  of  manege  in  which  the  rider 
crosses  the  quadrangle  from  side  to  side  and  returns 
to  the  original  piste  at  the  same  hand.  It  involves, 
therefore,  merely  two  changes  of  direction  to  one 
side  or  the  other. 

211 


I 

I    The  Double  to  the  R^h 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

The  movement  is  simple,  and  easy  of  execution 
for  the  experienced  rider  with  a  horse  that  is  suf- 
ficiently advanced  with  its  education.  The  essential 
point  is  to  manage  correctly  the  first  change  of 
direction,  and  then  to  guide  the  horse  exactly 
straight  across  to  the  other  side  of  the  manege  for 
the  second  change  which  completes  the  double.  At 
first  view,  it  looks  very  easy  to  do  this ;  but  in  prac- 
tice it  is  not  so  simple,  and  the  maneuver  is  asked  of 
the  horse  precisely  in  order  to  accustom  it  to  change 
and  return  straight.  The  rider  also  will  find  the 
double  educative  if  he  does  it  correctly.  The  point 
is  to  cure  any  hesitation  on  the  part  of  the  horse  in 
turning  to  either  side,  and  to  get  it  to  place  itself 
exactly  straight  from  head  to  croup  as  soon  as  it  has 
turned.  The  rider  who  can  do  the  double  correctly 
at  walk,  trot,  and  gallop  is  on  the  road  toward  the 
perfect  education  of  his  horse. 

CHANGE  OF  HAND 

CHANGE  of  hand  is  very  useful  in  training  horses  to 
be  equal  in  their  gaits,  and  also  for  teaching  riders 
to  execute  figures  on  either  side  when  instruction  is 
given  in  classes. 

Both  the  old  and  the  newer  schools  of  equitation 
prescribe  that  in  riding  at  the  right  hand  —  that  is 
to  say,  with  right  side  toward  the  center  of  the  ring 
—  both  reins  of  the  bit,  together  with  the  left  rein 
of  the  snaffle,  are  to  be  held  in  the  left  hand,  while 
the  right  rein  of  the  snaffle  alone  is  to  be  held  in  the 

213 


SO 

01 


* 


TJ 


HJa    l ^ 


-S v 

•g 

J? 

O 

& 


0 
'GO 


x.     x 


"  right  hand  ' 
I 

"^ 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

.j 

2)                                      > 

THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

right  hand,  since  all  turns  are  to  be  made  to  the 
right.  This  arrangement  follows  from  the  confused 
ideas  of  the  lateral  equitation  and  from  the  princi- 
ples developed  by  Baucher  for  changes  of  direction. 

The  scientific  equitation,  on  the  other  hand,  pre- 
scribes that,  in  riding  at  the  right  hand,  the  two 
reins  of  the  bit  and  the  right  rein  of  the  snaffle  shall 
be  in  the  right  hand  and  the  left  snaffle  rein  in  the 
left,  for  all  movements  in  diagonal,  that  is  to  say, 
at  walk  and  trot.  But  for  movements  at  the  gallop, 
the  curb  reins  are  to  be  transferred  to  the  left  hand 
and  only  the  snaffle  rein  held  in  the  right,  because 
the  gallop  is  a  lateral  gait. 

When  riding  at  the  right  hand,  the  horseman  may 
change  hand  by  means  of  a  great  variety  of  move- 
ments —  changes  in  width,  in  length,  in  diagonal, 
the  half-volte,  or  the  reversed  half-volte,  all  of 
which  will  be  discussed  shortly.  All  changes  of  hand 
are,  however,  really  nothing  but  changes  of  direc- 
tion. But  since  in  reversing  the  side  which  is  toward 
the  center  of  the  ring,  there  has  to  be  also  a  revers- 
ing of  the  position  of  the  reins  in  the  hands,  changes 
of  direction  have  come  to  be  called  changes  of  hand. 

THE  CIRCLE 

THE  circle  is  a  figure  of  manege  executed  near  the 
center  of  the  ring  by  a  single  horseman,  or  by  sev- 
eral horsemen  following  one  another.  This  figure 
may  also  be  executed  on  a  road,  a  piste,  or  a  field. 
The  ancient  equitation  and  that  of  the  Middle 

215 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

Ages  used  the  circle  to  train  the  horse  to  bend  its 
spine  in  the  direction  of  the  turn,  by  yielding  to  the 
lateral  effects  of  hand  and  legs,  but  without  altera- 
tion of  gait.  It  was  employed  especially  to  teach  the 


.return  on  the 
piste 


on  the  circle 


Circle 


animal  to  take  the  gallop,  since  a  horse  walking  or 
trotting  on  a  circle  to  the  right  is  already  placed. 
Its  neck  is  already  somewhat  turned  by  the  snaffle, 
and  to  change  to  the  gallop  it  needs  only  the  im- 
pulse of  the  rider's  legs  to  augment  the  action  of  the 
right  hind  limb.  The  circle,  therefore,  taken  alter- 
nately at  the  two  hands  and  by  means  of  the  lateral 
effects,  will  soon  teach  the  horse  to  gallop  to  either 
side. 

.  This  movement,  very  easy  in  the  lateral  equita- 
tion, is  much  more  complicated  in  the  reasoned 

216 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

equitation  at  the  trot  and  walk.  In  this  case,  the 
center  of  gravity  has  to  be  maintained  by  the 
rider's  seat,  while  at  the  same  time,  in  circling  to 
the  right,  the  horse's  neck  has  to  be  inclined  slightly 
to  the  left,  in  order  to  unload  the  left  front  leg,  so 
that  this  may  gain  more  ground  than  its  mate, 
which  acts  more  or  less  as  a  pivot.  Meanwhile,  the 
rider's  right  leg  is  impelling  the  horse's  right  hind 
leg  around  the  circular  path,  and  his  left  leg  is  pre- 
venting the  haunches  from  getting  away  toward 
the  left  at  the  effect  of  his  right. 

At  the  gallop,  circling  to  the  right,  the  position 
and  the  effects  of  the  rider's  legs  are  the  same, 
except  that  now  the  horse's  nose  is  carried  a  little 
to  the  right,  by  the  action  of  the  snaffle,  in  order  to 
unload  the  right  fore  leg,  which  now  has  to  be  lifted 
higher  than  the  left  and  to  gain  more  ground.  The 
center  of  gravity  is  now  more  on  the  right  side,  but 
always  in  the  middle,  though  slightly  back  under 
the  rider's  right  haunch. 

Doubles  upon  the  circle  are  executed  by  crossing 
on  a  diameter  and  continuing  once  more  along  the 
circumference  at  the  same  hand.  If,  however,  the 
rider,  after  passing  the  center,  turns  in  the  other 
direction  on  the  circumference,  he  is  said  to  execute 
a  change  of  hand  on  the  circle.  Evidently,  the 
circle  is  merely  a  continuation  of  the  two  voltes,  in 
which  the  horse  is  maintained  upon  the  circular 
line. 

The  important  point  in  this  work  on  the  circle  is 

217 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

to  keep  the  horse,  whether  walking,  trotting,  or 
galloping,  always  with  all  four  feet  in  the  circular 
path,  never  letting  the  hind  quarters  stray  inside 
or  outside  the  fixed  line.  Evidently,  in  circling  at 
the  right  hand,  the  partial  flexion  of  the  head  to  the 
right  will  tend  to  throw  the  haunches  outside  the 
true  path,  so  that  it  requires  a  very  accurate  effect 
of  the  rider's  outside  leg  to  correct  this  fault  to 
just  the  right  degree.  Moreover,  the  circle  itself, 
throughout  the  movement,  should  remain  of  pre- 
cisely the  same  size,  in  spite  of  the  tendency  to 
become  smaller  or  larger. 

THE  VOLTE 

THE  volte  is  a  circular  movement,  executed  in  the 
manege  or  outside,  in  which  the  horse  changes  direc- 
tion in  three  steps  of  one  yard  each,  and  in  twelve 
steps  completes  the  circle. 

Before  the  days  of  the  scientific  equitation,  the 
volte  was  asked  at  all  three  gaits  by  the  lateral  ef- 
fects. The  new  equitation  asks  the  volte  at  walk  and 
trot  by  means  of  the  diagonal  effects,  and  only  at 
the  gallop  by  means  of  the  lateral.  In  this,  I  am 
completely  opposed  to  the  principles  of  my  prede- 
cessors, Baucher,  Fillis,  Anderson,  and  their  con- 
temporaries. 

Consider,  therefore,  just  what  is  involved  in  the 
execution  of  a  volte,  let  us  say  to  the  right.  The 
horse,  in  order  to  send  its  inert  weight  to  the  right 
while  keeping  the  center  of  gravity  at  the  middle 

218 


1 

/    reversed    half  volt 


\    volf 
I 


/ 

\ 

\     half  volt 


/ 

/ 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

point  of  the  medial  plane,  must  dispose  its  legs  in 
the  following  manner:  The  right  front  leg  is  the 
chief  point  of  support,  since  it  is  nearer  the  center; 
but  the  left  leg,  since  it  is  farther  away  from  the 
center,  travels  the  longer  path.  The  right  hind  leg 
has  to  do  more  work  than  the  left,  since  in  addition 
to  supporting  its  share  of  the  weight,  it  does  more 
than  its  share  in  driving  the  body  forward. 

It  follows  from  this  that  at  walk  and  trot  the 
proper  effects  for  the  volte  are  a  very  limited  flexion 
of  the  head  to  the  left,  pressure  of  the  rider's  right 
leg  close  behind  the  girth,  and  pressure  of  the  left 
leg  farther  back,  to  keep  the  horse's  left  hind  leg  on 
the  circular  line.  At  the  gallop,  on  the  contrary, 
the  flexion  of  the  head  is  to  the  right,  to  unload  the 
right  front  leg  and  allow  it  to  gain  more  ground 
than  the  left.  The  effects  of  the  legs  are,  however, 
exactly  the  same  as  for  the  diagonal  gaits.  The 
rider's  right  leg  maintains  the  gallop  to  the  right  by 
its  stronger  effect  on  the  horse's  right  hind  leg, 
while  his  left  leg  holds  the  rear  limbs  in  the  circle. 

Now,  the  walk  and  trot  are  movements  made  in 
diagonal.  Why,  then,  ask  a  creature,  which  nat- 
urally and  by  instinct  moves  in  diagonal,  to  turn 
by  lateral  effects?  Fillis  himself  had  doubts  con- 
cerning the  propriety  of  this  method  of  changing 
direction ;  for  after  considering  the  question  he  adds, 
"The  opinion  of  Baucher  has  prevailed  and  the 
lateral  effect  has  been  accepted."  But  in  the  lateral 
effect,  the  right  rein  flexes  the  horse's  neck  to  the 

220 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

right,  and  therefore  loads  the  left  front  leg,  al- 
though this  has  to  gain  more  ground  than  the 
unloaded  right.  Meanwhile,  the  rider's  left  leg 
pushes  the  haunches  to  the  right  and  upon  the  right 
hind  leg,  directing  these  to  the  right  instead  of  to 
the  left  in  order  to  turn  the  horse  to  the  right.  It  is 
even  the  more  surprising  that  these  same  masters 
execute  the  volte  at  the  gallop  by  the  very  same 
means  as  at  the  walk  and  trot,  notwithstanding  the 
fact  that  these  gaits  involve  an  entirely  different 
disposition  of  the  mechanism. 

My  own  honest  opinion  is  that  these  masters 
were  asking,  by  lateral  effects,  movements  which 
the  horse  executed  by  diagonal  gaits,  and  so  con- 
fused their  mounts  thereby  that,  when  they  at- 
tempted such  diagonal  movements  as  the  piaffer, 
passage,  Spanish  walk,  and  Spanish  trot,  the  ani- 
mals resisted.  The  result  was  quarrels  and  fights 
between  man  and  horse.  I,  on  the  other  hand,  never 
have  fights.  When  my  horse  walks  or  trots,  in  di- 
agonal, all  movements  are  asked  by  diagonal  effects. 
But  when  the  horse  gallops,  in  lateral,  all  move- 
ments are  asked  by  lateral  effects.  My  mount  has 
always  all  its  natural  forces  in  their  instinctive 
relation. 

THE  HALF- VOLTE 

IN  executing  the  half-volte,  the  horse  makes  two 
successive  changes  of  direction,  so  that  he  faces  the 
opposite  way  from  his  original  position.  Suppose, 

221 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

for  example,  the  horse  is  traveling  along  a  piste,  at 
right  hand,  and  near  the  wall.  A  change  of  direction 
at  the  corner  of  the  manege,  followed  immediately 
by  another,  places  the  animal  about  three  steps 
away  from  the  wall  and  facing  toward  what  was 
the  rear.  Thereupon,  moving  on  a  diagonal  line, 
the  horse  returns  to  the  piste. 

The  half -volte  is,  then,  simple  enough  as  a  move- 
ment of  the  ordinary  equitation.  It  becomes  de- 
cidely  complicated  when  performed  as  a  figure  of 
the  reasoned  equitation.  The  rider,  as  above,  em- 
ploys the  left  diagonal  effect  to  reverse  the  direction 
of  the  horse's  movement;  and  then  immediately 
changes  to  the  right  diagonal  effect  to  return  to  the 
piste  by  means  of  a  half -passage  of  twelve  steps  at 
the  most.  The  formula  is,  therefore,  for  walk  and 
trot:  left  rein;  right  leg  near  the  girth,  to  maintain 
the  hind  hand  for  the  about-face;  then,  when  the 
two  changes  of  direction  are  complete,  right  rein, 
left  leg  behind  the  girth,  right  leg  near  the  girth,  to 
maintain  the  regularity  of  the  forward  action  during 
the  half-passage. 

At  the  gallop,  the  means  are  still  more  compli- 
cated. The  horse  is  at  the  right  hand  and  leading 
to  the  right.  The  procedure  is,  therefore:  right  rein, 
right  leg  near  the  girth,  left  leg  behind  the  girth  to 
maintain  the  haunches  during  the  turn;  then,  for 
the  half-passage,  left  leg  behind  the  girth  to  push 
the  horse  to  the  right.  As  the  horse  comes  once 
more  to  the  piste,  the  action  becomes:  left  rein  and 

222 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

left  leg  to  control  the  left  lateral  biped,  right  leg  to 
maintain  the  haunches  straight  and  to  change  the 
lead  from  right  to  left,  since  we  are  now  riding  at 
left  hand. 

One  should  practice  the  half-volte  several  times 
in  the  simpler  form  before  trying  to  add  the  half- 
passage,  and  should  not  attempt  the  latter  move- 
ment until  the  figure  is  perfectly  clear  in  the  mind. 
But  the  ordinary  half -volte  is  nothing  more  than 
the  ordinary  pirouette,  taken  at  walk,  trot,  or  gal- 
lop, and  continued  by  the  twelve  steps  of  the  half- 
passage  with  a  change  of  lead. 

THE  REVERSED  HALF- VOLTE 

IN  the  reversed  half-volte,  the  horse  travels  over 
the  same  path  as  in  the  direct  figure,  but  in  the 
opposite  direction.  Thus,  for  the  reversed  half- 
volte,  done  at  the  right  hand,  a  half -passage  to  the 
right  of  twelve  steps  takes  the  animal  away  from 
the  wall  of  the  manege.  Then  two  changes  of  direc- 
tion or  a  half-circle  to  the  left  complete  the  re- 
turn to  the  wall  with  an  about-face  and  a  change  of 
hand. 

The  means  are,  therefore,  for  the  half -passage  at 
walk  or  trot,  the  right  diagonal  effect  —  right  rein, 
right  leg  near  the  girth,  and  the  haunches  pushed 
over  to  the  right  by  the  left  leg  behind  the  girth  — 
with  continuance  of  the  same  effect  to  produce  the 
two  changes  of  direction,  until  the  horse  is  once 
more  straight,  but  at  the  opposite  hand. 

223 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

At  the  gallop,  the  horse  makes  the  half-passage 
leading  to  the  right;  the  lead  then  changes  to  the 
left  for  the  two  changes  of  direction.  Consequently, 
after  the  completion  of  the  half -passage,  the  left 
rein  and  the  left  leg  alter  the  lead,  while  the  right 
leg  prevents  the  haunches  from  going  too  far  to  the 
right  and  maintains  the  gallop  by  keeping  the  horse 
inclined  upon  the  circular  line. 

If  the  horse's  education  has  been  wisely  progres- 
sive, especially  if  the  progress  has  not  been  too 
rapid,  the  two  half-voltes  are  easily  performed 
simply  by  the  master's  equestrian  tact.  But  if  the 
training  has  been  irregular,  then  they  become  com- 
plicated and  difficult.  In  this  case,  it  is  better  to 
have  the  horse  move  in  a  straight  line  in  place  of 
the  half-passage,  changing  the  lead  when  necessary. 
Done  in  this  way,  the  figure  belongs  to  the  ordi- 
nary or  lateral  equitation.  Properly,  however,  it  is 
twelve  steps  of  the  half-passage,  completed  by  a 
reversed  pirouette  at  walk,  trot,  or  gallop. 

THE  FIGURE  EIGHT 

THE  figure  eight  involves  two  circles,  one  to  the 
right,  the  other  to  the  left,  done  at  the  center  of  the 
manege  or  anywhere  away  from  walls. 

The  older  methodists,  both  of  the  Middle  Ages 
and  of  modern  times,  prescribed  the  lateral  effects 
of  hand  and  legs  in  order  to  hold  the  horse's  entire 
body,  from  front  limbs  to  rear,  flexed  upon  the 
circle  on  which  it  travels.  It  is  necessary  for  this 

224 


Figure  8 


\  \ 


\ 


\ 


\ 


\ 


X 


\ 


\ 


\ 


p* 


\ 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

figure  that  the  horse's  education  shall  be  somewhat 
advanced,  in  order  that  the  curve  of  the  spine  may 
conform  to  that  of  the  path.  When,  in  addition  to 
this,  the  flexion  has  to  reverse  with  each  new  circle, 
the  difficulty  is  much  increased,  so  that  the  figure 
demands  great  suppleness  in,  and  perfect  collection 
on  the  part  of,  the  horse,  and  for  the  rider  an  eques- 
trian tact  sufficient  to  enable  him  to  reverse  his 
effects  at  each  change  of  circle  without  disturbing 
the  equilibrium  of  his  mount. 

The  figure  eight  has  been  a  great  deal  used  for 
suppling  the  horse,  and  is  still  employed  for  this 
purpose  by  modern  teachers  and  in  military  schools. 
The  scientific  equitation,  however,  comes  to  it  only 
after  the  horse  is  completely  suppled.  Inexperi- 
enced trainers  often  utilize  the  figure  to  teach  a 
horse  to  change  lead;  and  this  method  is  harmless 
and  practical.  Judges  at  horse  shows  have  the 
competitors  execute  the  figure  eight  in  order  to  dis- 
cover the  degree  of  suppleness  and  training  of  the 
horses.  It  serves  also  as  a  test  for  the  side  and  the 
limb  affected  by  lameness. 

SHOULDER-IN 

SHOULDER- IN  is  an  old  air  of  manege,  in  which  the 
horse  moves  sidewise.  It  differs  from  the  half- 
passage  in  that  it  is  performed  in  lateral,  whereas 
the  half-passage  is  in  diagonal.  The  name  is  a  mis- 
nomer. Possibly  it  arose  from  the  fact  that  in  exe- 
cuting the  figure  the  horse  is  usually  headed  to- 

226 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

ward  the  center  of  the  manege  with  croup  toward 
the  wall. 

To  obtain  the  shoulder-in,  from  left  to  right,  the 
rider,  having  his  mount  in  hand  and  forward,  in- 
creases the  pull  of  the  left  rein  to  flex  the  head  and 
neck  slightly  to  the  left.  At  the  same  time,  he  in- 
creases also  the  effect  of  his  left  leg,  carrying  it  a 
little  backward  on  the  flank,  and  thus  pushes  the 
haunches  toward  the  right.  Meanwhile,  the  right 
rein  prevents  the  complete  flexion  of  the  neck  to  the 
left,  and  forces  the  left  shoulder  toward  the  right  in 
front  of  the  right  leg. 

The  result  is  that  the  horse's  left  front  leg  passes 
in  front  of  and  across  the  right,  while  at  the  same 
time  the  left  hind  leg  also  passes  in  front  of  and 
across  its  mate.  Thereupon,  the  horse,  in  order  not 
to  fall,  steps  out  to  the  right  with  both  right  legs, 
and  the  first  step  of  the  shoulder-in  is  completed. 
Continuing  the  same  effects  continues  the  move- 
ment. 

But  the  student,  who  considers  anatomically  the 
mechanism  of  the  horse  and  its  action  in  the  various 
movements,  will  agree  with  the  anatomist  that  the 
muscles  and  articulations  of  the  horse's  shoulder 
are  not  designed  to  allow  natural  movements  of  the 
humerus  and  scapula  in  any  direction  except  for- 
ward and  back.  The  horse,  in  short,  is  not  a  crab, 
built  to  go  sidewise.  The  shoulder-in  and  the  half- 
passage  are  therefore  unnatural  contortions  com- 
pelled by  riders  who  know  no  better. 

227 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

HALF- PASS  AGE 

THIS  air  can  be  asked  of  the  horse  only  after  it  has 
learned  to  cede  from  the  neck  at  the  effects  of  the 
reins  and  from  the  haunches  at  the  effect  of  the  legs. 
To  obtain  the  movement,  the  horse,  walking  at  left 
hand,  is  first  stopped,  and  then  made  to  execute  a 
reversed  pirouette,  by  means  of  the  rider's  right  leg 
and  a  quarter  flexion  of  the  head  to  the  left  by 
means  of  the  left  rein.  Thus,  the  horse's  head  stays 
against  the  wall,  while  the  haunches  make  a  half- 
circle  to  the  left.  This  first  movement  is  complete 
when  the  horse  has  faced  about  and  is  at  the  right 
hand.  Immediately  thereupon  the  rider  caresses 
the  horse's  right  flank.  The  position  of  collection  is 
again  asked,  and  the  horse  carried  forward  at  right 
hand.  After  a  few  steps,  the  animal  is  again  halted 
and  put  through  the  reversed  pirouette  from  left  to 
right. 

In  all  this,  the  rider  has  to  remember  that  the 
employment  of  one  of  his  legs  does  not  mean  the 
complete  cessation  of  the  effect  of  the  other,  and  he 
has  also  always  to  bear  in  mind  the  principle,  sine 
qua  non,  forward,  forward,  always.  Consequently, 
when  the  reversed  pirouette  is  asked  from  right 
to  left,  the  rider's  right  leg  first  sends  the  horse 
forward. 

As  soon  as  the  horse  understands  the  reversed 
pirouette  after  being  stopped,  the  rider  has  it  exe- 
cute the  same  movement  without  the  stop.  When 

228 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

this  is  mastered,  the  rider,  still  keeping  the  animal 
moving  forward  by  the  effect  of  his  inside  leg,  by 
repeated  effects  of  the  left  leg,  causes  the  horse  to 
execute  two  or  three  steps  of  the  reversed  pirouette 
while  still  gaining  ground  forward,  the  head  against 
the  wall  and  the  haunches  toward  the  center  of  the 


HALF-PASSAGE,  HEAD  TO  WALL 

manege.  After  a  few  steps  of  this,  the  horse  is  again 
sent  forward;  and  after  a  few  more  steps,  the  half- 
passage  is  again  asked.  When  the  horse  executes 
this  movement  calmly  and  with  ease,  the  rider  first 
asks  the  half -passage,  and  then  completes  the  move- 
ment by  half  a  reversed  pirouette,  to  complete  the 
change  of  hand  without  stopping.  The  horse  being 
now  at  the  new  hand,  the  half-passage  is  again 

229 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

asked,  and  as  before  completed  by  a  reversed  pir- 
ouette after  a  few  steps  at  the  new  hand. 

When  the  horse  does  the  half-passage  correctly 
with  its  head  against  the  wall,  it  is  removed  from 
the  barrier  by  a  change  of  hand  in  diagonal.  During 
the  entire  time  of  this  diagonal  change,  the  horse 
will  be  kept  straight.  But  when  it  comes  to  within 
five  to  seven  steps  of  the  wall  at  the  new  hand,  the 
rider  will  begin  the  half-passage,  so  as  to  reach  the 
wall  at  least  ten  steps  from  the  corner. 

For  example,  the  rider,  at  right  hand,  makes  the 
diagonal  change  of  hand  by  going  straight  through 
the  center  of  the  ring,  and,  having  passed  this,  keeps 
straight  on  until  the  horse  is  five,  six,  or  seven  steps 
from  the  wall.  Here,  he  asks  the  half-passage  from 
left  to  right  —  right  leg  for  forward,  right  rein  and 
augmentation  of  the  effect  of  the  left  leg  for  the 
half-passage.  When,  by  this  movement,  the  horse 
is  brought  parallel  to  the  wall,  the  rider  stops  the 
horse,  caresses  its  left  flank,  and  keeps  it  standing 
still  for  some  moments  to  allow  the  movement  to 
fix  itself  in  its  memory.  It  is  then  carried  forward 
to  pass  the  corner. 

The  rider,  now  at  the  left  hand,  once  more  asks 
the  diagonal  change  of  hand  and  the  half-passage 
with  everything  now  reversed.  When  the  five  to 
seven  steps  of  the  half-passage  are  done  correctly, 
their  number  is  progressively  but  moderately  in- 
creased, until  finally  the  entire  diagonal  change  of 
hand  is  made  by  means  of  the  half-passage. 

230 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

When  the  animal  is  able  to  cross  the  ring  at  the 
half-passage  correctly,  it  is  taught  the  original  move- 
ment with  its  croup,  instead  of  its  head,  against  the 
wall.  For  this,  the  rider,  after  passing  the  corner  of 
the  manege  and  starting  down  the  long  side,  begins 
an  ordinary  diagonal  change  with  the  horse  straight. 


HALF-PASSAGE,  SHOULDER-IN 

But  as  soon  as  the  horse  has  completed,  at  most, 
four  steps  of  this  movement,  it  is  made  to  execute  a 
half-passage,  with  head  toward  the  center  of  the 
ring  and  tail  toward  the  wall.  After  a  few  steps  of 
the  half-passage,  the  horse  is  again  sent  forward, 
parallel  to  the  wall  but  four  steps  out,  and  then  is 
brought  back  to  the  wall,  at  the  same  hand  as 
at  the  beginning,  by  a  few  steps  of  another  half- 
passage.  With  moderate  progress  at  each  lesson, 
the  horse  is,  after  a  few  days,  brought  to  travel  the 

231 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

entire  length  of  the  side  of  the  manege  at  the  half- 
passage. 

By  the  same  progression  as  for  the  half-passage 
at  the  walk,  the  horse  is  next  trained  to  the  half- 
passage  at  the  trot. 

When  this  is  well  executed,  then  comes  the 
shoulder-in  at  the  gallop.  Galloping  to  the  right 
hand,  head  against  the  wall,  does  not  need  a  change 
of  lead.  But  for  the  change  of  hand  diagonally,  the 
horse  must  change  the  lead  when  the  change  of 
hand  is  completed  and  before  passing  the  corner. 
So  too,  for  the  shoulder-in  with  the  horse's  head 
toward  the  center  of  the  enclosure  and  the  croup 
toward  the  wall,  the  horse  has  to  be  galloping  at 
the  opposite  hand. 

If,  for  example,  the  rider  is  at  right  hand  and 
wishes  to  execute  the  shoulder-in  from  right  to  left, 
at  the  same  hand,  over  a  line  parallel  to  the  long 
side  of  the  manege,  and  with  the  horse's  head  to- 
ward the  center  and  the  croup  to  the  wall,  it  is 
evident  that  the  first  part  of  the  movement  which 
puts  the  head  inward  must  be  done  with  a  right 
lead.  Then  for  the  shoulder-in,  the  lead  must 
change  from  right  to  left.  But  when  the  horse  once 
more  travels  straight  along  the  wall,  it  is,  as  before, 
at  the  right  hand  and  must  lead  once  more  to  the 
right.  At  first,  however,  it  is  better  to  decompose 
the  movement,  changing  from  the  gallop  to  the  trot, 
at  the  end  of  each  portion,  and  then  returning  once 
more  to  the  gallop  with  the  proper  lead.  When, 

232 


r 


a > 


O 


\ 


\    t         *^ 

V 


V 


!1 

i. 

II 


ot 


•8 
* 

«d 

6 

I 


THE  FIGURES  OF  MANEGE 

however,  the  horse  makes  the  change  of  lead  in  the 
course  of  the  movement,  these  changes  are  made 
without  pause  or  change  of  gait. 

CONTRE-CHANGE  OF  HANDS 

CONTRE-CHANGE  of  hand  is  a  figure  of  manege  re- 
sembling the  square.  After  the  horse  has  passed  the 
short  side  of  the  ring  and  has  taken  about  ten  steps 
on  the  long  side,  the  rider  begins  a  diagonal  change 
of  direction  by  the  half-passage.  Arrived  at  the 
point,  A,  ten  steps  from  the  center,  O,  of  the  ma- 
nege, the  horse  is  put  straight  again  for  twenty  steps 
to  B;  and  after  that  returns  to  the  long  side  by  a 
half-passage  at  C,  at  the  same  hand  as  before  the 
execution  of  the  figure. 

At  the  walk  the  figure  is  quite  complicated  if  the 
tempo  of  the  gait  is  regular;  but  the  trot  is  more 
complicated,  because  of  the  difficulty  in  obtaining 
the  tempo  and  the  regular  number  of  steps. 

At  the  gallop,  the  difficulties  are  multiplied  by 
the  three  changes  of  lead.  The  rider  being  at  the 
right  hand  before  the  movement,  executes  the  half- 
passage  leading  to  the  right  to  A  or  B,  at  which 
point  the  lead  has  to  be  changed  from  right  to  left 
to  execute  the  half-passage  from  B  to  C.  Arrived 
at  C,  the  lead  is  to  the  left  and  has  to  be  changed  to 
the  right  at  C.  Finally,  the  horse,  now  returned  to 
the  right-hand  lead,  has  to  turn  the  corner  at  this 
new  hand,  which  is  the  same  as  that  before  the 
execution  of  the  figure. 

234 


CHAPTER  XXIV 
MY  OWN  SYSTEM 

THE  various  figures  of  manege,  together  with  the 
low  airs  of  the  high  school,  constitute  the  circus 
equitation.  This  differs  from  the  equitation  savante  in 
that  while  the  one  keeps  the  horse  always  in  the  state 
of  equilibrium,  the  other  neglects  this,  and  depends 
for  the  horse's  training  upon  straps,  tricks,  and  the 
memory  of  caresses  or  severe  punishments.  Never- 
theless, Franconi,  Baucher,  and  Fillis  have  shown  in 
the  beautiful  circuses  of  European  capitals  some 
horses  which,  always  in  the  state  of  equilibrium,  ex- 
ecuted these  low  airs  so  brilliantly  that  they  have 
never  been  equaled. 

Baucher  offered  his  system  to  the  different  cav- 
alries of  Europe,  but  without  success.  Fillis,  though 
not  accepted  in  France,  became  instructor  to  the 
officers  of  the  royal  chevaux-legers  in  Belgium,  and 
also  taught  for  several  years  at  the  cavalry  school 
in  Russia.  Both  these  grand  masters  were  continu- 
ally studying  the  application  of  their  principles;  and 
because  of  their  great  reputations,  they  were  able  to 
obtain,  for  education  or  purchase,  some  animals  of  a 
quality,  both  of  temper  and  of  conformation,  very 
near  perfection,  and  in  every  way  greatly  superior 
to  the  general  run  of  horses. 

I,  on  the  other  hand,  like  other  artists,  always 

235 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

poor,  have  always  been  criticized  for  the  inferior 
natural  quality  and  conformation  of  the  horses 
which  I  have  trained.  I  have,  therefore,  amidst  all 
the  confusion  of  theories,  methods,  and  principles, 
devoted  my  life  to  training  imperfect  animals.  In 
so  doing,  I  have  had  opportunity  to  discover  what 
is  right  and  what  wrong  in  the  methods  of  my 
predecessors.  They  selected  perfect  animals  and 
taught  them  the  low  airs  in  the  state  of  equilibrium. 
I  have  taken  imperfect  animals,  and  by  means  of 
the  low  airs,  using  these  as  gymnastics,  have  cor- 
rected their  imperfections,  and  brought  them  to  a 
conformation  that  makes  the  state  of  equilibrium 
possible. 

I  have  been  so  invariably  successful  in  correcting 
and  educating  the  horses  which  I  have  owned,  or 
which  have  been  sent  to  me  for  training,  that  as 
early  as  in  March,  1888,  a  commission  of  the  United 
States  Army  was  sent  to  my  school  to  examine  into 
my  system.  A  portion  of  their  report  appears  in  the 
Appendix. 

The  modus  operandi  of  my  method,  and  the 
progression  of  movements  of  the  low  airs  which  I 
employ  as  a  system  of  physical  culture  for  the 
horse,  are  best  explained  by  specific  examples.  In 
general,  the  scientific  equitation  can  locate  the 
cause  of  lameness  or  unsoundness  more  precisely 
than  can  a  veterinarian,  since  the  latter  has  neither 
the  equestrian  tact  nor  the  accuracy  of  seat  to  de- 
tect the  member  which  is  not  acting  as  it  should. 

236 


MY  OWN  SYSTEM 

For  instance,  a  horse  has  some  disease,  no  matter 
what,  affecting  the  left  fore  foot.  A  veterinary 
treats  the  trouble,  but  the  horse,  during  the  treat- 
ment, shrinks  from  putting  its  weight  on  the  lame 
foot.  The  muscles,  tendons,  and  ligaments  of  the 
left  fore  leg,  therefore,  doing  less  than  their  full 
duty,  become  more  or  less  atrophied,  while  the 
right  fore  leg,  doing  more  than  its  share,  becomes 
correspondingly  developed.  When,  at  length,  the 
diseased  foot  is  cured  and  once  more  sound,  no 
trouble  appears  so  long  as  the  horse  stands  still. 
But  as  soon  as  it  begins  to  move,  the  weaker  left 
leg  fails  to  stride  symmetrically  with  the  stronger 
right.  The  trouble  is,  however,  no  longer  in  the  foot, 
but  in  the  muscles,  ligaments,  or  tendons  of  the  leg. 
The  remedy  is,  then,  gymnastic,  to  bring  the  weak 
organ  to  the  level  of  the  rest  of  the  body.  This  be- 
longs to  the  master  of  the  scientific  equitation.  It 
is  exactly  like  the  case  of  a  man  kept  in  bed  with  a 
broken  limb,  whose  physician  gives  him  at  first 
massage,  and  then,  after  the  bone  is  knit,  turns 
him  over  to  an  instructor  in  gymnastics,  who,  by 
flexions  and  exercises,  restores  the  energy  and  elas- 
ticity which  the  patient  lost  during  his  enforced 
rest. 

I  have,  I  have  said,  always  been  criticized  for 
not  buying  good  and  sound  animals  for  myself,  as 
other  masters  do.  But  to  educate  such  an  animal 
teaches  the  rider  nothing.  It  is  too  easy.  The  mas- 
ter does  not  prove  his  own  ability  nor  the  practical 

237 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

usefulness  of  his  art  by  training  horses  already 
made  nearly  perfect  by  nature.  The  test  of  his 
science  and  his  utility  lies  in  his  ability  to  correct 
the  natural  defects  of  an  ordinary  animal  and  make 
it  useful. 

But  how  can  a  teacher  of  this  art  direct  his  pupils, 
if  he  does  not  himself  understand  the  importance, 
direct  or  indirect,  of  what  he  teaches?  "  An  ounce 
of  prevention,"  says  the  proverb,  "is  worth  a 
pound  of  cure."  Riding-masters,  teach  your  learn- 
ers correct  seat  and  correct  effects,  in  order  that 
they  may  not  themselves  lame  their  horses! 

To  take  now  an  example  of  a  very  different  sort, 
I  have  seen,  in  the  course  of  a  lifetime  passed  in 
studying  horses,  some  that  were  near  perfection 
after  their  education  was  finished,  but  not  before. 
One  and  all,  before  they  were  trained,  they  had 
some  defect  of  conformation  or  of  temper.  Further- 
more, I  have  particularly  noticed  that  physical  de- 
fect has  a  great  influence  on  the  temper.  For  if  a 
horse  has  the  conformation  and  the  strength  to 
accomplish  what  the  rider  asks,  it  makes  no  differ- 
ence what  the  service  may  be,  the  horse  will  try  its 
best  if  only  it  is  treated  with  humanity  and  intel- 
ligence. But  if  a  horse  is  weak,  or  badly  conformed, 
or  too  young  for  the  task  put  upon  it,  notwithstand- 
ing all  its  good-will  it  cannot  obey  for  lack  of  physi- 
cal power.  It  tries,  fails,  and  refuses.  If  then,  the 
rider,  neither  humane  nor  intelligent,  treats  the 
horse  brutally  or  unjustly,  the  animal's  retentive 

238 


MY  OWN  SYSTEM 

memory  stamps  the  lesson  on  its  temper.  It  be- 
comes restive,  vicious,  dangerous. 

My  long  observation  and  study  convince  me, 
moreover,  that  not  only  does  the  physical  strength 
of  the  horse  affect  its  temper;  the  very  temper  itself 
is  created  by  the  treatment  which  the  animal  re- 
ceives. This  treatment,  more  or  less  practical,  more 
or  less  reasoned,  is  the  horse's  education.  The  mem- 
ory of  wrong  treatment  is  what  fixes  the  instinctive 
reactions  which  we  term  defense,  restiveness,  and 
vice.  Is  it  not,  after  all,  precisely  on  this  basis  that 
we  direct  the  child's  development  to  manhood? 

Or  to  take  yet  another  example  illustrative  of 
my  principles,  every  horse,  like  every  man,  though 
on  the  whole  well  conformed,  is  virtually  never 
exactly  the  same  on  the  two  sides  of  the  body.  We 
ourselves  are  either  right-  or  left-handed,  and  usu- 
ally right-  or  left-legged.  We  seldom  have  quite  the 
same  power  or  freedom  in  one  set  of  members  as  in 
the  other. 

This  asymmetry  of  the  two  halves  of  the  body  is, 
in  the  horse,  known  as  "side."  All  methodists, 
from  Xenophon  to  the  present  day,  have  recognized 
the  defect.  I  shall  not  dwell  on  the  various  causes 
which  various  writers  have  assigned  for  the  trouble. 
It  is  sufficient  to  point  out  that  it  exists,  undeniably; 
and  that  it  appears  at  birth.  The  young  creature, 
therefore,  its  "side"  being  uncorrected,  forms  the 
habit  of  moving  unsymmetrically.  Certain  of  its 
members,  thereupon,  being  slightly  less  energet- 

239 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

ically  employed  than  their  mates,  develop  less 
strength.  In  the  end,  slight  atrophies  result  which 
derange  the  precise  equality  of  the  strides,  steps, 
and  gaits.  The  horse  does  not  go  sound,  and  is  con- 
demned as  lame.  Naturally,  such  "side**  is  a  more 
serious  matter  for  a  horse  than  for  a  man,  since  the 
horse  gets  its  utility  from  its  locomotion  and  the 
movement  of  its  four  members. 

This  inequality,  this  atrophy,  is  not  easily  located 
by  the  non-professional,  often  not  even  by  the  veter- 
inarian. The  inequality  or  the  lameness  is  apparent. 
But  which  leg  is  at  fault,  or  where  in  the  stride  the 
derangement  occurs,  is,  in  the  opinion  of  competent 
veterinarians,  a  very  complicated  problem.  The 
cause  may  be  in  a  hind  leg,  while  the  effect  appears 
in  a  perfectly  sound  front  one. 

Recognizing  the  importance  of  this  matter,  and 
interested  also  because  of  my  ownership  of  a  great 
variety  of  horses  in  my  different  schools,  I  have 
studied  the  problem  deeply,  and  as  the  result  of 
wide  experience  aided  by  experiments,  I  have  devel- 
oped a  system  which  was  adopted  by  General  P.  H. 
Sheridan,  after  a  favorable  report  from  a  board 
of  army  officers. 

This  system  involves  locating  the  derangement, 
discovering  its  causes,  and  then  repairing  the  defect 
by  means  of  the  low  airs  of  the  high  school.  A  com- 
plete account  is  beyond  the  scope  of  the  present 
work,  but  I  shall  be  glad  to  supply  complete  in- 
formation to  the  interested  reader.  I  touch  upon 

240 


MY  OWN  SYSTEM 

the  matter  here  to  emphasize  the  difference  between 
myself,  on  the  one  hand,  and  Baucher  and  Fillis, 
on  the  other.  They  employ  these  airs  of  manege 
for  the  sake  of  public  exhibition.  I  use  them  as  a 
means  of  correction  or  development.  I  want  a  horse, 
sound,  strong,  and  well  developed,  in  order  to  have 
a  square  and  equal  walk,  trot,  or  gallop.  Since  it  is 
impossible  to  find  a  horse  having  these  qualities 
by  nature,  I  attain  my  object  by  means  of  gym- 
nastic exercises  derived  from  the  movements  of  the 
high  school. 

I  have,  then,  invented  no  new  air  of  high  school, 
though  I  have  complicated  some  old  ones,  but  al- 
ways for  the  sake  of  more  strength,  more  precision, 
more  energy.  I  begin  my  course  of  training  always 
by  the  work  with  the  longe,  the  horse  turning  the 
circle  successively  at  the  two  hands.  It  is  during 
this  first  part  of  the  horse's  education  that  I  make 
my  diagnosis  of  the  case,  and  my  prognosis.  That 
done,  I  attack  immediately  the  local  cause  of  any 
derangement. 

For  example,  the  horse,  walking  round  the  circle, 
proves  weak  in  loins,  coupling,  hind  quarters.  I 
load  it  progressively  with  a  proper  weight,  and 
watch  its  progress.  When  it  carries  the  weight 
energetically  with  its  hind  quarters,  I  make  it  walk 
backward,  a  few  steps  at  a  time,  several  times  at 
each  lesson.  When  its  progress  becomes  still  more 
evident,  I  mount  and  continue  the  education  by 
flexions,  pirouettes,  reversed  pirouettes,  and  back- 

241 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

ing,  until  finally  I  come  to  the  assemblage.  When 
this  state  is  attained,  I  use  the  piaffer  from  the 
beginning,  progressively.  When  a  saddle  horse  can 
execute  the  piaffer,  the  hind  hand  has  all  the 
strength  needed  to  carry  weight  over  wall,  hurdle, 
or  ditch. 

Another  example.  My  horse  shows  that  it  is 
weak  in  its  left  stride.  I  immediately  begin  the 
Spanish  walk,  demanding  more  movement  of  the 
left  front  leg  than  of  the  right.  Then  I  exact  pro- 
gressively the  Spanish  trot,  provided  that  the  trou- 
ble is  localized  in  the  left  shoulder,  a  point  easy  to 
verify  by  the  lack  of  contact  upon  the  left  rein. 
How?  Well,  if  the  contact  upon  the  left  bar  gives 
the  fixed  point  at  the  atlas  region,  this  fixed  point 
is  the  center  from  which  originates  the  action  of  the 
two  muscles,  rhomboideus  and  mastoido-humeralis, 
which  by  their  contraction  raise  the  left  front  leg 
and  extend  it  forward.  But,  of  course,  if  the  shoul- 
der is  weak,  the  horse  is  not  willing  to  move  this 
left  shoulder  or  leg,  and  so  refuses  the  contact,  in 
order  not  to  establish  the  fixed  point  from  which 
the  action  starts.  But  if  the  difficulty  is  not  in  the 
shoulder,  but  in  the  arm  from  the  humerus  to  the 
knee,  by  a  little  more  steady  flexion  with  my  rein, 
I  flex  the  arm  upon  the  humerus.  The  head,  being 
now  more  flexed,  gives  the  fixed  point  to  the  rhom- 
boideus, but  prevents  the  action  of  the  mastoido- 
humeralis.  The  leg,  therefore,  raises,  with  the  arm 
extended  and  the  knee  flexed. 

242 


MY  OWN  SYSTEM 

Or,  again,  suppose  the  derangement  is  located  in 
the  right  trapezius,  which  gives  to  the  raised  front 
leg  the  time  of  the  three  movements  of  the  forward 
stride.  I  keep  a  more  persistent  flexion  to  the  right, 
in  order  that  the  muscles  of  the  neck,  by  their  ar- 
rangement and  their  connections  with  the  trapezius, 
may  force  the  trapezius  to  remain  contracted  for  a 
longer  time.  So  as  the  right  fore  leg  lifts,  flexes,  and 
extends,  the  trapezius  keeps  it  extended.  Thus,  the 
trapezius  is  especially  exercised,  and  in  the  course 
of  time  becomes  developed  to  the  degree  needed 
to  give  as  long  a  stride  on  that  side  as  on  the 
other. 

Still  another  case.  The  stride  of  the  left  front  leg 
is  longer  forward  than  that  of  the  right,  and  con- 
sequently gains  more  ground  than  its  mate.  Natu- 
rally, then,  the  right  hind  foot,  having  less  open 
space  in  front  of  it,  cannot  reach  out  so  far  as  the 
foot  on  the  other  side.  The  strides  are,  therefore, 
unequal;  and  the  horse  is  judged  to  be  lame  in  the 
right  hind  leg.  Yet  it  is  not.  The  short  stride  of  the 
right  hind  leg  is  only  the  effect.  The  cause  of  the 
trouble  lies  either  in  the  fore  leg,  or  in  the  shoulder, 
or  in  the  muscles  which  operate  the  right  fore  leg. 
But  the  horse,  being  lame,  balances  itself  with  head 
and  neck,  so  that  it  is  impossible  to  locate  the 
trouble.  Paralyze  this  balance,  and  the  horse,  if 
not  unequally  conformed,  will  stride  squarely.  It 
merely  had  a  bad  habit. 

In  a  word,  find  the  derangement,  its  location,  its 

243 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

cause,  by  means  of  effects  which  appear  only  when 
the  horse  moves.  Then  treat  the  cause  by  means  of 
the  low  airs,  using  these  as  gymnastic  exercises,  a 
method  of  physical  culture. 


CHAPTER  XXV 
THE  JAMBETTES 

BY  means  of  the  flexions  of  the  neck  and  the  lower 
jaw,  by  the  pirouette,  the  reversed  pirouette,  and 
the  movement  backward,  we  have  now  suppled  the 
different  parts  of  the  horse's  body.  We  have  not, 
however,  yet  suppled  the  limbs.  And  since  these 
are  the  essential  agents  in  locomotion,  these  also 
must  be  trained  to  execute  their  strides  without 
stiffness,  since  this  would  cause  constraint,  lame- 
ness, and  inequality. 

For  this,  we  have  the  same  means  of  controlling 
the  horse  as  before  —  the  right  and  left  reins,  the 
right  and  left  legs  of  the  rider,  and  his  accuracy  of 
seat.  The  hands  holding  the  reins  are  in  their  regu- 
lar position  when  they  are  at  the  same  height  as 
the  elbows.  When  they  are  lower  than  the  elbows, 
the  position  is  called  "hands  down,"  and  produces 
a  special  effect.  Hands  higher  than  the  elbows  is 
"hands  up,"  and  this  also  has  a  special  effect. 
These  three  effects  of  the  hands  are  communicated 
to  the  lower  jaw,  to  the  head,  to  the  neck,  and  to 
the  fore  hand,  and  act  by  the  play  of  the  various 
articulations  of  these  members. 

It  is  evident,  however,  that  these  different  effects 
of  the  hands  are  not  understood  by  the  horse;  so 
that  it  is  only  by  means  of  exercises  to  supple  the 

245 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

different  joints  and  to  make  it  understand  the 
meaning  of  these  effects  of  hand,  that  we  at  length 
obtain  that  complete  command  over  the  fore  legs 
which  is  the  sine  qua  non  of  controlled  locomotion. 

The  same  principles  apply  also  to  the  horse's  hind 
legs.  The  rider's  legs  produce  three  different  effects 
according  to  their  position  on  the  horse's  flanks. 
Four  inches  behind  the  girths,  pressure  of  the  rid- 
er's legs  stimulates  the  horse's  rear  limbs  to  a  move- 
ment of  impulsion  forward.  Near  the  girths,  this 
pressure  maintains  this  action  of  the  horse's  hind 
legs,  equally  forward,  with  the  same  elevation,  and 
at  the  same  speed.  But  the  rider's  legs  pressed 
three  inches  back  of  the  first  position  will  draw  the 
horse's  hind  legs  forward  under  its  body,  and  result 
in  a  position  which  brings  the  forward  impulse  to 
a  stop,  or  even  produces  motion  backward.  Only 
by  exercises  suppling  the  hind  legs  do  we  make  the 
horse  understand  the  meaning  of  these  effects. 

There  is  no  other  name  for  these  exercises  for 
suppling  the  limbs  except  the  French  name  jam- 
bettes,  fromjambes,  meaning  legs. 

This  exercise  of  the  jambettes  is,  however,  highly 
useful  for  still  another  purpose.  Since  the  horse's 
equilibrium  is  the  sine  qua  non  of  the  equitation 
savante,  it  is  very  necessary  that  the  rider  should  be 
able,  at  will,  to  place  the  fore  legs  of  his  mount 
perpendicular  to  its  body  and  to  the  ground.  Con- 
trol of  each  several  limb  by  means  of  reins  and  legs 
makes  it  possible  for  the  cavalier  to  rectify  immedi- 

246 


THE  JAMBETTES 

ately  a  wrong  position  of  any  one.  When,  therefore, 
the  horse  has  all  its  legs  perpendicular  to  the  ground 
and  parallel  to  one  another,  there  exists  the  state  of 
equilibrium  with  correct  location  of  the  center  of 
gravity.  The  rider's  seat  is  accurate,  so  that  a  trans- 
fer of  his  weight,  forward,  to  the  right,  to  the  left,  or 
backward,  impels  the  horse  in  one  of  these  directions. 

The  exercises  commence  with  the  horse  standing 
still.  The  front  legs  are  given  two  kinds  oijanibette, 
the  first  of  which  involves  the  flexion  of  the  scapula- 
humeralis  and  the  radio-humeralis. 

A  great  many  trainers  give  this  exercise  on  foot. 
The  right  rein,  preferably  at  first  the  snaffle,  is  held 
in  the  right  hand.  The  trainer,  holding  the  whip  in 
his  left  hand,  touches  very  gently  the  horse's  right 
leg,  repeating  very  gentle  strokes  until  the  animal 
lifts  its  right  fore  leg.  This  action,  when  secured,  is 
immediately  rewarded  by  the  caress. 

The  process  is  now  continued  until  the  leg  is  held 
in  position,  foot  off  the  ground,  knee  forward,  lower 
leg  down.  Very  soon,  the  mere  presence  of  the  whip 
accompanied  by  a  partial  flexion  with  the  right 
rein,  will  be  sufficient  to  maintain  the  leg  flexed  in 
the  air.  Then  the  whip  is  progressively  suppressed, 
and  thejambette  asked  by  a  partial  flexion  by  means 
of  the  right  rein.  At  this  point,  everything  is  re- 
versed, and  the  jambette  of  the  left  fore  leg  taught 
in  the  same  way.  The  great  difficulty  is  to  discover 
just  the  spot  on  the  horse's  leg  where  the  touch  of 
the  whip  will  best  stimulate  the  movement.  This 

247 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

cannot  be  told  in  advance.  Each  horse  has  its 
peculiar  sensibility,  which  must  be  discovered  by 
experiment. 

When  the  jambette  both  to  the  right  and  to  the 
left  is  obtained  by  means  of  the  snaffle,  it  is  asked 
in  the  same  way  by  the  bit.  When  everything  is 
thoroughly  mastered  with  the  trainer  on  foot,  the 
latter  mounts,  and  repeats  the  exercise  by  partial 
flexions  of  the  neck,  without  using  the  whip.  If, 
however,  the  horse  does  not  understand  when  first 
mounted,  it  can  be  helped  out  by  touches  of  the 
whip  on  shoulder  or  leg.  But  the  whip  should  be 
eliminated  as  soon  as  possible. 

Another  way  of  obtaining  the  same  jambette  is  to 
begin  mounted.  It  is  evident  that,  with  the  horse 
standing,  a  partial  flexion  of  the  neck  to  the  right 
will  shift  on  to  the  left  fore  leg  the  weight  formerly 
carried  by  the  right  fore  leg.  This,  therefore,  being 
unloaded,  tends  to  be  raised  from  the  ground.  If, 
now,  the  trainer,  at  the  first  sign  of  this  lifting, 
rewards  the  horse  with  caresses,  the  latter  will  very 
soon  comprehend  what  is  wanted;  and,  at  the  par- 
tial flexion  of  the  neck,  will  hold  up  the  right  fore 
leg.  (Figure  27.)  The  same  means  reversed  operates 
to  secure  the  elevation  of  the  left  fore  leg. 

During  this  practice  on  the  jambettes,  the  rider's 
legs  maintain  the  horse  standing  and  straight,  and 
prevent  movement  backwards.  Here,  then,  are  the 
principles  which  obtain  the  flexion  at  the  scapulo- 
humeralis  articulation. 

248 


Figure  27.  JAMBETTE:  FLEXION  OF  THE 

RIGHT  FORE  LEG 


Figure  28.  JAMBETTE:  EXTENSION  OF  THE  RIGHT 

FORE  LEG 


Figure  29.  JAMBETTE.-  FLEXION  OF  THE  RIGHT 
HIND  LEG 


THE  JAMBETTES 

When  this  form  of  the  exercise  is  well  understood, 
the  trainer  proceeds  to  the  second  form,  in  which 
the  entire  fore  leg  is  extended  forward. 

For  this,  the  rider's  hand,  in  calling  for  the  par- 
tial flexion  of  the  neck,  is  first  carried  at  the  regular 
position,  or,  if  necessary,  a  little  lower.  This  posi- 
tion of  the  hand  gives  the  fixed  point  at  the  atlas 
region,  and  thus  acts  directly  on  the  rhomboideus 
muscle,  which  by  its  contraction  raises  the  fore  leg, 
and  on  the  trapezius  which  holds  the  fore  leg  raised 
and  flexed.  In  the  meantime,  the  low  position  of  the 
hand,  as  the  flexion  is  asked,  inhibits  the  action  of 
the  mastoido-humeralis.  If  now  the  hand  is  raised 
progressively  from  its  low  position,  the  tension 
from  the  fixed  point  at  the  atlas  region  will  be  com- 
municated to  the  mastoido-humeralis ,  which  will 
enter  into  action,  extend  the  entire  fore  leg  forward, 
and  hold  it  there  so  long  as  the  fixed  point  remains 
at  the  atlas  region.  This  exercise  is,  then,  the  sec- 
ond form  of  thejambette.  (Figure  28.) 

These  jambettes  will  teach  the  horse  to  raise  its 
fore  legs  and  to  extend  them  at  the  effect  produced 
by  the  hands  of  the  rider,  both  in  motion  and  stand- 
ing still.  By  this  means  the  fore  legs  are  so  placed 
as  to  receive  and  support  their  proper  portion  of 
the  entire  load.  The  partial  flexions  used  to  obtain 
a  single  jambette  to  the  right  or  left  are  now  re- 
placed by  a  direct  flexion  of  the  lower  jaw  and  neck, 
which  gives  the  alternate  jambettes  of  the  two  limbs. 
By  the  two  positions  of  the  hands,  low  for  the  flex- 

249 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

ion  of  the  scapulo-humeralis  articulation,  high  for 
the  extension  of  the  lower  leg,  these  movements  are 
made  to  occur  alternately,  both  with  the  horse 
standing  and  in  motion. 

There  are,  then,  three  effects  of  the  hand  holding 
the  reins.  The  first  prevents  movement  forward. 
The  second  directs  the  body  when  in  motion.  The 
third  raises  and  sustains  the  front  hand  either  stand- 
ing or  moving. 

Thejambettes  of  the  hind  legs  are  obtained  by  the 
effects  of  the  rider's  legs,  and  involve  nothing  more 
than  a  flexion  of  a  limb  sustained  for  a  short  time. 
As  soon  as  the  effect  has  ceased,  the  horse's  leg 
returns  to  the  ground  for  the  next  stride.  (Figure 
29.) 

The  value  of  the  jambettes  of  the  hind  legs  is  that 
they  enable  the  rider  to  set  the  limbs  at  right  angles 
to  the  ground  and  parallel  to  each  other  when  the 
horse  is  standing;  or  when  the  horse  is  in  motion, 
they  enable  the  rider  to  secure  an  equal  impulse 
from  both  hind  legs. 

For  it  is  obvious  that  it  is  not  by  the  lifted  limb 
that  the  horse  sends  its  body  forward,  but  by  the 
other  which  is  on  the  ground.  For  example,  the  left 
hind  foot  cannot  be  lifted,  unless  the  right  hind  foot 
is  in  contact  with  the  ground,  in  order  that  the 
right  leg  may  bear  the  load  which  the  left  has  been 
supporting.  The  right  leg  is,  therefore,  in  position 
for  the  impulsion.  But  when  this  impulsion  is 
finished,  the  left  leg  will  have  returned  to  the 

250 


THE  JAMBETTES 

ground  under  the  center  of  gravity  and  in  position, 
in  its  turn,  to  act  as  support  for  the  load  and  to  de- 
liver the  forward  thrust  during  the  brief  interval 
when  the  right  leg  is  in  the  air.  For  this  reason,  it 
is  essential  that  each  hind  leg,  after  the  jambette, 
shall  return  to  the  ground,  either  at  the  perpendicu- 
lar or  forward  of  it,  never  behind. 

To  obtain  the  jambette  of  the  right  hind  leg  with 
the  horse  standing,  the  rider,  by  the  effect  of  his 
left  leg,  fixes  the  horse's  left  hind  leg  upon  the 
ground,  and  with  his  right,  asks  the  lifting  of  the 
right  hind  leg.  The  rider's  desire  will  not  at  first 
be  understood  by  the  horse.  But  with  repetitions 
and  caresses,  the  leg  soon  comes  to  be  held  in  the 
air.  Then  the  jambette  of  the  other  leg  is  taught 
with  everything  reversed. 

When  thejambettes  of  all  four  legs  are  thoroughly 
learned,  it  then  depends  simply  upon  the  equestrian 
tact,  the  skill  in  fingering,  and  the  accuracy  of  seat 
of  the  rider,  to  obtain  any  desired  movement  or 
gait;  for  the  rider  now  has  mastership  over  his 
horse's  legs,  which  are  its  only  means  of  locomotion. 


CHAPTER  XXVI 
THE  SPANISH  WALK 

IN  the  Spanish  walk,  the  horse  extends  alternately 
its  front  legs  forward  to  their  full  length,  holds  them 
extended  for  a  brief  time,  and  then  steps  forward. 
Why  this  gait  is  called  "Spanish"  is  a  mystery. 
Possibly  it  is  because  the  Spanish  jennet  has  com- 
monly an  exaggerated  action  forward,  though  this 
is  never  so  marked  as  in  the  Spanish  walk.  The  air 
is  also  sometimes  called  the  "soldier's  walk." 

The  Spanish  walk  is  the  first  movement  of  the 
so-called  high  school  or  circus  equitation.  It  is  also 
employed  by  the  reasoned  equitation  for  show  pur- 
poses. Both  schools  have  used  it  as  a  means  of 
teaching  the  Spanish  trot  and  various  other  move- 
ments of  the  high  school. 

I,  on  the  contrary,  do  not  use  the  Spanish  trot  for 
show  purposes,  but  only  as  a  gymnastic  exercise,  to 
obtain  the  greatest  muscular  development  of  the 
animal,  to  supple  various  portions  of  the  body,  to 
equalize  the  strides  of  the  four  limbs,  and  to  secure 
a  uniformly  energetic  action  throughout  the  entire 
mechanism.  For  me,  therefore,  the  Spanish  walk  is 
not  an  end,  but  a  means  toward  the  suppleness  and 
activity  which  results  from  practicing  it. 

When  the  Spanish  walk  is  asked  from  a  horse  that 
is  so  far  educated  as  to  preserve  the  state  of  equilib- 

252 


THE  SPANISH  WALK 

rium  during  all  movements,  it  becomes  a  most 
valuable  exercise  for  instilling  the  idea  of  the  di- 
agonal, as  well  as  for  making  the  horse  energetic 
and  active  at  the  other  gaits.  But  when  the  Span- 
ish walk  is  obtained  by  the  aid  of  straps,  whips,  or 
other  devices,  and  is  used  only  for  show,  the  gait  is 
neither  attractive  to  the  onlooker  nor  beneficial  to 
the  horse.  In  these  circumstances,  though  it  ele- 
vates its  front  legs,  it  does  not  really  advance  upon 
them  in  this  position.  Instead,  it  draws  its  fore  legs 
backward  from  their  extended  position  and  makes 
only  a  half-step  forward.  Meanwhile,  the  hind  legs 
drag  inactive;  the  head  and  neck  take  any  sort  of 
position;  and  the  rider's  hand,  at  each  step,  jerks 
up  and  down.  The  movement  becomes  a  mere 
grimace,  performed  under  the  direction  of  a  rider 
who  knows  no  better. 

To  teach  the  Spanish  walk  with  the  whip,  the 
trainer  places  the  horse  with  its  right  side  close  to  a 
fence  or  wall,  and  taking  the  reins  in  his  left  hand, 
touches  the  horse's  left  fore  leg  with  the  whip.  It  is 
difficult  to  say  at  just  what  part  of  the  limb  the 
whip  should  first  make  its  effect.  Some  horses  will 
understand  quicker  if  the  pastern  is  touched.  For 
others,  the  best  point  is  the  back  tendon,  the  shin, 
the  fore  arm,  or  the  knee.  The  rider  must  discover 
the  spot  by  trial;  but  the  place  once  found,  the  first 
touch  of  the  whip  should  always  be  at  that  point. 

When  the  horse  learns  to  raise  its  foot  from  the 
ground  at  the  contact  of  the  whip,  the  trainer 

253 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

should  at  first  rest  satisfied  with  this  concession. 
After  a  time,  the  horse  will  hold  its  leg  in  the  air. 
If  the  horse  paws  the  ground,  prevent  the  action, 
but  do  not  punish.  Pawing  is  merely  a  sign  of  im- 
patience, which,  however,  must  not  be  allowed  to 
become  a  habit. 

When  the  horse  holds  its  two  legs  flexed  equally 
well,  it  has  to  be  taught  to  extend  them  forward. 
For  this,  the  whip  is  brought  to  the  point  of  the 
shoulder,  and  the  trainer  perseveres  in  light,  re- 
peated touches  until  the  bent  limb  is  extended  for- 
ward. As  soon  as  this  occurs,  the  whip  is  no  longer 
applied  at  the  first  point,  whatever  that  was,  but 
the  touch  at  the  point  of  the  shoulder  obtains  both 
the  raising  of  the  leg  and  its  extension. 

The  horse,  having  now  reached  the  point  where 
it  holds  its  leg  extended,  the  next  matter  is  the  for- 
ward step.  For  this,  there  are  two  devices.  One  of 
these,  adopted  by  Fillis,  is  to  pull  the  animal  forward 
with  the  reins,  and  thus  force  it  to  set  down  its 
lifted  foot  at  a  point  corresponding  to  the  extension 
of  the  leg.  This  method  is  least  satisfactory,  be- 
cause of  the  long  time  it  takes  to  make  the  horse 
comprehend  what  is  wanted  of  it. 

The  second  method  is  easier  and  more  immedi- 
ately successful.  The  trainer,  always  facing  back- 
ward, reins  in  his  left  hand,  whip  in  his  right,  and 
keeping  the  horse's  right  side  against  the  barrier, 
chirps  with  his  tongue,  and  touches  the  horse's  left 
flank  with  the  whip,  until  the  horse  goes  forward  at 

254 


THE  SPANISH  WALK 

an  ordinary  walk.  Little  by  little,  this  walk  is  made 
slower  and  slower.  At  this  stage,  the  two  move- 
ments are  asked  together.  The  horse  now  moving 
at  the  slow  walk,  the  whip  touches  the  point  of  the 
shoulder  precisely  as  when  the  animal  was  standing 
still.  Thereupon,  very  shortly,  the  horse  extends 
its  left  shoulder  and  executes  the  first  step  of  the 
Spanish  walk.  If  now  the  trainer  knows  how,  by 
means  of  caresses  and  encouragements,  to  push  this 
first  success,  the  horse  will  soon  learn  to  walk  with 
extended  fore  legs.  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  add 
that,  throughout  all  this  work,  the  two  sides  are 
alternated  and  treated  equally. 

After  this  work  on  foot  has  continued  until  the 
horse  is  thoroughly  confirmed  in  the  gait,  the 
trainer  mounts,  and  once  more  obtains  the  exten- 
sion by  touching  the  horse's  shoulder  with  the  whip. 
When  this  much  is  done  well  and  easily,  standing, 
the  rider  by  means  of  his  legs,  sends  the  horse  for- 
ward at  a  slow  walk.  He  then,  with  the  whip, 
touches  the  shoulder  next  the  wall  shortly  before 
the  leg  on  that  side  has  begun  to  lift. 

When  the  animal  has  learned  to  extend  one  leg 
in  proper  cadence,  the  trainer  reverses  sides,  and 
trains  the  other  leg  in  the  same  manner. 

The  movement  being  executed  by  either  leg 
alone,  the  next  step  is  to  combine  the  two.  Some 
trainers,  for  this,  use  two  whips,  one  on  each  side. 
Others  have  an  assistant  mount,  while  they,  on 
foot,  as  the  assistant  sends  the  horse  forward  with 

255 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

legs  or  spurs,  touch  the  shoulders  with  the  whip  in 
proper  sequence.  Thus  the  rider  raises  first  one 
hand  and  then  the  other  to  secure  the  extension  of 
the  corresponding  leg,  and  the  trainer  on  foot  sup- 
plements this  effect  by  touches  of  the  whip.  In  this 
manner,  any  quadruped  can  be  taught  the  Spanish 
walk  —  elephant,  cow,  donkey.  A  great  many  such 
creatures  have,  in  fact,  been  exhibited.  But,  as 
Fillis  says,  a  horse  doing  the  Spanish  walk  is  only 
mechanized  to  execute  grimaces  with  its  front  legs 
while  the  hind  legs  drag  on  the  ground.  All  the 
work  has  been  directed  at  the  front  legs  to  the  com- 
plete neglect  of  the  hind  hand.  ("  Why-Not"  and 
"  Pierrot "  at  the  Spanish  walk,  Figures  30  and  31.) 
Masters  of  the  scientific  equitation  object  to  the 
foregoing  method  of  obtaining  the  Spanish  walk. 
Their  principles  admit  teaching  this  gait  only  when 
the  horse  is  mounted,  and  without  any  use  of  the 
whip.  Unfortunately,  grand  masters  of  equitation 
are  not  born  grand  masters;  and  there  is  not  one  of 
us  who,  at  the  beginning  of  our  careers,  has  not 
spent  years  over  'the  Spanish  walk,  on  foot,  with 
whip,  assistant,  and  the  rest.  After  long  and  assid- 
uous labor,  we  find  it  simple  enough  to  obtain  the 
air  mounted,  without  preparatory  work  on  foot. 
Of  course  it  is  simple  for  us  now.  But  it  was  not  so 
simple  fifty  years  ago;  and  we  were  proud  enough 
of  the  first  horse  that  we  put  through  the  Spanish 
walk.  I  say  this  in  order  to  encourage  the  young. 
When  they  have  had  the  experience  of  grand  mas- 

256 


Figure  30.  SPANISH  WALK:  LEFT  DIAGONAL 


Figure  31.  SPANISH  WALK:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL 


THE  SPANISH  WALK 

ters,  they  also  will  obtain  the  step  mounted  and 
without  aid. 

I  have  now  arrived  at  the  point  which  I  had  in 
view,  when,  in  discussing  such  movements  as  gal- 
lop, change  of  direction,  shoulder-in,  and  the  like, 
I  disputed  the  ideas  of  Baucher  and  Fillis  as  to  the 
effects  which  should  be  applied.  The  reader  will 
find  that  what  now  follows  will  be  clearer  if  he  will 
refer  back  to  the  portions  of  the  book  where  these 
topics  were  earlier  discussed. 

Baucher  and  Fillis  teach  the  Spanish  walk  only 
when  mounted,  just  as  I  do.  Why,  then,  have,  these 
grand  masters  fallen  into  the  error  of  applying  cer- 
tain principles  to  certain  movements,  and  yet  dis- 
allowing these  same  principles  in  similar  cases? 

I  quote,  by  way  of  example,  Baucher's  theory  of 
the  Spanish  walk,  the  italics  mine.  To  the  portion 
in  italics,  I  call  the  reader's  special  attention. 

"One  understands  by  Spanish  walk  the  action  of 
a  horse  which,  in  walking,  gives  all  the  extension 
possible  to  each  of  its  front  legs  alternately.  ...  In 
order  to  obtain  this  movement,  it  is  first  necessary 
to  force  the  horse  to  sustain  one  of  its  legs  in  the  air. 
One  will  arrive  at  this  promptly  by  flexing  the  head 
of  the  horse,  for  example,  to  the  right  with  the  rein  of 
the  snaffle  or  the  bridle.  That  position  taken,  one  will 
carry  the  hand  holding  the  bridle  to  the  left,  while  at  the 
same  time  sustaining  the  horse  strongly  by  means  of 
his  own  legs.  Nevertheless,  the  left  [leg]  will  be  applied 
to  the  flank  with  more  energy,  to  make  opposition  to 

257 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

the  hand.  Little  by  little,  the  weight  of  the  horse's  right 
leg  will  be  carried  upon  the  left,  and  the  first  [the  right] 
leg  will  quit  the  ground'' 

Fillis  teaches  exactly  the  same  principles  and  the 
same  means.  My  procedure  also  is  precisely  like 
that  of  the  two  grand  masters.  For  although  there 
is  always  the  difference  that  they  ask  the  movement 
simply  as  a  movement,  while  I  employ  it  only  as  a 
gymnastic  exercise  and  a  means  to  something  else, 
yet  our  methods  of  obtaining  the  action  are  the 
same. 

But  the  point  I  am  aiming  at  is  to  show  that 
Baucher  and  Fillis  teach  that  the  partial  flexion  of 
the  head  to  the  right  unloads  the  right  front  leg, 
and,  of  course,  loads  the  left.  But  why  is  the  head 
carried  to  the  right  to  unload  the  right  leg,  which 
is  the  pivot  and  support  in  such  different  movements 
as  shoulder-in,  change  of  direction,  and  others;  and 
why  is  the  head  carried  to  the  left  to  load  the  right 
shoulder  in  order  to  obtain  the  gallop  on  the  right 
lead?  When  we  ask  the  energetic  action  of  one  of 
our  own  members,  so  far  as  we  can,  we  unload  it. 
To  kick  the  ball  with  the  right  foot,  we  put  all  the 
weight  of  the  body  on  the  left.  Then  with  the 
right  —  "  there  she  goes  " !  But  to  load  a  limb  from 
which  we  ask  energetic  action,  is  a  curious  kind  of 
logic  or  science. 

Every  experienced  riding-master  will  keep  re- 
minding his  students  that  there  is  a  point  in  the 
educational  progress  of  every  horse,  where  the  ani- 

258 


THE  SPANISH  WALK 

mal  tends  to  stay  behind,  rather  than  upon,  the 
hand.  I  have  spent  some  years  in  studying  this 
anomaly.  Baucher  and  Fillis  also  recognize  this 
difficulty;  and  recommend  suspending  further  prog- 
ress and  beginning  over  again  to  find  the  contact 
upon  the  hand  by  energetic  impulsion  at  a  fast  trot 
or  gallop.  I  too  have  practiced  this  method;  but  I 
find  that  after  the  impulsion  at  the  trot  my  horse  is 
excited  and  willful. 

I  reason  the  matter  out  thus.  When  the  horse,  at 
the  Spanish  walk,  raises,  extends,  and  sustains, 
alternately,  the  two  front  legs,  it  must  be  evident 
that  this  is  done  by  the  contraction  of  the  two  great 
muscles  of  the  neck,  the  rhomboideus  and  the  mas- 
toido-humeralis,  which  have  their  fixed  point  in  the 
atlas  region.  Now,  this  gait,  obviously,  cannot  be 
other  than  the  product  of  the  diagonal  effect.  If, 
then,  the  diagonal  effect  produces  the  Spanish  walk, 
and  if  the  Spanish  walk  cannot  be  obtained  without 
the  fixed  point  at  the  atlas  region,  the  contact  of 
the  bit  must  be  the  consequence  of  the  fixed  point, 
and  therefore  a  result  of  the  Spanish  walk.  Ergo,  if 
my  horse  loses  the  contact  with  the  bit,  the  Spanish 
walk  will  restore  it  again.  This  means,  deduced 
from  theory,  I  have  found  never  to  fail  in  practice. 

When,  therefore,  a  horse,  in  the  progress  of  its 
training,  begins  to  stay  behind  the  hand,  the  best 
remedy  is  the  Spanish  walk.  Thus,  no  time  is  lost; 
and  the  horse,  always  under  the  direction  of  the 
diagonal  effect,  is  neither  excited  nor  nervous. 

259 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

Some  ten  years  ago  E.  L.  Anderson,  author  of 
Modern  Horsemanship,  wrote  me,  complaining  that 
the  Spanish  walk  and  trot  disturbs  the  fineness  of  a 
horse's  mouth,  so  necessary  for  the  piaffer  and  the 
passage.  I  replied  that  this  is  certainly  the  fact.  In 
the  passage  and  the  piaffer,  the  exertion  being  less 
than  in  the  Spanish  walk  and  trot,  the  rhomboideus 
acts  more  strongly  than  the  mastoido-humeralis.  In 
the  Spanish  walk  and  trot,  which  involve  greater 
exertion,  the  conditions  are  reversed,  and  the  mas- 
toido-humeralis acts  the  more  strongly.  But  it  is 
the  action  of  the  first  of  these  muscles,  the  rhom- 
boideus, that  gives  the  more  sensitive  contact 
against  the  hand. 


CHAPTER  XXVII 
THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FLYING  TROT 

THE  Spanish  trot  is  one  of  the  principal  low  airs  of 
the  haut  ecole  when  exhibited  in  the  circus.  For  the 
scientific  equitation,  it  is  a  valuable  gymnastic  ex- 
ercise for  developing  the  horse's  muscular  energy, 
upon  which  it  makes  very  great  demands. 

It  is,  like  the  piaffer  and  the  passage,  the  mani- 
festation of  perfect  diagonal  action.  It  differs,  how- 
ever, from  the  piaffer  and  the  passage,  in  that,  in 
these  two  airs  of  manege,  the  knees  are  flexed, 
while,  in  the  Spanish  trot,  as  in  the  Spanish  walk, 
the  fore  legs  are  fully  extended,  held  in  this  position 
for  an  instant  of  inactivity,  and  then  made  to  gain 
ground  forward.  The  impulse  for  each  step  is  given 
by  the  diagonal  hind  leg,  which  rises  at  the  same 
time  with  the  fore  leg  on  the  other  side,  and  is  held 
inactive  for  the  same  period.  In  other  words,  di- 
agonal bipeds  are  raised,  hang  for  a  moment  in  the 
air  with  the  fore  leg  extended,  and  then  are  set 
down  together  a  step  in  advance.  (Figures  32,  33.) 

All  the  masters  of  the  scientific  epuitation  have 
agreed  that  the  Spanish  trot  is  next  in  sequence  to 
the  Spanish  walk.  Baucher  and  Fillis  teach  the 
progression:  Spanish  walk,  Spanish  trot,  passage, 
piaffer.  I,  on  the  other  hand,  almost  reverse  this 

261 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

order,  and  take  first  the  piaffer,  than  the  passage, 
finally  the  Spanish  walk  and  trot. 

My  reasons  for  this  unusual  procedure  are  these. 
Neither  the  Spanish  walk  nor  trot  can  be  obtained 
until  after  the  horse  has  been  completely  estab- 
lished in  its  collection,  assemblage,  and  equilibrium, 
so  that  all  the  progressive  movements  which  pre- 
cede the  Spanish  walk  are  executed  without  dis- 
turbing the  state.  But  the  highest  possible  mani- 
festation of  the  state  of  assemblage  is  the  piaffer. 
No  assemblage,  no  piaffer,  is  almost  an  equestrian 
proverb.  When,  therefore,  I  have  the  piaffer,  I  have 
also  the  proof  of  the  maximum  of  assemblage.  The 
center  of  gravity  is  fixed  exactly  below  my  own 
vertebral  column,  while  the  equilibrium  is  so  perfect 
that  shifting  my  weight  to  my  right  or  my  left 
ischium  raises  alternately  the  diagonal  bipeds  of 
the  horse,  and  passing  the  load  slightly  forward 
causes  the  horse,  without  losing  cadence  or  equilib- 
rium, slightly  to  gain  ground  forward,  and  thus 
change  to  the  passage. 

In  order  to  obtain  the  piaffer,  I  place  the  horse's 
head  perpendicular  to  the  ground,  but  with  its  neck 
not  quite  so  high  as  for  the  ordinary  trot.  For  if 
the  head  and  neck  are  high,  the  two  muscles  of  the 
neck,  rhomboideus  and  mastoido-humeralis,  by  their 
fixed  point  at  the  atlas  region,  are  equally  in  con- 
tact with  my  hand.  This  is  precisely  what  I  do  not 
want.  The  rhomboideus  will  raise  shoulder,  scapula, 
and  leg;  but  the  mastoido-humeralis  will  extend  the 

262 


Figure  32.  SPANISH  TROT:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL 


Figure  33.  SPANISH  TROT:  LEFT  DIAGONAL 


THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FLYING  TROT 

leg  forward.  Therefore  it  follows  that  I  want  for 
the  piaffer  all  the  rhomboideus  possible,  but  not  too 
much  of  the  mastoido-humeralis.  In  order  for  the 
foot  in  the  piaffer  to  return  to  the  same  spot  from 
which  it  was  lifted,  the  horse  must  lift  its  fore  leg 
forward,  but  with  flexed  knee.  Too  much  action  of 
the  mastoido-humeralis  will  extend  the  leg  so  far 
that  I  cannot  call  back  the  foot  to  the  proper  spot 
and  still  preserve  the  speed  and  cadence  of  the  trot. 

When  I  have  secured  the  piaffer,  I  add  the  com- 
plication of  a  very  slow  forward  progress,  and  have 
the  passage.  Then,  having  the  passage,  I  give  a 
little  more  impulsion  forward,  by  lifting  my  coccyx 
out  of  the  saddle,  but  not  very  far  or  too  high,  and 
by  shifting  the  center  of  gravity  a  little  more  for- 
ward than  for  the  passage.  My  horse,  thereupon, 
lifts  its  head  a  little  higher  and  finds  contact  with 
the  bit.  The  two  muscles  concerned  have  now,  to 
an  equal  degree,  their  fixed  points  in  the  atlas  re- 
gion. The  rhomboideus,  continuing  to  act  as  before, 
raises  the  leg.  But  the  mastoido-humeralis,  acting 
more  strongly,  extends  the  leg  forward,  and  I  have 
the  Spanish  trot.  I  still  have  the  assemblage,  but 
under  different  conditions. 

The  teachings  of  the  grand  masters  for  these 
movements  are  very  different  from  my  own.  They, 
as  I  have  explained,  begin  with  the  Spanish  walk. 
The  horse's  head  and  neck  are  up.  The  point  of 
contact  is  established.  The  two  neck  muscles  act 
together.  The  leg  is  raised  and  extended,  stiff 

263 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

throughout  its  length.  The  spurs  are  applied,  and 
push  the  horse  forward  upon  the  front  leg,  which 
thereupon  returns  to  the  ground,  and  the  first  step 
is  taken.  The  second  step  follows,  secured  from  the 
other  diagonal  biped  by  the  same  means,  and  the 
walk  continues.  When  the  Spanish  walk  is  well 
understood  and  properly  performed,  a  stronger  im- 
pulsion of  the  hind  legs  by  the  spurs  precipitates 
this  into  the  Spanish  trot. 

The  method  answers  very  well  thus  far.  But 
when,  after  this  training,  the  rider  asks  the  pas- 
sage, the  horse,  as  before,  extends  its  front  legs,  but 
the  equilibrium  is  not  adequate  to  the  movement, 
and  quarrels  and  fights  begin  between  the  trainer 
and  the  horse.  When,  at  the  end  of  these  fights,  the 
passage  is  obtained,  they  still  have  to  be  gone 
through  with  once  more  to  obtain  the  piaffer.  It  all 
comes  about  because  the  masters  keep  diminishing 
the  extension  by  diminishing  the  impulsion.  I,  on 
the  contrary,  beginning  the  series  of  movements  at 
the  other  end,  keep  increasing  the  impulsion,  al- 
ways by  and  in  the  state  of  equilibrium. 

The  Spanish  trot  needs  good  conformation  and 
great  energy  on  the  part  of  the  horse;  and  on  the 
part  of  the  rider,  a  great  precision  of  effects,  if  the 
air  is  to  be  taught  according  to  the  principles  of 
the  reasoned  equitation.  If  the  horse  preserves 
the  condition  of  equilibrium,  the  movement  is  very 
brilliant  and  graceful.  The  animal  has  an  action 
forward  and  high,  yet  without  manifesting  too 

264 


THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FLYING  TROT 

severe  exertion.  The  suppleness  of  the  well-ca- 
denced  and  regular  movements  is  very  apparent, 
and  the  horse  behaves  as  if  it  liked  the  action.  But 
when  the  equilibrium  is  absent,  then  the  exertion 
is  very  evident.  The  entire  body  is  stiff.  The  gait 
is  wearying  to  the  animal,  so  that  it  must  be  sent 
against  the  bit  by  the  attack  of  the  spurs.  These, 
in  turn,  drive  it  forward  so  violently  that  the  bit 
has  to  act  with  strong  effect,  in  order  to  raise  the 
front  legs  and  prevent  the  action  from  being  for- 
ward instead  of  high.  The  proficient  esquire  does 
not  regard  this  last  form  of  the  Spanish  trot  the 
perfection  of  the  air.  But  the  beginner  is,  of  course, 
quite  satisfied  with  it,  until  after  he  has  trained 
three  horses.  Only  after  he  is  sure  of  obtaining  the 
Spanish  trot  at  all,  does  he  begin  to  see  that  there 
is  also  quality  in  the  work  and  to  try  to  secure  that. 

There  are  also  other  methods  of  obtaining  the 
Spanish  trot.  One  of  these  is  based  on  the  system 
for  the  Spanish  walk  in  which  the  trainer  on  foot 
touches  the  horse's  shoulders  alternately  with  the 
whip.  The  walk  being  learned  by  this  means,  the 
trainer  accelerates  the  movement,  until  with  prac- 
tice the  horse  breaks  into  a  gait  which  has  the  ca- 
dence and  height  of  the  Spanish  trot.  But  since 
the  whip  acts  on  the  front  hand  only,  although  the 
fore  legs  lift  high  enough,  the  hind  legs  drag  upon 
the  ground  with  neither  action  nor  elevation. 

Another  method  is  still  less  scientific.  Straps  are 
attached  to  the  pasterns  of  the  front  legs.  Each  of 

265 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

these  straps  is  held  by  a  man,  who  stands  some  six 
feet  in  front  of  the  horse  and  facing  it.  Another 
man,  holding  reins  and  whip,  touches  one  shoulder 
with  the  whip,  while  the  man  who  holds  the  strap 
pulls  the  corresponding  foot  off  the  ground  and 
holds  the  leg  extended  so  long  as  the  whip  takes 
effect.  Then  the  sides  are  reversed.  As  soon  as  the 
horse  raises  and  extends  its  fore  legs  successively, 
a  fourth  man  is  added.  This  latter  from  behind,  by 
means  of  a  long  whip  applied  to  the  hind  legs,  urges 
the  horse  forward,  while  the  two  men  in  front  alter- 
nately pull  the  fore  legs  by  the  straps. 

Horses  trained  by  either  of  these  two  methods 
are  stupid,  stiff,  inactive,  made  into  machines. 
They  have  the  appearance  of  slaves,  acting  against 
their  will.  These  systems  of  training  belong,  of 
course,  solely  to  the  circus.  Neither  of  them  is 
recognized  by  the  scientific  equitation. 

The  Spanish  trot,  done  slowly  and  in  cadence,  is 
considered  the  most  brilliant  of  the  horse's  gaits. 
The  action  is  in  complete  accord  with  all  the  natural 
powers  of  the  animal;  and  though  the  height  at- 
tained is  greater  than  in  the  ordinary  trot,  it  is 
nevertheless  entirely  possible  to  the  mechanism 
involved.  The  air,  therefore,  can  most  properly  be 
used  as  a  gymnastic  exercise  for  developing  energy 
and  action;  and  is  of  special  benefit  to  such  horses 
as  are  lacking  in  action,  indolent,  or  given  to  trip- 
ping and  stumbling.  All  this,  however,  is  on  the 
condition  that  the  work  with  the  Spanish  trot  is  so 

266 


THE  SPANISH  AND  THE  FLYING  TROT 

moderate  and  so  progressive  that  the  horse  has  time 
to  develop  the  muscular  strength  needed  to  execute 
the  air  without  overmuch  effort. 

THE  FLYING  TROT 

THE  flying  trot  has  the  same  cadence  and  high 
step  as  the  Spanish  trot,  but  the  movement  forward 
is  at  greater  speed.  Since,  then,  the  action  is  both 
high  and  rapid,  it  demands  great  strength  and  en- 
ergy on  the  part  of  the  horse.  Some  hackneys, 
however,  take  naturally  the  flying  trot  when  mod- 
erately supported  by  the  contact  of  the  bits. 

The  air  cannot  be  executed  on  every  kind  of 
ground.  If  the  track  is  too  soft,  the  hind  legs  fail  to 
give  the  needed  drive.  If  too  hard,  the  blow  of  the 
front  feet  on  the  ground  will  be  painful,  and  the 
horse  will  be  discouraged. 

The  movement  is  obtained  by  gradually  acceler- 
ating the  Spanish  trot,  but  without  keeping  the 
horse  too  long  at  the  exercise.  Evidently,  since  this 
added  speed  does  not  alter  the  elevation  of  the 
diagonal  bipeds,  the  gait  demands  from  the  esquire 
or  master  the  greatest  accuracy  of  seat  and  effects. 
For  the  horse,  at  the  flying  trot,  gets  high  off  the 
ground;  and  if  the  seat  of  the  rider  and  his  effects 
are  not  exactly  correct  and  accurate,  the  horse  is 
disturbed  in  its  cadence  and  the  elevation  of  the 
action  is  lost. 

Personally,  I  should  not  care  for  the  Spanish  trot 
if  it  were  not  the  means  of  obtaining  the  flying  trot, 

267 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

which  is  extraordinarily  enjoyable  and  exhilarat- 
ing —  though,  of  course,  it  is  to  be  indulged  in  only 
occasionally  when  the  ground  permits.  I  recom- 
mend to  the  beginner  to  train  several  horses  at  the 
Spanish  trot  before  attempting  the  more  difficult 
gait;  and  furthermore,  to  make  sure  that  his  ani- 
mal is  really  able,  after  suitable  practice,  to  execute 
the  movement  without  injury  or  discouragement. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII 
THE  PIAFFER 

ANOTHER  of  the  low  airs  is  the  piaffer,  in  which  the 
horse  trots,  with  perfect  motion  of  its  diagonal 
bipeds  alternately,  yet  without  progress  in  any 
direction.  The  piaffer  is,  then,  one  stage  beyond 
the  passage,  since  it  presupposes  an  even  more 
perfect  state  of  equilibrium  and  a  still  further  devel- 
opment of  the  horse's  muscular  strength.  All  mas- 
ters regard  the  piaffer  as  the  foundation,  the  sine 
qua  non,  of  the  whole  scientific  equitation. 

There  are,  however,  two  sorts  of  piaffer,  the  slow 
and  the  quick.  There  is  also  still  another  kind,  that 
exhibited  by  a  horse  which,  through  excitement, 
excess  of  energy,  or  nervous  temperament,  cannot 
stand  still.  If,  then,  the  rider  does  not  permit  the 
animal  to  go  forward,  it  prances  impatiently  on  the 
same  spot.  Such  a  mount  is  annoying  and  even 
dangerous  to  an  inexperienced  horseman;  so  that 
the  fault  needs  to  be  corrected  by  a  moderate  and 
progressive  training,  in  which  the  chief  difficulty  is 
to  stop  the  creature  and  to  keep  it  still. 

Both  the  quick  and  the  slow  piaffers  are  recog- 
nized by  the  scientific  equitation.  They  are,  indeed, 
closely  related.  The  quick  piaffer,  as  its  name  sug- 
gests, has  the  more  rapid  tempo.  It  is  also  com- 

269 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

monly  the  more  easily  obtained,  since  it  needs  less 
energy  on  the  part  of  the  horse  and  less  tact  on  the 
part  of  the  rider.  Notice  that,  although  I  say  less 
tact,  the  tact  must  nevertheless  be  of  a  high  order. 

The  slow  piaffer  is  rarely  seen.  Baucher,  Fillis, 
and  myself  have  obtained  it  from  a  limited  number 
of  horses,  each  of  which  has  left  a  name  in  the 
countries  where  it  has  been  shown.  Even  the  quick 
piaffer,  though  attained  by  a  greater  number  of 
animals,  is  no  ordinary  feat  of  horsemanship. 

It  would  take  volumes  to  describe  and  explain 
the  machines,  straps,  pillars,  and  other  instruments, 
more  or  less  complicated,  which  have  been  em- 
ployed to  obtain  an  action  so  agreeable,  so  elegant, 
and  so  difficult  as  the  quick  piaffer,  and  to  set  forth 
the  theories  of  able  masters  with  regard  to  it.  But 
to  obtain  the  slow  piaffer,  what  study  is  needed, 
what  labor  without  end !  It  is  the  dream  which  few, 
very  few,  masters  have  realized. 

From  Xenophon  to  Pluvinel,  horsemen  have 
sought  the  rassemble  or  assemblage.  In  Pluvinel's 
time  the  pillars  were  used  to  obtain  this  state;  and 
as  master  has  succeeded  master,  some  horses  have 
come  to  the  piaffer  by  this  and  other  mechanical 
means.  Even  to-day  the  pillars  are  still  employed 
in  the  military  riding-schools  of  the  nations  of  the 
world,  always  for  the  same  reason  and  to  the  same 
effect.  Results  are  uncertain  or  negative.  Brilliant 
as  the  outcome  may  sometimes  be,  all  the  evidence 
goes  to  show  that  they  are  seldom  enough  anything 

270 


THE  PIAFFER 

of  the  sort.  The  scientific  equitation  cannot  con- 
sider, teach,  or  admit  any  such  devices. 

The  quick  piaffer  has  the  cadence  of  the  trot, 
but  the  movements  are  rapid,  and  the  action  not 
high.  To  obtain  this  type  of  piaffer,  the  horse  is 
first  brought  to  the  most  complete  possible  state  of 
equilibrium  and  kept  in  this  condition  at  the  ma- 
nege walk.  The  rider  then  makes  repeated  attacks 
with  the  spurs,  first  with  one,  then  with  the  other, 
in  diagonal,  at  a  tempo  faster  than  for  the  passage 
and  comparable  to  that  of  quarter-notes  in  music. 
At  each  attack  the  spur  touches  the  flank  near  the 
girth,  while  the  leg  still  maintains  its  pressure,  and 
then  moves  away  no  more  than  the  twelfth  of  an 
inch. 

In  the  meantime,  the  rider,  by  the  accuracy  of 
his  seat,  helped  by  his  fingering  on  the  bridle,  re- 
ceives the  excess  of  action  given  by  the  spurs,  and 
holds  the  center  of  this  action  at  the  center  of  grav- 
ity. He  should,  thereupon,  feel  the  hind  limbs  rise 
and  fall  alternately,  a  little  in  front  of  the  perpendic- 
ular. If  the  hind  legs  are  too  far  in  front  of  the 
perpendicular,  the  horse  cannot  continue  to  move, 
except  by  contracting  the  two  vasti  muscles  and 
rearing  high.  If  when  the  horse  rears,  the  rider  in- 
stantly pushes  it  forward  by  leaning  sharply  to  the 
front,  the  horse  will  leap.  But  if  the  rider  does  not 
immediately  check  the  rearing,  the  horse  will  fall 
backward  at  once  or  paw  the  air  with  its  front  feet 
and  then  perhaps  fall.  But  so  long  as  the  rider  feels 

271 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

by  way  of  his  seat  the  action  of  the  hind  legs,  every- 
thing is  right  for  a  beginning.  One  must  be  careful 
at  this  stage  not  to  keep  the  horse  too  long  at  the 
exercise.  Five  or  six  repetitions  are  sufficient. 

As  for  the  fingering  of  the  hand  on  the  reins,  this 
has  to  meet  three  conditions.  The  fingers  should 
close  on  the  reins  in  the  same  tempo  with  the  di- 
agonal effect  of  the  legs,  and  should  be  proportioned 
to  the  cadence  and  strength  of  these.  The  fingering 
must  allow  the  center  of  gravity,  so  to  say,  to  filter 
imperceptibly  to  the  front  side  of  the  medial  plane, 
and  not  under  any  condition  let  it  get  behind  this 
position.  A  fortiori  the  fingering  must  maintain 
always  the  assemblage,  collection,  and  equilibrium. 

As  soon,  therefore,  as  any  derangement  of  these 
conditions  appears,  no  matter  how  slight,  all  di- 
agonal effect  must  stop  instantly,  and  the  horse  be 
sent  forward  with  decision  and  energy.  After  a  few 
forward  steps,  the  horse  is  once  more  brought  to  a 
stand,  its  calmness  reestablished,  the  equilibrium 
once  more  obtained,  and  the  piaffer  again  asked. 
As  a  general  principle,  every  execution  of  the  piaffer, 
no  matter  what  the  stage  of  progress,  should  be  fol- 
lowed by  at  least  one  or  two  steps  forward.  Other- 
wise, the  horse  would  get  into  the  way  of  stopping 
with  its  legs  inside  the  perpendicular,  and  this,  with 
time  and  habit,  would  create  the  acculer. 

When  the  piaffer  is  first  obtained,  no  one  can 
prophesy  how  it  will  develop.  It  nearly  always  be- 
gins as  the  quick  form;  and  with  this,  at  first,  the 

272 


Figure  34.  PIAFFER:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL 


Figure  35.  PIAFFER  :  LEFT  DIAGONAL 


THE  PIAFFER 

trainer  should  be  satisfied.  He  should  then  proceed, 
by  calmness,  moderation,  and  equestrian  tact,  to 
regulate  and  to  establish  the  rhythm  and  cadence  of 
each  diagonal  stride,  their  height  and  tempo.  With 
time  and  moderation,  the  horse,  more  or  less  excited 
at  the  beginning,  will  calm  itself,  will  understand 
better  the  cadence  demanded  by  the  esquire,  and 
with  the  habit  of  calmness  will  respond  to  the  tim- 
ing of  the  effects  of  hands  and  legs.  Then,  by  di- 
minishing little  by  little  the  rapidity  of  the  step,  the 
horse  is  finally  brought  to  the  slow  piaffer,  the  only 
really  perfect  and  scientific  form. 

The  slow  piaffer  is  the  poetry  of  action  of  the 
horse  in  motion  and  is  admitted  by  all  schools  to 
be  the  crown  of  the  scientific  equitation.  Baucher, 
Fillis,  and  I  employ  the  quick  piaffer  only  as  a 
means  of  obtaining  the  slow,  since  we  consider  this 
to  be  the  only  difficult  and  desirable  form.  The  two 
grand  masters  regard  the  slow  piaffer  as  the  abso- 
lute proof  of  the  state  of  equilibrium  in  motion,  and 
therefore  as  the  most  difficult  of  the  low  airs.  I  too 
accept  the  slow  piaffer  as  the  proof  of  equilibrium 
in  motion,  but  I  also  employ  it  as  a  part  of  my  sys- 
tem of  physical  culture,  to  develop  the  muscles 
of  the  horse's  back,  loins,  and  haunches.  (Figures 

34>  35-) 

Baucher  and  Fillis,  as  I  have  already  explained, 
do  not  attempt  the  piaffer  with  their  horses  until 
the  diagonal  effect  is  well  understood,  as  in  the 
Spanish  walk,  Spanish  trot,  and  passage.  Baucher, 

273 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

at  the  beginning  of  the  training,  works  his  horses  for 
a  considerable  time  on  foot,  with  the  whip.  All  this 
greatly  aids  the  animals  in  understanding  the  move- 
ments of  the  piaffer.  Fillis  works  his  horses  on  foot 
very  much  less  than  Baucher,  but  has  already 
trained  them  in  diagonal  movements  before  he  asks 
the  piaffer.  Both,  for  a  horse  to  be  taught  the  piaf- 
fer, select  with  the  greatest  care  an  animal  that  has, 
to  start  with,  the  required  conformation,  strength, 
and  soundness,  with  the  moral  and  physical  qual- 
ities that  give  action  and  energy.  And  since  the 
horse  which  has  these  qualities  sustains  the  state  of 
equilibrium  a  great  deal  better  than  does  one  of 
inferior  grade,  such  an  animal  has  really  a  value 
equivalent  to  the  time  and  effort  needed  to  secure 
the  degree  of  education  proved  by  the  slow  piaffer. 
I,  on  the  other  hand,  do  not  trouble  myself  over  the 
choice  of  a  horse.  The  more  inferior  it  is,  the  more 
faulty  its  conformation,  the  more  interesting  be- 
comes its  education.  The  more  difficult  the  work, 
the  more  the  fun  of  doing  it. 

Both  Baucher  and  Fillis  have  had  some  violent 
fights  with  their  horses.  They  put  a  young  beginner 
in  the  saddle  to  hold  the  reins,  while  they,  beside 
the  horse  on  foot,  direct  its  movements  with  small 
or  long  whips.  I  work  very  little  on  foot.  I  never, 
or  rarely,  use  a  whip.  I  do  all  the  work  myself ;  and 
I  very  seldom,  when  mounted,  have  a  quarrel  with 
my  horse  or  an  act  of  defense  from  it.  Six  months 
after  I  begin  training,  the  horse  has  already  ceased 

274 


THE  PIAFFER 

to  be  the  caricature  which  I  bought.  I  explain  these 
points,  not  to  dwell  upon  my  own  ideas,  but  to  aid 
the  reader  in  understanding  the  different  proce- 
dures of  the  different  grand  masters  which  I  shall 
now  discuss. 

The  difference  between  the  quick  piaffer  and  the 
slow  is  that  in  the  quick  piaffer  the  horse's  legs, 
acting  in  diagonal,  fall  more  quickly  to  the  ground 
under  the  pull  of  gravity.  But  in  any  case,  the  two 
diagonal  legs  which  support  the  body  are  acting 
only  during  the  time  during  which  the  other  two 
are  in  the  air.  Evidently,  then,  if  two  diagonal 
members  remain  longer  upon  the  ground,  the  other 
two  will  have  to  stay  longer  in  the  air,  and  vice 
versa. 

Now  the  question  is,  which  requires  the  greater 
effort  on  the  part  of  the  horse,  to  keep  its  body 
balanced  for  the  longer  time  on  two  feet,  or  to  hold 
two  legs  off  the  ground  and  flexed? 

But  the  shorter  the  time  the  feet  remain  in  the 
air,  the  more  rapid  is  the  action,  as  in  the  quick 
piaffer.  On  the  other  hand,  the  slower  the  action, 
the  greater  the  loss  of  the  original  upward  impulse. 
The  more  powerful,  therefore,  must  be  the  muscu- 
lar contraction  and  the  more  accurate  the  equilib- 
rium. Evidently,  then,  the  horse  needs  more  energy 
for  the  slow  piaffer  than  for  the  quick;  and  more  for 
the  quick  piaffer  than  for  the  passage,  trot,  or  gal- 
lop, since  in  these  last  the  animal, is  helped  by  its 
own  forward  motion. 

275 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

Baucher  and  Fillis  put  their  horses  at  the  passage, 
and  then,  by  altering  the  tempo  of  their  attacks  in 
diagonal,  they  slackened  still  further  the  already  slow 
speed  of  that  air.  After  a  time,  the  horse  would  con- 
tinue the  cadence  of  the  passage,  but  without  ad- 
vancing. Then  they  had  the  slow  piaffer.  Given 
the  qualities  of  their  horses,  this  was  a  rational 
method.  But  even  so,  there  always  came  a  time  of 
defenses,  fights,  revolts.  If  I  employed  this  method 
with  the  kind  of  horses  that  I  train,  I  should  kill  the 
animals  before  they  developed  the  strength  of  mus- 
cle needed  for  the  slow  piaffer! 

I  hold  that  it  is  no  special  obstacle  to  the  piaffer 
if  the  horse's  neck  and  legs  are  a  little  stiff,  pro- 
vided always  that  they  are  strong  enough  to  serve 
as  supports,  two  at  a  time.  Where,  then,  is  the  great 
center  of  development  of  the  forces  which  keep  the 
whole  inert  weight  balanced  on  two  legs,  keep  the 
balance,  and  return  two  feet  to  the  ground  and 
raise  the  other  two,  without  advancing  or  backing? 
I  answer,  at  the  coupling,  the  sacrum,  the  ilium, 
the  pelvis,  for  the  rear  half  of  the  body;  and  at  the 
thorax  for  the  front  half. 

Twenty  years  ago,  E.  L.  Anderson,  in  his  Modern 
Horsemanship,  wrote:  " Master  H.  L.  de  Bussigny 
professes  that  all  the  resistance  of  the  horse  is  lo- 
cated in  the  posterior  half  of  the  horse;  he  is  in 
contradiction  with  all  the  other  masters,  who  find 
the  center  of  resistance  in  the  neck."  I  regard  the 
iliac  region,  from  the  last  lumbar  vertebra  to  the 

276 


THE  PIAFFER 

end  of  the  sacrum, -as  the  point  of  union  of  the  fore 
hand  with  the  hind  hand.  Here  is  the  junction  of 
these  two  parts,  where  they  are  united  by  the  mus- 
cles. If  there  were  not  this  union,  if  the  volitional 
impulse  came  as  far  as  the  last  dorsal  vertebra  and 
there  stopped,  quadrupedal  locomotion  would  be 
quite  impossible. 

All  this  is  assuming  that  the  horse  is  free  from 
any  human  interference.  But  if  the  horse's  spine  is 
carrying  a  load,  we  cannot  neglect  the  influence  of 
this  weight  upon  the  two  parts  of  the  body,  which 
are,  by  instinct,  a  unit  and  under  the  same  acts  of 
will.  Their  point  of  union,  in  my  opinion,  is  this 
centrifugal  region  where  the  forces  are  assembled. 
It  is  like  the  mechanical  coupling  which  unites  the 
locomotive  to  the  loaded  cars  behind  it.  At  this 
point  all  the  pull  of  the  engine  is  concentrated 
against  the  weight  opposed  to  it.  If  the  cars  were 
not  loaded,  the  coupling  between  the  locomotive 
and  the  first  car  would  not  need  to  be  so  strong. 

If  a  horse,  when  running  or  jumping,  is  watched 
during  a  fall,  it  is  easy  to  discover  that  the  forward 
part  of  the  body  gives  way  first.  This  is  because 
the  hind  legs  do  not  come  forward  in  time  to  act 
their  part  as  supports.  But  the  hind  legs,  of  them- 
selves, have  no  power  to  come  forward  below  the 
center  of  gravity.  The  failure  is  in  the  loins,  the 
back,  which  have  not  pulled  the  legs  forward  in 
time  to  lend  their  support,  and  thus  to  prevent  the 
fall  of  the  whole  body. 

277 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

Or  note  how  an  athlete  does  a  somersault.  He 
leaps  into  the  air,  and  then,  solely  by  the  action  of 
his  loins,  he  turns  his  feet  up  and  his  head  down, 
and  then  alights  upon  his  feet.  Or  suppose  a  man 
is  running  and  falls.  If,  as  he  fell,  he  could  bring 
his  loins  into  action  sufficiently  to  bring  his  legs 
under  him,  the  fall  would  not  occur. 

I  have  dwelt  long  on  this  topic  of  strength  of 
loins  in  the  saddle  horse,  because  it  is  my  thorough- 
going conviction  that  the  various  schools  of  equita- 
tion have  emphasized  overmuch  the  correctness  of 
movements  of  the  horse's  limbs,  to  the  complete 
neglect  of  the  muscular  development  of  the  coup- 
ling, a  matter  which,  in  fact,  they  do  not  even  men- 
tion. It  is  to  develop  this  part  of  the  horse's  body 
that  I  employ  the  two  piaffers,  and  especially  the 
slow  one,  just  as  soon  as  my  mount  has  attained  to 
a  muscular  strength  sufficient  to  begin  a  movement 
needing  so  much  power  at  the  loins. 

I  have  asked  and  obtained  the  slow  piaffer  by 
the  methods  of  Baucher  and  Fillis;  but  I  have  al- 
ways found  that  this  procedure  results  in  great 
exertion,  great  fatigue,  and  very  often  irritation  and 
incipient  stages  of  revolt.  To  obviate  these  draw- 
backs, I  have  developed  a  procedure  which  has 
never  failed  to  secure  the  result  at  which  I  aim. 

I  do  not  attempt  the  piaffer  until  my  horse  is  at 
the  state  of  perfect  equilibrium  during  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  progression  up  to  this  stage,  and  is 
complete  as  a  park  hack.  Then  I  commence  the 

278 


THE  PIAFFER 

slow  piaffer.    I  prefer  to  begin  this  late  in  the  au- 
tumn, so  as  to  have  a  whole  winter  before  me. 

First  of  all,  I  perfect  the  manege  walk  to  the 
point  where  I  can  myself  determine  on  which  di- 
agonal biped  the  horse  shall  start.  When  I  am 
complete  master  of  either  diagonal  biped,  I  begin 
to  carry  my  horse  backward,  with  the  same  cadence 
and  tempo.  I  execute  six  steps  forward  and  six 
backward.  Then  I  interpolate  a  slow  trot,  which 
I  call  the  recreation  trot,  and  begin  again.  I  keep 
my  horse  always  straight,  and  I  take  special  pains 
to  have  the  strides  of  the  two  diagonal  bipeds  sup- 
ple and  precisely  alike.  I  realize  that  my  horse  will 
need  a  great  muscular  development  in  order  to  gain 
in  height  what  he  loses  in  motion  forward.  There- 
fore, I  use  great  moderation,  and  give  a  large 
amount  of  recreative  exercise. 

After  several  days,  if  the  work  is  well  done,  it 
becomes  apparent  that  each  diagonal  biped  is  stay- 
ing in  the  air  a  slightly  longer  time  than  before.  At 
this  point,  I  need  to  hold  on  to  myself,  and  to  tem- 
per my  impatience  to  begin  the  tempo  of  the  trot. 
But  I  continue,  I  favor,  I  protect,  I  recompense, 
more  and  more  and  patiently. 

The  time  comes,  always  and  quite  soon,  that  the 
horse  walks  step  by  step,  so  slowly  that  each  di- 
agonal biped,  in  cadence,  stays  in  the  air  a  longer 
or  shorter  time.  When  this  habit  is  completely  fixed, 
I  stop  the  horse  and  attack  him  very  gently  so  that 
he  merely  feels  the  pressure  of  my  spurs.  When  the 

279 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

horse  knows  that  I  have  the  spurs  ready  at  my  dis- 
posal, I  put  him  at  the  manege  walk,  at  the  slowest 
possible  gait,  step  by  step.  Then  I  begin  to  activate 
the  entire  mechanism,  but  not  by  any  quicker  ac- 
tion of  my  legs  or  fingers.  I  keep  the  same  tempo, 
with  an  even  more  accurately  measured  power  of 
my  effects,  and  I  incline  my  body  slightly  forward, 
so  as  to  shift  the  center  of  gravity  and  lighten  the 
loins.  At  the  slightest  disorder,  I  stop  everything, 
reestablish  calm,  and  begin  again. 

It  is  very  seldom  that  I  have  to  start  over  more 
than  three  times  before  I  obtain  one  or  two  move- 
ments of  the  loins.  For  the  rider  who  has  not  had 
the  experience,  it  is  a  strange  sensation  that  he  now 
receives  through  the  seat.  As  the  horse  flexes  its 
haunches  and  hocks  below  its  pelvis,  one  feels  as  if 
the  horse  were  on  the  point  of  kicking,  first  with  one 
leg  and  then  with  the  other.  It  is  really  nothing  of 
that  sort.  It  is  simply  the  first  of  the  two  indica- 
tions that  the  croup  is  lifting  higher.  If,  after  this 
first  manifestation,  you  know  how  to  recompense, 
to  calm,  and  to  rest,  it  becomes  easy  to  secure  two 
or  four  or  six.  Do  not  accept  an  odd  number  of 
actions,  because  this  will  tend  to  make  the  horse 
unequal,  with  one  side  more  indolent  or  backward 
than  the  other. 

The  rest  is  easy,  merely  a  question  of  time,  pro- 
gression, and  moderation,  in  order  for  the  horse  to 
develop  the  necessary  strength.  The  slower  the 
action,  the  more  difficult  and  the  more  brilliant,  so 

280 


THE  PIAFFER 

long  as  the  horse  does  not  move  either  forward  or 
backward. 

When  the  slow  piaffer  begins  to  be  understood, 
I  prepare  myself,  and  at  each  repetition  of  very 
delicate  attacks  well  cadenced,  and  in  the  tempo  of 
each  step,  I  lift  my  hand  a  little  higher,  make  my 
fingering  more  pronounced  and  precise,  and  raise 
the  four  legs  higher  and  higher,  two  by  two  in  di- 
agonal. I  caress  all  the  body  of  the  horse  a  great 
deal,  speak  to  it  in  an  amiable  and  encouraging 
voice,  and  make  my  horse  like  the  lesson. 

Last  of  all,  I  complete  the  training  by  shifting 
my  own  weight  from  haunch  to  haunch,  without 
apparent  movement  of  the  upper  part  of  my  body, 
or  of  my  hand,  arms,  thighs,  or  legs.  At  first  this 
shifting  of  my  weight  from  side  to  side  appears  to 
have  no  effect.  Well,  then,  I  begin  the  slow  piaffer 
by  means  of  my  hands  and  legs;  but  when  the 
movement  is  under  way,  I  cease  the  effect  of  hands 
and  legs,  and  begin  the  balancing  on  my  seat.  I 
have  to  try  several  times;  and  then  success  is  as- 
sured. 

After  each  exercise  in  the  time  of  the  piaffer,  I 
carry  my  horse  forward  a  few  steps,  bring  him  to 
rest,  and  either  abandon  him,  or  let  him  be  free  to 
stretch  his  spine  and  neck. 

In  brief,  then,  calculate  accurately  your  effects, 
develop  your  equestrian  tact,  keep  in  your  mind 
the  principles  which  I  have  always  had  before  me, 
my  deus  ex  machina.  Labor  improbus  omnia  vincit, 

281 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

and  you  will  have  won  the  ne  plus  ultra  of  the  sci- 
entific equitation,  the  slow  piaffer. 

My  own  horse,  "  Why-Not,"  does  the  slow  piaffer 
at  the  cadence  of  the  walk,  without  advancing. 
But  the  taller  a  horse  is,  the  more  difficult  is  the 
slow  piaffer  for  the  horse  to  execute  and  for  the 
rider  to  obtain. 

As  for  the  pillars,  by  means  of  these  a  horse  can 
be  trained  to  any  sort  of  trick,  to  kneel  down,  to 
extend  the  legs,  to  lie  down,  and  the  like.  But  since 
these  tricks  are  not  recognized  by  the  reasoned 
equitation,  there  is  no  need  to  touch  upon  them. 
It  is  only  to  obtain  the  piaffer  that  the  new  school 
admits  the  use  of  the  pillars,  copying  in  this  the 
principles  of  the  old  school. 

The  horse  is  put  in  the  pillars,  and  by  means  of 
the  whip,  is  taught  to  raise  and  keep  up  one  leg 
after  the  other,  beginning  with  the  fore  limbs.  By 
touching  the  chest  with  the  whip,  alternately  on 
the  right  and  left  sides,  the  horse  will  very  soon 
learn  to  raise  his  fore  feet,  by  flexing  his  legs  at  the 
knees,  first  at  the  walk  and  then  at  the  trot,  as  the 
whip  is  applied  more  rapidly. 

When  this  movement  is  obtained  from  the  front 
legs,  the  trainer  operates  in  the  same  way  with  the 
hind  legs. 

This  done,  the  problem  is  to  get  all  four  legs  to 
act  together  in  diagonal.  Repeated  touches  of  the 
whip  upon  the  haunches,  given  in  the  cadence  of 
the  movement,  tend  to  make  the  horse  go  forward. 

282 


THE  PIAFFER 

But  since  cavesson  and  reins  prevent  this,  the  horse 
becomes  more  or  less  excited,  and  begins  to  move 
in  diagonal,  up  and  down  on  the  same  spot.  At  this 
point  the  trainer  stops  the  horse,  caresses  him,  and 
begins  again. 

It  must  be  evident  that,  by  this  method,  it  is  not 
possible  to  obtain  the  slow  piaffer  at  the  beginning. 
The  first  result  is  always  the  quick  form.  This,  how- 
ever, the  trainer  slows  down  by  calmness  and  by 
spacing  the  touches  of  the  whip  farther  and  farther 
apart.  Weights  or  bells  may  be  attached  at  the 
pasterns  to  encourage  the  horse  to  carry  his  knees 
higher  and  higher. 

There  has  also  been  invented,  I  think  by  Han- 
hauser,  a  special  harness  for  the  purpose  of  obtain- 
ing the  movement  in  diagonal.  A  heavily  padded 
strap  is  fastened  to  each  pastern,  and  each  pair  of 
straps  in  diagonal,  is  buckled  to  the  two  ends  of 
a  rope.  These  ropes,  in  their  turn,  pass  through  a 
pulley  which  is  fastened  to  a  strong  surcingle  so 
that  it  comes  close  to  the  body  at  the  middle  of  the 
lower  side  of  the  chest.  The  ropes  are  rather  tight, 
so  that,  when  the  horse  lifts,  for  example,  its  right 
front  foot,  the  pull  comes  against  the  left  rear  one. 
Since,  in  addition,  the  horse  is  fixed  fast  in  the  pil- 
lars, there  is  nothing  it  can  do  except  to  go  up  and 
down  in  diagonal  on  the  same  spot.  But  the  piaffer 
of  horses  trained  by  such  mechanical  methods  is 
never  elegant,  supple,  or  brilliant.  It  suggests  the 
manequins  of  Mme.  Tussaud. 

283 


CHAPTER  XXIX 
THE  PASSAGE 

OF  all  the  low  airs  which  a  horse  can  execute,  the 
passage  is  the  most  rhythmic,  the  most  artistic,  and 
the  most  scientific.  It  is  not  an  artificial  gait,  but 
an  entirely  regular  and  natural  movement.  Let  a 
horse  of  any  conformation,  trained  to  any  kind  of 
service,  be  out  of  the  stable  and  free.  He  trots  at 
the  passage.  His  head  is  up,  his  neck  well  placed, 
his  tail  in  the  air.  Hocks,  haunches,  knees,  and 
shoulders  flex  on  their  centers  of  motion,  high,  with 
energy,  cadence,  and  balance.  The  back  and  loins 
are  supple,  the  nostrils  are  well  opened,  and  the 
breathing  is  deep  even  to  snorting.  Every  joint 
is  loose.  Every  limb  functions  with  suppleness, 
rhythm,  elegance.  The  horse  is  like  a  hunting-dog 
bounding  around  his  master  as  he  holds  a  shot-gun. 
He  is  in  the  air  as  if  he  would  fly.  (Figures  36,  37.) 
But,  alas,  as  soon  as  the  harness  is  on,  and  the 
driver  is  on  the  box  or  the  rider  in  the  saddle,  all 
this  cadence,  tempo,  rhythm,  elegance,  departs. 
The  horse  becomes  heavy,  stupid,  brutish,  without 
energy,  a  slave  without  initiative,  a  submissive  vic- 
tim when  he  understands  what  is  wanted  and  a 
restive  victim  when  he  does  not.  To  raise  the  har- 
nessed animal  to  the  standard  of  its  natural  beauty 

284 


Figure  36.  PASSAGE:  RIGHT  DIAGONAL 


Figure  37.  PASSAGE  :  LEFT  DIAGONAL 


THE  PASSAGE 

in  locomotion,  to  transfer  the  natural  gifts  of  sup- 
pleness and  elegance  from  the  horse  free  to  the 
horse  mounted,  is  the  dream,  the  life  dream,  the 
object  of  life  of  the  masters  of  the  scientific  equi- 
tation. And  I  ask  the  horsemen,  the  masters  from 
Xenophon  to  our  own  epoch,  if  ever  a  rider,  mounted 
on  a  horse  at  the  passage,  has  forgotten  the  sensation 
of  that  motion! 

The  passage  is  too  often  confounded  with  the 
Spanish  trot,  even  by  the  generality  of  masters. 
Yet  the  difference  is  complete.  More  than  nine 
tenths  of  the  Spanish  trot  is  done  against  resistance; 
and  the  fore  legs  are  forcibly  extended  straight 
forward  at  full  length.  But  at  the  passage,  only 
the  fore  arm  extends  forward,  the  limb  being  flexed 
at  the  knee;  and  the  forward  step  is  only  a  third  the 
length  of  the  stride  in  the  Spanish  trot.  Although 
the  Spanish  trot  may  be  very  beautiful  when  well 
performed,  it  is  never  so  graceful,  elegant,  and 
elastic  as  the  passage,  probably  because  the  passage 
is  more  natural  to  the  horse  than  the  violent  exer- 
tions of  the  Spanish  trot. 

For  the  Spanish  trot  is  an  artificial  air,  which  has 
been  taught  to  thousands  of  horses,  enslaved  by 
straps,  whips,  severe  bits,  and  continued  repetition. 
Fillis  says,  with  great  truth,  "Yet  it  is  certain  that 
the  new  school  is  in  use  everywhere.  The  man  does 
not  any  more  ride  the  horse  to  educate  him.  All 
the  work  is  done  on  foot,  with  whips  and  straps, 
absolutely  like  the  training  of  monkeys  or  goats. 

285 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

It  is  what  the  public  called  with  irony  at  Vienna, 
pudel  dressierung,  the  training  of  poodle-dogs!" 

The  passage  cannot  be  taught  by  this  system. 
It  requires  a  progressive  education,  based  on  the 
principles  of  the  scientific  equitation.  A  great  many 
persons  are  not  able  to  obtain  it  for  lack  of  the 
perfect  equestrian  tact  which  inspires  in  the  horse 
the  confidence,  the  energy,  the  excess  of  power 
needed  to  make  all  his  bodily  mechanism  move 
with  cadence  and  rhythm,  and  to  preserve  perfect 
diagonal  action,  without  the  slightest  interference 
of  hand,  leg,  or  seat,  since  this  would  instantly  de- 
stroy equilibrium,  and  with  it  the  rhythm,  cadence, 
and  tempo.  Certain  horses,  indeed,  by  their  nat- 
urally high  and  energetic  action,  do  tend  of  them- 
selves to  execute  the  passage.  But  even  these 
should  be  given  the  same  preliminary  training  as 
the  less  energetic  animals.  Sometimes,  also,  the 
action  of  the  fore  legs  is  high  and  correct  enough, 
while  that  of  the  hind  legs  is  low  and  imperfect. 
But  the  passage  cannot  endure  mediocrity  of  ex- 
ecution. That  is  painful  to  feel  or  to  see.  The  air 
is  possible  only  when  the  perfected  state  of  equilib- 
rium can  be  kept  by  the  horse  during  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  progression  of  the  scientific  equitation. 

The  horse  needs  for  the  passage,  after  his  com- 
plete education,  soundness,  developed  muscles,  the 
proportions  of  a  perfect  conformation,  energy,  a 
calm  yet  ardent  nature.  Most  of  all,  it  needs  to  be 
mounted  by  a  master  with  the  artistic  tempera- 

286 


THE  PASSAGE 

ment,  who  has  already,  in  his  youth,  spoiled  several 
horses,  before  being  several  times  successful.  One 
cannot  hope  to  put  a  horse  successfully  at  the  pas- 
sage until  after  he  has  trained  five  or  ten  horses. 
For  when  a  master  first  begins  the  passage,  the 
great,  the  nearly  insurmountable  difficulty  is  to 
obtain  the  first  two  or  three  manifestations  of  the 
cadence.  But  it  is  absolutely  impossible  for  these 
first  two  or  three  steps  to  be  at  all  pronounced  or 
decided.  They  are  like  the  ripples  in  a  teacup  com- 
pared to  the  steady  undulation  of  the  sea.  But  if 
the  master  does  not  recognize  at  once  this  earli- 
est almost  insensible  ripple,  and  so  continues  to 
ask  it  of  the  horse,  the  horse  becomes  more  and 
more  confused.  Neither  understands  what  is  being 
asked. 

These  first  signs  of  the  passage  are,  then,  I  say, 
very  nearly  imperceptible.  But  if  they  are  recog- 
nized and  rewarded,  they  are  stored  in  the  horse's 
memory.  And  since  these  first  steps  are  the  most 
difficult  to  obtain,  everything  possible  must  be 
done  to  fix  the  lesson  in  the  animal's  mind. 

Both  Fillis  and  I,  at  the  first  adumbrations  of  the 
passage,  stop  the  horse,  jump  down,  take  off  the 
curb  chain  and  bridle,  blanket  the  horse,  give  him 
some  pieces  of  carrot,  sugar,  or  apple,  and  dismiss 
him  to  the  stable. 

At  the  next  lesson,  I  bridle  the  horse  myself,  us- 
ing calmness  and  tact,  and  have  him  go  through 
some  movements  in  the  state  of  perfect  equilibrium, 

287 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

but  avoid  any  sort  of  canter  or  gallop,  since  these 
are  in  lateral  biped  and  will  only  confuse.  Only 
after  the  passage  is  learned,  are  canter  and  gallop 
in  order. 

When  the  horse  executes  these  preparatory 
movements  in  the  condition  of  equilibrium,  bring  it 
to  a  stand,  after  passing  the  second  corner  of  the 
short  side,  if  you  work  in  a  manege,  so  as  to  have 
the  length  of  the  long  side  before  you.  Here  dis- 
pose your  horse  and  yourself,  calculating  accurately 
and  calmly  just  what  you  are  about  to  ask,  what 
effects  you  are  to  employ,  and  how. 

You  are  now  ready.  Your  horse  is  ready.  Send 
your  horse  forward,  step  by  step,  at  the  manege 
walk.  When  you  have  the  cadence  of  this,  begin 
your  diagonal  effects.  At  the  slightest  derangement, 
stop,  calm  your  horse,  reestablish  the  perfect  order, 
begin  again  with  the  manege  walk,  and  apply  the 
diagonal  effects.  If  you  obtain  two  or  three  man- 
ifestations, two  or  three  ripples  of  the  approaching 
passage,  stop  by  means  of  the  ensemble,  and  caress, 
caress  profusely,  the  neck,  loins,  and  haunches. 

Pass  the  end  of  the  manege  and  continue  on  the 
long  side,  where,  with  the  horse  once  more  straight, 
you  have  space  in  front  of  you  in  case  of  difficulty. 
Then  again,  equilibrium,  and  forward  at  the  ma- 
nege walk.  Again  calculate  well  and  take  your  time. 
Do  not  yourself  become  excited  or  too  ambitious.  If 
you  do,  the  horse  will  feel  and  resent  it.  Then  com- 
mence your  diagonal  effects.  Again  you  obtain  the 

288 


THE  PASSAGE 

two,  three,  or  four  manifestations  of  the  passage. 
Stop.  Caress.  Take  off  the  bridle.  Carrots.  Stable. 

The  next  day  the  same  work,  at  the  same  hand. 
Do  not  alter  anything.  Impress,  engrave  on  the 
horse's  memory,  these  first  foreshadowings  of  the 
passage. 

During  this  early  work  on  the  passage,  stay  at 
the  side  of  the  manege  and  do  not  try  the  center. 
If  you  do,  you  will  be  sorry  afterwards,  for  you  will 
send  your  horse's  haunches  to  the  right  or  left,  in- 
stead of  having  them  straight.  When  the  signs  of 
the  passage  become  more  marked,  before  asking  for 
the  movement,  attack  the  horse  very  lightly,  with 
the  "delicate  touch  of  the  spurs'1  of  Gueriniere,  or, 
as  I  call  it,  "the  honeyed  attack."  Do  this  always 
at  the  manege  walk,  and  ask  the  cadence  by  the 
calves  of  the  legs  only.  Obtain  three  or  four  steps. 
Then  let  go.  Begin  again.  Repeat  this,  at  the  ut- 
most, no  more  than  four  to  six  times  at  each  lesson. 

At  this  point,  supposing  that  you  have  worked 
properly  thus  far,  I  must  especially  advise  that  you 
do  not,  under  any  conditions  or  circumstances,  let 
the  horse  take  the  cadence  of  the  passage  at  its  own 
initiative.  Let  it  do  this  only  when  you  ask  the  ac- 
tion by  your  diagonal  effects.  Be  very  sure  of  this. 

When  progress  begins  to  be  marked,  the  time  has 
come  for  a  change  of  hand  at  each  success.  Other- 
wise the  diagonal  biped  that  has  been  nearest  the 
wall  will  develop  more  energy  or  more  action. 
Nothing  must  be  neglected  that  will  make  for  that 

289 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

perfect  equality  of  squareness,  height,  energy,  gait, 
and  stride,  which  is  the  sine  qua  non  of  the  artistic 
passage.  Do  not,  moreover,  allow  your  mount  to  be 
behind  the  hand.  Accept  the  passage  only  when  the 
horse  is  in  contact  upon  your  hand. 

Let  us  now  analyze  our  effects  and  their  conse- 
quences. 

Baucher  writes: 

"The  passage  is  the  diminutive  of  the  piaffer.  In 
this  air,  the  horse  raises  its  legs  as  in  the  trot;  but 
he  advances  only  imperceptibly  and  at  tempo. 

"For  this  work,  the  talent  of  the  cavalier  con- 
sists, not  in  making  continually  an  opposition  with 
the  bridle  each  time  that  the  leg  acts,  but  in  so  well 
concentrating  all  the  forces  at  the  center,  as  for  the 
piaffer,  that,  with  the  reins  loosened,  the  horse  ad- 
vances only  imperceptibly  by  an  excess  of  action. 
It  is  easy  to  see  that  there  is  necessary  a  complete 
assemblage,  in  order  that  the  horse  may  execute 
with  regularity  this  brilliant  and  scientific  air  of 
equitation." 

I  am,  with  some  minor  differences,  of  the  same 
opinion  as  the  grand  master;  but  it  must  be  con- 
fessed that  it  will  be  very  difficult  for  the  student  to 
obtain  the  passage  with  only  the  data,  principles, 
and  lessons.  Baucher  is  correct  in  saying  that  the 
reins  are  to  be  loose  and  that  the  opposition  of  the 
hand  is  not  necessary,  provided  the  horse  is  already 
at  the  air.  But  before  the  movement  is  obtained, 
the  opposition  of  the  hand  is  essential,  since  it  is 

290 


THE  PASSAGE 

by  an  excess  of  the  effects  of  our  legs  that  we  not 
only  keep  the  horse  in  equilibrium,  but  also  gain  in 
weight  of  action  what  we  lose  in  forward  progress. 
A  locomotive  needs  a  much  greater  initial  force  to 
start  the  train  than  to  keep  it  running  after  it  has 
reached  full  speed;  and  in  something  the  same  way 
in  the  case  of  the  horse,  a  second  force  has  to  be 
added  to  that  which  produces  motion  forward,  in 
order  to  make  the  action  higher  and  slower.  But  so 
far  as  this  second  force  is  located  outside  the  total 
mechanism  of  the  horse's  body,  it  cannot  arise  ex- 
cept by  the  opposition  of  the  hand,  even  though  this 
is  as  light  as  can  be  made.  If  the  horse,  in  a  state  of 
freedom,  acts  the  air  spontaneously,  it  is  because 
the  creature  understands  by  its  natural  instinct  how 
to  equilibrize  its  forces.  But  this  natural  instinct 
becomes  paralyzed  just  as  soon  as  we  interfere  with 
our  weight  or  by  our  lack  of  tact. 

Fillis  is  clearer  and  more  explicit.  He  holds,  and 
rightly,  that  the  horse's  education  should  be  com- 
plete before  the  passage  is  attempted.  This  means 
that  the  horse  can  take  and  keep  the  state  of  assem- 
blage during  the  execution  of  every  movement  in 
the  progression  up  to  that  point.  The  "in  hand," 
the  equilibrium,  must  be  perfect,  and  retained 
without  excitement  or  fatigue.  The  horse  being 
then  at  the  manege  walk,  the  rider's  legs  close  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  girths.  The  horse  is  per- 
fectly calm.  The  left  spur  attacks;  and  immediately 
after  it,  the  right.  The  timing  of  these  attacks  is 

291 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

that  of  the  "one,  two;  one,  two;  lunge'*  in  fencing. 
Or,  since  many  riders  do  not  fence,  it  is  very  nearly 
the  tick  of  the  second-hand  of  a  watch.  At  the 
touch  of  the  left  spur,  the  horse,  surprised,  raises  its 
left  hind  leg  and  moves  its  body  toward  the  right. 
Then,  at  precisely  the  right  instant,  comes  the  right 
spur  to  prevent  the  haunches  from  swinging  to  the 
right,  and  also  to  lift  the  right  leg.  Then  again  the 
left  spur  with  the  reversed  effect;  and  so  alter- 
nately. After  four  such  trials,  whether  successful  or 
not,  stop,  calm  your  horse,  and  begin  again. 

The  master  or  the  student  must  impress  upon  his 
mind  exactly  what  he  desires  to  obtain  and  the 
means  by  which  he  is  to  obtain  it.  If  what  has  been 
written  above  has  been  studied  and  understood,  it 
should  be  clear  that  the  point  is  to  utilize  the  an- 
imal's forces  in  such  wise  as  to  secure  height  at  the 
expense  of  progress.  Evidently,  it  will  be  by  the  op- 
position of  the  hand  that  the  motion  forward  will  be 
checked  and  converted  into  motion  up.  Thus  the 
propulsive  force  generated  by  the  attacks  of  the 
spurs,  which  tends  to  drive  the  horse  forward,  is  re- 
ceived upon  the  hand.  The  fingers  close  upon  the 
reins  just  at  the  instant  of  the  forward  push.  The 
result  is  that  the  fore  leg  flexes  with  the  knee  up  and 
forward,  the  foot  down.  Simultaneously  with  this, 
the  opposite  rear  leg  comes  up,  and  the  horse  bal- 
ances upon  a  diagonal  biped. 

Consider,  for  example,  the  first  manifestation  of 
the  passage  on  the  right  lateral  biped.  We  have,  in 

292 


THE  PASSAGE 

this  case,  the  right  front  leg  and  the  left  hind  leg 
operated  by  the  right  diagonal  effect;  that  is  to  say, 
by  the  opposition  of  the  right  rein  and  the  attack  of 
the  left  spur.  The  right  diagonal  biped  is  now  up. 
Then  follows  the  opposition  of  the  left  rein  and  the 
attack  of  the  right  spur,  which  force  the  right  diag- 
onal biped  to  return  to  the  ground  before  the  left 
diagonal  biped  can  be  raised.  The  left  diagonal  bi- 
ped now  lifts  by  the  same  effects  as  the  right  and 
in  the  same  cadence,  and  we  have  two  steps  of 
the  passage.  Again,  right  rein  and  left  spur,  and 
the  left  diagonal  biped  returns  to  the  ground  as  the 
other  lifts.  Once  more  comes  the  left  rein  and  the 
right  spur,  the  bipeds  reverse,  and  we  have  four 
steps  of  the  passage. 

The  essential  means  are,  evidently,  the  attacks  of 
the  spurs.  At  the  first  touch,  the  horse  is  surprised. 
At  the  second,  the  surprise  is  increased.  At  the 
third,  the  animal  becomes  worried.  At  the  fourth, 
he  is  very  near  to  a  revolt,  because  he  does  not  un- 
derstand what  his  rider  asks.  If  now  the  rider  con- 
tinues the  attacks,  the  horse  will  be  driven  into  a 
complete  revolt.  The  spurs  will  bleed  him.  He  has 
no  idea  what  it  all  means.  This  will  be  utter  brutal- 
ity, without  the  slightest  chance  of  success. 

Sometimes  the  animal,  all  at  sea  as  to  what  is 
wanted  of  him,  goes  crazy.  As  Fillis  expresses  it, 
"He  plays  his  all,  and  completely  loses  his  head." 
In  that  condition,  he  maybe  dangerous,  not  only  at 
the  time,  but  for  the  future.  One  must,  therefore, 

293 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

make  ample  preparation,  take  plenty  of  time,  be  al- 
ways moderate,  calm,  persevering,  and  patient.  If 
in  these  four  attacks  you  obtain  any  sort  of  small 
beginning  of  a  leap  from  one  diagonal  biped  to  the 
other,  rest  satisfied  for  the  time,  and  be  generous  of 
your  recompense  and  caresses.  But,  for  pity's  sake, 
do  not  condemn  your  horse  for  a  fault  which  is 
mostly  your  own.  Be  sure  you  are  right  before 
every  demand;  and  do  not  form  your  opinion  too 
soon. 

Finally,  be  sure  that  the  surface  on  which  the 
horse  practices  the  passage  is  properly  soft  and 
elastic,  lest  its  feet  become  sore,  to  its  discourage- 
ment. Stay  as  much  as  possible  near  the  wall,  and 
keep  the  horse  straight.  Change  the  hand  some- 
times, but  not  too  often.  Let  the  horse  frequently 
stop  and  be  free.  Ask  little;  but  ask  well.  Be  satis- 
fied if  the  first  sign  of  the  desired  cadence  is  from 
one  biped  only.  So  far  as  possible,  work  alone  in  the 
manege.  Catch  your  pupil's  attention  and  hold  it 
on  yourself.  In  a  word,  make  him  enjoy  his  lessons 
at  the  passage.  Success  depends  upon  you  and  upon 
nobody  else.  Remember  that  you  cannot  buy  the 
accomplishment.  You  have  to  create  it  for  your- 
self. 

There  are,  in  addition,  several  more  or  less  in- 
telligent and  progressive  mechanical  devices  for  ob- 
taining the  passage;  but  these  are  not  accepted  by 
the  strictly  scientific  equitation. 

Baucher  and  Fillis  employed  a  logical  progres- 

294 


THE  PASSAGE 

sion,  when  they  used  the  Spanish  walk  and  the 
Spanish  trot  as  a  preliminary  to  the  passage.  This, 
moreover,  has  been  the  order  generally  accepted  by 
the  equestrian  world;  since,  of  course,  horses  which 
already  have  the  idea  of  sustaining  and  lifting  their 
weight  on  diagonal  bipeds,  in  cadence  and  tempo, 
will  the  more  quickly  understand  the  passage,  and 
will  require  less  equestrian  tact  on  the  part  of  the 
rider.  I  also,  in  my  youth,  like  other  trainers,  ap- 
proached the  passage  by  way  of  the  Spanish  trot. 
But  when,  later,  I  came  to  look  upon  the  passage  as 
the  result  of  perfect  equilibrium,  I  came  also  to  un- 
derstand that  the  passage  is  impossible  until  one  has 
obtained,  first  the  assemblage,  and  then  the  piaffer, 
to  give  the  idea  of  the  diagonal  action.  Then,  after 
the  piaffer,  comes  the  passage,  with  the  extension 
of  the  fore  legs  and  the  flexion  of  the  hocks  and 
haunches. 


CHAPTER  XXX 
THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD 

THE  passage  backward  follows  from  the  piaffer,  and 
therefore  presupposes  a  horse  educated  to  the  per- 
fect state  of  assemblage  and  equilibrium. 

A  horse  at  the  slow  piaffer  —  which  is,  of  course, 
the  only  form  of  the  piaffer  considered  by  the 
scientific  equitation  —  balances  itself  on  the  same 
spot,  all  four  legs  flexing  at  the  knees  and  hocks,  but 
without  gaining  ground.  The  center  of  gravity  is, 
therefore,  midway  of  the  body,  and  exactly  under 
the  seat  of  the  rider.  Under  these  conditions,  the 
horse  is  like  a  large  ball  which  rests  upon  a  smooth 
and  level  surface,  with  which  it  is  in  contact,  only  at 
one  end  of  a  diameter.  Evidently,  the  slightest 
force  applied  at  the  other  end  of  this  diameter  will 
send  the  ball  rolling  in  the  direction  of  the  force. 
So,  in  the  piaffer,  a  force  applied  alternately  on  the 
two  sides  of  the  center  of  gravity  makes  the  horse 
receive  its  weight  alternately  on  its  two  diagonal 
bipeds.  As  the  center  of  gravity  shifts  to  the  right, 
the  left  diagonal  biped  is  raised,  and  vice  versa. 

If,  then,  under  these  conditions,  the  rider  leans 
forward,  the  horse  must  move  forward,  under  the 
operation  of  the  same  law.  But  if,  when  the  horse  is 
lifting  his  legs  in  diagonal  alternately  upon  the  same 
spot,  the  rider's  weight  is  inclined  backward,  the  al- 

296 


Figure  38.  THE  TROT  BACKWARDS 


Figure  39.  GALLOP  ON  THREE  LEGS  :  RIGHT  FORE  LEG 

EXTENDED 


Figure  40.  GALLOP  ON  THREE  LEGS  :  LEFT  FORE  LEG 

EXTENDED 


THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD 

ternale  change  from  side  to  side  still  continuing, 
then  the  horse  will  trot  backward.  The  hand  has 
nothing  to  do  with  the  action,  except  to  maintain 
the  equilibrium,  by  means  of  the  fingering. 

When  once  the  piaffer  is  obtained,  the  backward 
trot  follows  without  much  difficulty;  but  the  move- 
ment needs  moderation,  and  should  begin  with  a 
few  steps  at  first,  the  number  increasing  with  prac- 
tice. (Figure  38.) 

The  speed  of  the  backward  trot  is  not  the  test  of 
its  execution.  A  three-inch  step,  taken  equally  by 
each  diagonal  biped,  and  with  the  same  cadence, 
tempo,  and  elevation  as  for  the  piaffer,  is  proof  of  a 
better  equilibrium  and  a  better  training,  than  is  any 
precipitate  rush  rearward  in  which  the  horse  avoids 
the  state  of  equilibrium  by  moving  as  it  pleases. 
The  air  should  always  seem  to  be  executed  without 
exertion  and  without  compulsion.  The  horse  bal- 
ances itself  with  an  easy  action  of  the  limbs  in  di- 
agonal, moves  backward,  returns  to  the  piaffer, 
changes  into  the  passage,  returns  to  the  piaffer, 
takes  the  backward  trot.  The  rider's  hands  are  im- 
mobile. The  position  of  his  body,  as  it  swings  like  a 
pendulum  into  the  correct  place,  is  the  force  which 
actuates  the  mechanism. 

With  this  animal  mechanism,  the  backward  trot 
is  in  perfect  accord.  The  movement  is  entirely 
natural,  when  it  is  done  in  equilibrium  from  the 
piaffer.  But  if  it  is  obtained  by  severity  of  hand, 
spurs,  or  whip,  it  becomes  precisely  contrary  to  the 

297 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

horse's  nature.  It  is  then  dangerous  to  the  rider,  be- 
cause the  horse,  pulled  backward  by  the  bridle,  may 
rear  and  fall. 

However,  the  trot  backward  cannot  properly  be 
considered  a  gait  of  the  horse.  It  is  serviceable  only 
for  perfecting  the  equilibrium,  and  for  suppling 
the  entire  hind  hand,  most  especially  the  coupling. 

THE  GALLOP  ON  THREE  LEGS 

IN  the  gallop  on  three  legs,  the  horse  uses  both  hind 
limbs ;  but  only  one  in  front,  and  holds  the  other  in 
the  air.  Before  the  movement  is  asked,  the  horse 
must  already  be  able  to  maintain  a  complete  and 
permanent  equilibrium  during  the  ordinary  gallop, 
to  execute  the  jambette  at  the  diagonal  effect  with 
great  precision  and  with  complete  extension  of  the 
front  leg,  and  to  gallop,  not  terre-a-terre,  but  very 
slowly.  (Figures  39,  40.) 

The  movement  is  asked  by  decomposing  the  air 
into  its  elements.  The  horse  gallops  slowly  in 
assemblage.  The  rider  stops  it,  and  by  means  of 
the  right  snaffle  rein  and  the  left  spur,  asks  im- 
mediately the  jambette.  After  the  jambette,  the 
horse  is  allowed  to  walk.  Again  the  gallop,  the 
stop,  and  the  jambette  immediately.  These  three 
are  repeated  for  whatever  time  is  needed  to  calm 
the  horse,  and  to  teach  it  to  keep  straight  when 
stopped  and  giving  the  jambette. 

When  the  horse  has  mastered  this  exercise,  the 
gallop  is  asked  immediately  after  the  jambette, 

298 


THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD 

without  the  intervening  walk.  From  the  gallop,  the 
horse  is  stopped  as  before,  made  to  give  the  jam- 
bette,  and  then  started  again  at  the  gallop.  Again, 
stop,  jambette,  start.  Never  change  the  lead;  al- 
ways keep  working  on  the  same  side. 

After  a  certain  time,  it  always  comes  about  that 
the  horse  executes  the  jambette  just  before  it  comes 
to  the  stop,  partly  of  its  own  volition,  and  partly  at 
the  effects  of  the  rider's  hand  and  legs.  The  great 
point  is,  then,  to  seize  upon  this  first  single  step  of 
the  gallop  combined  with  the  jambette  or,  in  other 
words,  of  the  gallop  on  three  legs.  When  you  have 
one  —  one  only  —  caress  with  all  your  heart  and 
send  to  the  stable. 

The  next  day,  the  same  procedure.  The  horse,  as 
before,  does  one  step  of  the  gallop  with  the  jam- 
bette held.  Once  more,  caress,  dismount,  caress 
again,  and  to  the  stable. 

After  a  few  days,  get  two  steps  of  the  gallop  on 
three  legs;  then  the  next  day,  four.  Continue  in 
this  way,  but  do  not  ask  too  much.  When  the  horse 
does,  let  us  say,  five  steps  at  the  lead  which  he  has 
been  taught,  change  the  lead  and  commence  from 
the  beginning  precisely  as  before.  Do  not  accept 
the  slightest  degree  of  confusion  or  mistake.  Lean 
the  body  forward  on  the  side  of  the  jambette  and 
push  the  horse  forward  with  the  legs. 

Fillis  advocates  using  the  left  leg  to  secure  and 
maintain  the  jambette,  and  also  to  continue  the 
gallop.  I  have,  at  various  times  and  with  different 

299 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

horses,  obtained  the  jambette  by  holding  the  right 
snaffle  rein  in  the  right  hand,  high,  and  the  curb 
reins  low  in  the  left  in  order  to  maintain  the  horse's 
head  near  the  perpendicular,  while  my  legs  confine 
themselves  to  the  effects  needed  for  the  gallop. 

It  is  evident  that,  to  obtain  the  gallop  on  three 
legs,  the  horse  must  be  morally  and  physically  per- 
fect, or  else  have  been  adequately  developed  by  its 
previous  training.  Moreover,  the  rider  must  him- 
self possess  delicate  equestrian  tact,  and  have  per- 
fect control  over  his  effects.  Even  then,  he  will  not 
always  be  successful,  unless  he  has  already  ed- 
ucated several  horses  in  the  scientific  equitation. 

The  gallop  on  three  legs  is  a  beautiful  demonstra- 
tion of  the  power  of  the  man's  effects  over  the  an- 
imal; but  it  is  of  use  only  for  this  purpose  and  in  the 
manege.  Outside  the  manege,  the  air  has  no  value 
whatever.  It  is,  then,  reasonable  enough  to  teach 
the  air  to  the  manege  horse,  but  not  to  horses  that 
are  for  other  service;  and  in  general  I  think  that  the 
strength  of  the  horse  and  the  tact  of  the  rider  are 
better  spent  on  more  useful  movements.  I  even  go 
so  far  as  to  say  that  the  gallop  on  three  legs  is  a 
source  of  danger  both  in  the  case  of  a  beginner  and 
of  a  master  who  is  training  an  animal  for  some  one 
else  to  ride.  For  if  the  rider  of  a  horse  trained  to  the 
gallop  on  three  legs  is  not  a  thoroughly  competent 
esquire,  he  will  not  always  use  exactly  the  correct 
means  to  obtain  the  change  of  lead  at  the  gallop, 
the  change  of  direction,  or  the  stop.  He  may,  in 

300 


THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD 

that  case,  start  the  horse  to  galloping  on  three  legs — 
to  its  great  confusion. 

Moreover,  during  the  gallop  on  three  legs,  the 
horse  is  completely  on  his  haunches.  The  hind  legs 
carry  all  the  weight,  advance  by  very  short  steps, 
and  always  very  close  to  the  ground.  Therefore, 
unless  the  horse  is  sent  forward  by  the  weight  of  the 
rider  and  by  a  strong  effect  of  legs  and  spurs  cou- 
pled with  great  tact  of  hand,  the  creature  is  exactly 
in  the  position  to  rear  high.  The  gallop  on  three 
legs,  like  the  gallop  backward,  demands  a  com- 
bination of  favorable  conditions  as  to  both  horse 
and  rider  that  is  in  practice  pretty  difficult  to 
find. 

Considering,  then,  the  danger  to  the  horse's  hocks 
and  to  its  temper,  and  the  peril  to  the  rider,  I  can- 
not feel  that  the  usefulness  of  the  gait  at  all  compen- 
sates for  the  wear  and  tear  on  the  one  or  the  risk  to 
the  other.  Fillis  has,  indeed,  executed  the  air  most 
brilliantly,  on  the  different  occasions  when  he  has 
exhibited  his  horses.  I  have  performed  the  feat 
with  several  different  animals.  But,  on  the  whole, 
the  game  has  not  been  worth  the  candle. 

THE  GALLOP  A  TEMPO 

THIS  form  of  the  gallop  is  a  slow  canter,  in  which 
the  lead  changes  rhythmically  from  one  biped  to  the 
other  with  each  completion  of  a  fixed  number  of 
steps.  For  example,  the  horse  gallops  ten  steps 
to  the  right,  and  then  on  the  eleventh  it  changes 

301 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

and  gallops  ten  steps  to  the  left.  On  the  twenty- 
first  step  it  returns  to  the  right-hand  lead;  and 
so  on. 

The  difficulty  is  for  the  rider  to  keep  count  of  the 
steps,  since  the  air  demands  for  its  correct  perform- 
ance that  the  number  shall  always  be  exactly  the 
same.  Moreover,  at  its  best,  the  movement  requires 
the  change  of  lead  at  every  step  —  one  stride  with 
lead  to  the  right,  then  the  change  to  the  left,  then 
one  stride  with  lead  to  the  left,  and  again  the 
change  back  to  the  right,  thus  continuing  indef- 
initely. Naturally,  this  demands  thorough  training 
for  the  horse  and  the  highest  equestrian  tact  from 
the  rider. 

Both  Baucher  and  Fillis  have  performed  this  air 
with  remarkable  evenness  of  rhythm.  Fillis,  also, 
once  upon  a  time,  laid  a  heavy  wager  with  certain 
amateur  horsemen,  who  denied  the  possibility  of 
the  gallop  a  tempo,  that  he  would  ride  from  the 
Arc  de  Triomphe  to  the  Place  de  la  Concorde,  with 
a  change  of  lead  after  every  step.  The  grand  master 
won. 

In  training  a  horse  for  this  air,  the  change  of  lead 
should  be  at  first  only  once  in  every  twenty  steps. 
Afterwards,  with  the  greatest  patience  and  moder- 
ation, the  number  is  reduced  progressively.  The 
exercise  demands  great  energy  from  the  horse, 
which  must  throughout  remain  perfectly  calm. 
Whatever  the  number  of  steps  between  changes  of 
lead,  this  must  always  remain  unvaried. 

302 


Figure  41.  THE  GALLOP  TERRE  A  TERRE 


THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD 

THE  GALLOP  BACKWARD 

FOR  the  gallop  backward,  the  horse  must  be  of 
perfect  conformation,  especially  in  its  hind  quarters, 
and  must  be  educated  to  the  point  where  it  can 
interpret  almost  imperceptible  effects  of  the  rider. 
Its  equilibrium  and  assemblage  must  be  perfect  — 
the  sine  qua  non  of  this  air,  since  the  gait  is  very 
precise  and  the  beats  equal  and  uniform  —  and  its 
strength  must  be  sufficient  to  sustain  without  appar- 
ent exertion  the  gallop  terre-a-terre.  (Figure  41.) 

In  the  gallop  terre-a-terre,  as  in  the  piaffer,  the 
horse  is  like  a  ball  resting  on  one  pole  and  movable 
by  the  slightest  force.  If,  then,  the  rider's  effects, 
by  their  lack  of  equality,  timing,  fineness,  or  uni- 
formity, disturb  this  perfect  equilibrium,  the  gallop 
terre-a-terre  becomes  impossible.  But  if  the  rider's 
effects  are  precisely  correct,  the  horse  will  continue 
to  gallop  on  the  same  spot,  like  the  ball  resting  on 
a  pole.  Under  these  conditions,  if  the  rider's  weight 
shifts  on  the  seat  to  throw  the  center  of  gravity 
backward  of  the  perpendicular  around  which  the 
whole  mechanism  has  centered,  the  horse  will  be 
forced  to  move  backward  in  order  to  prevent  falling. 

Meanwhile,  of  course,  the  rider,  by  his  effects, 
must  continue  to  maintain  the  equilibrium  and  the 
gait  of  the  gallop.  If  either  is  disturbed  ("evap- 
orated" is  the  expression  I  use  with  my  pupils),  the 
horse  loses  either  its  equilibrium  and  then  its  gallop, 
or  else  its  gallop  and  then  its  equilibrium.  In  either 

303 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

case,  the  movement  becomes  dislocated  and  im- 
possible. 

But  the  swing  of  the  rider's  body  should  never 
be  a  stiff  inclination  backward  of  a  rigid  spine. 
The  weight  is,  at  the  beginning,  immobile  upon  the 
saddle.  Then  for  the  change,  the  rider's  spine  plays 
back  and  forth,  flexing  at  the  coupling  between  the 
sacrum  and  the  last  lumbar  vertebra,  in  time  with 
each  beat  of  the  gallop  and  at  the  precise  instant 
when  the  horse's  two  hind  feet  are  off  the  ground, 
and  the  right  fore  leg  only  is  bearing  the  weight  — 
assuming  that  the  backward  gallop  starts  from  the 
gallop  terre-a-terre  on  the  right  lateral  biped.  This 
translation  of  the  weight  by  the  flexion  of  the  cou- 
pling is  to  be  repeated  at  each  beat  of  the  stride. 
Meanwhile,  the  rider's  legs  have  to  sustain  the 
equilibrium  and  to  hold  the  contact  of  the  horse's 
mouth  with  the  bits. 

If,  now,  the  rider,  as  he  swings  his  weight,  merely 
closes  his  fingers,  without  moving  his  hand,  the 
horse  will  gallop  backward,  one  step  only,  but  still 
one  step.  That  obtained,  stop  everything,  yield 
everything,  and  caress.  When  the  horse  has  be- 
come calm,  forward  again  at  the  walk  and  the 
terre-a-terre  at  the  same  hand  as  before.  Be  quiet 
yourself;  flex  your  spine;  finger.  Another  step 
backward.  That  is  enough  for  the  time  being. 
Dismount;  arid  to  the  stable.  The  next  day,  the 
same  progression. 

After  a  few  days,  you  will  be  able  to   obtain 

304 


THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD 

three  or  four  backward  steps.  When  the  horse 
executes  these  calmly  at  the  hand  at  which  it  was 
first  taught,  change  the  lead  and  repeat  the  same 
work  at  the  new  hand.  Always  keep  the  horse 
straight  and  forward.  Better  work  near  the  wall, 
as  this  will  aid  in  keeping  the  straight  position. 

If  the  horse  is  to  be  completely  educated  in  the 
scientific  equitation,  it  is  better  to  teach  the  gallop 
backward  before  the  gallop  on  three  legs.  Other- 
wise, the  horse  may  give  the  gallop  on  three  legs 
when  asked  for  the  gallop  terre-a-terre.  You  cannot 
punish  it  for  a  mistake  like  this,  and  the  result  is 
confusion.  But  if  the  horse  has  thoroughly  learned 
the  terre-a-terre  and  the  backward  gallop,  it  is  a  far 
easier  matter  to  push  it  forward  against  the  contact, 
and  so  change  from  the  terre-a-terre  to  the  gallop  on 
three  legs,  than  to  restrain  it  from  the  gallop  on 
three  legs  to  the  gallop  terre-a-terre. 

In  beginning  either  the  terre-a-terre  or  the  gallop 
backward,  do  not  accept  from  the  horse  the  slight- 
est sign  of  being  behind  the  hand.  If  you  feel  this 
at  all,  use  your  legs  vigorously  and  push  the  animal 
forward  upon  the  hand.  The  rider  can  always  de- 
tect this  tendency  to  stay  behind  the  hand;  and 
should  correct  it  by  giving  three  minutes  of  good, 
energetic  promenade  trot.  For  this  purpose,  I  pre- 
fer the  trot  to  the  gallop,  since  at  the  gallop  one 
lateral  biped  tends  to  get  more  work  than  the 
other,  unless  the  rider  takes  pains  to  change  hands. 
In  any  case,  the  gallop  does  not  give  so  complete 

305 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

a  disposition  of  the  animal's  forces  as  does  the 
trot. 

The  "in  hand"  for  the  gallop  backward  is  be- 
tween the  "upon  the  hand"  and  "behind  the 
hand."  A  horse  upon  the  hand  lifts  its  front  legs 
too  high  and  its  hind  legs  not  high  enough.  But  if 
the  rider  livens  it  by  the  action  of  his  own  legs,  the 
horse  rears  or  points  forward.  If  the  horse  is  behind 
the  hand,  the  fore  legs  do  not  lift  sufficiently,  and 
the  tempo  of  the  gallop  is  not  exact.  It  is,  however, 
not  possible  to  describe  completely  the  sensation 
which  comes  to  the  rider's  hand,  and  only  by  ex- 
perience can  the  rider  determine  whether  he  is  right 
or  wrong. 

In  fine,  then,  perfect  equilibrium,  terre-a-terre, 
perfect  equilibrium,  flexion  of  the  rider's  coupling, 
fingering,  moderation,  and  good  fortune.  The 
backward  gallop  proves  uncommon  suppleness  on 
the  part  of  the  horse,  together  with  great  strength 
in  the  haunches.  On  the  part  of  the  rider,  it  proves 
high  equestrian  tact.  Yet  the  position  which  the 
horse  takes  and  the  action  of  its  legs  are  far  from 
graceful,  and  the  utility  of  the  air  is  debatable.  It 
risks  the  soundness  of  the  horse's  hocks,  and  it  is 
certainly  not  worth  attempting  by  a  beginner,  who 
has  to  spoil  several  horses  physically  and  morally 
before  he  attains  to  the  tact  and  the  accuracy 
of  seat  essential  to  the  gallop  backward  without 
danger. 

And  yet,  for  any  rider,  experience  with  the  gallop 

306 


Figure  42.  FILLIS  AT  THE  GALLOP 

BACKWARD 


Figure  43.  "  WHY-NOT  "  AT  THE  GALLOP 

BACKWARD 


THE  PASSAGE  BACKWARD 

backward  cannot  be  other  than  very  limited.  Very 
few  esquires  have  ever  obtained  the  movement.  I 
know  of  only  Baucher  and  Fillis,  and  even  they 
with  only  two  or  three  horses  each.  Moreover,  it 
is  absurd  for  any  one  to  think  that  any  horse  can 
do  the  backward  gallop  really  well  for  more  than  a 
few  strides,  because  of  the  great  energy  demanded. 

I  give  (Figures  42,  43)  as  illustrations  of  the 
movement,  Fillis  mounted  upon  "  Germinal,'*  and 
myself  upon  "Why-Not,"  in  order  that  the  reader 
may  compare  the  leg  action  of  the  two  horses  at 
the  same  gait.  " Germinal"  is  fifteen  hands,  three 
inches  high:  "Why-Not"  is  sixteen  hands,  three 
inches.  Although  the  backward  gallop  is  the  last 
refinement  of  equilibrium  possible  to  the  horse,  it 
is  in  itself  pleasant  neither  for  the  horse  nor  for  the 
spectator.  "Why-Not"  is  the  fourth  animal  from 
which  I  have  obtained  it,  not  for  my  own  satisfac- 
tion, but  for  the  sake  of  making  a  picture  for  this 
book,  in  which  I  set  forth  nothing  that  I  have  not 
myself  done. 

And  now,  finally,  at  the  end  of  this  last  chapter 
on  horse  gymnastics,  I  beg  the  reader  to  review  the 
illustrations,  and  to  compare  the  several  pictures  of 
"Why-Not"  before  his  training  and  at  the  various 
stages  of  his  development  during  the  course  and  at 
the  end.  These  photographs  prove  amply  the  mus- 
cular improvement  accomplished  during  the  horse's 
education. 


307 


CHAPTER  XXXI 
HANDS  WITHOUT  LEGS:  LEGS  WITHOUT  HANDS 

"  HANDS  without  legs,  legs  without  hands,"  is  the 
name  applied  to  a  new  principle  in  equitation  enun- 
ciated by  Baucher  only  a  few  years  before  his  death. 
It  resulted  in  a  schism  among  horsemen,  and  the 
new  ideas  were  opposed  by  many  masters  and  es- 
quires. 

I  have  myself  experimented  with  the  new  meth- 
ods upon  horses  of  very  different  qualities.  My  own 
conclusion  is  that  the  system  is  practicable  only  for 
a  very  able  horseman  training  an  animal  of  very 
superior  endowments,  both  physical  and  mental. 
I  do  not  regard  the  scheme  as  workable  for  any 
rider  dealing  with  a  horse  of  inferior  conformation, 
or  for  an  inexperienced  rider  dealing  with  any  sort 
of  horse. 

For  it  must  be  evident  that,  with  a  horse  of  su- 
perior conformation,  the  state  of  equilibrium  is  both 
more  easily  obtained  and  more  easily  kept  by  the 
ordinary  principles  of  the  reasoned  and  the  scien- 
tific equitation,  hands  and  legs  being  used  together 
for  the  different  movements,  than  with  an  inferior 
animal.  Moreover,  the  less  perfectly  conformed 
the  animal  is,  the  more  difficult  is  it  to  maintain  the 
state  of  equilibrium,  even  with  the  aid  of  hands  and 
legs  together. 

308 


HANDS  WITHOUT  LEGS 

In  other  words,  with  a  well-conformed  horse,  the 
state  of  equilibrium  is  very  easy  for  a  practiced 
rider  and  very  difficult  for  a  novice.  With  a  badly 
conformed  horse,  the  desired  state  is  difficult  for 
the  experienced  esquire,  and  very  nearly  impossible 
for  the  inexperienced,  even  if  they  both  employ 
both  hands  and  legs. 

It  comes  about,  then,  that,  whether  the  horse  be 
well  or  ill  conformed,  it  has  to  be  trained  to  the 
condition  of  .equilibrium  by  means  of  both  hands 
and  legs.  But  the  horse  once  trained,  though  not 
before,  it  becomes  possible  to  preserve  the  state  of 
equilibrium  by  means  of  the  rider's  legs  without 
the  cooperation  of  his  hands,  or  by  means  of  his 
hands  without  the  cooperation  of  his  legs. 

But  now  arises  the  question,  how  does  accuracy 
of  seat  act  upon  the  center  of  gravity,  which  is  the 
immediate  sequence  of  the  state  of  equilibrium? 
The  answer  is,  that  this  equilibrium  is  a  unit,  and 
the  center  of  gravity  is  an  element.  We  obtain  this 
unified  condition  by  the  accord  of  our  effects  of 
hands  and  of  legs.  But  if,  when  we  have  obtained 
this  unit  condition,  we  employ  more  effect  of  hands 
or  more  effect  of  legs  in  order  to  execute  a  move- 
ment, we  at  once  disturb  the  original  unity.  There- 
upon the  equilibrium  vacillates  between  the  hands 
and  the  legs,  and  does  not  remain  permanently 
anywhere. 

On  the  other  hand,  by  means  of  accuracy  of  seat, 
we  are  able  to  act  upon  this  unified  condition  of 

309 


THE  SCIENTIFIC  EQUITATION 

equilibrium  without  destroying  it.  I  am  the  first  to 
enunciate  this  principle  of  the  efficiency  of  accuracy 
of  seat.  I  know  that  I  shall  be  the  object  of  criti- 
cism; but  I  consent  to  accept  this.  Beati  pauperes 
spiritu,  regnum  codi  habent. 


PART  IV 

THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE  AND 
THEIR  CORRECTION 


CHAPTER   XXXII 

THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE  AND 
THEIR  CORRECTION 

EVEN  the  masters  of  equitation  have  to  admit  that 
it  is  very  nearly  impossible  to  complete  the  educa- 
tion of  any  horse  without  having  the  animal  show 
some  tendency  to  lack  of  obedience,  some  trace  of 
hesitation,  refusal,  or  revolt.  The  experienced  mas- 
ter senses  this  condition  at  its  beginning;  and  with- 
out losing  any  time  he  discovers  the  reason  for  it, 
and  corrects  the  trouble  forthwith.  At  the  early 
stage,  correction  is  comparatively  easy.  But  when 
the  animal  has  once  formed  the  habit  of  rebellion, 
correction  is  very  difficult,  indeed.  The  result  is 
sometimes  a  downright  fight  between  rider  and 
horse. 

The  problem  is,  therefore,  to  discover  the  reason 
for  the  horse's  defense,  and  then  to  remove  the 
cause  before  the  horse  gets  the  idea  that  disobedi- 
ence is  possible.  Experience  shows,  moreover,  that 
these  causes  are  generally  physical.  The  only  men- 
tal factor  is  the  fear  of  injury  from  some  object 
heard,  seen,  or  smelled.  This  mental  state  is  to  be 
remedied  only  by  persuasion,  patience,  and  good 
treatment. 

The  physical  causes  of  defense  are  bodily  pains 
and  the  consequent  memory  of  them.  A  horse  will, 

313 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

however,  very  seldom  defend  itself  against  the  first 
sensation  of  an  unknown  pain,  but  only  if  the  pain 
be  prolonged  or  repeated.  Furthermore,  a  horse 
does  not  enter  immediately  into  the  state  of 
revolt. 

At  the  beginning,  it  simply  hesitates  to  act  and 
move  as  it  has  been  doing.  Then  it  tries  to  stop. 
Finally,  it  does  stop,  and  thereupon  enters  into 
complete  rebellion.  The  moment  when  the  horse 
first  tries  to  stop  is,  of  course,  the  point  at  which  the 
rider  should  quell  the  approaching  revolt.  The 
rider,  therefore,  so  to  say,  takes  hold  of  the  horse's 
legs  and  forces  these  to  carry  the  body  forward,  at 
any  gait,  in  order  that  the  animal  may  not  feel  that 
its  limbs  have  any  possibility  of  stopping.  What- 
ever the  horse  may  think,  the  rider's  only  argument 
is:  "Yes;  forward  and  straight." 

Consequent  to  this  first  sign  of  revolt,  the  refusal 
to  go  forward,  there  is  a  contraction  of  the  muscles 
of  the  spinal  column  and  of  the  white  and  yellow 
cords,  the  animal  is  in  revolt  against  the  rider  and 
his  main  controls  are  lost,  and  the  defenses  become 
possible.  These  defenses  are  of  four  sorts,  rearing, 
kicking,  backing,  and  bolting.  All  other  defenses 
depend  on  the  possibility  of  these  four  primordial 
ones. 

REFUSAL 

A  HORSE  refuses  when,  because  of  its  moral  state,  it 
uses  its  great  physical  strength  to  disobey  the  com- 

314 


REFUSAL 

mands  of  its  rider.  The  two  wills,  the  horse's  and 
the  man's,  are  opposed.  The  man  asks.  The  horse 
refuses.  The  point  at  issue  becomes,  then,  whether 
the  man  is  to  remain  master  by  virtue  of  his  intel- 
ligence. 

The  initial  step  is  to  find  the  reason  for  the  horse's 
revolt.  Has  he,  first  of  all,  been  obedient,  and  has 
he  already  executed  the  movement  asked?  If  he 
has,  then  something  new  must  have  occurred  to 
alter  the  previous  state  of  submission.  With  a  little 
experience,  coupled  with  a  great  deal  of  calm,  it  is 
always  easy  to  discover  what  this  something  is. 
We  inspect  our  saddle  and  girths,  the  snaffle  and 
bit  and  throat  latch.  We  consider  whether  some 
small  departure  from  the  habit  already  formed  by 
the  animal  has  not  provoked  the  refusal.  Have  we 
not  repeated  the  same  movement  in  exaggerated 
form?  Are  we  correct  in  our  use  of  our  effects?  Are 
these  understood  by  the  horse?  Is  he  tired,  or  con- 
fused, or  sick,  or  lame? 

No,  everything  is  all  right,  and  as  usual.  The 
horse  revolts  from  pure  willfulness,  because  it  de- 
sires to  be  master.  Very  well,  I  will  tell  you  how  to 
handle  this  condition. 

If  the  manege  or  the  road  is  too  much  crowded 
with  women,  children,  and  beginners,  wait  pa- 
tiently and  without  provoking  any  further  rebel- 
lion, until  you  are  alone  and  free  for  the  little  fun 
that  you  are  going  to  give  your  mount. 

First  make  sure  that  you  are  entirely  in  the  right 

315 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

and  perfectly  calm,  with  not  the  least  passion  or 
anger.  Have  a  whip  brought,  but  hide  it  out  of  the 
horse's  sight,  by  holding  it,  handle  down  and  lash 
up,  straight  in  line  with  his  neck. 

Then  begin  to  encourage  the  horse  in  a  firm, 
gentle  voice.  If  it  obeys,  caress  it,  and  let  it  go  on 
at  a  walk  calmly.  Then  ask  a  more  complicated 
movement.  If  the  horse  refuses  or  hesitates,  there 
is  a  rending  sound  in  the  air,  followed  by  a  dull  one 
like  that  of  a  bullet  entering  a  man's  chest.  All  this 
is  very  sharp,  sudden,  and  surprising.  The  horse 
turns  his  head  to  left  and  to  right,  not  know- 
ing whence  the  stroke  has  come.  But  the  whip  has 
been  felt,  most  certainly;  and  the  horse  is  van- 
quished. 

If  it  begins  again,  the  rider  is  ready,  and  proceeds 
as  before.  Two  or  three  such  corrections  put  the 
horse  back  into  the  state  of  obedience  as  he  was 
before  his  revolt.  But  if  the  horse  knows,  after  the 
refusal,  that  the  rider  has  the  whip  ready,  it  will 
then  obey;  and  later,  when  the  whip  is  not  at  hand, 
it  will  again  refuse.  It  is  important,  therefore,  that 
the  horse  shall  not  know  that  the  rider  has  the  whip, 
nor  just  what  happens  to  him.  Then,  if  he  refuses, 
the  chastisement  follows  immediately,  and  there  is 
engraven  on  his  memory  the  association  between 
the  disobedience  and  the  physical  pain.  But  the 
pain  comes  as  a  surprise  to  the  horse,  who  does  not 
know  what  caused  it  nor  where  the  instrument  has 
gone. 

316 


RESISTANCE 

There  can  be  no  complete  education  of  a  horse 
without  an  occasional  refusal.  But  the  point  is  to 
see  it  coming  and  to  forestall  it  by  equestrian  tact, 
or  at  the  worst  not  to  let  the  habit  grow.  Raabe, 
Baucher,  and  Fillis  have  all  had  real  tempests  of 
revolt  from  their  horses.  I  who  write  these  lines 
have  had  some  fights,  but  not  many.  Those  which 
I  have  been  through  make  me  very  sad;  because 
they  show  me  that,  with  all  my  studies  and  with  all 
my  long  years  of  experience,  I  do  not  know  enough 
to  ride  without  being  obliged  to  punish. 

RESISTANCE 

RESISTANCE  and  refusal  are  very  nearly  synony- 
mous, but  not  quite.  A  horse  may  refuse  to  execute 
certain  movements,  but  will,  nevertheless,  perform 
others.  Or  he  may  refuse  to  perform  the  movement 
in  the  way  desired  by  the  rider,  yet  still  do  it  after 
his  own  fashion,  incorrectly.  But  when  a  horse 
resists,  he  enters  willfully  into  a  state  of  complete 
revolt,  and  tries  to  free  himself  from  any  sort  of 
control.  He  may  carry  his  rider  into  a  river,  and  no 
effort  will  prevent  him.  No  effects,  no  means,  se- 
vere or  gentle,  will  make  him  obey.  Either  he  will 
not  understand  the  rider's  orders;  or  else,  under- 
standing them,  he  will  not  carry  them  out. 

If  the  horse  resists  because  he  does  not  under- 
stand, then  the  best  corrective  is  patience,  per- 
severance, and  persuasion,  without  punishment. 
But  if  the  horse  understands,  yet  refuses  to  obey, 

317 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

the  cause  may  be  bad  will,  fear,  confusion,  or  fa- 
tigue. 

When  fear  is  the  cause,  the  terrifying  object  may 
be  seen,  heard,  or,  very  rarely,  smelt.  The  cure  is 
to  reestablish  the  animal's  confidence,  by  proving 
to  him  that  the  object  is  inoffensive. 

If  the  horse  resists  because  he  is  confused,  the 
fault  is  the  rider's  own.  He  should,  therefore,  dis- 
tract the  horse's  mind  until  the  confused  images 
have  faded  from  its  memory.  Then  he  should  begin 
again,  avoiding  his  former  error. 

If  fatigue  is  the  cause  of  the  resistance,  the  rem- 
edy is  to  proceed  with  moderation,  and  to  ask  only 
euch  work  as  is  proportionate  to  the  horse's  age, 
strength,  and  training. 

But  if  the  fault  is  in  the  horse's  evil  will,  the  rider 
should  first  make  perfectly  certain  that  all  his  sig- 
nals meet  the  same  resistance,  without  the  smallest 
sign  of  any  return  to  submission.  This  done,  he 
should  punish,  with  severity,  but  without  passion. 
Only  thus  can  the  horse  be  made  to  understand 
that  its  will  is  to  be  submitted  to  the  rider's  control. 

Veterinary  science  is  no  doubt  correct  in  the 
opinion  that  there  are  defects  in  the  horse's  brain, 
analogous  to  those  in  the  brain  of  a  man,  which 
cause  obstinacy,  if  not  insanity.  My  own  experi- 
ence, nevertheless,  goes  to  show  that  the  cause  of 
resistances,  refusals,  and  similar  difficulties  have 
their  basis  in  ordinary  physical  defects,  which  can 
be  cured  by  moderate  and  proper  education. 


CONTRACTION 

CONTRACTION 

A  HORSE  is  instinctively  timid  and  anxious,  even  in 
a  state  of  freedom;  and  this  nervous  tension  tends 
to  affect  the  muscles  and  to  cause  these  to  contract 
and  stiffen  beyond  their  normal  tonus. 

This  contraction  is  likely  to  be  augmented  during 
the  animal's  education.  Its  four  senses  are  very 
acute,  and  the  unaccustomed  objects  which  sur- 
round it  keep  it  chronically  alarmed.  The  harness 
also,  and  the  contact  of  the  rider,  with  his  various 
effects,  and  all  the  various  checks  and  impediments 
of  the  domestic  life,  tend,  until  the  horse  becomes 
wonted  to  them,  still  further  to  increase  its  nervous 
alarm.  To  relieve  this  state  of  contraction  is  one 
task  of  the  horseman. 

Whether  this  state  of  anxiety  and  contraction  is 
treated  properly  or  improperly  determines  in  large 
measure  the  future  temper  of  the  mount.  The  well- 
disposed  animal  will  always  be  ready  to  obey  as 
soon  as  it  understands  what  the  rider  wants  of  it. 
Moreover,  until  the  horse  begins  to  contract  itself, 
it  cannot  resist.  But  this  contraction  is  easily  de- 
tected by  the  rider,  through  his  seat,  legs,  and  hand. 
If  the  rider  is  inexperienced,  he  tries  to  counteract 
this  while  the  horse  is  in  motion.  The  abler  rider, 
on  the  other  hand,  immediately  stops  the  horse  and 
relieves  the  contraction.  When  this  is  completely 
at  an  end,  he  once  more  sends  the  animal  forward, 
properly  supple. 

319 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

This  is  Baucher's  principle.  Fillis  advocates  de- 
stroying the  contraction  while  the  horse  is  still 
moving.  But  a  rider  of  Fillis's  ability  can  do  this 
without  danger  of  confusing  his  mount,  since  his 
seat  is  so  secure  that  he  can  resist  the  defenses 
which  follow  the  contraction  without  impairing  his 
effects  of  hand  and  legs.  But  the  student  or  the 
ordinary  rider  cannot  do  this.  If  he  attempts  it,  he 
endangers  the  temper  of  the  horse  and  the  sound- 
ness of  its  limbs.  Moreover,  the  horse  gets  the  idea 
that  it  can  refuse  by  contracting;  and  when  the 
rider  applies  his  effects  in  correction,  the  horse  dis- 
covers that  it  can  resist  these  by  bounding.  All  this 
it  retains  in  its  memory  for  use  whenever  it  wishes 
to  defend  itself  against  the  rider. 

Baucher,  on  the  contrary,  always  starts  from  the 
equestrian  axiom:  The  horse's  position  of  supple- 
ness and  balance  make  possible  the  execution  of 
the  movement  asked.  This  position,  since  it  is  the 
foundation  of  every  movement,  must  be  permanent. 
To  permit  the  animal  to  conceive  the  possibility  of 
movement  when  not  occupying  this  position  is  to 
accustom  it  to  the  possibility  of  contractions,  re- 
fusals, and  bounds.  But  to  stop  the  horse  at  the 
first  sign  of  contraction,  to  restore  its  suppleness  at 
once,  and  only  then  to  carry  it  forward,  is  to  im- 
press upon  its  memory  the  impossibility  of  moving 
unless  supple  and  balanced.  To  follow  out  this 
principle  invariably  develops  with  the  progress  of 
the  instruction  a  second  nature  in  the  horse,  bene- 

320 


THE  HARD-MOUTHED  HORSE 

fits  its  morals,  and  economizes  the  wear  and  tear  of 
its  physical  mechanism.  My  own  opinion  and  prac- 
tice agree  with  those  of  Baucher. 

THE  HARD-MOUTHED  HORSE 

THE  hard-mouthed  horse  has  insensitive  bars;  and 
is,  therefore,  able  to  resist  the  bit.  Baucher  insists 
that  there  is  no  such  thing.  Fillis  admits  its  exist- 
ence, but  lays  it  to  the  lack  of  skill  of  former  riders. 
I,  in  a  way,  agree  with  them  both. 

Fillis  offsets  the  lack  of  sensibility  by  using  a 
severer  bit.  His  method  is  sound  and  practical  for 
the  man  who  must  ride  a  hard-mouthed  animal, 
yet  has  not  the  time  to  educate  his  mount.  But  the 
severe  bit  is  only  a  provisional  remedy,  since  the 
horse  will  very  soon  become  accustomed  to  this  also 
and  pull  against  it  as  before.  For  the  trainer  who 
can  spare  the  time  needed  for  a  real  cure,  Baucher's 
idea  is  the  right  one,  and  I  am  completely  of  his 
opinion. 

I  have  already  explained  that,  in  natural  con- 
formation, there  are  three  sorts  of  bars.  I  do  not, 
however,  believe  that  the  lack  of  sensibility  of  any 
sort  follows  directly  from  its  shape.  It  is,  rather, 
an  indirect  result  of  other  causes. 

Consider,  for  example,  two  different  horses,  rid- 
den by  the  same  trainer,  who  we  will  assume  is 
entirely  competent.  One  of  these  animals  is  well 
conformed,  with  a  somewhat  heavy  neck,  and 
heavy  or  fleshy  bars.  The  other  is  badly  conformed 

321 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

and  weak,  but  with  a  well-proportioned  neck  and 
good  bars.  The  first  horse,  having  ample  strength 
to  carry  its  load,  is  a  good  deal  at  its  ease.  At  the 
beginning  of  its  training,  it  will  pull.  But  the  hand 
of  the  rider  being  fixed,  the  horse  will  very  soon  find 
that  pulling  brings  no  relief  to  the  sensation  on  the 
bars.  Thereupon,  its  jaw  will  more  or  less  relax; 
and  since  the  rider's  fingers  now  also  relax,  the 
horse  finds  it  profitable  not  to  bear  against  the  bit. 
Meanwhile,  the  rider  does  not  allow  the  horse  to 
take  any  initiative,  but  pushes  it  forward  at  will, 
by  the  effects  of  his  legs.  Since  the  horse  is  well 
conformed  and  carries  the  weight  without  too 
much  effort,  it  complies  with  the  rider's  wishes 
without  objection. 

Turn  now  to  the  other  horse.  Because  of  its 
weakness  in  legs  and  spine,  this  animal  cannot  carry 
its  load  without  constraint  and  a  general  contrac- 
tion of  all  its  muscles,  so  that  its  balance  becomes 
disturbed.  It  stiffens  the  muscles  of  its  neck.  The 
contraction  spreads  from  the  neck  to  the  lower  jaw. 
The  bars  are  set.  The  horse  pulls  against  the  hand, 
and  is  called  hard-mouthed.  The  longer  the  train- 
ing continues,  the  harder-mouthed  does  it  become, 
up  to  the  time  when  the  gymnastic  exercises  have 
developed  its  strength  sufficiently  for  it  to  carry  its 
rider  and  execute  its  commands  with  ease  and  com- 
fort. Then  it  becomes  like  the  first  horse. 

I  hold  —  my  experience  compels  me  to  hold  — 
that  the  well-bred,  well-conformed  horse,  strong 

322 


CARRYING  THE  HEAD  TOO  LOW 


and  sound,  very  seldom  resists  the  rider.  But  the 
case  is  exactly  reversed  for  the  horse  that  is  weak, 
badly  conformed,  or  unsound.  It  is  for  this  obvi- 
ous reason  that  I  insist  on  the  fundamental  dif- 
ference between  the  training  of  a  horse  and  its 
education. 

Evidently,  then,  the  treatment  of  a  hard  mouth 
is  not  a  question  of  using  a  more  or  less  severe  bit. 

CARRYING  THE  HEAD  TOO  LOW 

Porter  bas  it  is  called  in  French,  when  a  horse  lets 
its  head  drop  below  the  correct  position,  either 
because  of  bad  natural  con- 
formation, or  because  of 
weakness  in  the  neck  mus- 
cles. Sometimes  the  head 
is  too  large  and  heavy  for 
the  front  hand  to  support. 
Sometimes  the  weakness  is 
in  the  loins.  Sometimes  the 
croup  is  too  high  in  relation 
to  the  withers. 

Where  the  defect  is  exces- 
sive, correction  is  very  diffi- 
cult indeed.  In  milder  cases, 
the  imperfection  in  one  part 
of  the  body  is  compensated 
for  by  over-development  in  another;  and  these  the 
esquire  will  cure  by  progressive  exercises,  espe- 
cially flexions  of  the  mouth  and  neck.  I  especially 

323 


HEAD  TOO  LOW 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

recommend  the  progression:  flexions,  followed  by 
mobilization  of  the  front  and  hind  hands  in  place. 
If  this  work  is  done  with  perseverance  and  ability, 
the  esquire  will  demonstrate  by  his  success  the 
truth  and  value  of  his  art. 

This  defect  occurs  very  often  in  horses  in  the 
United  States.  The  inbreeding  of  the  native  stock 
has  tended  to  make  the  loins  weak;  and  since  a 
horse,  in  order  to  carry  its  head  high,  has  to  shift 
some  of  its  weight  from  the  fore  to  the  hind  legs, 
weakness  of  the  loins  tends  to  prevent  this  and  so 
to  make  the  head  hang  too  low.  Moreover,  the 
theory,  widely  held  in  America,  that  the  natural 
way  for  a  horse  to  eat  is  off  the  stable  floor  as  if  he 
were  cropping  grass,  tends  to  stretch  the  muscles 
which  hold  up  the  head,  and  so  make  the  horse 
heavy  upon  the  hand. 

CARRYING  THE  HEAD  TOO  HIGH 

To  porter  la  tete  au  vent  is  to  pivot  the  skull  at  the 
atlas  region,  and  swing  it  upward  into  a  horizontal 
position.  The  head  thus  carried,  neither  the  curb 
bit  nor  the  snaffle  bears  upon  the  bars,  but  merely 
pulls  upon  the  commissure  of  the  two  lips,  pressing 
these  against  the  first  molar  teeth. 

The  cause  of  the  fault  may  be  too  severe  a  bit, 
too  short  a  curb  chain,  too  heavy-handed  a  rider,  or 
too  injudicious  and  severe  punishment,  which  has 
produced  a  moral  revolution  in  the  horse  and  made 
it  try  to  escape  the  man's  control.  In  these  cases, 

324 


CARRYING  THE  HEAD  TOO  HIGH 

the  trouble  is  only  occasional;  and  the  rider,  cor- 
recting himself,  will  correct  his  horse. 

But  if  this  wrong  carriage  is  often  repeated,  and 


HEAD  TOO  HIGH 

without  provocation  from  the  rider,  then  the  cause 
lies  in  some  defect  of  conformation,  as  long  and 
weak  loins,  or  too  straight  hocks,  which  are  some- 
times the  beginning  of  spavin  or  curb,  or  else  in 

325 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

some  local  trouble,  such  as  pain  in  the  kidneys,  a 
sore  mouth,  or  sharp  teeth.  In  the  latter  cases,  re- 
moving the  cause  will  at  once  effect  a  cure.  But  for 
weakness  of  loins  or  hocks,  the  remedy  is  progres- 
sive work  with  the  flexions  with  mobilization  of  the 
hind  hand  backward. 

A  standing  martingale  will,  of  course,  keep  the 
head  from  being  carried  too  high.  But  it  will  not 
remove  the  cause. 

PULLING  AGAINST  THE  HAND 

A  HORSE  pulls  against  the  hand  when  it  takes  the 
bit  as  a  point  of  support.  It  may  do  this  in  either  of 
two  ways.  In  one  case,  it  may  object  to  the  pressure 
of  the  bit  on  its  bars,  and  may  try  to  free  itself  of 
the  pain,  by  extending  its  neck  forward  with  mus- 
cles contracted,  taking  a  point  of  support,  and  pull- 
ing with  all  its  might.  The  corrective  for  this  is  a 
milder  bit,  and  flexions  of  the  mouth  and  neck.  I 
say,  mouth  and  neck,  because  sometimes  the  bars  are 
the  reason  for  the  pulling,  and  sometimes  the  neck, 
so  that  either  may  be  the  cause  and  either  the  effect. 
In  the  other  case,  the  cause  is  a  bad  conformation 
which  was  not  corrected  at  the  beginning  of  the 
education  when  the  horse  was  young.  A  badly 
shaped  neck,  a  few  saccades  of  the  reins  in  the  hands 
of  an  unskillful  rider,  and  the  horse  has  so  vivid  a 
remembrance  that  it  bears  against  the  hand  to 
avoid  flexing  its  neck  and  opening  its  mouth.  Some- 
times, too,  if  the  fore  legs  are  weak,  the  animal 

326 


PULLING  AGAINST  THE  HAND 

stiffens  its  neck  and  pulls  against  the  rider's  hand 
for  the  sake  of  supporting  limbs  in  which  it  has  no 
confidence.  Or,  again,  the  weak  point  is  in  the  loins, 
or  the  coupling;  and  because  the  region  where  the 
fore  and  hind  hands  join  is  not  strong  enough  to 
permit  the  horse's  supporting  himself  with  the  loins, 
he  keeps  himself  upon  the  hand  by  pulling  against 
the  bit. 

Some  authors  have  maintained  that  pulling  on 
the  hand  is  the  result  of  bad  conformation  of  the 
bars.  If  this  were  the  case,  it  should  always  be  pos- 
sible to  find  a  bit  of  such  a  form  that  it  will  com- 
pensate for  this  defect.  I,  however,  agree  with 
Baucher's  opinion  that  the  trouble  lies  in  a  general 
weakness  or  bad  conformation  of  the  body,  which 
makes  it  difficult  for  the  horse  to  place  itself  in- 
stinctively, or  be  placed  by  the  rider,  in  the  correct 
position  of  assemblage.  Since,  then,  the  horse  is 
wrongly  set,  it  tries  to  support  itself  by  pulling 
against  the  hand. 

In  every  instance,  therefore,  the  proper  way  to 
correct  the  fault  is  to  develop  the  animal's  strength 
by  progressive  gymnastics  and  by  good  and  ample 
food,  meanwhile,  freeing  the  contractions  of  the 
mouth  and  neck  by  means  of  flexions,  which  will 
not  only  supple  these  parts,  but  will  besides  develop 
their  strength  and  conformation.  If  the  seat  of  the 
difficulty  is  in  the  loins,  the  coupling,  or  the  hind 
legs,  the  proper  treatment  is  through  backing  and' 
the  reversed  pirouette,  executed  as  a  moderate  and 

327 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

progressive  gymnastic  until  the  requisite  strength 
is  attained. 

BEATING  AGAINST  THE  HAND 

NOTHING  is  more  uncomfortable  on  horseback  than 
a  mount  which,  at  the  slightest  effect  of  bit  or  snaf- 
fle on  its  bars,  refuses  to  obey,  and  to  avoid  the 
contact  shakes  its  head  in  every  direction,  or,  as 
the  French  call  it,  battre  a  la  main. 

There  are  several  reasons  for  this  defect.  Most 
generally,  it  is  due  to  some  rider's  too  severe  hand 
on  bars  that  are  too  sharp,  to  a  bridle  wrongly  ad- 
justed to  the  horse's  mouth,  to  too  tight  a  curb 
chain,  or  to  some  previous  saccades  against  sensi- 
tive bars.  All  these  result  from  ignorance  on  the 
part  of  the  rider  or  of  the  caretaker.  They  are  cor- 
rected by  the  rider's  greater  experience,  better 
instruction  in  horsemanship,  a  change  in  the  bit,  or, 
mechanically,  by  a  standing  martingale. 

Very  often,  too,  the  beating  against  the  hand  is 
the  consequence  of  some  defect  of  conformation, 
some  wound  or  lameness.  The  horse's  head  and 
neck  are  like  the  balancing  pole  of  the  rope  dancer; 
and  if  there  is  something  wrong  with  the  conforma- 
tion of  the  backbone  or  its  spine,  some  trouble  with 
the  kidneys,  the  coupling,  or  the  pelvis,  if  the  mus- 
cles of  the  back  have  become  sore  under  the  saddle, 
the  horse  may,  in  consequence,  shake  its  head.  But 
the  cause  will  be  in  some  derangement  of  the  animal 
mechanism. 

328 


CHAMPING  THE  BIT 

Still  a  third  cause  is  unsoundness  of  the  hocks, 
curb,  and  spavin.  For  these  a  veterinarian  will 
have  to  be  consulted.  In  general,  when  everything 
about  the  horse  is  all  right,  it  will  take  the  contact 
when  sent  against  the  bit.  But  if  anything  is  wrong, 
it  will  refuse  contact  and  beat  against  the  rider's 
hand. 

CHAMPING  THE  BIT 

THUS  Newcastle  translates  begayer,  meaning  a 
stammering  or  stuttering  movement  of  the  horse's 
lips  or  teeth. 

The  properly  educated  horse  takes  the  contact  of 
the  bit,  and  at  the  contact  opens  its  mouth  by  con- 
tracting the  digastrius  muscle.  At  the  cessation  of 
the  contact,  the  mouth  closes  again  by  the  action  of 
the  temporalis.  Early  in  its  education,  the  horse 
opens  and  shuts  its  mouth  quickly  and  at  its  own 
will;  not  calmly  and  precisely.  It  lips,  stutters,  and 
stammers.  One  hears  easily  the  sound  made  by  the 
snaffle,  which  is  first  lifted  by  the  tongue  and  then 
dropped  against  the  bit.  While  this  is  pardonable 
in  a  horse  at  the  beginning  of  its  training,  it  is  a 
serious  defect  for  the  more  advanced  animal,  and 
should  be  corrected  as  soon  as  possible,  before  the 
habit  becomes  fixed.  Otherwise,  it  may  become  the 
cause  of  further  refusals  of  obedience  from  mouth, 
neck,  or  the  entire  organism. 

It  is  certain  that  the  horse  which  lips,  stutters,  or 
stammers  has  already  developed  a  mouth  more 

329 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

sensitive  than  before  the  training  began.  The  ig- 
norant, therefore,  whose  number  is  legion,  hearing 
the  noise,  think  that  the  flexion  of  the  mouth  is 
complete.  This  is  a  mistake.  The  sound  really 
comes  from  the  mouthpiece  of  the  Liverpool  bit 
sliding  on  the  shaft  of  the  branches. 

I  object,  therefore,  to  this  sort  of  bit  for  the  sad- 
dle horse.  The  effect  on  the  bars  is  not  sufficiently 
precise.  The  shaft,  by  allowing  the  mouthpiece  to 
slide  on  the  branches,  makes  it  possible  for  the 
cannon  to  transmit  the  pressure  from  the  hand 
from  below  upward  along  the  bars,  and  in  conse- 
quence to  press  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  bars 
against  the  first  molars.  When  the  rider's  hand  is 
rigid,  the  mouthpiece  stays  pressed  against  these 
teeth.  When  the  hand  cedes,  the  mouthpiece  drops. 
At  the  next  effect  of  the  hand,  it  again  slides  up. 
Thus  it  is  the  mouthpiece  only  which  responds  to 
the  pressure  of  the  hand,  not  the  lower  jaw,  though 
this  yielding  of  the  lower  jaw  is  the  sine  qua  non  of 
the  flexions  of  the  mouth  and  neck. 

The  horse,  properly  trained  with  snaffle  and  curb, 
raises  its  tongue  very  lightly  as  it  opens  its  mouth, 
finds  the  snaffle  with  its  tongue  and  lifts  this.  As 
the  effect  of  the  hand  ceases,  the  tongue  returns  to 
its  normal  position,  and  the  snaffle  falls  against  the 
mouthpiece  of  the  bit  and  makes  the  silvery  note 
so  precious  to  the  rider.  But  with  the  Liverpool  bit, 
it  is  the  bit  itself  which  gives  the  sound.  The  rea- 
soned and  the  scientific  equitation  recognize  flex- 

330 


STAMMERING 

ions  of  the  neck  only  as  they  are  dependent  upon 
flexions  of  the  lower  jaw. 

Some  horses,  nervous  and  excitable  by  nature, 
sometimes  champ  their  bits  because  of  their  own 
energy  and  impatience.  This  is  not  so  much  a  fault 
as  a  proof  of  energy,  which  properly  directed  be- 
comes one  of  the  qualities  of  a  good  horse. 

STAMMERING 

STAMMERING  is  a  contortion  of  the  horse's  mouth 
which  occurs  when  the  rider's  hand  asks  the  direct 
flexion.  There  should  be  a  feeling  of  square  contact 
before  the  flexion,  which,  as  the  mouth  opens, 
should  pass  into  a  sort  of  honeyed  sensation  in  the 
rider's  fingers.  This  should  be  exactly  square  and 
equal.  If,  however,  one  of  the  bars  does  not  cede 
precisely  like  the  other,  but  holds  the  contact  when 
the  other  has  yielded  completely,  the  horse  is  said 
to  stammer.  The  same  word  is  used,  also,  when  the 
horse  grinds,  gnashes,  cracks,  snaps,  or  slaps  its 
teeth. 

The  horse's  nervousness,  irritability,  or  impa- 
tience is  what  makes  it  casser  la  noisette;  and  the 
correction  is  by  obtaining  the  complete  direct  flex- 
ion of  the  lower  jaw.  A  young  horse,  at  the  begin- 
ning of  its  education,  is  pretty  likely  to  stammer, 
and  must  be  excused.  But  the  trainer  must  take 
care  that  the  stammering  does  not  become  a  habit, 
since,  when  once  fixed,  it  is  difficult  to  cure. 

On  the  other  hand,  this  cracking  of  the  teeth 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

together  has  been  employed  successfully  by  the  au- 
thor to  cure  the  fault  of  "making  forces,"  discussed 
just  below,  and  also  to  correct  the  habit  of  putting 
the  tongue  over  the  bit.  In  either  case,  the  horse 
will  bite  its  tongue,  and  having  done  this  two  or 
three  times,  will  desist  forever.  Such  bites  of  the 
tongue  are  not  serious.  A  little  salt  or  sugar,  helped 
by  the  saliva,  will  heal  the  wound  in  a  day  or  two. 
The  corrective  of  stammering  is  to  complete 
the  progressive  work  of  the  flexions.  The  direct 
flexion  will  always  reestablish  calm  in  the  general 
organism. 

FAIRE  DES  FORCES 

A  HORSE  is  said  to  "make  forces "  when  it  takes  a 
wrong  position  of  the  lower  jaw  and  resists  the 
effects  of  the  rider's  hand.  This  may  take  the  form 
of  shutting  the  lower  jaw  against  the  upper  at  the 
effect  of  the  bit,  of  opening  the  mouth  too  wide  and 
keeping  it  thus,  or  of  carrying  the  jaw  to  the  right 
or  left  at  the  solicitation  of  snaffle  or  bit  and  hold- 
ing it  there  against  the  effect  of  the  rider's  hand. 

The  fault  is  generally  the  result  of  bad  conforma- 
tion of  the  hind  legs  or  of  weakness  of  the  loins.  In 
a  well-conformed  animal,  it  arises  from  incorrect, 
too  severe,  or  badly  adjusted  bits,  from  roughness 
of  hand  and  irregular  gaits,  and  sometimes  from  too 
sharp  teeth  on  one  side  of  the  mouth.  In  this  latter 
case,  the  only  remedy  is  to  have  the  teeth  filed  by 
a  dentist. 

332 


FAIRE  DES  FORCES 

If  the  trouble  comes  from  weakness  of  the  loins, 
the  corrective  is  progressive  exercise  of  the  loin  or 
ilio-spinalis  muscles  by  such  movements  as  reversed 
pirouettes,  backing,  and  standing ;  but  these  are  not 
always  effective. 

A  horse  which  "  makes  forces "  is  not  agreeable 
to  ride  until  it  is  cured  of  the  failing,  because  of  the 
uncertainty  of  control,  since  it  may,  at  the  slightest 
occasion  for  bad  will  or  fear  of  objects,  resist  and 
refuse  to  obey  the  rider's  effects.  Very  generally, 
too,  the  fault  is  accompanied  by  some  other  dif- 
ficulty with  the  mouth,  and  the  horse  lolls  with  its 
tongue,  puts  its  tongue  over  the  bit,  or  pulls  its 
tongue  back  behind  the  bit  and  carries  it  rolled  into 
a  ball. 

Various  bits  have  been  invented  to  remedy  these 
tricks.  Fillis  recommends  a  bit  with  a  palette  to 
come  in  the  middle  of  the  free  portion  of  the  tongue. 
In  a  class  for  ladies'  saddle  horses  at  the  National 
Horse  Show  in  New  York  City,  among  twenty-five 
horses,  I  found  five  with  rings  in  their  mouths, 
fastened  with  strings  to  the  bits.  The  tongue  passed 
through  the  ring,  and  of  course  had  to  stay  there. 

I  have,  myself,  had  a  number  of  horses  which 
"made  forces";  and  I  have  tried  every  sort  of  bit. 
No  bit  has  been  a  complete  corrective.  Yet  I  have 
cured  every  case  but  one,  a  thoroughbred  steeple- 
chaser named  "Minstrel,"  a  very  powerful  animal, 
whose  bars  were  too  sharp,  and  so  near  together 
that  there  was  insufficient  room  for  the  tongue. 

333 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

For  this  animal,  I  tried  a  straight  bit,  and  one  cov- 
ered with  linen.  I  also  tried  using  the  snaffle  only. 
But  nothing  worked.  The  other  horses  I  continued 
to  ride,  after  giving  them  flexions  on  foot.  As  soon 
as  they  "made  forces/'  I  stopped  them  and  flexed 
again. 

One  horse  was  so  stubborn  that  I  was  in  despair, 
until  a  gentleman  came  to  see  me,  riding  a  horse 
that  was  "  cracking  nuts."  Hearing  the  horse  clack 
its  teeth  against  one  another,  gave  me  the  idea  of 
training  my  subject  to  do  the  same.  Thereafter, 
it  stopped  "making  forces."  But,  unfortunately, 
cassant  la  noisette  is  quite  an  annoyance,  since  the 
horse  may  bite  its  tongue  and  rear.  Nevertheless, 
the  fact  remains  that  if  a  horse  " cracks  the  nut" 
it  cannot  "make  forces." 

However,  in  any  ordinary  case,  my  advice  is  to 
remedy  the  fault  of  the  mouth  by  flexions  of  the 
mouth  and  neck,  at  first  standing  still,  and  after- 
wards at  the  walk. 

BOLTING  AND  RUNNING  AWAY 

WHEN  the  forward  drive  which  the  horse's  hind  legs 
give  to  the  entire  body,  instead  of  being  directed  by 
the  rider's  legs,  is  under  the  control  of  the  horse's 
will,  it  is  possible  for  the  animal,  impelled  by  fear, 
to  bolt,  and  to  run  at  full  speed  against  walls  or 
other  riders,  into  fire  or  trains,  over  precipices.  All 
sensibility  to  the  rider's  effects  has  disappeared, 
and  only  fatigue  can  reestablish  control. 

334 


BOLTING  AND  RUNNING  AWAY 

It  is,  therefore,  very  nearly  impossible  to  stop  a 
horse  when  once  the  bolt  is  under  way,  though  it  is 
comparatively  easy  to  prevent  his  entrance  into 
the  state,  except  where  the  habit  is  already  formed 
as  the  consequence  of  defective  eyesight  or  the 
memory  of  pains  from  over-hard  whippings  or  the 


RUNNING  AWAY 

too  severe  use  of  sharp  spurs.  One  should,  then, 
endeavor  to  find  the  reason  for  the  bolting,  and 
remove  this.  This  done,  the  fault  will  sometimes 
disappear. 

When  a  horse  is  bolting,  its  vertebral  column 
from  atlas  to  coupling  becomes  stiff.  The  neck  is 
rigid.  The  bit  is  without  effect.  It  is  sometimes 
possible,  under  these  conditions,  to  release  the  con- 
traction of  the  neck  by  lifting  the  horse's  head,  but 
not  so  high  that  it  cannot  see  out  in  front,  and  saw- 
ing with  the  snafHe  rein.  But  if  the  rider  feels  that 

335 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

every  sort  of  control  is  lost,  the  only  thing  for  him 
to  do  is  to  be  very  calm,  make  sure  of  his  seat,  and 
separating  the  reins  in  his  two  hands,  try  to  direct 
the  animal  in  its  mad  speed.  When,  if  it  be  possible, 
the  horse  has  run  enough  to  tire  itself,  the  rider 
should  try  to  quiet  it  by  his  voice,  and  by  sawing 
with  the  reins,  to  make  it  take  the  trot  and  finally 
the  walk.  To  stop  the  horse  completely  is  very 
difficult,  the  impulsion  being  still  powerful. 

If  a  rider,  himself  well  mounted,  has  occasion  to 
stop  a  bolting  horse,  the  best  method  is  to  place 
himself  at  the  left  side  of  the  line  on  which  the 
animal  seems  to  be  running,  and  to  gallop  at  a  good 
speed  in  the  same  direction.  As  the  bolting  horse 
comes  alongside,  the  rescuer  increases  his  speed, 
and  seizing,  with  his  right  hand,  the  reins  of  the 
frightened  creature  close  up  to  the  mouth,  gallops 
for  some  steps  beside  it.  Having  next  tested  his 
control  over  his  own  mount,  he  tries,  by  quick  jerks 
of  his  right  hand,  to  reduce  the  run,  first  to  a  gallop, 
then  to  a  trot,  and  finally  to  a  walk,  while  with  his 
left  hand  he  checks  correspondingly  his  own  horse. 
But,  of  course,  any  such  performance  as  this  in- 
volves circumstances  and  conditions  which  it  is 
impossible  to  anticipate  in  print. 

In  order  to  correct  a  horse  that  has  bolted  several 
times,  put  it  in  a  large  field  of  newly  ploughed 
ground  or  on  a  long  sandy  beach,  and  run  it  till  it  is 
tired.  Then  make  it  run  again.  But  though  this 
device  will  work,  my  counsel  is,  find  the  reason  for 

336 


SAWING  WITH  THE  SNAFFLE 

the  bolting  and  remove  that.  The  cure  will  then  go 
deeper  and  be  more  permanent. 

Running  away  is  not  quite  the  same  thing  as 
bolting.  It  is  rather  the  result  of  the  habit  of  getting 
out  of  control.  The  horse  bolts  because  of  too  se- 
vere correction,  defective  eyesight,  too  tight  a  curb 
chain,  too  severe  jerks  upon  the  mouth,  sore  bars, 
a  sore  tooth,  a  bit  set  too  high  and  cutting  the  com- 
missure of  the  lips,  the  continual  pricking  of  the 
spurs  of  a  rider  without  seat.  The  bolt  is  repeated, 
until  by  and  by  habit  and  memory  suggest  the 
possibility  of  resisting  in  the  same  way  all  demands 
of  the  rider  which  are  unpleasant  to  the  horse.  The 
horse  thereupon  becomes  a  runaway.  The  French 
express  this  desperate  action  by  prend  le  mors  aux 
dents,  s'emporter,  and  s'emballer. 

Naturally,  the  cure  for  running  away  is  to  dis- 
cover the  cause  of  the  original  bolting  from  which 
it  developed,  and  to  remove  that.  The  scientific 
equitation  does  not  recognize  the  utility  of  martin- 
gales and  other  straps.  It  depends  solely  on  pro- 
gressive education,  holding  that,  after  a  horse  is 
properly  suppled,  it  is  impossible  for  it  to  run  away 
without  giving  to  its  rider  the  opportunity  to  pre- 
vent the  first  sign  of  revolt,  of  which  the  running 
away  is  the  sequel. 

SAWING  WITH  THE  SNAFFLE 

IT  sometimes  happens  that  a  young  horse  not  com- 
pletely trained,  or  an  older  animal  surprised  by  a 

337 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

sudden  sight  or  sound,  or  either  when  it  suffers 
from  lack  of  exercise,  will  escape  contact  with  the 
bit;  and  so,  getting  out  of  control,  will  travel  faster 
than  the  rider  desires,  and  will  refuse  to  moderate 
its  speed  at  the  effects  of  the  bit.  Usually  in  such  a 
case,  the  animal  carries  its  head  very  low;  and  if  it 
flexes  its  neck,  does  this  in  such  wise  as  to  bring  the 
chin  near  the  chest,  so  that  the  more  the  rider  pulls 
against  the  bit,  the  more  is  the  chin  drawn  against 
the  chest.  This  position  prevents  the  action  of  the 
bit,  and  the  horse  goes  faster  and  faster. 

The  only  corrective  is  to  saw  with  the  snaffle. 
The  rider,  without  losing  any  time,  abandons  the 
reins  of  the  bit,  and  takes  a  snaffle  rein  in  each  hand, 
holding  it  quite  short.  He  then  raises  his  hands,  and 
pulls  forcibly,  first  on  One  rein  and  then  on  the 
other,  until  the  horse  comes  once  more  under  his 
control. 

The  reason  is  simple.  With  its  head  down  and  its 
neck  contracted,  the  animal  has  the  point  (Tappui 
which  makes  resistance  possible.  The  rider,  by 
paising  the  head,  releases  the  contraction  of  the 
neck,  and  thus  destroys  the  center  of  refusal.  The 
feeling  on  the  horse's  mouth  of  the  mild  effect  of 
the  snaffle,  rapidly  repeated,  keeps  the  horse  from 
taking  the  position  of  resistance. 

It  is  an  equestrian  axiom  that  a  horse,  in  order  to 
resist  its  rider,  must  begin  by  contracting  unduly 
the  neck  muscles  which  are  the  locomotors  of  the 
fore  hand.  The  only  way  to  free  this  contraction  is 

338 


HEAD  TO  HAUNCH 

by  sawing  with  the  snaffle.  But  if  the  contraction 
of  the  neck  continues,  the  horse  will  escape  from 
the  rider's  control,  since,  in  this  condition,  his  effects 
are  not  sufficiently  powerful  to  decide  its  conduct. 

HEAD  TO  HAUNCH 

Tele  a  queue,  as  the  French  call  it,  is  a  defense  of 
the  horse  in  which  the  animal  bends  its  spine  side- 


wmf&^i 

THE  HEAD  TO  CROUP 

wise  to  form  a  half-circle  of  its  body,  and  thus  bring 
the  two  ends  near  together.  A  horse  sometimes 
takes  this  position  when  stung  on  a  hind  leg  by  a 
fly.  It  bends  its  neck  to  reach  the  insect  with  its 
teeth,  and  at  the  same  time,  to  make  this  easier  and 
to  shorten  the  distance,  it  turns  its  haunches  as  far 
as  possible  to  the  same  side.  This,  however,  is  only 
occasional,  and  is  not  in  any  wise  a  defense. 

339 


THE  DEFENSES  OP  THE  HORSE 

As  a  defense,  the  horse  turns  "  head  to  haunches  " 
very  suddenly;  and  is  likely,  therefore,  to  mix  its 
legs,  and  to  fall  to  the  side  opposite  to  that  to  which 
it  turns.  In  a  manege,  this  need  not  be  especially 
dangerous.  But  out  of  doors  on  a  hard  road,  the  re- 
sult may  be  a  serious  injury  both  to  rider  and  horse. 

Evidently,  there  is  some  reason  for  this  sudden 
movement  of  the  horse;  and  it  is  for  the  rider  to  dis- 
cover this  and  remedy  it.  Since,  then,  each  individ- 
ual animal  has  one  side  or  the  other  to  which  the 
bend  is  always  made,  the  corrective  is  to  hold  the 
reins  in  both  hands,  with  the  pair  on  the  side  away 
from  the  bend  held  shorter  than  the  other.  Thus, 
if  the  horse  swings  head  to  haunches  on  the  left,  the 
right  reins  are  shortened  and  the  rider's  right  leg  is 
brought  nearer  to  the  horse's  flank.  In  this  posi- 
tion, the  rider  does  not  wait  for  the  horse  to  begin 
its  defense.  He  prevents  it  at  the  start  by  flexing 
sharply  the  horse's  neck  to  the  right  and  down- 
ward, while  with  his  right  leg  he  pushes  the  haunches 
to  the  left.  This  action  turns  the  horse  to  the  right, 
in  the  opposite  direction  to  its  defense.  In  making 
this  turn  to  the  right,  the  rider  should  execute  only 
the  ordinary  change  of  direction.  He  should  not 
have  the  horse  perform  "head  and  haunches  to  the 
right." 

If  this  work  is  being  done  in  a  manege,  the  horse 
should  always  be  at  the  hand  opposite  to  the  side 
toward  which  it  makes  the  defense.  If,  for  example, 
as  in  the  case  above,  the  bend  is  toward  the  left,  the 

340 


HEAD  TO  HAUNCH 

riding  is  done  with  the  right  side  toward  the  center 
of  the  ring.  On  road,  street,  bridle  path,  or  track, 
unless  one  keeps  in  the  middle,  the  horse  may  go  on 
to  the  sidewalk  and  injure  a  passer-by.  But  by 
riding  at  the  middle  of  the  road,  one  keeps  himself 
clear  of  other  riders  and  of  carriages  which  might 
hurt  him  in  case  of  a  fall. 

I  have  myself  tried  various  correctives  for  head 
to  haunches.  None  of  them  have  satisfied  me.  It 
seems  to  me  that  the  trouble  is  the  result  of  rheu- 
matic pains  in  the  side  of  the  back,  which  appear 
from  time  to  time,  suddenly.  I  have  observed  that 
certain  horses  which  have  this  failing  will  go 
straight  for  days,  sometimes  for  months,  and  then 
once  more,  without  the  slightest  provocation,  bend 
tete  a  queue.  Possibly  we  are  dealing  here  with  the 
same  affection  which  the  doctors  call  coup  de  fouet, 
which  is  a  sudden  attack  of  lumbago  or  something 
similar.  Evidently,  in  such  a  case,  a  veterinary's 
care  is  indicated. 

Where  head  to  haunches  is  a  willful  defense,  it  is 
best  to  call  in  the  services  of  a  professional  rider, 
letting  him  know  to  which  side  the  turn  is  made. 
Some  masters  advocate  using  a  standing  short  rein, 
fastened  at  the  stirrup  strap,  on  the  side  opposite  to 
the  twist.  I  am  against  such  a  proceeding;  be- 
cause, although  the  fixed  rein  will  undoubtedly  pre- 
vent the  defense,  it  will  at  the  same  time  hinder  the 
horse  from  turning  its  head  to  the  opposite  side  for 
the  purpose  of  seeing  and  avoiding  obstacles  in  the 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

road.  The  sure  result  is  a  fall  or  other  accident. 
When  I  am  correcting  any  defense  of  a  horse,  I  like 
to  be  as  free  as  possible  and  alone  with  the  animal. 

RESTIVENESS 

A  RESTIVE  horse  refuses  obedience,  but  under  cer- 
tain conditions  and  circumstances.  The  disorder  is, 
then,  moral;  but  it  is  not  permanent,  nor  does  it  oc- 
cur always  for  the  same  reason. 

A  restive  horse  will,  for  example,  carry  its  rider 
most  obediently  for  a  certain  distance.  And  then, 
suddenly,  without  provocation,  will  insist  on  going 
down  some  other  road.  It  will  persist  in  turning  to 
one  side,  and  no  effect  of  rein  or  spurs  will  make  it 
turn  to  the  other.  Or,  again,  the  horse  will  come  to 
a  stop  with  its  head  in  a  corner  of  the  manege,  and 
no  power  will  make  it  budge.  Yet  at  another  time 
the  horse  will  pass  the  spot  where  it  was  restive  be- 
fore without  a  sign  of  rebellion.  In  a  word,  the 
horse's  restiveness  is  intermittent,  so  that  very 
many  horsemen  attribute  the  condition  to  a  state 
of  the  horse's  own  will. 

But  while  it  is  entirely  reasonable  to  suppose  that 
restiveness  in  a  horse  is  predominantly  a  matter  of 
will,  this  volitional  state  must  itself  have  had  a  be- 
ginning at  some  point  where  the  possibility  of  dis- 
obeying first  took  root  and  started  to  grow  into  a 
habit. 

Consider  the  case  of  a  young  horse,  without 
training,  which  knows  nothing  of  the  meaning  of 

342 


RESTIVENESS 

the  effects  of  its  rider's  hands  and  legs.  The 
trainer,  at  the  beginning  of  the  horse's  education, 
asks  a  movement  perfectly  easy  to  perform.  The 
horse  fails  to  understand  what  is  wanted  of  him, 


PUNISHING  A  RESTIVE  HORSE 

refuses,  and  is  brutally  whipped.  But  the  whipping 
does  not  make  him  understand  anything  that  he 
did  not  know  before.  So  he  again  refuses;  and  is 
again  whipped.  Thereupon  the  trainer  passes  to 
another  movement.  But  the  punishment  is  en- 
graved on  the  animal's  memory.  What  is  more, 

343 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

this  procedure  has  taught  the  horse  that  it  can  re- 
fuse or  obey  as  it  pleases.  Farther  along  in  its  ed- 
ucation, the  horse  again  becomes  restive.  The 
rider  follows  the  same  course  as  before ;  and  getting 
no  better  result  than  before,  again  passes  over  the 
movement  and  takes  up  another.  The  horse  is  con- 
firmed in  the  idea  that  it  can  obey  or  not  obey  as  it 
chooses.  Do  we  not  find  exactly  the  same  restive- 
ness  in  a  spoiled  child?  In  the  same  way,  the  habit 
of  refusal  spoils  the  horse.  It  becomes  capricious. 
When  it  chooses,  it  obeys.  When  it  does  not  choose, 
it  disobeys.  In  short,  it  is  restive. 

Punishment,  in  such  a  case,  will  have  no  result. 
When  the  horse  feels  that  the  man  who  happens  to 
be  riding  him  is  strong  enough  to  fight  and  compel 
obedience,  the  horse  will  obey.  But  as  soon  as  an- 
other rider  is  on  its  back,  the  horse  will  again  try 
what  it  can  do. 

I  have  had  a  great  many  horses  sent  me  to  be 
cured  of  restiveness,  and  I  have  never  been  unsuc- 
cessful. My  only  method  is  to  start  the  training  all 
over  again  from  the  beginning,  as  if  the  animal  were 
absolutely  green.  Very  soon,  I  reach  the  place  where 
the  education  has  been  slighted.  I  insist  on  the 
neglected  movement;  and  confirm  the  habit  of  obe- 
dience to  the  special  effects  which  secure  this,  until 
the  animal  has  learned  to  obey  without  fear  of 
punishment.  By  degrees,  he  learns  that  he  is 
better  off  to  obey  me  than  to  be  restive  and  be 
punished. 

344 


BOUNDING 

The  horse's  contrariness  is  now  removed.  But 
how  did  it  arise  in  the  first  place?  By  the  educa- 
tion at  the  hands  of  the  first  trainer,  who  allowed 
the  horse  to  refuse  to  execute  a  movement  or  submit 
to  an  effect  which  it  did  not  understand.  If  the 
trainer  had  insisted  patiently  and  gently  on  the 
horse's  learning  that  troublesome  effect,  he  would, 
at  the  very  beginning,  have  disposed  the  horse's 
will  in  his  favor,  and  instilled  the  habit  of  obe- 
dience. But  by  punishing  the  horse  for  not  under- 
standing some  effect,  the  trainer  has  impressed 
upon  its  will  and  memory  the  possibility  of  success- 
ful revolt.  The  animal  knows  that  it  has  had  the 
best  of  the  man. 

The  error  really  lies  in  the  haste  with  which  mas- 
ters and  public  are  trying  to  complete  the  educa- 
tion of  a  horse.  One  who  takes  a  reasonable  time 
and  follows  without  hurrying  the  sequence  of  the 
training  should  never  have  occasion  to  induce  any 
restiveness.  Either  the  horse  knows  or  does  not 
know  what  the  man's  effects  indicate.  If  it  knows 
and  refuses,  it  must  be  punished.  But  if  it  does  not 
know,  it  is  to  be  taught.  To  educate  the  horse  to 
understand  the  rider's  effects  is  to  make  it  superior 
to  other  horses  and  more  intelligent,  and  is  the 
surest  means  toward  success. 

BOUNDING 

A  BOUNDING  horse  springs  straight  up  in  the  air 
from  all  four  legs,  and  comes  down  again  on  the 

345 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

same  spot.  The  movement,  therefore,  cannot  be 
executed  if  the  horse  is  already  in  motion. 

A  jump  of  this  sort  is  especially  disconcerting  to 
an  inexperienced  rider,  since,  like  any  movement 
which  does  not  carry  the  animal  forward,  it  tends 
to  a  considerable  derangement  of  the  seat.  Often- 
times, the  bound  arises  from  nothing  more  than  ex- 
uberance of  life  or  lack  of  exercise ;  and  in  this  case, 
plenty  of  hard  work  will  correct  the  fault.  Often, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  horse  bounds  in  order  to  free 
himself  from  the  rider's  weight.  In  this  case,  the 
bounding  becomes  a  defense. 

The  rider  should,  then,  study  the  position  taken 
by  the  horse's  head  and  neck  shortly  before  and 
during  the  bound.  He  will  observe  that  the  mouth 
has  closed  and  is  rigid,  and  that  the  neck  is 
stretched  forward  and  stiff.  The  bound  itself  in- 
volves a  contraction  of  the  muscles  which  lie  along 
the  spine,  and  a  projection  upward  of  the  body  by 
the  action  of  the  hocks  and  knees. 

As  soon,  therefore,  as  the  rider  feels  by  his  seat 
that  the  horse's  spine  is  becoming  rigid,  he  should 
separate  the  two  snaffle  reins,  and  then,  by  raising 
one  hand  after  the  other  alternately,  quite  high,  he 
should  lift  the  horse's  head,  and  with  it  the  neck. 
The  head  and  neck,  being  up,  cannot  be  contracted 
preliminary  to  the  bound.  The  rider  should  then 
turn  the  horse  sharply,  let  us  say  to  the  right,  by 
the  tension  of  the  right  rein  and  the  effect  of  his 
right  leg;  and  immediately  afterwards,  to  the  left 

346 


THE  BUCK-JUMP 


by  the  reversed  effects.  By  doing  this  several  times 
alternately,  he  will  make  it  impossible  for  the  horse 
to  place  all  four  feet  at  the  same  time  on  the  ground. 
The  horse  is,  therefore,  unable  to  bound ;  and  after 
he  has  tried  several  times  and  failed,  he  will  cease  to 
try. 

THE  BUCK-JUMP 

A  YOUNG  horse,  not  yet  wonted  to  the  pressure  of 
the  girths  and  the  weight  of  the  rider  on  its  back,  is 
likely  to  stiffen  its  spine, 
and  at  the  same  time  to 
rear  slightly  with  its  front 
legs.  In  this  position,  the 
hind  legs  tend  to  send  the 
body  forward.  But  since 
the  spine  is  everywhere 
rigid,  the  two  hind  legs 
cannot  function  independ- 
ently. Both,  therefore,  act 
together  to  throw  the  croup 
violently  up.  Thus  the 
movement  becomes  a  sort 
of  kick,  in  which,  how- 
ever, the  hind  legs  do  not  extend  backward.  Follow- 
ing this,  the  front  legs  return  to  the  ground  reach- 
ing forward.  The  hind  legs  follow;  and  immediately 
the  buck- jump  is  repeated.  Meanwhile,  the  head  is 
held  low  and  the  neck  stiff,  in  order  to  resist  the 
effect  of  the  rider's  hand;  since,  if  the  head  were  up 

347 


THE  BUCK-JUMP 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

and  the  mouth  and  neck  relaxed,  the  spine  also 
would  be  freed,  and  the  buck-jump  could  not  be 
executed. 

Some  horses,  already  trained,  when  they  have 
their  girths  too  tight  will  buck- jump.  But,  in  gen- 
eral, the  movement  is  consequent  to  some  provoca- 
tion, and  employed  by  the  horse  as  a  defense.  Not 
infrequently,  a  horse,  having  once  freed  its  back 
from  its  rider's  weight,  will  continue  to  practice 
this  defense  until  it  develops  the  habit. 

Whether  the  buck- jump  be  sporadic  or  the  re- 
sult of  a  fixed  habit,  the  reason  is  always  the  same 
—  the  horse  refuses  to  go  forward.  It  makes  no 
difference  what  the  reason  is,  whether  the  girths 
are  too  tight  or  whether  the  weight  of  the  rider  is 
greater  than  that  to  which  the  horse  is  accustomed, 
the  result  is  the  same. 

The  remedy  is  to  see  that  the  girths  are  not  too 
tight,  and  to  accustom  the  horse  to  the  rider's 
weight.  But  when  the  horse  begins  the  defense,  the 
rider  should  at  once  lift  its  head  as  high  as  possible. 
In  this  position  the  horse  can  raise  its  front  legs, 
but  not  its  hind  ones,  which  remain  on  the  ground. 
If,  then,  the  rider  is  sufficiently  sure  of  himself,  he 
should  make  the  horse  back.  This  will  prevent 
the  rigidity  of  the  coupling,  and  the  hind  legs  will 
act  in  alternation.  The  result  will  be  the  walk  or 
the  trot,  but  not  the  buck-jump. 

The  effect  of  too  tight  a  girth  is  to  inhibit  the  ac- 
tion of  the  great  pectoral  muscles,  so  that  these  do 

348 


THE  HORSE  WHICH  BURIES  ITSELF 

not  draw  the  hind  legs  forward  as  the  front  legs  are 
extended.  From  these,  the  stiffness  is  commu- 
nicated to  the  ilio-spinalis,  which,  stimulated  by  the 
weight  of  the  rider,  contracts  and  paralyzes  the 
articulation  of  the  coupling.  This,  in  its  turn,  pre- 
vents the  separate  action  of  the  hind  legs.  These,  as 
a  result,  act  together  to  raise  the  hind  hand,  ex- 
tended and  stiff. 

The  remedy,  therefore,  is  to  keep  the  horse  mov- 
ing his  legs  alternately,  and  so'moving  forward.  If  all 
four  limbs  are  acting  to  send  the  body  forward,  all 
rearing  and  kicking  are  impossible.  But  if  the 
animal  is  allowed  to  stop,  then  any  action  of  its  legs 
is  open  to  it,  and  it  can  lie  down  as  easily  as  it  can 
buck- jump. 

THE  HORSE  WHICH  BURIES  ITSELF 

SOME  horses  are  by  nature  restive  and  violent,  so 
that  they  do  not  respond  to  kindness  until  after 
they  have  been  tamed  by  energetic  treatment.  This 
native  excess  of  bad  temper  leads  such  animals  to 
try  every  means  of  escape  from  the  rider's  domina- 
tion; and  before  they  finally  submit,  they  some- 
times, as  a  last  effort,  set  their  four  limbs  im- 
movably so  that  no  sort  of  persuasion  can  make 
them  stir.  Sentener  and  s'immobiliser  are  names 
for  this  action,  which  I  have  translated  as  "bury 
itself." 

When  a  horse  thus  buries  itself,  the  only  correc- 
tive is  to  apply  the  whip  on  the  flanks  during  the 

349 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

time  when  the  horse  is  set.  Do  not  employ  legs  or 
spurs,  since  the  effect  of  these  is  to  make  some 
horses  lie  down  in  a  sort  of  frenzy.  Avoid  also  any 
caressing  of  the  animal  during  the  time  when  it  is 
rigid.  If  both  rider  and  horse  are  in  a  safe  situation, 
and  if  the  failing  is  only  occasional  and  not  a  formed 
habit,  remain  perfectly  calm,  and  keep  the  animal, 
or,  more  correctly,  permit  him  to  be,  completely 
free.  Very  soon  he  will  become  exhausted  by  the 
tension,  will  relax,  and  move  forward.  The  power- 
ful spasm  of  the  horse's  nerves  and  muscles  is  much 
like  that  of  a  man  made  temporarily  insane  by  ex- 
cess of  alcohol.  If,  then,  the  horse  is  left  to  itself, 
very  soon  it  is  sufficiently  punished,  and  as  soon  as 
its  strength  gives  out,  it  will  relax. 

When,  however,  a  horse  continues  to  repeat  the 
act  of  burying  itself,  it  is  better  to  consult  a  vet- 
erinarian and  have  a  careful  examination  of  the 
heart.  The  horse's  heart  is  susceptible  to  disease, 
trouble,  failure;  and  the  rider  should  know  the 
situation  before  he  exposes  himself  to  accident  from 
some  abnormal  condition. 

PREPARING  FOR  DEFENSE 

PREPARING  for  defense  is  the  action  which  a  horse 
takes  as  a  preliminary  to  entering  upon  the  state  of 
non-submission,  revolt,  and  refusal. 

This  first  act  of  rebellion  is  very  easy  to  detect. 
The  animal  escapes  the  contact  of  the  bit.  It  keeps 
its  mouth  closed,  holds  its  neck  rigid  and  usually 

350 


PREPARING  FOR  DEFENSE 

extends  it  forward,  while  by  carrying  the  head  low, 
it  neutralizes  the  effects  of  the  bridle.  The  hind 
legs  are  not  together,  but  one  of  them  is  too  much 
under  the  body  while  the  other  is  extended  too  far 
to  the  rear  and  does  not  support  its  share  of  the 
weight.  Commonly,  the  horse  stops  of  its  own  will, 
and  refuses  to  advance  or  to  change  its  position  at 
the  ordinary  effects.  The  rider  feels  as  if  he  were 
mounted  upon  an  unsteady  wooden  horse. 

Sometimes  this  condition  of  fear  or  stupor  is  the 
result  of  defective  eyesight,  and  is  brought  about 
by  the  sensation  of  some  object  the  effect  of  which 
has  spread  from  the  brain  to  the  entire  body.  The 
sound  of  a  locomotive  or  of  an  automobile  some- 
times, though  not  often,  has  a  like  effect.  In  the 
first  instance,  the  correction  is  through  the  treat- 
ment of  the  horse's  eyes  by  a  veterinary.  In  the 
second,  the  procedure  is  to  accustom  the  horse 
to  the  noise  and  to  build  up  its  confidence  in  its 
rider. 

But  where  the  state  is  the  result  of  an  evil  will 
and  the  desire  to  refuse  obedience,  the  corrective  is, 
without  loss  of  time,  to  separate  the  reins  into  the 
two  hands,  and  with  right  hand  and  right  leg,  or 
vice  versa,  force  the  horse  to  turn  round  and  round 
in  a  very  small  circle. 

The  horse,  thereupon,  from  fear  of  falling,  will 
move  its  legs  and  relax  all  its  body.  After  this  treat- 
ment, it  will  remember  the  result  of  its  rebellion 
and  will  very  seldom  repeat  the  offense. 

351 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 


L ACCULER 

L'acculer  has  no  English  equivalent.   It  means  the 
position  taken  by  the  horse's  rear  limbs  when  the 

animal,  refusing  to  go  for- 
ward at  the  effects  of  the 
rider's  legs,  throws  too  much 
of  the  weight  on  its  hind  feet. 
This  position  of  the  horse 
is  the  basis  of  all  its  de- 
fenses. For  when  the  center 
of  gravity  is  too  far  back, 
it  then  becomes  possible 
for  the  animal  to  rear  up, 
to  kick,  or  to  plant  itself 
immovably  on  its  fore  legs 
and  refuse  to  advance.  It 
is  easy  to  understand  that, 
with  the  center  of  gravity  too  far  back,  the 
hind  legs  are  so  overloaded  with  the  weight  that 
they  are  no  longer  ready  for  the  impulsion  forward. 
In  order  to  prevent  the  horse  from  taking  this  posi- 
tion, the  rider's  legs  should  always,  and  in  all  cir- 
cumstances, in  sending  the  horse  forward,  act  in 
advance  of  his  hands.  Moreover,  this  action  of  the 
rider's  legs  should  continue  from  the  time  when  the 
forward  movement  is  first  obtained,  until  the  horse 
is  perfectly  light  in  hand  and  all  contractions  have 
disappeared.  By  obtaining  this  lightness,  the  rider 
makes  sure  that  his  mount  is  not  accule.  But  a 

352 


A  RESTIVE  HORSE  IN  THE 
INCORRECT  POSITION 
CALLED  "ACCULER" 


REARING 


horse  that  advances  at  the  effects  of  the  rider's  legs, 
giving  to  the  hand  of  the  rider  the  contact  upon  the 
bit,  is  never  accule. 

REARING 

A  HORSE,  in  rearing,  shifts  the  entire  weight  to  the 
hind  hand,  brings  its  hind  legs  forward  under  its 
body,  and  raises  its  fore  hand 
very  high  in  the  air,  either 
bending  its  fore  legs  at  the 
knees  or  extending  them  very 
high  and  pawing  the  air.  Al- 
together it  is  the  most  danger- 
ous defense  of  the  horse  when 
habitual,  and  bad  enough  when 
only  sporadic.  In  either  case, 
the  animal  becomes  quite  im- 
possible for  a  woman  rider. 

Rearing  may  be  the  result  of 
several  causes.  The  principal 
ones  are:  sudden  fear;  bad  eye- 
sight; weakness  in  the  hind 
legs  or  loins;  pains  within  the 
abdomen  or  in  the  region  of  the  sacrum,  pelvis,  or 
pubis;  too  tight  a  curb  chain;  a  too  severe  hand; 
saccades  against  the  bars;  abuse  of  means  and  ef- 
fects ;  the  physical  confusion  which  results  from  too 
rapid  progress  with  the  training.  Sometimes,  too, 
especially  at  certain  ages,  the  teeth  are  growing  or 
are  being  lost,  and  the  gums  are  sore.  Besides 

353 


REARING 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

these,  there  are  the  moral  causes,  defects  of  temper, 
violence,  nervousness,  a  restive  nature. 

If  the  rearing  is  the  result  of  sore  gums  or  defec- 
tive eyesight  or  of  weakness  in  the  muscles  of  the 
loins,  the  remedy  is  treatment  of  the  eyes  and 
mouth  by  a  veterinarian  or  progressive  education 
at  the  hands  of  a  trainer  to  develop  the  weak  spot. 
If  the  bars  are  the  cause,  the  corrective  is  a  bit  with 
a  large  port  and  small  branches,  with  flexions  of 
the  mouth  and  neck,  done  first  on  foot  and  then 
mounted.  For  such  other  causes  as  saccades,  im- 
proper bitting,  a  heavy  hand,  the  remedy  is  to  let 
the  animal  lose  the  memory  of  the  pains  inflicted 
on  him,  and  thereafter  to  use  hands  and  legs  with 
more  moderation. 

But  the  rider  should  always  remember  that, 
whether  the  cause  be  physical  or  moral,  the  horse 
is  able  to  rear  only  if  the  alternate  action  of  the 
hind  legs  is  arrested  for  a  sufficient  time  for  the 
animal  to  bring  both  hind  feet  forward  under  the 
body.  These,  therefore,  acting  as  supports,  are  able 
to  bear  the  entire  weight.  A  horse  cannot  rear  on 
one  hind  leg  alone.  But  if  one  hind  foot  is  brought 
forward  and  held  there  until  the  other  comes  for- 
ward beside  it,  then  the  rearing  becomes  possible. 

Consequently,  the  best  preventive  against  rear- 
ing is  not  to  allow  either  hind  foot  to  remain  in  the 
forward  position,  but  to  keep  them  both  continu- 
ally in  motion,  from  the  moment  when  the  rider 
feels  the  first  tendency  to  stop.  But  when  the  rider 

354 


REARING 

feels  that  the  effects  of  his  legs,  used  together  or 
separately,  are  not  going  to  prevent  the  horse  from 
stopping,  he  should,  as  quickly  as  possible,  take  his 
feet  from  the  stirrups,  lean  his  body  forward  and  to 
one  side  close  to  the  horse's  mane,  and  loosen  the 
reins.  In  this  position,  if  the  horse  has  not  yet  com- 
menced to  rear,  it  is  still  possible  to  carry  it  forward, 
or  at  least  to  keep  the  hind  legs  moving.  But  after 
the  horse  is  fairly  in  the  air,  it  is  dangerous  for  the 
rider  to  employ  both  legs  together.  Never theless, 
he  may  be  able,  by  using  one  of  his  legs  after  the 
other,  to  force  the  horse  to  bring  its  fore  feet  back 
to  the  ground.  If,  however,  the  rider  feels  that  the 
horse,  not  merely  rearing,  but  already  reared,  is 
likely  to  fall  backward,  he  should  rest  one  hand  on 
the  pommel  of  the  saddle,  pass  one  of  his  legs  over 
the  horse's  croup,  and  helping  himself  with  his 
hand,  should  slip  to  the  ground,  alighting  upright 
on  his  feet,  always  of  course  at  the  side  of  the  ani- 
mal, never  behind. 

The  various  tricks  of  spurring,  whipping,  break- 
ing a  bottle  of  water  on  the  horse's  occiput  between 
the  ears,  are  not  practicable,  although  advocated  by 
certain  masters. 

Rearing  is  dangerous  only  if  the  horse  actually 
does  fall  backward.  But  although  the  horse  may, 
for  various  different  reasons,  be  willing  to  rear  as  a 
defense  or  for  simple  restiveness,  it  will  not  volun- 
tarily fall.  If,  then,  the  horse  does  topple  over,  this 
is  always  because  it  has  not  the  strength  to  carry 

355 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

its  weight  aloft  on  its  hind  legs.  Since  the  best 
remedy  is  to  carry  the  horse  forward,  it  is  correct 
in  doing  this  to  use  legs,  spurs,  and  whip.  But  these 
are  not  a  corrective  after  the  horse  has  already 
reared. 

A  horse  which  takes  frankly  the  contact  of  the 
bit  will,  if  the  rider's  hand  is  intelligent,  very  sel- 
dom try  to  rear.  But,  naturally,  this  contact  can- 
not be  obtained  without  the  effects  of  the  rider's 
legs  to  give  the  impulse  forward.  If,  then,  the 
rider's  legs  are  able  to  send  the  horse  forward,  so 
long  as  the  horse  is  under  the  control  of  their  ef- 
fects it  cannot  stop  and  cannot  attempt  to  rear. 

KICKING 

IN  executing  the  kick,  the  horse  stops  its  forward 
motion,  plants  its  fore  legs  firmly  on  the  ground, 
and  using  these  as  a  point  of  support,  sends  both 
its  hind  legs  backward  and  up.  This  true  kick 
should  not  be  confused  with  the  kick  with  one  hind 
leg  only,  which  is  called  in  French  made.  In  the 
made,  the  horse  is  trying  to  reach  some  object  with 
the  purpose  of  damaging  it.  A  kick  out  with  both 
feet  may,  of  course,  injure  anything  that  is  near 
enough  to  be  touched;  but  it  is  seldom  that  a  horse 
of  good  temper  will  actually  try  to  hit  a  man  in  this 
way.  This  does  not,  however,  hold  for  another  horse ; 
so  that,  if  one  animal  approaches  too  near  the  hind 
quarters  of  another,  the  second  is  likely  to  deliver 
either  a  kick  in  the  proper  sense  or  a  made.  This  is 

356 


KICKING 

instinctive,  and  is  the  animal's  method  of  protect- 
ing itself  from  other  creatures. 

But  although  the  kick  is  considered  a  defense  of 
the  horse,  and  indeed  is  so  when  it  involves  the 


KICKING 

refusal  to  move  forward,  it  is  not  in  the  least  dan- 
gerous. For  a  rider  with  an  accurate  seat,  it  is  like 
a  wave  to  a  sailboat.  It  does,  however,  sometimes 
make  trouble  for  young  riders,  if  they  let  the  horse 
repeat  the  kick  too  often,  until  it  becomes  a  habit, 
called  forth  by  the  slightest  annoyance  or  provoca- 
tion. In  this  case,  it  does  become  a  defense. 

We  here  are  concerned  with  the  horse  which  kicks 
when  mounted,  and  uses  this  action  to  resist  our 
means  of  control.  This  may  result  from  weakness, 

357 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

or  from  exuberance  of  energy,  or  from  the  stings  of 
bees  and  the  bites  of  green  flies. 

If,  in  summer  and  fall,  a  horse  kicks  when  an- 
noyed by  insects,  the  best  remedy  is  a  switch  of 
horsehair  carried  in  place  of  a  whip.  If  it  is  weak  in 
the  loins,  time  and  progressive  exercise  will  give  it 
strength.  Then,  after  the  horse  has  become  strong, 
the  fault  can  be  corrected.  But  if  the  horse  kicks 
because  it  does  not  understand  the  meaning  of  our 
legs  and  spurs,  it  has  to  be  taught.  When  it  under- 
stands, it  will  no  longer  kick.  Where  kicking  is  the 
consequence  of  too  much  exuberance  of  life,  a  good 
trot  or  gallop  upon  a  field,  repeated  with  wisdom 
and  moderation,  will  work  a  cure. 

In  any  case,  however,  the  best  immediate  remedy 
is  to  keep  the  fore  legs  in  motion.  Unless  the  fore 
legs  stop,  they  cannot  receive  the  entire  weight, 
and  the  hind  feet  must  remain  on  the  ground  to  act 
as  supports.  Moreover,  since,  in  order  to  kick,  the 
horse  has  not  only  to  put  all  its  weight  on  its  fore 
legs,  but  in  addition  must  drop  its  head  very  low 
and  near  its  fore  feet,  raising  the  head  high  is  also  a 
corrective.  There  is,  besides,  a  shifting  forward  of 
the  center  of  gravity  as  the  weight  is  thrown  on  to 
the  fore  legs,  and  the  head  and  neck  go  forward  and 
down.  If,  therefore,  as  the  rider  promptly  lifts  the 
horse's  head  by  means  of  the  snaffle,  he  also  leans 
far  back  in  his  saddle,  he  will  put  a  greater  load  on 
the  croup,  and  thus  force  the  hind  legs  to  continue 
their  support. 

358 


KICKING 

It  often  happens,  however,  that  a  horse,  while 
not  actually  kicking,  is,  as  the  French  say,  crou- 
pioner,  an  expression  which,  though  not  correct 
French,  is  the  usual  word  among  horsemen. 

In  this  state,  at  the  least  touch  of  legs,  spurs,  or 
whip,  or  even  at  the  approach  of  another  horse,  the 
animal  checks  the  action  of  its  fore  legs,  flexes 
its  coupling  downward,  lifts  its  croup  with  both 
hind  legs,  and  makes  ready  to  shoot  out  its  feet 
behind. 

The  condition  affects  some  mares  at  certain  sea- 
sons of  the  year,  on  account  of  a  too  great  sensibility 
of  the  muscles  of  the  loins  and  more  or  less  of  the 
kidneys.  It  may  occur  in  any  animal  from  the 
memory  of  soreness  occasioned  by  a  badly  adjusted 
saddle,  or  by  too  heavy  a  weight,  which  has  over- 
worked the  loin  muscles.  In  a  great  many  instances, 
however,  the  annoying  habit  results  from  nothing 
more  than  the  inexperience  of  the  rider,  who  has 
employed  his  spurs  without  understanding  their 
proper  use,  and  because  of  the  instability  of  his 
seat  and  his  want  of  control  over  his  legs,  is  always 
tickling  his  horse's  flanks.  Or  the  trouble  may  arise 
simply  from  improper  attacks  of  the  spurs,  made 
too  early  in  the  training  or  without  accuracy  and 
decision. 

The  horse  which  is  croupioner,  though  annoying 
enough,  is  not  dangerous  except  to  riders  who  come 
too  near.  He  is,  however,  undecided  and  unwill- 
ing to  carry  himself  forward  strongly.  Mares  are 

359 


THE  DEFENSES  OF  THE  HORSE 

often  cured  under  a  veterinarian's  advice.  For  both 
horses  and  mares,  where  the  trouble  arises  from 
proper  accuracy  and  decision  in  the  attacks,  these 
should  be  repeated  and  carried  through.  But  if  the 
horse  has  simply  been  provoked  by  spurs  used 
without  reason,  the  cure  is  for  the  rider  either  to  sit 
still  in  his  saddle,  or  else  to  take  off  the  spurs  which 
have  become  a  razor  in  the  hands  of  a  monkey. 
Some  good  exercising  at  an  energetic  walk,  trot, 
and  gallop  will  also  help  to  make  the  horse  go  for- 
ward more  determinedly. 

JUMPING  TO  ONE  SIDE 

"To  jump  to  one  side"  seems  to  be  the  only  pos- 
sible translation  into  English  of  ecart,  which  the 
Duke  of  Newcastle  uses  for  the  action  of  a  horse 
which  makes  a  sidewise  leap  away  from  an  object 
which  it  fears. 

The  Duke  advises,  in  dealing  with  an  animal 
which  acts  in  this  way,  that  the  rider  shall  be  always 
attentive,  never  neglecting  the  accuracy  and  cor- 
rectness of  his  seat,  so  as  not  to  be  caught  by  any 
movement,  however  sudden  and  unexpected.  This 
grand  master  recommends  gentleness  at  first,  let- 
ting the  horse  come  near  the  object,  see,  smell,  and 
touch  it.  But  if,  after  the  horse  has  done  this,  it 
again  jumps  away  from  the  same  object,  then  he 
recommends  punishing  the  horse  so  severely  that 
the  memory  of  the  pain  shall  be  afterwards  stronger 
than  the  fear;  and  he  quotes  Hippocrates,  "To 

360 


KICKING 

destroy  one  pain,  it  is  rational  to  inflict  another 


more  severe." 


It  is,  nevertheless,  to  be  noted  that  the  same 
grand  master,  after  setting  forth  this  theory,  goes 
on  to  say  that  his  own  experience  proves  that,  after 
a  horse  has  been  forced  by  severe  correction  to  ap- 
proach the  particular  object  which  was  the  cause 
of  the  initial  fear,  it  will  shortly  commit  the  same 
ecart  for  another  object.  This,  in  turn,  having  been 
corrected  by  the  same  procedure,  the  horse  finds,  in 
still  another  object,  the  reason  for  still  another 
ecart;  and  so  on  for  any  number  without  limit.  The 
Duke's  theory  is  interesting  and  his  experience 
practical.  But  as  instruction  for  other  riders,  he 
leaves  a  good  deal  to  be  desired. 

For  the  fact  is,  a  young  horse,  not  yet  sufficiently 
educated,  may,  from  mere  gayety  and  exuberance, 
be  surprised  by  the  sight  of  some  object,  which, 
though  quite  harmless,  is  not  familiar.  The  animal, 
therefore,  fearing  physical  pain,  at  once  jumps  aside. 
It  is  a  simple  matter  for  a  rider  to  accustom  his 
horse  to  any  particular  object;  and  then  to  observe 
whether  the  ecart  occurs  with  one  object  only,  or  is 
produced  by  several  objects  of  different  appearance. 
If  the  trouble  is  simply  youth  and  a  too  exuberant 
life,  the  rational  corrective  is  to  have  patience,  to 
inspire  confidence  in  the  horse,  and  in  the  mean- 
time to  increase  the  amount  of  exercise.  But  if  the 
horse  commits  the  fault  for  different  objects,  and 
for  objects  which  it  has  before  passed  without  shy- 

361 


THE  DEFENSES  OP  THE  HORSE 

ing,  then  the  true  remedy  is  to  call  in  an  oculist  and 
have  him  examine  carefully  the  horse's  eyes.  If 
the  eyesight  is  at  fault,  veterinary  science  will  ef- 
fect the  cure,  if  any  cure  is  possible.  Otherwise, 
nothing  can  be  done.  Such  an  animal  can  still  be 
used  by  a  young  and  firm-seated  rider  who  will 
enjoy,  more  or  less,  the  eccentricities  of  his  mount. 
But  it  is  no  horse  for  a  timid  person,  still  less  for  a 
woman. 


APPENDIX 

REPORT  OF  A  COMMISSION  OF  THREE  OFFICERS 

OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  ARMY  ON 

THE  DE  BUSSIGNY  SYSTEM 


APPENDIX 

REPORT  OF  A  COMMISSION  OF  THREE  OFFICERS 

OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  ARMY  ON 

THE  DE  BUSSIGNY  SYSTEM 

[Copy  of  1705  B.  W.  D.  1888] 

Proceedings  of  the  Board  of  Officers  convened  at  Boston, 
Massachusetts,  by  virtue  of  the  following  order. 

Special  Orders  HEADQUARTERS  OF  THE  ARMY, 

No.  44.  ADJUTANT-GENERAL'S  OFFICE, 

WASHINGTON,  February  24,  1888. 

Extract. 
13.  A  Board  of  Officers,  to  consist  of 

Capt.  John  R.  Brinckle,  5th  Artillery, 
Capt.  Henry  W.  Lawton,  4th  Cavalry, 
Capt.  George  S.  Anderson,  6th  Cavalry, 
will  convene  at  Boston,  Massachusetts,  on  March  5,  1888, 
for  the  purpose  of  examining  into  and  reporting  upon  Mr. 
de  Bussigny's  method  of  horse  training,  treatment,  and 
management. 

The  report  of  the  Board  will  be  forwarded  to  the  Adjutant- 
General  of  the  Army  for  the  Lieu  tenant-General. 

On  the  completion  of  their  duties,  the  members  of  the 
Board  will  return  to  their  proper  stations. 

The  travel  enjoined  is  necessary  for  the  public  service. 
By  command  of  Lieu  tenant-General  Sheridan: 

R.  C.  DRUM, 

Ad  j  u  tan  t-General . 

BOSTON,  MASS.,  March  i&h,  1888. 

The  members  of  the  Board  assembled  at  Young's  Hotel 
at  about  10  A.M.  on  March  5th,  and  proceeded  to  the  riding- 

365 


APPENDIX 

academy  of  Mr.  Henry  L.  de  Bussigny,  .  .  .  and  asked  him 
for  both  oral  and  practical  demonstration  of  his  methods. 

Owing  to  the  presence  of  Mr.  de  Bussigny's  riding-classes, 
the  Board  could  not  get  more  than  two  or  three  hours  per 
day  of  his  time;  and  on  Saturday,  the  loth,  he  was  too  much 
occupied  to  give  us  any  session.  The  Board  has  held  meet- 
ings of  three  hours  each  day  but  that  Saturday  to  this  date. 

Owing  to  the  very  limited  knowledge  of  English  of  Mr. 
de  Bussigny,  and  the  difficulty  with  which  he  expressed  him- 
self, the  members  of  the  Board  were  troubled  to  understand 
him.  .  .  .  He  presented  papers  to  the  Board,  which  satisfied 
the  members  that  he  had  been  a  lieutenant  of  French  cav- 
alry. He  also  claims  (and  the  Board  believes  him)  to  be  a 
pupil  of  Baucher  and  Raabe,  and  to  have  been  a  close  stu- 
dent of  horsemanship  for  over  forty  years. 

He  is  certainly  a  most  able  horseman. 

At  his  own  suggestion,  he  explained  his  system  by  answers 
to  the  following  questions: 

1st  question.  Who  is  the  founder  of  the  system? 

A.  It  was  founded  by  myself  after  a  careful  study  of  all 
the  books  published  on  equestrianism,  and  after  over  forty 
years'  practical  work  in  the  field.  It  was  eclectic  and  thor- 
oughly practical.  He  took  as  types  the  systems  of  Baucher 
and  Count  d'Aure.  The  former,  he  explained,  had  a  good 
system  for  the  training  of  circus  horses,  but  it  was  too  elabo- 
rate and  thoroughly  unfitted  for  the  military  service. 

The  latter  based  his  system  on  a  severe  military  discipline, 
but  evolved  it  from  a  very  limited  experience.  A  thorough 
horseman  must  know  his  horse  intimately  and  adapt  the 
treatment  to  the  temperament  of  the  animal. 

Q.  2.  In  what  countries  and  in  what  campaigns  has  the 
author  applied  this  system? 

A.  The  system  is  a  matter  of  growth  with  him,  but  he 
began  it  in  the  cavalry  service  at  the  battle  of  Solferino;  has 
seen  service  in  Mexico,  during  Maximilian's  occupation ;  also 

366 


APPENDIX 

in  Algeria,  Morocco,  and  Syria,  and  in  France  in  the  war  of 
18/0.  In  all  of  these  he  has  insisted  on  the  individuality  of 
the  horse  and  rider  joined  —  that  reconnaissance  work 
vshould  be  one  by  individual  horsemen  rather  than  by  pla- 
toons or  squadrons.  The  seat  is  the  cavalry  soldier's  true 
capital,  and  only  when  that  is  perfect  is  the  combination 
(man-horse)  valuable  in  war.  Mr.  de  Bussigny's  squadron 
had  its  flag  decorated  on  account  of  its  promptness,  energy, 
and  bravery  at  Pablo  del  Monte  in  Mexico.  In  France,  in 
1870,  he  had  six  hundred  green  horses  ridden  by  six  hundred 
green  men  in  a  hard  campaign,  and  he  had  hardly  a  single 
sore  back  or  lame  horse. 

He  enlarged  on  the  effect  of  the  rider's  nervousness  on  the 
horse;  no  matter  whether  this  nervousness  came  from  em- 
barrassment, fright,  or  want  of  knowledge  what  to  do,  it  was 
immediately  communicated  to  the  horse.  If  he  rode  a  horse 
without  a  thought  or  care  as  to  his  management,  the  rider 
was  left  free  to  devote  all  his  thoughts  and  faculties  to  the 
business  at  hand. 

Q.  3.  In  what  does  the  theory  of  the  system  consist? 

A.  It  is  based  on  the  individuality  to  be  given  to  each 
horseman,  and  by  its  simplicity  gives  that  horseman  the 
possibility  of  being  the  trainer  of  his  own  animal.  The  horse 
is  no  longer  restive;  does  not  want  to  go  wrong;  he  is  con- 
trolled by  the  rider's  legs  and  by  them  he  is  impelled  for- 
ward. 

He  is  sustained  and  directed  by  his  bridle.  The  two  legs  of 
the  rider  producing  an  equal  effect  will  equally  impel  the 
horse  forward.  By  the  bridle,  he  will  be  equally  sustained 
and  directed,  and  the  motion  will  necessarily  be  straight  to 
the  front.  The  impulsion  forward  given  to  the  horse  by  the 
two  legs  of  the  rider,  being  increased  by  one  of  the  legs 
without  relaxing  the  effect  of  the  opposite  leg,  will  determine 
the  horse  to  turn  to  the  right  or  the  left.  If  the  pressure  of 
the  legs  is  equal,  and  the  horse  equally  sustained  by  the 

367 


APPENDIX 

bridle,  he  will  have  his  spine  straight,  and  consequently  be 
able  to  carry  weight,  to  regulate  his  gait,  and  be  less  fatigued, 
and  consequently  less  subject  to  lameness  and  sickness.  If 
the  impulse  given  by  the  legs  be  decreased,  and  the  sustain- 
ing effect  of  the  bridle  increased,  the  horse  will  diminish  or 
stop  his  motion  forward.  The  effect  of  the  legs  and  bridle 
being  applied  to  the  horse,  and  the  effect  of  the  bridle  then 
increased,  the  impulsion  of  the  horse  will  be  backward.  The 
horse  being  stopped,  a  quick  increase  of  effect  of  the  left  leg 
of  the  rider,  without  relaxing  the  effect  of  the  right  leg,  will 
determine  a  quick  answer  of  the  left  hind  leg  of  the  horse. 
The  immediate  raising  of  the  hand  of  the  rider  will  raise  the 
fore  hand  of  the  horse,  and  as  it  is  impossible  for  him  to 
sustain  the  weight  of  his  body  on  his  left  hind  leg  only,  the 
opposite  (right)  will  come  immediately  to  sustain  and  assist 
the  impulsion.  The  cessation  of  the  effect  of  the  hand  will 
allow  the  fore  hand  to  return  immediately  to  the  ground, 
and  the  gallop  will  be  determined  to  the  left.  In  this  system 
there  is  no  change  of  position  of  the  rider.  He  leans  neither 
forward  nor  backward;  consequently,  there  is  no  unusual 
strain  on  the  horse,  and  a  perfect  seat  is  kept  at  all  times. 
The  charge  is  only  an  extension  of  the  gallop. 

The  leap  is  accomplished  by  increasing  the  effect  of  both 
hand  and  legs  at  the  same  time  instant,  and  then  diminishing 
them  simultaneously,  afterwards  sustaining  the  horse  by  a 
renewal  of  both. 

Q.  4.  What  is  the  practicability  of  applying  this  system 
to  the  Army? 

A.  It  is  very  essential  to  have  a  system  that  is  uniform, 
and  one  that  will  combine  all  that  is  necessary  in  the  fewest 
possible  movements.  To  this  end  he  has  reduced  them  to 
three  simple  ones.  First,  to  go  forward;  second,  to  go  back- 
ward ;  and  third,  to  turn  to  the  right  or  to  the  left.  Baucher 
used  fifteen,  most  of  which  were  unnecessary  and  impractical ; 
as  Mr.  de  Bussigny  has  simplified  it^  it  is  within  the  comore- 


APPENDIX 

hension  and  ability  of  any  soldier,  and  must  make  a  good,  if 
not  a  perfect  horseman  of  him. 

Q.  5.  What  was  the  result  of  the  practical  work  before 
the  Board? 

This  question  he  left  the  Board  to  answer.  All  of  this 
work  was  that  of  a  master,  whether  he  used  old  and  thor- 
oughly broken  horses,  trained,  or  new  and  unbroken  ani- 
mals. With  his  own  horse  he  showed  all  the  gaits  and  mo- 
tions of  the  circus  rider ;  made  him  walk,  trot,  and  gallop  in 
place  and  backward.  In  short,  he  showed  him  a  thoroughly 
trained  animal.  New  animals  that  he  had  never  ridden  be- 
fore were  got  under  control  immediately,  and  gaited  to  his 
taste.  The  Board  is  convinced  that  few  men  are  capable  of 
arriving  at  the  degree  of  perfection  attained  by  Mr.  de 
Bussigny,  but  it  believes  that  the  system  is  the  best  of  any 
known  to  the  Board,  and  that  it  can  be  applied  to  the  Army 
in  general  with  great  benefit.  The  system  was  most  satis- 
factorily illustrated  to  the  Board  by  some  of  Mr.  de  Bus- 
signy's  pupils.  The  only  system  of  treatment  that  Mr.  de 
Bussigny  used  or  desired  to  explain  was  one  for  horses 
broken  down  and  not  diseased,  or  those  having  deficient 
muscles.  His  entire  system  consists  in  determining  exactly 
what  muscles  needed  increasing,  diminishing,  or  treating, 
and  then  by  proper  gymnastic  exercises  correcting  the  defect. 
Several  horses  under  treatment  were  shown  and  the  results 
to  be  obtained  were  explained.  The  methods  were  certainly 
ingenious,  and  would  probably  be  attended  with  success, 
but  the  Board  did  not  remain  long  enough  to  witness  any 
thorough  accomplishment  of  his  purpose.  Mr.  de  Bussigny's 
only  idea  is  to  strengthen  and  develop  the  weakened  or 
stiffened  parts  by  a  system  of  flexions  and  exercises,  and  by 
throwing  out  of  use  parts  too  highly  developed,  to  partially 
paralyze  them. 

The  subject  of  management  is  entirely  considered  in  the 
preceding  resume",  and  may  be  described  in  a  word  as  one  of 

369 


APPENDIX 

gentleness,  kindness,  and  careful  training.  His  system  is 
entirely  unwritten  and  difficult  to  explain.  He  makes  no 
claims  for  the  handling  of  vicious  or  diseased  horses  other 
than  as  indicated. 

The  Board,  believing  that  nothing  further  could  be  ac- 
complished without  extensive  personal  practice  in  this  sys- 
tem, adjourned  March  I5th. 

J.  R.  BRINCKLE, 

Capt.  5th  Artillery,  President. 
H.  W.  LAWTON, 

Capt.  4th  Cavalry,  Member. 
GEORGE  S.  ANDERSON, 

Capt.  6th  Cavalry,  Recorder. 

(Endorsement) 

HEADQUARTERS  OF  THE  ARMY, 

March  29,  1888. 

Respectfully  submitted  to  the  Secretary  of  War. 

The  report  of  this  Board  shows  that  Mr.  de  Bussigny's 
methods  could  be  best  employed  if  understood  by  officers. 
I  know  of  no  place  where  they  could  be  carried  into  effect 
except  at  the  Military  Academy,  where  instruction  in  riding 
and  horse  management  is  now  given  to  cadets  who  subse- 
quently become  commissioned  officers,  and  I  therefore  rec- 
ommend that  his  services  be  obtained  for  that  post. 
P.  H.  SHERIDAN, 

Lieutenant-General,  Commanding. 


•     ' 

i 


